Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1 | Ohio Administrative Code 4123:1 — Bureau of Workers' Compensation | Division of Safety and Hygiene

Chapter 4123:1-1 Elevators

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-1-01 Scope and definitions.

(A) Scope.

The purpose of this chapter of the Administrative Code is to provide reasonable safety for life, limb, and health of employees.

The specific provisions of this chapter are for the protection of employees of an employer who has the possession of an elevator through ownership, lease, or other property right under which said employer has continuous control of and responsibility for the operation of the elevator. This chapter does not afford protection requirements for employees of elevator manufacturers, installers, or inspectors while any such employee is working on premises not in the legal possession of such employee's own employer or for employees of an employer other than the type described in the preceding sentence. The provisions of this chapter apply to all elevators that fall within the term "elevator", as that term is defined in division (A) of section 4105.01 of the Revised Code.

Other chapters of the Administrative Code of specific safety requirements adopted by the Ohio bureau of workers' compensation may be applicable to some or all items related to some types of elevators. To the extent that any such other chapter may conflict with the provisions of this chapter, this chapter shall prevail. Where conflict does not exist, such other chapter shall be deemed to establish specific safety requirements that are supplementary to those contained in this chapter. The provisions of this chapter apply to elevators, whether installed, rebuilt, or changed before or after the effective date hereof.

(B) Reserved.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:03 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-1-02 Certificate of operation.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(C) Pursuant to Chapter 4105. of the Revised Code and the rules promulgated thereunder, no elevator of an employer may be operated without a currently valid certificate of operation, issued by the Ohio department of commerce, divisions of industrial compliance, or similar authorization issued by a municipality having jurisdiction to do so. In the absence of a currently valid certificate or authorization, an injury or death of an employee incurred by reason of an elevator of the employer shall be presumed to be due to the violation of this specific safety requirement. Such presumption may be rebutted if the employer shows that the absence of the certificate or authorization was due to factors beyond the control of the employer for one or more of the following reasons:

(1) The inspecting authority, with knowledge of the existence of the elevator, had failed to inspect it, which knowledge may be shown by

(a) Evidence of express notice having been forwarded to the appropriate authority,

(b) Evidence that a certificate or other authorization had been issued in the past for such elevator,

(d) Other competent evidence demonstrating such knowledge by the appropriate authority;

Provided however, that no such authority shall be found to have had knowledge of the existence of an elevator after the elevator has once been taken out of service, except for maintenance or minor repairs. An elevator operated after having been so taken out of service and before it has been inspected by the appropriate authority shall be a violation of this specific safety requirement, and the presumption prescribed above applies.

(2) The inspecting authority had inspected the elevator, approved it, and the certificate of operation or other authorization had not been received by the employer.

(3) The inspecting authority had inspected the elevator, and no deficiency noted in the inspection report contributed to the injury or death.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:03 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-1-03 Maintenance.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(C) During the period covered by the certificate of operation or other authorization, pursuant to rule 4123:1-1-02 of the Administrative Code, the employer shall maintain the elevator and appurtenances in the following respects:

(1) Hoistways and pits.

Hoistways and pits shall be kept clean and free of dirt and rubbish and not be used for storage purposes. Water shall not be allowed to accumulate in the pits.

(2) Machine rooms.

Machine room floors shall be kept clean and free from oil or grease. Articles or materials not necessary for the maintenance or operation of the elevator shall not be stored therein. Flammable liquids having a flash point of less than one hundred ten degrees Farenheit (43.3 degrees Celsius) shall not be kept in such rooms or spaces.

(3) Escalator pit pans.

Escalator pit pans shall be kept clean of oil and refuse in order to reduce to a minimum any hazards resulting from accidental ignition.

(4) Tops of cars.

The tops of cars shall be kept clean and free from oil or grease and not be used for storing lubricants. Material not necessary for the operation of the elevator shall not be stored or carried on top of elevator cars.

(5) Additional requirement for hydraulic elevators.

Valves and cylinders shall be kept properly packed and the packing maintained to prevent leaks.

(6) Illumination.

Illuminating switches, fixtures, and lights in the machine room, hoistway, pit, elevator car, landing sills, and step treads shall be kept in operational condition at all times.

(7) Emergency communication.

Emergency signals and communication equipment shall be kept in operational condition at all times.

(8) Machine room doors.

Door closing and locking devices on the machine room or rooms shall be kept in operational condition at all times.

(9) Escalator steps, railings, and handrails.

Bent or broken teeth on escalator steps and landing combs and broken or substantially damaged handrails shall be repaired or replaced promptly.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:03 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-1-04 Operating characteristics of the elevator.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(C) Between inspections by or on behalf of the authorized public agency, the employer shall promptly correct any operational deficiency that becomes evident in any one of the following:

(1) The automatic controls that prevent the car from leaving the landing until the car and hoistway doors are closed;

(2) The semi-automatic gates that open and close at the hoistway landings;

(3) The reopening device activating automatic car and hoistway doors that prevent injury to an employee whose body or limb is interposed between the closing doors or door and jamb;

(4) The hoistway door interlocks that operate to remain closed at all times when the car is away from the landing and that operate to prevent the hoistway doors from being opened from outside the hoistway while the car is away from the landing;

(5) The leveling device that levels the car at the landing;

(6) The devices that prevent movement of the car in either direction while it is standing at the landing; or

(7) The rubber beading, molding, or astragal on biparting doors.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:04 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-1-05 Operation of the elevator.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(C) No elevator shall be subjected to loads at any time in excess of its rated load as specified on the capacity plate, except where the elevator is designed and installed to carry one-piece loads greater than the rated load. Such one-piece loads may be carried in such elevator pursuant to the design specifications, but the design weight shown on the applicable capacity plate cannot be exceeded.

(D) Loads shall not be carried on top of or beneath the elevator car or protrude over or below the car.

(E) No operator shall remain on the elevator car while freight is being loaded on it.

(F) Freight elevators shall not be used to carry passengers, except employees in the pursuit of their duties and having the permission of the employer.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:04 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Chapter 4123:1-3 Construction

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-01 Scope and definitions.

(A) Scope.

The purpose of this chapter of the Administrative Code is to provide safety for life, limb and health of employees engaged in construction activity.

Activities within the scope of this chapter, generally referred to herein as "construction", include: the demolition, dismantling, excavation, construction, erection, alteration, repair, painting, decorating, glazing, cleaning, and pointing of buildings and other structures and the installation of machinery or equipment and all operations in connection therewith; the excavation, construction, alteration and repair of subways, sewers, tunnels, trenches, caissons, conduits, pipelines, roads, and all operations pertaining thereto; the moving of buildings, signs, and other structures; and to the construction, alteration, repair, or removal of wharfs, piers, abutments, or any other construction, alteration, repair, or removal work carried on, in, about, or over water.

This chapter covers construction activities of employees whose employer engages in such work as its principal business. This chapter also covers employees of other employers when the activities are performed in the course of new construction or substantial reconstruction of all or part of an existing structure, as well as substantial demolition or razing of an existing structure. This chapter does not cover employees of employers when the activities are performed in the ordinary course of maintenance work.

This chapter shall not apply to the electric utility industry, contractors, and subcontractors when engaged in the installation and maintenance of electric supply lines or the transmission and distribution of electric power in such lines between the outlet of the generating station and the outlet side of the meter through which such power is measured to a retail customer.

Installations, construction equipment, or constructions built or contracted for prior to the effective date of any specific requirement shall be deemed to comply with the provisions of this chapter, if such installations or constructions comply either with the provisions of this chapter or with the provisions of any applicable chapter which was in effect prior to said date.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Air contaminants" means concentrations of dust, mist, fume, gas, or vapor, or any combination thereof when suspended in the atmosphere.

(2) "Approved" means accepted or certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as "UL Solutions," "FM Approvals," or a responsible government agency.

(3) "Danger zone" means the point of operation where a known hazard exists.

(4) "Department, division, section, or group" means a number of employees that are a separate part or branch of a government, business, school, or other organization, classified together because of a common characteristic or function.

(5) "Equipment" means and includes all machinery, tools, mechanical devices, derricks, hoists, conveyors, scaffolds, platforms, runways, ladders, and related safeguards and protective construction used in connection with construction operations.

(6) "Equivalent" means alternative designs, materials, or methods to protect against a hazard which the employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than the design, materials, or methods specified in the standard.

(7) "Exposed to contact" means that the location of the material or object during the course of operation is accessible to the employee in performance of his regular or assigned duty.

(8) "Factor of safety" means the ratio between the ultimate breaking strength and the working stress of the material, structure or device. For example, the term "factor of safety of four" means the materials, structure or device is constructed of such strength that the maximum load will be one-fourth the designed ultimate breaking load. Where other factors of safety appear they will apply in the same manner. The standards of the "American Society for Testing and Materials" will be used in determining the strength of material except as otherwise provided herein.

(9) "Fire-resistant" means material or construction which resists failure because of high temperatures and which prevents or retards the passage of high temperatures, hot gases, or flames.

(10) "Ground connection" means the equipment used in establishing a path between an electric circuit or equipment and earth. A ground connection consists of a ground conductor, a ground electrode, and the earth which surrounds the electrode.

(11) "Grounded" means connected to the earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.

(12) "Grounded effectively" means permanently connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the building up of voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to employees.

(13) "Guard" means the covering, fencing, railing, or enclosure which shields an object from accidental contact.

(14) "Guarded" means that the object is covered, fenced, railed or otherwise shielded from accidental contact.

(15) "Hazardous concentrations," as applied to air contaminants, means concentrations of air contaminants which are in excess of established occupational exposure limits.

(16) "Lanyard" means a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap which generally has a connector at each end for connecting the body belt or body harness to a life line or anchorage, or for a body harness, to a deceleration device.

(17) "Operator" means any employee assigned to work at the specific equipment.

(18) "Personal fall arrest system" means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a walking or working surface. It consists of a safety harness as defined in rule 4123:1-3-03 of the Administrative Code, anchorage, and connector. The means of connection may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combination of these.

(19) "Pinch point" or "shear point"means any point at which it is possible to be caught between the moving parts of a machine, or between the moving and stationary parts of a machine, or between the material and the moving parts of a machine.

(20) "Point of operation" means the point at which material is placed in or removed from the machine.

(21) "Protective equipment" means any appliance used or required to be used to prevent injury to employees.

(22) "Provide" means to make available.

(23) "Rope, wire (haulage)" means wire rope which is to be used only on inclined planes, for dragging objects along the ground, and only where the rope is not subjected to repeated bending.

(24) "Rope, wire (hoisting)" means wire rope to be used on cranes, derricks, dredges, draglines and power shovels in lifting operations.

(25) "Securely fastened" means that the object referred to shall be substantially fixed in place.

(26) "Shall" shall be construed as mandatory.

(27) "Standard guardrail" means a substantial barrier, constructed in accordance with paragraph (E) of rule 4123:1-3-04 of the Administrative Code.

(a) "Top rail" means the top lateral member of a standard guardrail.

(b) "Intermediate rail" means the lateral member or members of a standard guardrail, installed at intervals of no more than twenty-one inches (53.3 centimeters).

(28) "Structure" means that which is built or constructed, an edifice or building of any kind, or any piece of work artificially built up or composed of parts joined together in some definite manner.

(29) "Substantial" means construction of such strength, of such materials, and of such workmanship that the object will withstand the wear, usage, or shock for which it is designed.

(30) "Toeboard" means a vertical barrier erected along the exposed edges of a floor opening, platform, runway, ramp, or scaffold to prevent falls of material.

(31) "Walkway" means a cleared passageway for ingress and egress for employees between two given points.

(32) "Wall opening" means an opening no less than eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) in its horizontal dimension in any wall, where the outside bottom edge of the wall opening is six feet (1.8 meters) or more above lower levels and the inside bottom edge of the wall opening is less than thirty-nine inches (one meter) above the walking or working surface.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:51 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-02 Temporary storage and disposal.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) All materials stored in tiers shall be stacked, racked, blocked, interlocked, or otherwise secured to prevent sliding, falling, or collapse.

(2) Material stored inside buildings under construction shall not be placed within six feet (1.8 meters) of any hoistway or inside floor openings, nor within ten feet (three meters) of an exterior wall which does not extend above the top of the material stored.

(3) Bagged materials shall be stacked by stepping back the layers and cross-keying the bags at least every ten bags high.

(4) Lumber piles shall not exceed twenty feet (6.1 meters) in height provided that lumber to be handled manually shall not be stacked more than sixteen feet (4.9 meters) high.

(5) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar stock, and other cylindrical materials, unless racked, shall be stacked and blocked so as to prevent spreading or tilting.

(D) Disposal.

(1) During the course of construction, alteration, or repairs, form and scrap lumber with protruding nails, and all other debris, shall be kept cleared from work areas, passageways, and stairs in and around buildings or other structures.

(2) Containers shall be provided for the collection of waste, trash, oily and used rags, and other refuse. Containers used for oily, flammable, or hazardous wastes, such as caustics, acids, or harmful dusts, shall be equipped with covers.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:52 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-03 Personal protective equipment.

(A) Scope.

The requirements of this rule relate to the personal protective equipment listed in this paragraph, as required for employees on operations described in this rule in which there is a known hazard, recognized as injurious to the health or safety of the employee.

(1) Eye and face protection.

(2) Foot and toe protection.

(3) Respiratory protection, such as respirators, masks, canister type masks, or supplied-air helmets for protection of the respiratory system from inhalation of particulate matter, noxious gases and vapors, and oxygen deficiency. Although this rule does not cover engineered protective measures such as heating, ventilation, and exhaust equipment that are addressed in rule 4123:1-3-18 of the Administrative Code, exposure control shall be accomplished as far as is feasible by accepted engineering methods before considering or instituting use of respirators.

(4) Head and hair protection, which includes all operations where employees are required to be present in areas where a hazard to their head exists from falling or flying objects, from physical contact from rigid objects, or from exposures where there is a risk of injury from electrical shock or hair entanglement.

(5) Protective clothing.

(6) Hearing protection.

(7) Safety belts, safety harnesses, lifelines, and lanyards.

(8) Seat belts.

(9) Safety nets.

(10) Working over or near water.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Head protection devices" means any device that meets the American national standards institute (ANSI) Z89.1-1997 or any revisions to that standard.

(2) "Lanyard" means a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap, which generally has a connector at each end for connecting the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline, or anchorage.

(3) "Lifeline" means a component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage.

(4) "Optical density" or "O.D." means the light refractive characteristics of a lens.

(5) "Radiant energy" means energy that travels outward in all directions from its sources.

(6) "Respiratory devices" means any of the following devices:

(a) "Air-purifying respirator" means a respirator with an air-purifying filter, cartridge, or canister that removes specific air contaminants by passing ambient air through the air-purifying element.

(b) "Assigned protection factor" or "APF" means the workplace level of respiratory protection that a respirator or class of respirators is expected to provide to employees when the employer implements a continuing, effective respiratory protection program as specified by this rule.

(c) "Atmosphere-supplying respirator" means a respirator that supplies the respirator user with breathing air from a source independent of the ambient atmosphere and includes supplied-air respirators and self-contained breathing apparatus units.

(d) "Canister" or "cartridge" means a container with a filter, sorbent, or catalyst, or combination of these items, which removes specific contaminants from the air passed through the container.

(e) "Demand respirator" means an atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits breathing air to the facepiece only when a negative pressure is created inside the facepiece by inhalation.

(f) "Escape-only respirator" means a respirator intended to be used only for emergency exit.

(g) "Filter" or "air-purifying element" means a component used in respirators to remove solid or liquid aerosols from the inspired air.

(h) "Filtering facepiece "or" dust mask" means a negative pressure particulate respirator with either a filter as an integral part of the facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed of the filtering medium.

(i) "Positive pressure respirator" means a respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering exceeds the ambient air pressure outside the respirator.

(j) "Powered air-purifying respirator "or" PAPR" means an air-purifying respirator that uses a blower to force the ambient air through air-purifying elements to the inlet covering.

(k) "Supplied-air respirator," "SAR," or "airline respirator" means an atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the source of breathing air is not designed to be carried by the user.

(l) "Self-contained breathing apparatus" or "SCBA" means an atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the source of breathing air is designed to be carried by the user.

(7) "Safety belt" or "body belt" means a device worn around the body which, by reason of its attachment to a lanyard and lifeline or a structure, will prevent an employee from falling.

(8) "Safety harness" or "body harness" means a design of straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest, and shoulders with means for attaching it to the other components of a personal fall arrest system.

(1) Personal protective equipment furnished by the employer shall be issued to the employee in sanitary and proper condition so that it will effectively protect against the hazard involved.

(2) Where employees provide their own protective equipment, such equipment shall give equal or greater protection than that furnished by the employer.

(D) Eye and face protection.

(1) Responsibilities.

The employer shall provide eye protection for all employees engaged in the operations listed in paragraph (D)(2) of this rule and exposed to an eye hazard. Eye protection shall also be provided for any other employees required to work in the immediate area and who are exposed to the hazards of the operations listed. It shall be the responsibility of the employee to use the eye protection provided by the employer. See sections 4101.12 and 4101.13 of the Revised Code. See also Table 3-1 of the appendix to this rule for "Eye and Face Protector Selection Guide".

(2) Operations requiring eye protection.

(a) Eye protection shall be provided to employees performing the following operations:

(i) When using hand tools or mechanical equipment to cut, chip, drill, clean, buff, grind, polish, shape, or surface masonry, plaster, stone, plastics, or other hardened substances, which includes demolition work where the materials listed are part of the operation;

(ii) Where acids, sand, or shot blast are used in building cleaning operations;

(iii) Welding or cutting operations involving the use of gas flames or electric arc, and for all electric welding operations, the employer shall provide suitable helmets, hoods, or hand shields. (See Table 3-1 and Table 3-2 of the appendix to this rule);

(iv) Where portland cement or similar dust-producing material is taken from an elevated bin, hopper, or similar structure by a chute;

(v) All spray paint operations where the employee's eyes are exposed to paint mist in the atmosphere;

(vi) All sand or shot blast operations where the employee's eyes are exposed to the blasting;

(vii) In the handling of molten metal, hot tars, hot pitch, hot asphalt, hot plastic, or similar hot substances;

(viii) Dressing grinding wheels;

(ix) Cleaning operations where wire wheels are used;

(x) In handling injurious acids, alkalis, or other chemicals;

(xi) When working in close proximity to a laser beam in excess of five milliwatts (five millijoules per second);

(xii) Cutting, drilling, turning, planing, jointing, and sanding of wood with power tools;

(xiii) Operations of portable explosive-actuated fastening tools and portable pneumatically powered fasteners; and

(xiv) Operations requiring the use of compressed air for cleaning purposes.

(b) This rule does not apply where a shield or exhaust equipment provides adequate eye protection for employees otherwise exposed to the hazards covered in paragraphs (D)(2)(a)(i) to (D)(2)(a)(xiv) of this rule.

(3) Face shields.

Face shields may be used only in conjunction with safety glasses or goggles where additional protection for the face is necessary.

(4) Material requirements for eye and face protection shall meet ANSI Z87.1-1968 or any revisions to that standard.

(5) Laser protection.

The employer shall provide laser safety goggles which will protect the employee from direct or reflected laser light equal to or greater than five milliwatts (five millijoules per second) per square centimeter. The laser safety goggles shall provide protection for the specific wavelength of the laser and be of optical density adequate for the energy involved. Table 3-3 of the appendix to this rule lists the maximum power or energy density for which adequate protection is afforded by glasses of optical densities from five through eight. Output levels falling between lines in this table shall require the higher density.

(a) Labeling of eye protection.

All protective goggles shall bear a label identifying the following data:

(i) The laser wavelength for which use is intended;

(ii) The optical density of those wavelengths; and

(iii) The visible light transmission.

(b) Labeling of laser equipment.

The employer shall furnish equipment provided with labels containing the following minimum information for continuous-wave, or "cw," lasers:

(i) Wavelength or wavelength range;

(ii) Emergent beam size;

(iii) Beam divergence;

(iv) Maximum average power output;

(v) Maximum emergency beam irradiance;

(vi) Manufacturer's name and address; and

(vii) Product identification number.

The employer shall post standard laser warning placard notices in prominent locations in which lasers are being operated. For examples, see example 3-A and example 3-B of the appendix to this rule.

(d) Beam shutters or caps shall be utilized, or the laser turned off, when laser transmission is not actually required. When the laser is left unattended for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour, overnight or at change of shifts, the laser shall be turned off.

(e) Atmospheric conditions.

When it is raining or snowing, or when there is dust or fog in the air, the operation of laser systems shall be prohibited where practicable; in any event, employees shall be kept out of range of the area of source and target during such weather conditions.

(E) Foot and toe protection.

Foot protection shall be worn by the employee where an employee is exposed to machinery or equipment that represents a foot hazard or where an employee is handling material which presents a foot hazard. Safety toe and footwear for employees shall meet the requirements and specifications in ANSI Z41.1-1967 or any revisions to that standard.

(F) Respiratory equipment.

(1) The employer shall furnish approved respiratory equipment where there are air contaminants as defined in paragraph (B)(1) of this rule. It shall be the responsibility of the employee to use the respirator or respiratory equipment provided by the employer, to guard the respirator or respiratory equipment against damage, and to report any malfunction to the employer. See Table 3-4 and Table 3-5 of the appendix to this rule for basic guides for the selection of respirators.

(2) This requirement does not apply where an effective exhaust system or other means of equal or greater protection has been provided.

(G) Head and hair protection.

(1) Responsibilities.

(a) Employer.

(i) Whenever employees are required to be present in areas where the potential hazard mentioned in paragraph (A)(4) of this rule are present, employers shall provide them with head protection devices or hair enclosures.

(ii) Where required, head protection shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z89.1-1969 or any revisions to that standard.

(iii) When required, employers shall provide accessories designed for use with protective headgear which are suitable for their intended purpose.

(iv) Protective helmets and bump caps, or parts thereof, and hair enclosures shall be sanitized before reissue, and damaged parts of protective headgear shall be replaced.

(b) Employees.

Employees shall not alter any head or hair protective equipment that lessens its effectiveness and shall use the head or hair protective equipment in accordance with instructions and training received.

(2) Hair enclosures.

(a) A hat, cap, or net shall be worn where there is danger of hair entanglement in moving parts of machinery or equipment, or where there is exposure to means of ignition. The hat, cap, or net shall be designed to enclose all loose hair and be adjustable to accommodate all head sizes. Material used for a hair enclosure shall be durable, fast-dyed, nonirritating to the skin, and capable of withstanding frequent cleaning. Hair enclosures shall not be reissued from one employee to another unless they have been thoroughly sanitized.

(b) Hair enclosures used in areas where there is exposure to sparks, hot or molten metals, or ignition from heat, flames, or chemical reaction shall be made of materials that are nonburning or flame retardant and do not melt.

(H) Protective clothing.

(1) When handling chemicals injurious to the skin.

The employer shall provide rubber or plastic gloves, sleeves, and aprons for all operations involving the handling of injurious concentrations of acids, alkalis, epoxy, or similar substances.

(2) Welding, cutting, brazing, and molten metal exposures.

(a) All employees exposed to the hazards created by welding, cutting, brazing, or molten metal operations shall be protected by personal protective equipment.

(b) Specified protective clothing.

(i) The employer shall provide durable flame-resistant gloves for all welders and oxygen cutters. Insulated linings shall be provided when the employee is exposed to high radiant energy.

(ii) The employer shall provide cape sleeves or shoulder covers with bibs made of leather or other flame-resistant materials for employees required to perform overhead welding or cutting operations.

(iii) Clothing treated with nondurable, flame-retardant materials shall be treated after each wetting or cleaning.

(3) When working by hand on electrical circuits, protector gloves shall be worn over insulating gloves, except as follows:

(a) Unless deenergized and grounded, the employer shall provide electricians' rubber gloves with protectors, or other means of insulating employees from ground or current of opposite polarity when working on circuits in excess of two hundred fifty volts.

(b) Protector gloves need not be used with Class 0 gloves, under limited-use conditions, when small equipment and parts manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity.

(c) If the voltage does not exceed two hundred fifty volts, alternating current, or three hundred seventy-five volts, direct current, protector gloves need not be used with Class 00 gloves, under limited-use conditions, when small equipment and parts manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity.

(d) Any other class of glove may be used without protector gloves, under limited-use conditions, when small equipment and parts manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity, but only if the employer can demonstrate that the possibility of physical damage to the gloves is small, and the class of glove is one class higher than that required for the voltage involved.

(e) Insulating gloves that have been used without protector gloves may not be reused until they have been tested under the provisions of ASTM international F496-14a or any revisions to that standard.

(4) When handling hot asphaltic materials.

The employer shall provide suitable foot protection to prevent burns when employees are required to handle hot asphaltic materials.

(I) Hearing protection.

Employees exposed to continuous noise levels of ninety or more decibels, A-scale (dBA), slow response shall be provided with approved ear protection. If ear plugs that require fitting are provided, the ear plugs shall be fitted to the individual employee by a competent person.

(J) Lifelines, safety belts, safety harnesses, and lanyards.

(1) Lifelines, safety belts, safety harnesses, and lanyards shall be provided by the employer, and it shall be the responsibility of the employee to wear such equipment when exposed to hazards of falling where the operation being performed is more than six feet (1.8 meters) above ground, above a floor or platform except as otherwise specified in this chapter, and when required to work on stored material in silos, hoppers, tanks, and similar storage areas. Personal fall arrest systems shall be securely fastened to the structure and shall sustain a static load of no less than five thousand four hundred pounds (two thousand four hundred fifty kilograms).

(2) Lifelines, safety belts, safety harnesses, and lanyards shall be used only for employee safeguarding. Any lifeline, safety belt, safety harness, or lanyard actually subjected to in-service loading, as distinguished from static load testing, shall be removed from service and shall not be used again for employee safeguarding until inspected and determined by an authorized person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse.

(3) Lifelines used on rock-scaling operations, or in areas where the lifeline may be subjected to cutting or abrasion, shall be a minimum seven-eighths inch (twenty-two millimeters) wire core manila rope or equivalent. For all other lifeline applications, a minimum of three-fourths inch (nineteen millimeters) manila rope or equivalent, with a minimum breaking stregnth of five thousand pounds (two thousand two hundred sixty-eight kilogrms), shall be provided.

(4) A safety belt, lanyard or a safety harness lanyard shall be a minimum of one-half-inch (thirteen millimeters) nylon, or equivalent, with a maximum length to provide for a fall of no more than six feet (1.8 meters). The lanyard shall have a breaking strength of no less than five thousand four hundred pounds (two thousand four hundred fifty kilograms).

(5) All safety belt, safety harness, and lanyard hardware shall be cadmium plated and made of either drop forged or pressed steel. Surfaces shall be smooth and free from sharp edges.

(6) All safety belt safety harness, and lanyard hardware shall be capable of withstanding a tensile loading of four thousand pounds (one thousand eight hundred fifteen kilograms) without cracking, breaking, or becoming permanently deformed.

(7) Safety nets may be used in lieu of personal fall arrest systems.

(K) Seat belts.

(1) Seat belts shall be provided for crawler-type tractors, bulldozers, rubber-tired earth-moving equipment, off-highway trucks, and graders except on equipment that is designed for standup operations only or that has no rollover protective structure.

(2) Seat belts and anchorages meeting the requirements of 49 CFR Part 571, "Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards," shall be installed in all motor vehicles.

(L) Safety nets.

(1) Safety nets shall be provided when workplaces are more than twenty-five feet (7.6 meters) above the ground, water, or other surface where the use of ladders, scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary floors, safety lines, safety belts, or safety harnesses is impractical.

(2) Where safety net protection is required by this rule, operations shall not be undertaken until the net is in place and has been tested.

(3) Safety nets shall extend eight feet (2.4 meters) beyond the edge of the work surface where employees are exposed and shall be installed as close under the work surface as practical but in no case more than twenty-five feet (7.6 meters) below such work surface. Safety nets shall be hung with sufficient clearance to prevent user's contact with the surfaces or structures below. Such clearances shall be determined by impact load testing.

(4) The mesh size of safety nets shall not exceed six inches (15.2 centimeters). All new safety nets shall meet accepted performance standards of seventeen thousand five hundred foot-pounds (23.7 kilojoules) minimum impact resistance, as determined and certified by the manufacturer, and shall bear a label of proof test. Edge ropes shall provide a minimum breaking strength of five thousand pounds (22.2 kilonewtons).

(5) Forged steel safety hooks or shackles shall be used to fasten the safety net to its supports. Attachment of safety nets to the working platform is prohibited.

(6) Connections between safety net panels shall maintain the full strength of the safety net.

(M) Working over or near water.

(1) Where employees are working over or near water, and where the depth or current of the water creates a danger of drowning, the employer shall provide U.S. coast guard-approved life jackets or buoyant work vests for each employee.

(2) Ring buoys with no less than ninety feet (27.4 meters) of line attached shall be provided and readily available for emergency rescue operations. Distance between ring buoys shall not exceed two hundred feet (sixty-one meters).

(3) At least one lifesaving skiff shall be immediately available at locations where employees are working over or adjacent to water.

(4) In cribs and cofferdams where employees are exposed to danger of falling inside of the enclosure containing water, a life raft shall be provided.

(N) Employee's responsibility.

It shall be the responsibility of the employee to properly use the equipment provided by the employer as required in this rule in accordance with section 4101.13 of the Revised Code.

View Appendix

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:52 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-04 Floors, stairways, railing, overhead protection and guarding of open-sided floors, platforms and runways.

(A) Scope.

This rule shall apply to temporary conditions where there is danger of employees or material falling through floor, roof, or wall openings or from stairways or runways.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Handrail" means a rail used to provide employees with a handhold for support.

(2) "Hole" means a gap or void two inches (5.1 centimeters) or more in its least dimension, in a floor, roof, or other walking or working surface.

(3) "Nose" or "nosing" means that portion of a tread projecting beyond the face of the riser immediately below.

(4) "Platform" means a working space for employees elevated above the surrounding floor or ground.

(5) "Rise" or "riser" means the vertical distance from the top of a tread to the top of the next higher tread, platform, or landing, or the distance from the top of a platform or landing to the top of the next higher tread, platform or landing.

(6) "Runway" means a passageway for employees, elevated above surrounding floor or ground level.

(7) "Stair platform" means an extended step or landing breaking a continuous run of stairs.

(8) "Stairrail system" means a vertical barrier erected along the unprotected sides and edges of a stairway to prevent employees from falling to lower levels. The top surface of a stairrail system may also be a "handrail."

(9) "Stairs" or "stairway" means a series of steps and landings having four or more risers leading from one level or floor to another or leading to platforms.

(10) "Standard guard railing" means a substantial barrier, constructed in accordance with paragraph (E) of this rule.

(a) "Intermediate rail" means the intermediate lateral member or members of a standard guard railing, installed at intervals of no more than twenty-one inches (53.3 centimeters).

(b) "Top rail" means the top lateral member of a standard guard railing.

(11) "Toeboard" means a low protective barrier that will prevent the fall of materials and equipment to lower levels and provide protection from falls for personnel.

(12) "Tread width" means the horizontal distance from the front to back of tread, excluding nosing.

(1) Strength and construction.

(a) Strength.

Temporary floors shall be provided in all structures for employees working on various floor levels and shall be substantially constructed to support employees and equipment safely.

(b) Construction.

The planks shall be placed as close together as possible and shall not extend more than one foot (30.5 centimeters) beyond supports unless securely fastened to prevent slipping or tipping.

(2) Guarding of partial area.

(a) When employees are not required to work over the entire area of a floor, only such partial area on which employees are required to work shall be provided with the temporary working floors as required in paragraph (C)(1) of this rule.

(b) Standard guard railing and toeboards shall be provided around the unused portion of exposed sides of all openings in floors, roofs, platforms or shafts.

(3) Joists.

(a) Joists shall be securely fastened to prevent tipping before placing temporary floors.

(b) Over joists upon which concrete floors are to be placed, expanded metal lath or wire mesh no greater than one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) mesh may be used where the joist spacing does not exceed twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters), provided that all laps and joints are securely fastened and that plank runways are provided for safe passage or working thereon by employees.

(4) Temporary floors below finished floor.

In buildings or structures where the upper floors are constructed before the lower floors, temporary floors of the strength required in paragraph (C)(1) of this rule shall be maintained no more than two floors below the floor being constructed.

(5) In structural steel frame buildings.

(a) Structural steel frame buildings shall have temporary floors as provided in paragraph (C)(1) of this rule placed within two typical floors of the erectors and the riveters. Such floors shall cover the entire floor area beneath riveters or erectors except that no floors are required over hoistway or stairway openings.

(b) Exception.

The provisions of paragraph (C)(5)(a) of this rule shall not apply to what is generally known as mill buildings where no floors are contemplated, and where the operation of overhead cranes will not permit compliance.

(6) In reinforced concrete frame constructed buildings.

Reinforced concrete frame constructed buildings shall have floor or concrete forms constructed before the forms of the story above are started.

(7) Sectionally constructed buildings.

In sectionally constructed buildings, each section constitutes a separate building operation in the application of the temporary floor requirements of this rule.

(D) Holes and openings.

(1) Openings.

Floor openings shall be guarded by a standard guard railing and toeboard or a cover with a factor of safety of no less than two and so constructed that the cover cannot be accidentally displaced. A safety belt or safety harness, with a lanyard, may be provided in lieu of a standard guard railing and toeboard or cover.

(a) Ladderway floor openings or platforms.

Ladder or openings shall be guarded by a standard guard railing and toeboard on all exposed sides except at the entrance to the opening, with the passage through the standard guard railing either provided with a swinging gate or so offset that an employee cannot walk directly into the opening.

(b) Floor holes.

Floor holes into which employees can accidentally walk shall be provided with either a standard guard railing and toeboard on all exposed sides, or a floor hole cover which provides a factor of safety of no less than two and so constructed that the cover cannot be accidentally displaced. While the cover is not in place, the floor hole shall be guarded by a standard guard railing.

A removable standard guard railing and toeboard shall be provided on no more than two sides of the hatchway opening and fixed standard guard railing and toeboard shall be provided on all other exposed sides. The removable portion of the standard guard railings shall be kept in place when the opening is not in use and where practicable should be hinged or otherwise mounted so as to be conveniently replaceable.

(2) Wall openings.

(a) Guarding.

Each employee working on, at, above, or near wall openings, including those with chutes attached, shall be protected from falling by the use of a guardrail system, a safety net system, or a personal fall arrest system.

(b) Spreaders.

If spreaders are used in window or door frames, such spreaders shall be substantially secured in place.

(c) Where doors or gates open directly onto a stairway, a platform shall be provided and the swing of the door shall not reduce the effective width of the platform to less than twenty inches (50.8 centimeters).

(3) Roof openings.

Wherever there is a danger of an employee falling six feet (1.8 meters) or more to a lower level through a roof opening, including skylights, a standard guard railing and toeboard shall be provided on all exposed sides, or a cover which provides a factor of safety of no less than two shall be provided. A safety belt, safety harness, or a safety net system may be provided in lieu of the standard guard railing and toeboard or cover.

(E) Standard guard railing.

(1) Standard guard railings shall be constructed as a substantial barrier, securely fastened in place and free from protruding objects such as nails, screws, and bolts, to protect openings, and to prevent accidental contact with some object. Top edge height of top rails, or equivalent guardrail system members, shall be forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) plus or minus three inches (7.6 centimeters) above the walking or working level. When conditions warrant, the height of the top edge may exceed the forty-five inch (114.3 centimeters) in height, provided the guardrail system meets all other criteria of this paragraph. When employees are using stilts, the top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent member, shall be increased an amount equal to the height of the stilts. Minimum material requirements shall be:

(a) Metal.

(i) For pipe railings, the top rail, intermediate rail, and uprights shall be no less than one and one half inches (3.8 centimeters) nominal diameter of schedule forty pipe with uprights spaced no more than eight feet (2.4 meters) on centers.

(ii) For structural steel railings, the top rail, intermediate rail, and uprights shall be two inches (5.1 centimeters) by two inches (5.1 centimeters) by three-eights inch (one centimeter) angles with uprights spaced no more than eight feet (2.4 meters) on centers.

(iii) For wire rope railings, the top and intermediate rail shall be at least one-quarter inch (six millimeters) diameter of thickness. If wire rope is used for top rails, the wire rope shall be flagged at not more than six foot (1.8 meter) intervals with high-visibility material.

(b) Wood.

For wood railings, the uprights shall be of no less than two inches (5.1 centimeters) by four inches (10.2 centimeters) with nominal stock space not to exceed eight feet (2.4 meters); the top rail shall be of no less than two inches (5.1 centimeters) by four inches (10.2 centimeters) nominal stock; the intermediate rail shall be of no less than one-inch (2.5 centimeters) by six-inch (15.2 centimeters) nominal stock.

(2) A standard toeboard shall be constructed of substantial material. It shall be three and one-half inches (8.9 centimeters) minimum in vertical height from its top edge to the level of the floor, platform, runway, or ramp. It shall be securely fastened in place, with a clearance of no more than one-fourth inch (6 millimeters) above the floor, platform, runway, or ramp. Standard toeboards shall be solid or have openings not over one inch (2.5 centimeters) in greatest dimension. Toeboards shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least fifty pounds (two hundred twenty-two newtons) applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the toeboard.

(F) Stairways.

(1) Uniform dimensions.

(a) The rise height and tread width shall be uniform throughout any flight of stairs, including any foundation structure used as one or more treads of the stairs. Variations in riser height or tread depth shall not be over one-fourth inch (six millimeters) in any stairway system.

(b) Temporary stairs shall have a landing no less than thirty inches (76.2 centimeters) in the direction of travel and extend at least twenty-two inches (55.9 centimeters) in width at every twelve feet (3.7 meters) of vertical rise.

(c) Winding and spiral stairways shall be equipped with a handrail offset sufficient to prevent walking on those portions of the stairways where the tread width is less than six inches (15.2 centimeters).

(2) Angle of stairways.

(a) Stairways that will not be a permanent part of the structure on which construction work is being performed shall have landings of not less than thirty inches (76.2 centimeters) in the direction of travel and extend at least twenty-two inches (55.9 centimeters) in width at every twelve feet (3.7 meters) or less of vertical rise. Stairs shall be installed between thirty degrees and fifty degrees from horizontal.

(b) Where it is not possible to provide temporary stairways due to the absence of floors in the structure, a ladder shall be provided.

(3) Stairways with pan-type treads.

Except during stairway construction, foot traffic is prohibited on stairways with pan stairs where the treads or landings are to be filled in with concrete or other material at a later date, unless the stairs are temporarily fitted with wood or other solid material at least to the top edge of each pan. Such temporary treads and landings shall be replaced when worn below the level of the top edge of the pan.

(4) Treads, landings, and gratings.

Treads for temporary service shall be made of wood or other solid material and shall be installed the full width and depth of the stair.

(5) Illumination.

Stairways, ramps, runways, and platforms shall be lighted to no less than the minimum illumination intensity of five foot-candles (53.8 lux).

(6) Stair railings and handrails.

(a) Every flight of stairs having four or more risers or rising thirty inches (76.2 centimeters), whichever is less, shall be equipped with stair railings or handrails as specified in paragraphs (F)(6)(a)(i) to (F)(6)(a)(v) of this rule, the width of the stair to be measured clear of all obstructions except handrails. Handrails and the top rails of stairrail systems shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least two hundred pounds (eight hundred ninety newtons) applied within two inches (5.1 centimeters) of the top edge, in any downward or outward direction, at any point along the top edge.

(i) The height of handrails shall be not more than thirty-seven inches (ninety-four centimeters) nor less than thirty inches (76.2 centimeters) from the upper surface of the handrail to the surface of the tread, in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread.

(ii) When the top edge of a stairrail system also serves as a handrail, the height of the top edge shall be not more than thirty-seven inches (ninety-four centimeters) nor less than thirty-six inches (91.4 centimeters) from the upper surface of the stairrail system to the surface of the tread, in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread.

(iii) Stairrail systems and handrails shall be so surfaced as to prevent injury to employees from punctures or lacerations and to prevent snagging of clothing.

(iv) Handrails shall provide an adequate handhold for employees grasping them to avoid falling.

(v) The ends of stairrail systems and handrails shall be constructed so as not to constitute a projection hazard.

(vi) Unprotected sides and edges of stairway landings shall be provided with guardrail systems.

(b) Construction.

(i) Stair railing.

A stair railing shall be of construction similar to a standard guard railing, except that the vertical height shall be no less than thirty-six inches (91.4 centimeters) from the upper surface of the top rail to the surface of the tread in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread.

(ii) Handrail.

(a) A handrail shall be of construction similar to a standard guard railing except that it is mounted to a wall or partition and does not include an intermediate rail. A handrail shall have a smooth surface along the top and both sides. Ends of a handrail shall be constructed so as not to constitute a projection hazard.

(b) The height of handrails shall be no more than thirty-seven inches (ninety-four centimeters) and no less than thirty inches (76.2 centimeters) from the upper surface of the handrail to the surface of the tread, in line with the face of the riser or to the surface of the ramp.

(c) Handrails and railings shall be provided with a clearance of approximately three inches (7.6 centimeters) between the handrail or railing and any other object.

(G) Overhead protection.

Overhead protection shall be provided where employees are working below other employees on floor levels with open floor above.

(H) Guarding of open-sided floors, platforms, and runways.

(1) Open-sided floors or platforms.

(a) Standard guard railing and toeboards shall be provided on every open-sided floor or platform six feet (1.8 meters) or more above adjacent floor or ground level, except where there is entrance to a ramp, stairway, or fixed ladder.

(b) One-quarter inch (six millimeter) wire rope and toeboard, substantially secured in place, may be used in lieu of standard guard railing.

(2) Runways.

(a) Standard guard railings and toeboards shall be provided on all open sides of runways six feet (1.8 meters) or more above floor or ground level.

(b) Runways used exclusively for special purposes may have the railing on one side omitted where operating conditions necessitate such omission, providing the falling hazard is minimized by using a runway no less then eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) wide.

(3) Working above dangerous equipment.

(a) Each employee working less than six feet (1.8 meters) above dangerous equipment shall be protected from falling into or onto the dangerous equipment by a standard guard railing and toeboard, or the equipment shall be guarded. Dangerous equipment includes machinery in operation; open vats, hoppers, or tanks; railroad tracks with moving equipment below the work; live electrical conductors unless deenergized and effectively grounded; or similar sources of danger.

(b) Each employee working six feet (1.8 meters) or more above dangerous equipment shall be protected from falling into or onto the dangerous equipment by a standard guard railing and toeboard, or safety belt or harness, or a safety net system. Dangerous equipment includes machinery in operation; open vats, hoppers, or tanks; railroad tracks with moving equipment below the work; live electrical conductors unless deenergized and effectively grounded; or similar sources of danger.

(4) Bridge decks.

The height of the standard guard railing on bridge decks may be adjusted to provide clearance for the operation of paving machinery.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:52 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-05 Mechanical power transmission apparatus.

(A) Scope.

(1) This rule provides for the protection of employees from motion hazards associated with equipment used in the mechanical transmission of power on construction sites. Installations to be guarded include sources of mechanical power, the associated and intermediate equipment, and the driven machines up to, but excluding, the point of operation. This provision pertains to revolving, oscillating, reciprocating, or other moving parts such as, but not limited to, belts, brakes, cams, chains, clutches, collars, compressors, counterweights, couplings, cranks, eccentrics, engines, gears, lead screws, motors, power cylinders, pumps, pulleys, shafting, sheaves, spindles, sprockets, turbines, and winches.

(2) This rule shall not be construed as being applicable to power transmission facilities located within the frame of the equipment and where exposure is necessary to its operation or adjustment.

(B) Reserved.

(1) Vee belts.

Vee belts and pulleys, where exposed to contact, shall be guarded.

(2) Rope and chain drives.

Rope and chain drives, and their pulleys, where exposed to contact, shall be guarded.

(D) Power driven conveyors including chain, bucket, belt, and screw.

(1) Horizontal overhead, vertical, and inclined conveyors.

(a) Overhead protection.

Where overhead conveyors carry material with a clearance of seven feet (2.1 meters) or more above the floor or ground level, cross designated walkways or roads, or pass over areas where employees are normally at work, a substantial barrier shall be installed to catch falling material.

(b) Screw conveyors.

In addition to the requirements of paragraph (D)(1)(a) of this rule, the auger of screw conveyors shall be guarded. Guards shall be solid or of wire mesh, in accordance with the appendix to this rule. Where an electric power source is used, guards designed for removal shall be interlocked so that removal will disconnect the power source.

(2) Conveyors exposed to contact.

A stopping device shall be immediately available to disengage conveyors from their source of power where conveyors are exposed to contact. Means for stopping the motor or engine shall be provided at the operator's station. Conveyor systems shall be equipped with an audible warning signal to be sounded immediately before starting up the conveyor. If the operator's station is at a remote point, similar provisions for stopping the motor or engine shall be provided at the motor or engine location. Emergency stop switches shall be arranged so that the conveyor cannot be started again until the actuating stop switch has been reset to running or the "on" position.

(3) Safe means of passage.

Where employees are required to cross over conveyors, a fixed platform equipped with standard guard railing and toeboards shall be provided.

(4) Pinch or shear points.

Pinch points created by travel of conveyor belts over or around end, drive and snubber, or take-up pulleys shall be guarded. Alternatively, a means shall be provided at the pinch point to disengage the belt from the source of power.

(5) Lockout for repairs and maintenance.

Conveyors shall be locked out or otherwise rendered inoperable and tagged out with a "Do Not Operate" tag during repairs and when operations are hazardous to employees performing maintenance work.

(E) Shafts.

(1) Revolving shafting.

(a) All revolving shafting and couplings thereof, located seven feet (2.1 meters) or less above the floor, platform, or ground level, and exposed to contact, shall be guarded.

(b) Ends of shafting, where exposed to contact, shall present a smooth edge and end and shall not project more than one-half of the diameter of the shaft unless guarded by non-rotating caps or safety sleeves.

(2) Universal joints.

Universal joints where exposed to contact shall be guarded.

(3) Unused keyways.

Unused keyways where exposed to contact shall be filled or covered.

(4) Set screws, keys, and other projections.

Set screws, keys, and other projections protruding beyond the surface of revolving parts, where exposed to contact, shall be guarded.

(5) Revolving face plates and chucks.

Revolving face plates and chucks shall be cylindrical with no projecting parts on the rim unless such projecting parts are guarded. This provision does not apply to those face plates and chucks revolving less than five revolutions per minute.

(F) Gears, sprockets, and friction drives.

(1) Set or train of gears.

(a) A set or train of gears is two or more power driven gears that move and intermesh. This definition does not apply to adjusting gears which do not normally revolve and are not power operated, or to adjusting gears which require access for manual manipulations, such as hand-operated gears used only to adjust machine parts and do not continue to move after hand power is removed.

(b) Guarding.

All or any part of a set or train of gears, exposed to contact, shall be completely guarded or have a band guard around the face of the gear with the side flanges extending inward beyond the root of the teeth. Where there are openings of more than two and one-half inches (6.4 centimeters) between arm or through web, the entire gear shall be guarded. Guarding shall be in accordance with the appendix to this rule and shall be securely fastened in place.

(2) Frictional disc, link belt, and sprocket drives. The driving point of all friction drives when exposed to contact shall be guarded, all arm or spoke friction drives, and all web friction drives with holes in the web shall be entirely enclosed. All projecting belts on friction drives, where exposed to contact, shall be guarded.

(G) Machinery control.

(1) Disengaging from source of power.

A stopping device shall be provided at each machine, within easy reach of the operator, for disengaging the machine from its source of power.

(2) When machines are shut down.

The employer shall furnish, and the employees shall use, a device to lock the controls in the "off" position when machines are shut down for repair, adjusting, oiling, or cleaning. On mobile equipment where lockout devices cannot be used, the employer shall furnish, and the employee shall use, warning tags when machines are shut down for repair, adjusting, oiling, or cleaning.

(3) Mechanical belt shifters.

Tight and loose pulley arrangements shall be equipped with mechanical belt shifters. Tight and loose pulleys on all installations shall be equipped with a permanent belt shifter provided with mechanical means to prevent the belt from creeping from loose to tight pulley. It is recommended that old installations be changed to conform to this rule.

(4) Treadles or extensions.

Treadles or extensions for starting machinery shall be located or guarded as to minimize accidental starting or tripping of the machinery.

(H) Anchoring and mounting of equipment.

(1) Anchoring.

All stationary machinery shall be securely fastened.

(2) Portable machinery.

Portable machinery mounted upon mobile units shall be securely fastened thereto, and such mobile unit shall be so locked or blocked as to prevent movement or shift while the portable machine is in operation.

(I) Counterweights.

Counterweights and suspending devices, other than those which are an integral part of machines, shall be guarded by an enclosure guard or secured with a safety chain or wire rope.

(J) Feed rolls.

Power driven feed rolls, when exposed to contact, shall be guarded at the pinch points.

View Appendix

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:52 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-06 Motor vehicles, mechanized equipment and marine operations.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Earthmoving equipment" means, but is not limited to, scrapers, loaders, crawlers, wheel tractors, bulldozers, off-highway trucks, graders, agricultural tractors, industrial tractors, power shovels, and backhoes.

(2) "Jacked piles" means a method of driving horizontal piles for under supports of existing buildings by the use of hydraulic jacks.

(3) "Motor vehicles", as covered by this rule, means all those vehicles that operate within an off-highway jobsite, not open to unrestricted public traffic.

(1) A safety tire rack, cage, or equivalent protection shall be provided and used when inflating, mounting, or dismounting tires installed on split rims or rims equipped with locking rings or similar devices.

(2) When being repaired, or when not in use, machinery, equipment, or parts thereof, which are suspended or held aloft by use of slings, hoists, or jacks shall be substantially blocked or cribbed. Bulldozer blades, scraper blades, end-loader buckets, dump bodies, and similar equipment shall be either fully lowered or blocked when being repaired or when not in use.

(3) Equipment parked on inclines shall have the wheels chocked and brakes set, or the bulldozer blade, scraper blade, end-loader bucket, dump bodies, or similar equipment shall be fully lowered.

(4) All cab glass shall be safety glass, or equivalent, that introduces no visible distortion affecting the safe operation of any machine covered by this rule.

(5) All equipment which can contact power lines shall also comply with the requirements of paragraph (E) of rule 4123:1-3-07 of the Administrative Code.

(6) At locations where gasoline is being transferred to the fuel tank of any construction machinery, the engine shall be shut down during the transfer of fuel.

(D) Motor vehicles.

(1) All trucks shall be equipped with an audible warning device, in an operable condition, at the operator's station.

(2) On mobile equipment having an obstructed view to the rear, the employer shall:

(a) Provide a reverse signal alarm audible above the surrounding noise, or

(b) Provide an observer to signal the assured clear distance.

(3) All haulage vehicles loaded by means of cranes, power shovels, loaders, or similar equipment shall have a substantial cab shield or canopy to protect the operator from shifting or falling materials.

(4) Trucks used to transport employees.

(a) Trucks assigned to or generally used for the transportation of employees shall be equipped with seats and back rests, which are securely fastened, for the number of employees to be transported.

(b) Tools and material transported in the same compartment with employees shall be secured to prevent movement.

(5) Seat belts.

The employer shall provide, and employees shall use, seat belts on all motor vehicles which have rollover protective structures or cabs. This provision does not apply to equipment designed only for stand-up operations.

(6) Trucks with dump bodies shall be equipped with positive means of support, permanently attached, and capable of being locked in position to prevent accidental lowering of the body while maintenance or inspection work is being done.

(E) Material handling equipment.

(1) The employer shall provide seat belts on all equipment covered by this rule except:

(a) Equipment which is designed only for stand-up operations, and

(b) Equipment which does not have rollover protective structure or substantial canopy protection.

(2) Forklift tractors and forklift trucks.

A substantial overhead guard shall be provided for operators of forklift tractors and forklift trucks.

(3) Mobile concrete mixers.

(a) Guarding.

(i) Mobile concrete mixers with skips having a capacity of one cubic yard (three-quarters cubic meter) or more shall be provided with single rail guards on both sides of the skip pan. The single rail guard shall be constructed of substantial material and shall be no less than thirty-six inches (91.4 centimeters) or more than forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) in height above the ground or working level and shall extend the full length of the pan.

(ii) Where the single rail guard is of a type having a chain or rod connection, the single rail guard shall not be removed but shall be kept in place while the mobile concrete mixer or skip is in operation. Employees shall be instructed to not tie up, or otherwise fasten, the single rail guard to the mixer in such manner as to expose employees to contact with the skip when in operation.

(b) Chutes and spouts for transferring concrete.

Chutes and spouts for transferring concrete shall be constructed and installed so as to sustain no less than four times the maximum working load.

(F) Site clearing.

Rider operated equipment used in site clearing operations shall be equipped with rollover protective structures. In addition, the rider operated equipment shall be equipped with an overhead and rear canopy guard meeting the following requirements:

(1) The overhead covering on the canopy structure shall be of no less than one-eighth inch (three millimeters) steel plate or one-fourth inch (six millimeters) woven wire mesh or equivalent, with openings no greater than one inch (2.5 centimeters) at its greatest dimension.

(2) The opening in the rear of the canopy structure shall be covered with no less than one-fourth inch (six milimeters) woven wire mesh or equivalent, with openings no greater than one inch (2.5 centimeters) at its greatest dimension.

(G) Pile driving equipment.

(1) General requirements.

(a) Overhead protection, which will not obscure the vision of the operator, shall be provided. Protection shall be the equivalent of two-inch (5.1 centimeter) planking or other solid material of equivalent strength.

(b) Stop blocks shall be provided for the leads to prevent the hammer from being raised against the head block.

(c) A blocking device shall be provided for placement in the leads under the hammer at all times while employees are working under the hammer.

(d) A device shall be provided across the top of the head block to prevent the cable from jumping out of the sheaves.

(e) Fixed ladders shall be provided on leads. The loft worker shall be equipped with a safety belt and lanyard, and there shall be rings provided with a factor of safety of no less than four for attachment to the ladder or leads. If the leads are provided with loft platforms, the loft platforms shall be protected by standard guardrails.

(f) Steam or air hose leading to a hammer or jet pipe shall be securely fastened to the hammer with a length of no less than one-quarter inch (six millimeters) diameter chain or cable to prevent whipping in the event the joint at the hammer breaks.

(g) Safety chains, or equivalent means, shall be provided for each hose connection to prevent the line from thrashing around in case the coupling becomes disconnected.

(h) Steam or air line controls shall consist of two shutoff valves, one of which shall be a quick-acting lever type within easy reach of the hammer operator.

(i) The stability of pile driver rigs shall be maintained by the use of guys, outriggers, thrustouts, or counterbalances.

(2) Pile driving operations.

(a) When piles are being driven in an excavated pit of five feet (1.5 meters) or more in depth, the walls of the pit shall be sloped to the angle of repose or shored and braced.

(b) When it is necessary to cut off the tops of driven piles, cutting operations shall be suspended except where the cutting operations are separated from the leads by twice the length of the exposed pile prior to its being securely fastened in the leads, and driving has commenced.

(c) When driving jacked piles, all access pits shall be provided with ladders and bulkheaded curbs to prevent material from falling into the pit.

(3) Pile driving from barges and floats.

Barges and floats supporting pile driving operations shall meet the requirements of paragraph (H) of this rule.

(H) Marine operations and equipment.

(1) Access to barges by employees.

When employees are required to step to or from the wharf, float, barge, or river towboat, a ramp or walkway shall be provided substantial in construction and fastening.

(2) Access to barges by vehicles.

Ramps, with side boards, shall be provided for access of vehicles to or between barges. Such ramps shall be substantial in construction and fastening. See rule 4121:1-3-21 of the Administrative Code for requirements for diving operations.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:52 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-07 Cranes, hoists, and derricks.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Derrick" means an apparatus consisting of a mast or equivalent members held at the top by guys or braces, with or without a boom, for use with a hoisting mechanism and operating ropes.

(2) "Derrick, A-frame" means a derrick in which the boom is hinged from a crossmember between the bottom ends of two upright members, spread apart at the lower ends and united at the top, the upper ends of the boom being secured to the upper junction of the side members, and the side members braced or guyed from the junction point.

(3) "Derrick, basket" means a derrick without a boom, similar to a gin pole, with its base supported by ropes attached to corner posts or other parts of the structure. The base is at a lower elevation than its supports. The location of the base of a basket derrick can be changed by varying the length of the rope supports. The top of the pole is secured with multireeved guys to position the top of the pole to the desired location. By varying the length of the upper guy lines, the load is raised and lowered by ropes through the sheave or block secured to the top of the pole.

(4) "Derrick, breast" means a derrick without a boom, the mast consisting of two side members spread farther apart at the base than at the top, tied together at the top and bottom by rigid members, the top held from tipping by guys, and the load raised and lowered by ropes through a sheave or block secured to the top crosspieces.

(5) "Derrick, Chicago boom" means an ordinary derrick boom, so installed as to utilize a building column or tower hoist as the mast, and to depend upon the structural steel beam connections or bracing to take the place of the stiff legs. The lower end of the boom is attached to the building columns by means of a combination hinge pin and swivel pin to a heavy steel plate clamp attached to the column. The derrick is completed with load fall line and boom fall line.

(6) "Derrick, gin pole" means a derrick consisting only of a mast with guys, so arranged as to permit leaning the mast in any direction, and the load being raised or lowered by ropes leading through sheaves or blocks at the top of the mast. Where the size or spacing of guy lines do not result in the gin pole being stable in both boomed and vertical positions, the employer must ensure that the derrick is not used in an unstable position.

(7) "Derrick, guy" means a fixed derrick consisting of a mast capable of being rotated, supported in a vertical position by guys and a boom whose bottom end is hinged or pivoted to move in a vertical plane, with lines between the head of the mast and the head of the boom for raising and lowering the boom lines from the head of the boom for raising and lowering the load a minimum number of six guys, with equal spacing, except:

(a) Where a qualified person or derrick manufacturer approves variations from these requirements and revises the rated capacity to compensate for such variations; or

(b) Where more guys and a boom whose bottom end is hinged or pivoted to move in a vertical plane, with lines between the head of the mast and the head of the boom for raising and lowering the boom lines from the head of the boom for raising and lowering the load.

(8) "Derrick, stiff leg" means a derrick similar to a guy derrick except that the mast is supported or held in place by two or more stiff members capable of resisting either tensile or compressive forces. Sills are generally provided to connect the lower ends of the two stiff legs to the foot of the mast.

(9) "Derrick, tripod" means a derrick consisting of three upright legs or members securely fastened together at the top, supporting a hoisting mechanism and operating ropes. The legs can be spread to various angles.

(10) "Hoist, mast" means a hoist having no less than two upright parallel members forming the mast, on which the cage is suspended outside of the parallel members. The entire unit is portable, but not self-propelled.

(11) "Hoist, material" means a hoist for raising and lowering material only, with the hoisting of persons prohibited except for inspection and maintenance.

(12) "Hoist, personnel" means a mechanism for use in connection with construction, alteration, maintenance, or demolition of buildings, structures, or other work. It is used for hoisting and lowering employees, material, or both, is equipped with a car that moves on guide members during its vertical movement, and includes a hoistway.

(13) "Hoist tower" means a tower constructed of sections forming a shaftway in which a cage or platform travels. Towers inside of structures shall be enclosed on all four sides throughout the full height.

(14) "Prime mover" means equipment used as the primary source of power, such as engines and motors.

(1) Load rating chart.

A substantial and durable manufacturer's load rating chart with clearly legible letters and figures shall be maintained in each crane and securely fixed to the crane cab in a location easily visible to the operator while seated at the operator's control station. The data and information to be provided on such charts shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following data:

(a) A full and complete range of manufacturer's approved crane load ratings at all stated operating radii and boom angles, and for all permissible boom lengths, jib lengths, and angles, also alternate ratings for use and non-use of optional equipment on the crane such as outriggers and extra counterweights which affect ratings.

(b) An operating manual shall be provided and maintained with the equipment, showing recommended parts of hoist reeving, size, and type of rope for various crane loads.

(2) Boom hoist.

When using the manufacturer's recommended boom hoist reeving with rated loads suspended, the boom hoist shall be capable of raising the boom, holding it stationary without attention from the operator, and lowering it only when coupled to its prime mover.

(a) The boom hoist drum shall have sufficient rope capacity to operate the boom at all positions from horizontal to the highest angle recommended when using the manufacturer's reeving and rope size.

(i) No less than two full wraps of rope shall remain on the drum with the boom point lowered to the level of the crane supporting surface.

(ii) The drum end of the rope shall be anchored by a clamp securely attached to the drum or a wedge socket arrangement approved by the crane manufacturer.

(b) The drum diameter shall be sufficient to provide a first layer rope pitch diameter of no less than eighteen times the nominal diameter of the rope used.

(3) Main hoist mechanism.

Load hoist drums shall have sufficient rope capacity with recommended rope size and reeving to perform crane service within the range of boom lengths, operating radii, and vertical lifts stipulated by the manufacturer.

(a) No less than two full wraps of rope shall remain on the drum when the hook is in its extreme low position.

(b) The drum end of the rope shall be anchored by a clamp securely attached to the drum or a wedge socket arrangement approved by the crane or rope manufacturer.

(4) Ropes.

(a) The hoisting rope shall be of a construction recommended for crane service. Non-rotating rope shall not be used for boom hoist reeving or multiple reeving.

(b) Socketing shall be done in the manner specified by the manufacturer of the assembly.

(d) Wherever exposed to temperatures at which fiber cores would be damaged, rope having an independent wire rope or wire strand core, or other temperature damage-resistant core shall be used.

(e) Replacement rope shall be the same size, grade, and construction as the original rope furnished by the crane manufacturer, unless otherwise recommended by a rope manufacturer due to actual working condition requirements.

(f) Factor of safety.

The employer shall, when re-reeving boomed equipment, provide ropes which meet the manufacturer's specifications, and the factor of safety shall be no less than three and one-half.

(g) Splicing.

If the deficiency is localized, the problem is corrected by severing the wire rope in two; the undamaged portion may continue to be used. If a rope is shortened the employer must ensure that the drum will still have two wraps of wire rope when the load and/or boom is in its lowest position. Joining lengths of wire rope by splicing is prohibited.

(h) Fastening.

Wire rope shall not be secured by knots. Thimbles shall be used where wire rope is looped. Wire rope clips shall conform to the manufacturer's specifications. The loop ends of wire rope clips shall be on the dead end of the wire rope, and the grooved plate of the wire rope clip shall take the load of the pulling part for which it is designed. In looping or in short bends, wire rope clips and turnback of rope shall conform to the following table, and spacing of clips shall be uniform between the loop and the dead end.

Number and Spacing of U-Bolt Wire Rope Clips

| Improved Plow Steel, rope diameter in inches (centimeters) | Number of clips | Other material than Improved Plow Steel, rope diameter in inches (centimeters) Other material Other material | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Drop forge | Other material | | | | 1/2 (1.3) | 3 | 4 | 3 (7.6) | | 5/8 (1.6) | 3 | 4 | 3 3/4 (9.5) | | 3/4 (1.9) | 4 | 5 | 4 1/2 (11.4) | | 7/8 (2.2) | 4 | 5 | 5 1/2 (14) | | 1 (2.5) | 5 | 6 | 6 (15.2) | | 1 1/8 (2.9) | 6 | 6 | 6 3/4 (17.1) | | 1 1/4 (3.2) | 6 | 7 | 7 1/2 (19) | | 1 3/8 (3.5) | 7 | 7 | 8 1/4 (21) | | 1 1/2 (3.8) | 7 | 8 | 9 (22.9) |

Figure: How to attach wire rope clips

(5) Reeving accessories.

Eye splices shall be made in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (C)(4)(g) of this rule, and thimbles shall be used in all eye splices.

(6) Sheaves.

(a) Sheave grooves shall be smooth and free from surface defects.

(b) Sheaves carrying wire ropes shall be provided with close-fitting guards or other suitable devices to guide the rope back into the groove when the load is applied again.

(7) Cabs.

(a) Construction.

(i) Power driven cranes shall be provided with a cab to protect the operator in case the cable should break or material fall from the dipper or bucket.

(ii) All windows shall be of safety glass or equivalent.

(iii) A clear passageway shall be provided from the operator's station to an exit door on the operator's side.

(b) Platform to cab.

(i) Principal walking surfaces shall be of an anti-skid type.

(ii) Originally-equipped steps, handholds, ladders, guardrails, railings, and grab rails shall be maintained in good condition.

(8) Roof.

Where necessary for rigging or service requirements, a ladder or steps shall be provided to give access to the cab roof.

(9) Booms.

(a) Boom stops shall be provided on all mobile cranes.

(b) A boom angle indicator shall be provided.

(10) Exhaust pipes.

All exhaust pipes shall be guarded or insulated in areas where employees are exposed to contact in the performance of normal duties. See rule 4123:1-3-18 of the Administrative Code for ventilating exhaust gases.

(11) Miscellaneous equipment.

(a) Portable fuel containers shall be equipped with a self-closing filler cap. Where gasoline is the fuel, a flame arrestor shall be provided.

(b) An effective warning and operating signal device shall be provided.

(d) Barricades shall be provided to prevent an employee from being struck or crushed by the rotating superstructure of the crane.

(D) Hoists.

(1) General requirements.

(a) Rated load capacity and posting.

Rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds, and special hazard warnings or instructions shall be posted on cars and platforms.

(b) Hoisting ropes shall be installed in accordance with the wire rope manufacturer's recommendations.

(d) The use of endless belt type manlifts on construction sites is prohibited.

(e) Hoist platforms.

Blocking and cleats shall be provided on hoist platforms when wheelbarrows or other rolling equipment is transported.

(f) Landing platforms.

(i) Landing platforms shall be of sufficient strength to support the maximum working loads imposed upon them, and no less than seventy-five pounds per square foot (3.59 kilonewtons per square meter), without exceeding the allowable working stresses specified in the appendix to this rule.

(ii) Standard guard railing, toeboards, and side screens shall be provided on both sides of landing platforms.

(iii) Clearance between adjacent edges of the hoist platform and the landing platform shall not exceed two inches (5.1 centimeters).

(2) Material hoists.

(a) Operating rules shall be established and posted at the operator's station of the hoist. Such rules shall include signal system and allowable line speed for various loads. Rules and notices shall be posted on the car frame or crosshead in a conspicuous location, including a statement that does not allow riders.

(b) No employee shall be required to ride on material hoists except for the purposes of inspection and maintenance.

(c) All entrances of the hoistway shall be guarded by substantial gates or bars which shall guard the full width of the landing entrance. All hoistway entrance bars and gates shall be painted with diagonal contrasting colors, such as black and yellow stripes.

(i) Bars shall be no less than two-inch (5.1 centimeters) by four-inch (10.2 centimeters) wooden bars or the equivalent, located two feet (sixty-one centimeters) from the hoistway line. Bars shall be located no less than twenty-six inches (sixty-six centimeters) or more than forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) above the floor.

(ii) Gates or bars protecting the entrances to hoistways shall be equipped with a latching device.

(d) Overhead protective covering of two-inch (5.1 centimeters) planking, three-fourths inch (nineteen millimeters) plywood, or other solid material of equivalent strength shall be provided on the top of every material hoist cage or platform.

(e) The operator's station of a hoisting machine shall be provided with overhead protection equivalent to tight planking no less than two inches (5.1 centimeters) thick. The support for the overhead protection shall be of equivalent strength.

(f) Hoist towers may be used with or without an enclosure on all sides. However, whichever alternative is chosen, the following applicable conditions shall be met:

(i) When a hoist tower is enclosed, it shall be enclosed on all sides for its entire height with a screen enclosure of one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) mesh, "No. 18 U.S. Gauge" wire or equivalent, except for landing access.

(ii) When a hoist tower is not enclosed, the hoist platform or car shall be totally enclosed or caged on all sides for the full height between the floor and the overhead protective covering with one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) mesh of "No. 14 U. S. Gauge" wire or equivalent. The hoist platform enclosure shall include the required gates for loading and unloading. A six-foot (1.8 meters) high enclosure shall be provided on the unused sides of the hoist tower at ground level.

(g) Car arresting devices shall be installed to function in case of rope failure.

(h) Material hoists shall be securely fastened to the structure at no less than twenty-five foot (7.6 meters) intervals.

(3) Personnel hoists.

(a) Hoist towers outside the structure shall be enclosed for the full height on the side or sides used for entrance and exit to the structure. At the lowest landing, the enclosure on the sides not used for exit or entrance to the structure shall be enclosed to a height of no less than ten feet (three meters). Other sides of the tower adjacent to floors or scaffold platforms shall be enclosed to a height of ten feet (three meters) above the level of such floors or scaffolds.

(b) Towers inside of structures shall be enclosed on all four sides throughout the full height.

(c) Towers shall be anchored to the structure at intervals not exceeding twenty-five feet (7.6 meters). In addition to tie-ins, a series of guys shall be installed. Where tie-ins are not practical, the tower shall be anchored by means of guys made of wire rope no less than one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) in diameter, securely fastened to anchorage to ensure stability.

(d) A minimum of two and one-half square feet (0.23 square meters) shall be provided for each person riding on hoist car.

(e) Whenever a hoist tower extends twenty-five feet (7.6 meters) or more above the roof line or last possible tie-ins to the structure, it shall be guyed.

(f) Hoistway doors or gates shall be no less than seventy-eight inches (two meters) high, shall be provided with mechanical locks which cannot be operated from the landing side, and shall be accessible only to employees on the car.

(g) Cars shall be permanently enclosed on all sides and the top, except sides used for entrance and exit which have car gates or doors.

(h) A door or gate shall be provided at each entrance to the car which shall guard the full width and height of the entrance opening.

(i) Overhead protective covering of two-inch (5.1 centimeters) planking, three-fourths inch (nineteen millimeters) plywood or other solid material of equivalent strength shall be provided on the top of every personnel hoist.

(j) Doors or gates shall be provided with electric contacts which do not allow movement of the hoist when door or gate is open.

(k) Cages of all hoists upon which employees are permitted to ride shall be equipped with a down speed governor to operate the car safety.

(l) Safeties shall be capable of stopping and holding the car and rated load when traveling at governor tripping speed.

(m) Cars shall be provided with a capacity and data plate secured in a conspicuous place on the car or crosshead.

(n) Internal combustion engines for direct drive are prohibited.

(o) Normal and final terminal stopping devices shall be provided.

(p) An emergency stop switch shall be provided in the car and conspicuously marked.

(q) Ropes.

(i) The minimum number of hoisting ropes used shall be three for traction hoists and two for drum-type hoists.

(ii) The minimum diameter of hoisting and counterweight wire ropes shall be one-half inch (thirteen millimeters).

(iii) Factor of safety.

| Minimum factors of safety for suspension wire ropes | | | --- | --- | | Rope speed in feet per minute: (meters per minute) | Minimum factor of safety: | | 50 (15.2)____________________ | 7.60 | | 75 (22.9)______________________ | 7.75 | | 100 (30.5)______________________ | 7.95 | | 125 (38.1) ______________________ | 8.10 | | 150 (45.7) ______________________ | 8.25 | | 175 (53.3) ______________________ | 8.40 | | 200 (61)______________________ | 8.60 | | 225 (68.6) ______________________ | 8.75 | | 250 (76.2)______________________ | 8.90 | | 300 (91.4) ______________________ | 9.20 | | 350 (106.7) ______________________ | 9.50 | | 400 (121.9)______________________ | 9.75 | | 450 (137.1)______________________ | 10.00 | | 500 (152.4) ______________________ | 10.25 | | 550 (167.6) ______________________ | 10.45 | | 600 (182.9) ______________________ | 10.70 |

(r) Following assembly and erection of hoists, and before they are put in service, an inspection and test of all functions and safety devices shall be made at full rated capacity under the supervision of the manufacturer or the manufacturer's authorized representative. A similar inspection and test is required following major alteration of an existing installation. All hoists shall be inspected and tested no less often than at three-month intervals. Records shall be maintained and kept on file for the duration of the job.

(s) Personnel hoists used in bridge tower construction shall be approved by a registered professional engineer and erected under the supervision of a qualified engineer competent in this field.

(i) When a hoist tower is not enclosed, the hoist platform or car shall be totally enclosed or caged on all sides for the full height between the floor and the overhead protective covering with three-fourths inch (nineteen millimeters) mesh of "No. 14 U.S. Gauge" wire or equivalent. The hoist platform enclosure shall include the required gates for loading and unloading.

(ii) These hoists shall be inspected and maintained on a weekly basis. Whenever the hoisting equipment is exposed to winds exceeding thirty-five miles (fifty-six kilometers) per hour, the hoisting equipment shall be inspected and put in operable condition before re-use.

(iii) Wire rope shall be taken out of service when any of the following conditions exist:

(a) In running ropes, six randomly distributed broken wires in one lay or three broken wires in one strand in one lay;

(b) Wear of one-third the original diameter of outside individual wires, including kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any other damage resulting in distortion of the rope structure;

(d) Reductions from nominal diameter of more than three sixty-fourths inch (1.2 millimeters) for diameters to and including three-fourths inch (nineteen millimeters), one sixteenth inch (1.6 millimeters) for diameters seven-eighths inch (twenty-two milimeters) to one and one-eighth inches (twenty-nine millimeters) inclusive, and three-thirty-seconds inch (2.4 millimeters) for diameters one and one-fourth inches (thirty-two millimeters) to one and one-half inches (thirty-eight millimeters) inclusive; or

(e) In standing ropes, more than two broken wires in one lay in sections beyond end connections or more than one broken wire at an end connection.

(4) Overhead hoists.

(a) The safe working load of the overhead hoist, as determined by the manufacturer, shall be indicated on the hoist, and this safe working load shall not be exceeded.

(b) The supporting structure to which the hoist is attached shall have a safe working load equal to that of the hoist.

(c) The support shall be arranged so as to provide for free movement of the hoist and shall not restrict the hoist from lining itself up with the load.

(d) The hoist shall be installed only in locations that will permit the operator to stand clear of the load at all times.

(e) All overhead hoists in use shall meet the applicable requirements for construction, design, installation, testing, maintenance, and operation as prescribed by the manufacturer.

(E) Proximity to overhead electric conductors.

When it is necessary to move or operate cranes, derricks, or any other type of hoisting apparatus or construction equipment within twenty feet (6.1 meters) of an electrical conductor carrying one hundred ten volts or more, the employer shall do at least one of the following:

(1) Arrange with the owner of the conductor, or the owner's authorized representative, to deenergize the conductor;

(2) Arrange with the owner of the conductor, or the owner's authorized representative, to move the conductor;

(3) Arrange with the owner of the conductor, or the owner's authorized representative, to guard the conductor from accidental contact, and the employer shall designate an employee to act as signalman to direct the operator in the movement of derricks, cranes, or any other type of hoisting apparatus or construction equipment; or

(4) Install an insulated type guard about the boom or arm of the equipment and a dielectric insulator link between the load and the block, and the employer shall designate an employee to act as a signalman to direct the operator in the movement of derricks, cranes, or any other type of hoisting apparatus or construction equipment.

(F) No employee shall be permitted to pass or be under loads handled by power shovels, derricks, or hoists. Employees who are not engaged in vehicle loading shall be required to stand back from any such vehicle during the loading.

(G) Derricks.

The following types of derricks are covered by the requirements in this section wherever such requirements apply to the specific type of derrick: gin poles, tripod derricks, A-frame derricks, Chicago boom derricks, stiff leg derricks, breast derricks and guyed masts. See the appendix to this rule for diagrams of derricks.

(1) Design.

(a) Derricks and all appurtenances thereof, including anchorage, shall be designed to carry the maximum working loads to be imposed upon them and shall provide a factor of safety of no less than four, including wind loads calculated on the basis of the following table:

NOTES:

For cylindrical sections in excess of two inch (5.1 centimeters) diameter, multiply by factor of 0.80.
For cylindrical sections two inches (5.1 centimeters) or less in diameter, multiply by factor of 1.00.
For flat sections, multiply by factor of 1.30.
When height under consideration is fifty feet (15.2 meters) or more, interpolate wind load for such height from table.
Design shall be checked for wind loading in all directions. No allowance shall be made for sheltering from adjacent structures.

(b) All equipment shall be designed and erected in a substantial manner and securely fastened in place.

(2) Foundations and anchoring.

(a) Foundations.

Derricks shall be set upon substantial foundations.

(b) Anchoring and securing.

(i) Independent of building or structure.

(a) Derricks independent of a building or structure shall be substantially anchored at the top of each corner post and at intermediate intervals of no more than forty feet (12.2 meters) with no less than three-eights inch (ten millimeters) steel wire rope or material of equal or greater strength. Anchorage for the guys of derricks shall be designed to resist the loads imposed.

(b) Under no circumstances shall less than six guys be used on a derrick supported solely by guys.

(c) The anchoring of derricks shall be such as to ensure that with the boom in any position, the righting moment will exceed the overturning moment, imposed under service conditions with rated load or under storm conditions.

(ii) Secured to building or structure.

Derricks shall be securely fastened to the building or structure, at intervals of no more than forty feet (12.2 meters).

(3) Hoist hooks.

Hoist hooks used with bucket, cage, or skip shall be equipped with a safety latch designed to prevent the load from being accidentally detached.

(4) Braking systems.

Derricks shall be provided with a brake which will operate in case of power failure. The braking system shall be capable of holding the maximum rated load at any point of the lift.

(5) Protection from falling material or objects.

A substantial overhead guard shall be provided which will protect the operator of the derrick from falling material and objects.

(6) Running lines.

Running lines and pinch points where a wire rope runs onto sheaves, blocks, or pulleys of derricks, located six feet or less (1.8 meters) from the ground or working level shall be guarded, except when loads are moved horizontally.

View Appendix

Last updated July 13, 2026 at 3:33 PM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-08 Ropes, chains and slings.

This rule was filed with the Legislative Service Commission in PDF format and is presented here as filed.

View Rule Text

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 12:00 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-09 Roofing devices.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

Buckets furnished by the employer and used by the employee to handle hot tar, hot pitch, hot asphalt, or similar materials shall be made of "No. 24 Gauge" or heavier sheet metal and shall have a metal bail of one-fourth inch (six millimeters) diameter or larger. The bail shall be fastened to offset ears which have been riveted or welded to the bucket.

(D) Felt-laying machines and mechanical moppers.

Operators of felt-laying machines and mechanical moppers shall not be required to operate such machines within a distance of six feet (1.8 meters) of any unprotected roof opening, within six feet (1.8 meters) of any unprotected roof edge which is parallel to the direction of mechanical equipment operation, and not less than ten feet (three meters) from the roof edge which is perpendicular to the direction of mechanical equipment operation.

(E) Roofing brackets.

(1) Construction.

Roofing brackets shall be constructed to fit the pitch of the roof.

(2) Fastening.

Roofing brackets shall be securely fastened in place. When brackets cannot be securely fastened by any other means, rope supports shall be used. When rope supports are used, such supports shall consist of manila rope of no less than three-quarter inch (nineteen millimeters) diameter, or equivalent.

(F) Catch platforms for pitched and flat roofs.

(1) Catch platforms for pitched roofs.

On pitched roofs with a rise of four inches (10.2 centimeters) in twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) or greater, sixteen feet (4.9 meters) or more above ground, and not having a parapet of at least thirty inches (76.2 centimeters) in height, catch platforms shall be installed. The platform shall extend two feet (sixty-one centimeters) beyond the projection of the eaves and shall be provided with a standard guardrail substantially fixed in place. Safety harnesses attached to a lifeline which is securely fastened to the structure may be used in lieu of a catch platform.

(2) Catch platforms for flat roofs.

On flat roofs, not having a parapet of at least thirty inches in height, a standard guardrail substantially fixed in place may be used. Safety harnesses attached to a lifeline which is securely fastened to the structure may be used in lieu of a standard guardrail.

(G) Kettles and tankers.

(1) Heating of kettles and tankers.

(a) All kettles and tankers in use or being heated up for use shall have a qualified person, designated by the employer, in attendance.

(b) Automatic tanker heaters, when used to maintain a minimum temperature, are exempt.

(2) Leveling devices.

Kettles shall be equipped with leveling devices, and the leveling devices shall be securely fastened in place.

(3) Lids or covers.

Kettles shall be equipped with lids or covers hinged in place.

(4) Pumper or agitator.

A pumper or agitator shall not be set into hot material.

(5) Propane cylinders.

Valves, fittings, and accessories connected directly to propane cylinders, including primary shut-off valves, shall have a rated working pressure of no less than two hundred fifty pounds per square inch (one thousand seven hundred twenty-four kilopascal) gage and shall be of material and design suitable for liquified petroleum gas service.

(6) Storage containers for fuel.

Storage containers for fuel used to heat tankers shall be located no less than twenty-five feet (7.6 meters) from burners on tankers with capacity of less than two thousand gallons (seven thousand five hundred seventy-one liters), no less than fifty feet (15.2 meters) on tankers with capacity of two thousand gallons (seven thousand five hundred seventy-one liters) or more.

(H) Chicken ladders or crawling boards.

(1) Construction.

Chicken ladders or crawling boards shall be no less than ten inches (25.4 centimeters) wide and one inch (2.5 centimeters) thick having cleats no less than one inch (2.5 centimeters) by one and one half inches (3.8 centimeters) and extending no less than two inches (5.1 centimeters) beyond each side of the board. Cleats shall be evenly spaced and shall not exceed twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters) on center. Nails shall be driven through and clinched on the underside.

(2) Securing of crawling boards.

Crawling boards shall be secured to the roof by means of ridge hooks or no less than three-quarters inch (nineteen millimeters) manila line, or its equivalent, passed over the ridge and securely fastened to maintain a safe working condition. A firmly fastened grabline of no less than three-quarters inch (nineteen millimeters) manila line, or its equivalent, shall be strung beside each crawling board for a handhold.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:53 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-10 Scaffolding.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Bearer" means a horizontal member of a scaffold upon which the platform rests and which may be supported by ledgers.

(2) "Boatswain's chair" means a seat supported by slings attached to a suspended rope, designed to accommodate one employee in a sitting position.

(3) "Brace" means a tie that holds one scaffold member in a fixed position with respect to another member.

(4) "Bricklayer's square scaffold" means a scaffold, the platform of which is supported on built-up squares secured to each other by full and continuous diagonal bracing.

(5) "Carpenter's bracket scaffold" means a scaffold, the platform of which is supported on triangular braced brackets fastened to the side of the structure.

(6) "Chimney, stack, or tank bracket scaffold" means a scaffold composed of a platform supported by wood or steel brackets, hooked over a steel wire rope which surrounds the circumference of the chimney, stack, or tank.

(7) "Coupler" means a device for locking together the component parts of a tubular metal scaffold.

(8) "Double pole scaffold" or "independent pole scaffold" means a scaffold supported from the base by a double row of uprights, independent of support from the walls and constructed of uprights, ledgers, horizontal platform bearers, and diagonal bracing.

(9) "Elevating assembly" means a mechanical, hydraulic, or other type of mechanism used to elevate and lower a work platform.

(10) "Float or ship scaffold" means a scaffold hung from overhead supports by means of ropes, consisting of a platform having diagonal bracing underneath, and the platform rests upon, and is fastened to, two parallel plank bearers at right angles to the span.

(11) "Foot scaffold" means a scaffold used to give additional height, the platform of which does not exceed eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) above the supporting surface.

(12) "Heavy duty scaffold" means a scaffold designed and constructed to carry a working load in excess of fifty pounds per square foot (244.1 kilograms per square meter) but no more than seventy-five pounds per square foot (366.2 kilograms per square meter).

(13) "Horizontal wire rope supported scaffold" means a scaffold, the platform of which is supported at two or more points by horizontal wire ropes.

(14) "Horse scaffold" means a scaffold for light or medium duty, composed of saw horses supporting a work platform.

(15) "Interior hung scaffold" means a scaffold suspended from the ceiling or roof structure.

(16) "Ladder jack scaffold" means a light duty scaffold supported by brackets attached to ladders.

(17) "Lean to, or shore, scaffold", the use of which is prohibited pursuant to paragraph (C)(16) of this rule, means a scaffold, the platform of which is supported on members consisting of a putlog or bearer, knee braced to two diverging inclined legs in a plane substantially transverse to the putlog that support the outer end of the putlog or bearer, while the inner end of the bearer or putlog rests on, against, or on a bearing block attached to the structure.

(18) "Ledgers" or "stringers" means a horizontal scaffold member which extends from post to post at right angles to the putlogs or bearers, supports the putlogs or bearers, and forms a tie between the posts and becomes a part of the scaffold bracing.

(19) "Light duty scaffold" means a scaffold designed and constructed to carry a working load of no more than twenty-five pounds per square foot (122.1 kilograms per square meter).

(20) "Manually propelled mobile scaffold" means a portable rolling scaffold equipped with casters.

(21) "Mason's adjustable multiple-point suspension scaffold" means a scaffold having a continuous platform supported by bearers suspended by wire rope from overhead supports, so arranged and operated as to permit the raising or lowering of the platform to desired working positions.

(22) "Maximum rated load" means the total of all loads including the working load, the weight of the scaffold, and such other loads as may be reasonably anticipated.

(23) "Medium duty scaffold" means a scaffold designed and constructed to carry a working load in excess of twenty-five pounds per square foot (122.1 kilograms per square meter) but no more than fifty pounds per square foot (244.1 kilograms per square meter).

(24) "Needle beam scaffold" means a cantilevered light duty scaffold consisting of two parallel horizontal beams supporting a platform.

(25) "Outrigger scaffold" means a scaffold supported by outriggers or thrustouts projecting beyond the wall or face of the building or structure, the inboard ends of which are secured inside the wall or face of such building or structure.

(26) "Platform" means the temporary flat working surface used to support employees, material, and equipment.

(27) "Putlog" means a scaffold member upon which the platform rests. Also see "bearer."

(28) "Runner" means the lengthwise horizontal bracing or bearing members, or both.

(29) "Scaffold" means any temporary elevated platform and its supporting structure used for supporting employees, materials, or equipment.

(30) "Single-point adjustable suspension scaffold" means a manually or power operated unit designed for light duty use, supported by a single wire rope from an overhead support, so arranged and operated as to permit the raising or lowering of platform to desired working positions.

(31) "Single-pole scaffold" means platforms resting on putlogs or cross beams, the outside ends of which are supported on ledgers secured to a single row of posts or uprights, and the inner ends of which are supported on or in a wall.

(32) "Stack bracket scaffold," see "chimney, stack, or tank bracket scaffold."

(33) "Suspended scaffold" means a scaffold supported from above, the platform of which is supported at more than two points from overhead outriggers which are fastened to the framework of the structure.

(34) "Tank bracket scaffold." see "chimney, stack, or tank bracket scaffold."

(35) "Tube and coupler scaffold" means an assembly consisting of tubing which serves as posts, bearers, braces, ties, a runner, a base supporting the posts, and special couplers which serve to connect the uprights and to join the various members.

(36) "Tubular welded frame scaffold" means a sectional panel or frame metal scaffold built up of prefabricated welded sections which consists of posts and horizontal bearers with intermediate members.

(37) "Two-point suspension scaffold" or "swinging scaffold" means a scaffold, the platform of which is supported by stirrups or hangers at two points to permit raising or lowering, suspended from overhead supports.

(38) "Window jack scaffold" means a scaffold, the platform of which is supported by a jack or thrustout which projects through a window opening.

(39) "Working load" means the load on the scaffold imposed by employees, material, and equipment.

See the appendix to this rule for examples of various scaffolds mentioned throughout this rule.

(1) The footing or anchorage for scaffolds shall be sound, rigid, and capable of supporting the load without settling or displacement. Unstable or loose objects shall not be used to support scaffolds.

(2) Scaffolds and their components shall be capable of supporting without failure no less than four times the maximum rated load.

(3) Any scaffold including accessories, such as braces, brackets, trusses, screw legs, and ladders, damaged or weakened from any cause, shall be immediately repaired or replaced.

(4) Guardrails and toeboards.

Standard guardrails and toeboards shall be installed on all open sides and ends of platforms more than ten feet (three meters) above the ground or floor, except on needle beam scaffolds and floats.

(5) Where employees are required to work or pass under the scaffold, each employee shall be provided with additional protection from falling hand tools, debris, and other small objects through the installation of toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems, or through the erection of debris nets, catch platforms, or canopy structures that contain or deflect the falling objects. When the objects are too large, heavy, or massive to be contained or deflected by any of the above-listed measures, the employer shall place such potential falling objects away from the edge of the surface from which the objects could fall and shall secure those materials as necessary to prevent their falling.

(6) Nails provided for the construction of scaffolds shall be no less than eight-penny common.

(7) All planking shall be "Scaffold Grade," or equivalent, as recognized by approved grading rules for the species of wood used.

(8) All planking of platforms shall be overlapped a minimum of twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) or secured from movement.

(9) An access ladder or equivalent safe access shall be provided for all scaffolds.

(10) Scaffold planks shall extend over end supports no less than six inches (15.2 centimeters) and no more than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters).

(11) The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds shall be plumb and securely and rigidly braced to prevent swaying and displacement.

(12) Overhead protection shall be provided for employees on a scaffold exposed to hazards from overhead.

(13) Reasonable care shall be taken to maintain all scaffold surfaces free of debris and slippery substances.

(14) No welding, burning, riveting, or open flame work shall be performed on any scaffolding suspended by means of fiber or synthetic rope. Only fiber or synthetic ropes, properly treated or protected, shall be used for or near any work involving the use of corrosive substances or chemicals.

(15) Wire, synthetic, or fiber rope used for scaffold suspension shall be capable of supporting no less than six times the maximum rated load.

(16) The use of shore scaffolds or lean-to scaffolds is prohibited.

(17) When there is danger of material being hoisted striking against the scaffold, a tag line shall be provided.

(18) The free ends of fall lines from scaffolds shall be guarded.

(D) Wood pole scaffolds.

See the appendix to this rule for examples of wood pole scaffolds.

(1) Scaffold poles shall bear on a foundation of sufficient size and strength to spread the load from the pole over a sufficient area to prevent settlement. All poles shall be set plumb.

(2) Where poles are spliced, the ends shall be squared and the upper section shall rest squarely on the lower section. Wood splice plates shall be provided on no less than two adjacent sides and shall be no less than four feet (1.2 meters) in length, overlapping the abutted ends equally, have the same width, and have no less than the cross-sectional area of the pole. Splice plates composed of other materials of equivalent strength may be used.

(3) Independent pole scaffolds shall be set as near to the wall of the building as practicable.

(4) All pole scaffolds shall be securely guyed or tied to the building or structure. Where the height or length exceeds twenty-five feet (7.6 meters), the scaffold shall be secured at intervals no greater than twenty-five feet (7.6 meters) vertically and horizontally.

(5) Putlogs or bearers shall be set with the greater dimension vertical, long enough to project over the ledgers of the inner and outer rows of poles no less than three inches (7.6 centimeters) for proper support.

(6) Every wooden putlog on single pole scaffolds shall be reinforced with a three-sixteenths inch (4.8 millimeters) by two-inch (5.1 centimeters) steel strip, or equivalent, secured to its lower edge throughout its entire length.

(7) Ledgers shall be long enough to extend over two pole spaces. Ledgers shall not be spliced between the poles. Ledgers shall be reinforced by bearing blocks securely fastened to the side of the pole to form a support for the ledger.

(8) Diagonal bracing shall be provided to prevent the poles from buckling or from moving in a direction parallel with the wall of the building.

(9) Cross bracing shall be provided between the inner and outer sets of poles in independent pole scaffolds. The free ends of pole scaffolds shall be cross braced.

(10) Full diagonal face bracing shall be erected across the entire face of pole scaffolds in both directions. The braces shall be spliced only at the poles. The inner row of poles on medium and heavy duty scaffolds shall be braced in similar manner.

(11) Platform planks shall be laid with their edges butted together, so the platform shall be tight with no spaces through which tools or fragments of material can fall.

(12) Where planking is lapped, each plank shall lap its end support no less than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters). Where the ends of planks abut each other to form a flush floor, the butt joint shall be at the centerline of a pole. The abutted ends shall rest on separate bearers. Intermediate beams shall be provided where necessary to prevent dislodgment of planks due to deflection, and the ends shall be secured to prevent their dislodgment.

(13) When a scaffold materially changes its direction, the platform planks shall be laid to prevent tipping. The planks that meet the corner putlog at an angle shall be laid first, extending over the diagonally placed putlog far enough to have a good safe bearing, but not far enough to involve any danger from tipping. The planking running in the opposite direction at an angle shall be laid so as to extend over and rest on the first layer of planking.

(14) When moving platforms to the next level, the old platform shall be left undisturbed until the new putlogs or bearers have been set in place, ready to receive the platform planks.

(15) All wood pole scaffolds sixty feet (18.3 meters) or less in height shall be constructed and erected in accordance with "Table 10-1" to "Table 10-6." If they are over sixty feet (18.3 meters) in height, they shall be designed by a professional engineer competent in this field, and shall be constructed and erected in accordance with such design.

Table 10-1. Minimum nominal size and maximum spacing of members of single-pole scaffolds, light duty.

| | Maximum height of scaffold | | | --- | --- | --- | | | 20 ft. (6.1 m) | 60 ft. (18.3 m) | | Uniformly distributed load | Not to exceed 25 p.s.f. (122.1 kg/m²) | | | Poles or uprights | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | 4 x 4 in. (10.2 x 10.2 cm) | | Pole spacing (longitudinal) | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) | 10 ft. 0 in. (3 m) | | Maximum width of scaffold | 5 ft. 0 in. (1.5 m) | 5 ft. 0 in. (1.5 m) | | Bearers or putlogs to 3 ft. 0 in. width | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | | Bearers or putlogs to 5 ft. 0 in. width | 2 x 6 in.(5.1 x 15.2 cm) or 3 x 4 in. (7.6 x 10.2 m | 2 x 6 in. (5.1 x 15.2 cm) or 3 x 4 in. (7.6 x 10.2 cm) (rough). | | Ledgers | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | 1 1/4 x 9 in. (3.2 x 22.9 cm) | | Planking | 1 1/4 x 9 in. (3.2 x 22.9 cm) (rough) | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Vertical spacing of horizontal members | 7 ft. 0 in. (2.1 m) | 9 ft. 0 in. (2.7 m) | | Bracing, horizontal and diagonal | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | | Tie-ins | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | | Toeboards | 4 in. high (minimum) (10.2 cm) | 4 in. (10.2 cm) high (minimum). | | Guardrails | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) |

All members except planking shall be used on edge.

Table 10-2. Minimum nominal size and maximum spacing of members of single-pole scaffolds, medium duty.

| Uniformly distributed load. | Not to exceed 50 p.s.f. (244.1 kg/m²) | | --- | --- | | Maximum height of scaffolds. | 60 ft. (18.3 m) | | Poles or uprights | 4 x 4 in. (10.2 x 10.2 cm) | | Pole spacing (longitudinal). | 8 ft. 0 in. (2.4 m) | | Maximum width of scaffold. | 5 ft. 0 in. (1.5 m) | | Bearers or putlogs | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) or 3 x 4 in. (7.6 x 10.2 cm) | | Spacing of bearers or putlogs. | 8 ft. 0 in. (2.4 m) | | Ledgers | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Vertical spacing of horizontal members. | 7 ft. 0 in. (2.1 m) | | Bracing, horizontal | 1 x 6 in. (2.5 x 15.2 cm) or 1 1/4 x 4 in. (3.2 x 10.2 cm) | | Bracing, diagonal | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | | Tie-ins | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | | Planking | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Toeboards | 4 in. high (10.2 cm) (minimum). | | Guardrails | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) |

All members except planking shall be used on edge.

Table 10-3. Minimum nominal size and maximum spacing of members of single-pole scaffolds, heavy duty.

| Uniformly distributed load. | Not to exceed 75 p.s.f. (366.2 kg/m²) | | --- | --- | | Maximum height of scaffold. | 60 ft. (18.3 m) | | Poles or uprights | 4 x 6 in. (10.2 cm x 15.2 cm) | | Pole spacing (longitudinal). | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) | | Maximum width of scaffold. | 5 ft. 0 in. (1.5 m) | | Bearers or putlogs | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) or 3 x 5 in. (7.6 x 12.7 cm) | | Spacing of bearers or putlogs. | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) | | Ledgers | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Vertical spacing of horizontal members. | 6 ft. 6 in. (2 m) | | Bracing, horizontal and diagonal. | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | | Tie-ins | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | | Planking | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Toeboards | 4 in. high (10.2 cm) (minimum). | | Guardrails | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) |

All members except planking shall be used on edge.

Table 10-4. Minimum nominal size and maximum spacing of members of independent pole scaffold, light duty.

| | Maximum height of scaffold | | | --- | --- | --- | | | 20 ft. (6.1 m) | 60 ft. (18.3 m) | | Uniformly distributed load | Not to exceed 25 p.s.f. (122.1 kg/m²) | | | Poles or uprights | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | 4 x 4 in. (10.2 x 10.2 cm) | | Pole spacing (longitudinal) | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) | 10 ft. 0 in. (3 m) | | Pole spacing (transverse) | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) | 10 ft. 0 in. (3 m) | | Ledgers | 1 1/4 x 4 in. (3.2 x 10.2 cm) | 1 1/4 x 9 in. (3.2 x 22.9 cm) | | Bearers to 3 ft. 0 in. span | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | | Bearers to 10 ft. 0 in. span | 2 x 6 in. (5.1 x 15.2 cm)or 3 x 4 in. (7.6 x 10.2 cm) | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) (rough) or 3 x 8 in. (7.6 x 20.3 cm) | | Planking | 1 1/4 x 9 in. (3.2 x 22.9 cm) | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Vertical spacing of horizontal members | 7 ft. 0 in. (2.1 m) | 7 ft. 0 in. (2.1 m) | | Bracing, horizontal and diagonal | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | | Tie-ins | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | | Toeboards | 4 in. high (10.2 cm) | 4 in. (10.2 cm) high (minimum) | | Guardrails | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) |

All members except planking shall be used on edge.

Table 10-5. Minimum nominal size and maximum spacing of members of independent pole scaffolds, medium duty.

| Uniformly distributed load. | Not to exceed 50 p.s.f. (244.1 kg/m²) | | --- | --- | | Maximum height of scaffold. | 60 ft. (18.3 m) | | Poles or uprights | 4 x 4 in. (10.2 x 10.2 cm) | | Pole spacing (longitudinal). | 8 ft. 0 in. (2.4 m) | | Pole spacing (transverse). | 8 ft. 0 in. (2.4 m) | | Ledgers | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Vertical spacing of horizontal members. | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) | | Spacing of bearers | 8 ft. 0 in. (2.4 m) | | Bearers | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Bracing, horizontal | 1 x 6 in. (2.5 x 15.2 cm) or 1 1/4 x 4 in. (3.2 x 10.2 cm) | | Bracing, diagonal | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | | Tie-ins | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | | Planking | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Toeboards | 4 in. (10.2 cm) high (minimum). | | Guardrails | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) |

All members except planking shall be used on edge.

Table 10-6. Minimum nominal size and maximum spacing of members of independent pole scaffold, heavy duty.

| Uniformly distributed load. | Not to exceed 75 p.s.f. (366.2 kg/m²) | | --- | --- | | Maximum height of scaffold. | 60 ft. (18.3 m) | | Poles or uprights | 4 x 4 in. (10.2 x 10.2 cm) | | Pole spacing (longitudinal). | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) | | Pole spacing (transverse). | 8 ft. 0 in. (2.4 m) | | Ledgers | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Vertical spacing of horizontal members. | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) | | Bearers | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) (rough). | | Bracing, horizontal and diagonal. | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | | Tie-ins | 1 x 4 in. (2.5 x 10.2 cm) | | Planking | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Toeboards | 4 in. (10.2 cm) high (minimum). | | Guardrails | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) |

All members except planking shall be used on edge.

(E) Tube and coupler scaffolds.

(1) The material used for couplers shall be of a structural type, such as drop-forged steel, malleable iron, or structural grade aluminum.

(2) A light duty tube and coupler scaffold shall have all posts, bearers, runners, and bracing of nominal two-inch (5.1 centimeter) outside-diameter (O.D.) steel tubing. The posts shall be spaced no more than six feet (1.8 meters) apart in width and ten feet (three meters) apart in length. Other structural metals when used must be designed to carry an equivalent load. No dissimilar metals shall be used together.

(3) A medium duty tube and coupler scaffold shall consist of no less than nominal two-inch (5.1 centimeters) O.D. steel tubing in all posts, runners, and bracing. Where the posts are spaced no farther apart than five feet (1.5 meters) by eight feet (2.4 meters), the bearers shall also be no less than nominal two-inch (5.1 centimeters) O.D. steel tubing. Where the posts are spaced at greater distances apart than five feet (1.5 meters) by eight feet (2.4 meters), the bearers shall be of not less than nominal two and one-half inch (6.4 centimeters) O.D. steel tubing but, in no event, may the posts of a medium duty tube and coupler scaffold be spaced farther apart than six feet (1.8 meters) by eight feet (2.4 meters). Other structural metals, when used, must be capable of carrying a load equivalent to the load supportable by the prescribed tube and coupler scaffold. No dissimilar metals shall be used together.

(4) A heavy duty tube and coupler scaffold shall have all posts, runners, and bracing of nominal two-inch (5.1 centimeters) O.D. steel tubing, with the posts spaced no more than six feet (1.8 meters) by six feet six inches (two meters). Other structural metals, when used, must be designed to carry an equivalent load. No dissimilar metals shall be used together.

(5) Tube and coupler scaffolds shall be limited in heights and working levels to those permitted in "Table 10-7" to "Table 10-9." Drawings and specifications of all tube and coupler scaffolds above the limitations in "Table 10-7" to "Table 10-9" shall be designed by a qualified engineer competent in this field.

(6) Posts shall be accurately spaced, erected on suitable bases, and maintained plumb.

(7) Runners shall be erected along the length of the scaffold, located on both the inside and the outside posts at even heights. Runners shall be interlocked to the inside and the outside posts at even heights. Runners shall be interlocked to form continuous lengths and coupled to each post. The bottom runners shall be located as close to the base as possible. Runners shall be placed no more than six feet six inches (two meters) on centers.

(8) Bearers shall be installed transversely between posts and shall be securely coupled to the posts bearing on the runner coupler. When coupled directly to the runners, the coupler must be kept as close to the posts as possible.

(9) Bearers shall extend past the post and runners.

(10) Cross bracing shall be installed across the width of the scaffold no less than every third set of posts horizontally and every fourth runner vertically. Such bracing shall extend diagonally from the inner and outer runners upward to the next outer and inner runners.

(11) Longitudinal diagonal bracing on the inner and outer rows of poles shall be installed at approximately a forty-five degree angle from near the base of the first outer post upward to the extreme top of the scaffold. Where the longitudinal length of the scaffold permits, such bracing shall be duplicated beginning at every fifth post. In a similar manner, longitudinal diagonal bracing shall also be installed from the last post extending back and upward toward the first post. Where conditions preclude the attachment of this bracing to the posts, the bracing may be attached to the runners.

(12) The entire scaffold shall be tied to and securely braced against the building at intervals not to exceed thirty feet (9.1 meters) horizontally and twenty-six feet (7.9 meters) vertically.

Table 10-7. Tube and coupler scaffolds, light duty

| Uniformly distributed load | Not to exceed 25 p.s.f. (122.1 kg/m²) | | --- | --- | | Post spacing (longitudinal) | 10 ft. 0 in. (3 m) | | Post spacing (transverse) | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) |

| Working levels | Additional planked levels | Maximum height | | --- | --- | --- | | 1 | 8 | 125 ft. (38.1 m) | | 2 | 4 | 125 ft. (38.1 m) | | 3 | 0 | 91 ft. 0 in. (27.7 m) |

Table 10-8. Tube and coupler scaffolds, medium duty

| Uniformly distributed load | Not to exceed 50 p.s.f (244.1 kg/m²) | | --- | --- | | Post spacing (longitudinal) | 8 ft. 6 in. (2.6 m) | | Post spacing (transverse) | 6 ft. 0 in (1.8 m) |

| Working levels | Additional planked levels | Maximum height | | --- | --- | --- | | 1 | 6 | 125 ft. (38.1 m) | | 2 | 0 | 78 ft. 0 in. (23.8 m) |

Table 10-9. Tube and coupler scaffolds, heavy duty

| Uniformly distributed load | Not to exceed 75 p.s.f. (366.2 kg/m²) | | --- | --- | | Post spacing (longitudinal) | 6 ft. 6 in. (2 m) | | Post spacing (transverse) | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) |

| Working levels | Additional planked levels | Maximum height | | --- | --- | --- | | 1 | 6 | 125 ft. (38.1 m) |

(F) Tubular welded frame scaffolds.

(1) Scaffolds shall be properly braced by diagonal braces for securing vertical members together laterally, and the cross braces shall be of such length as will automatically square and align vertical members so that the erected scaffold is always plumb, square, and rigid. All brace connections shall be made secure.

(2) Scaffold legs shall be set on adjustable bases or plain bases placed on mud sills or other adequate foundations.

(3) The frames shall be placed one on top of the other with coupling or stacking pins to provide proper vertical alignment of the legs.

(4) Where uplift may occur, panels shall be locked together vertically by pins or other equivalent means.

(5) Supported scaffolds with a height to base width, including outrigger supports if used, ratio of more than four to one shall be secured to the building or structure at intervals not to exceed thirty feet (9.1 meters) horizontally and twenty-six feet (7.9 meters) vertically.

(6) Maximum permissible spans or planking shall be in conformity with paragraph (C)(7) of this rule.

(G) Manually propelled mobile scaffolds.

(1) When free standing mobile scaffold towers are used, the height of the work platform shall not exceed four times the minimum base dimension.

(2) Casters shall be properly designed for strength and dimensions to support four times the maximum rated load. All casters shall be provided with a locking device to hold the scaffold in position.

(3) Scaffolds shall be properly braced by cross bracing and horizontal bracing conforming with paragraph (F)(1) of this rule.

(4) Platforms shall be tightly planked for the full width of the scaffold except for a necessary entrance opening. Platforms shall be secured in place.

(5) A ladder or stairway shall be provided for proper access and exit and shall be affixed or built into the scaffold and so located that when in use, the scaffold will not tip. A landing platform must be provided at intervals not to exceed thirty-five feet (10.7 meters).

(6) Provision shall be made to stabilize the tower during movement from one location to another.

(7) The employer shall not require employees to ride on manually propelled scaffolds unless the following conditions exist:

(a) The floor or surface is within three degrees of level and free from pits, holes, or obstructions.

(b) When ready for rolling, the height of the work platform shall not exceed two times the narrowest dimension of the base, When outriggers are used, the outriggers shall be included in the base dimension and shall be installed on both sides of the staging.

(d) All tools and materials are secured or removed from the platform before the mobile scaffold is moved.

(H) Elevated work platforms and self-propelled elevated work platforms.

(1) The minimum rated work load of a platform shall be no less than two hundred fifty pounds (113.4 kilograms). The work platform and all structural components shall have a factor of safety of no less than four.

(2) Any work platform when raised to its maximum working height shall be capable of sustaining without reaching instability, a horizontal force of fifty pounds (22.7 kilograms) applied to any point on the platform while the platform is carrying the working load.

(3) The base shall not be used or placed on an inclined surface unless leveled by a device that is part of the unit.

(4) Work platform elevating assemblies.

(a) Factors of safety of elevating assembly.

(i) Where the platform is supporting its working load by a system of wire ropes or lift chains, or both, the factor of safety of the wire or chain shall be no less than six.

(ii) All critical components of a hydraulic or pneumatic system used in a work platform shall have a bursting strength that exceeds the pressure attained when the system is subjected to the equivalent of four times the maximum rated load. Critical components are those in which a failure would result in a free fall. All noncritical hydraulic components shall have a bursting factor of safety of no less than two.

(b) Systems protection.

(i) Where the elevation of the platform is accomplished by an electromechanical assembly, or a hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder assembly, the system shall be so equipped as to prevent free fall in the event of a power failure.

(ii) Where the elevation of the platform is accomplished by a hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder assembly, the system shall be so equipped as to prevent free fall in the event of a hydraulic or pneumatic line failure.

(iii) Where the elevation of the platform is accomplished by a single hoist cable, the system shall be protected by a broken-cable safety device.

(iv) Where the elevation of the platform is accomplished by manual-mechanical or manual-hydraulic assembly, the assembly shall be equipped to prevent free fall in case of failure.

(i) Any powered work platform shall have both upper and lower control devices. Controls shall be plainly marked as to their function and guarded to prevent accidental operation. The upper control device shall be in or beside the platform, within easy reach of the operator. The lower control device shall have the capability to lower the platform where the operator's safety is in jeopardy.

(ii) Each elevated work platform shall be equipped with a clear visible instruction plate stating:

(a) Rated capacity;

(b) Maximum platform height; and

(iii) Protection to personnel.

(a) Pinch points and shear points shall be guarded with a barrier to prevent accidental or inadvertent entrapment of personnel while the work platform is being operated.

(b) All rotating shafts, gearing, and other moving parts shall be guarded.

(I) Outrigger scaffolds.

See appendix to this rule for examples of outrigger scaffolds.

(1) Outrigger beams shall extend no more than six feet (1.8 meters) beyond the face of the building. The inboard end of the outrigger beams, measured from the fulcrum point to anchorage point, shall be no less than one and one-half times the outboard end in length. The beams shall rest on edge, the sides shall be plumb, and the edges shall be horizontal. The fulcrum point of the beam shall rest on a secure bearing no less than six inches (15.2 centimeters) in each horizontal dimension. The beam shall be secured in place against movement and shall be securely braced at the fulcrum point against movement and shall be securely braced at the fulcrum point against tipping.

(2) The inboard ends of outrigger beams shall be securely anchored either by means of struts bearing against sills in contact with the overhead beams or ceiling, or by means of tension members secured to the floor joists underfoot, or by both if necessary. The inboard ends of outrigger beams shall be secured against tipping, and the entire supporting structure shall be securely braced in both directions to prevent any horizontal movement.

(3) Unless designed by a professional engineer competent in this field, outrigger scaffolds shall be constructed and erected in accordance with "Table 10-10." Outrigger scaffolds designed by a professional engineer shall provide equivalent or greater safeguards than those required herein.

(4) Planking shall be laid tight and shall extend to within three inches (7.6 centimeters) of the building wall. Planking shall be secured to the beams.

Table 10-10. Minimum nominal size and maximum spacing of members of outrigger scaffolds.

| | Light duty | Medium duty | | --- | --- | --- | | Maximum scaffold load. | 25 p.s.f. (122.1 kg/m²) | 50 p.s.f. (244.1 kg/m²) | | Outrigger size | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | 3 x 10 in. (7.6 x 25.4 cm) | | Maximum outrigger spacing. | 10 ft. 0 in. (3 m) | 6 ft. 0 in. (1.8 m) | | Planking | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | 2 x 10 in. (5.1 x 25.4 cm) | | Guardrail | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | | Guardrail uprights | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | | Toeboards | 4 in. (10.2 cm) (minimum). | 4 in. (10.2 cm) (minimum). |

(J) Masons' adjustable multiple-point suspension scaffolds.

See appendix to this rule for examples of masons' adjustable multiple-point suspension scaffolds.

(1) The scaffold shall be capable of sustaining a working load of fifty pounds per square foot (244.1 kilograms per square meter) and shall not be loaded in excess of that figure.

(2) The scaffold shall be provided with hoisting machines that meet the requirements of an approved testing laboratory.

(3) The platform shall be supported by wire ropes, capable of supporting no less than six times the intended load, suspended from overhead outrigger beams.

(4) The scaffold outrigger beams shall consist of structural metal securely fastened or anchored to the frame or floor system of the building or structure.

(5) Where an outrigger beam does not project more than six feet six inches (two meters) beyond the bearing point, the outrigger beam shall be equivalent in the strength to no less than a standard seven-inch (17.8 centimeters, fifteen and three-tenths pound (6.9 kilograms) steel I-beam no less than fifteen feet (4.6 meters) long.

(6) Where the overhang exceeds six feet six inches (two meters), outrigger beams shall be composed of stronger beams or multiple beams, providing proportionally greater strength than that required in paragraph (J)(5) of this rule.

(7) All outrigger beams shall be set and maintained with their webs in a vertical position.

(8) A stop bolt shall be placed at each end of every outrigger beam.

(9) The outrigger beam shall rest on suitable wood bearing blocks.

(10) The free end of the suspension wire ropes shall be equipped with proper size thimbles and secured by splicing or other equivalent means. The running ends shall be securely attached to the hoisting drum and no less than four turns of wire rope shall at all times remain on the drum. The use of fiber rope is prohibited.

(11) Where a single outrigger beam is used, the steel shackles or clevises with which the wire ropes are attached to the outrigger beams shall be placed directly over the hoisting drum.

(12) The scaffold platform shall be equivalent in strength to no less than two-inch (5.1 centimeters) planking.

(13) When employees are at work on the scaffold and a hazard exists from overhead, overhead protection shall be provided on the scaffold, no more than nine feet above the platform, consisting of two-inch (5.1 centimeters) planking, or material of equivalent strength, laid tight, and extending no less than the width of the scaffold.

(K) Two-point suspension scaffolds or swinging scaffolds.

See appendix to this rule for examples of swinging scaffolds.

(1) Two-point suspension scaffold platforms shall be no more than thirty-six inches (91.4 centimeters) wide overall. The platform shall be securely fastened to the hangers by U-bolts or by other equivalent means.

(2) The hangers of two-point suspension scaffolds shall be made of mild steel, or other equivalent materials, having a cross-sectional area capable of sustaining four times the maximum rated load, and shall be constructed to accommodate a guardrail, intermediate rail, and toeboard.

(3) When hoisting machines are used on two-point suspension scaffolds, the hoisting machines shall be of a design tested and approved by an approved testing laboratory.

(4) Employees shall not be required to use a bridge between, or to move directly from, one swinging scaffold and another unless the platforms are at the same height, are abutting, and walk through stirrups specifically designed for this purpose are used.

(5) The roof irons or hooks shall be of mild steel, or other equivalent material, of proper size and design, securely installed and anchored. Tiebacks of three-quarter inch (nineteen millimeters) manila rope, or the equivalent, shall serve as an additional means of anchorage, installed at right angles to the face of the building, whenever possible, and secured to a structurally sound portion of the building.

(6) Two-point suspension scaffolds shall be suspended by wire, synthetic, or fiber ropes capable of supporting no less than six times the maximum rated load. All other components shall be capable of supporting no less than four times the maximum rated load.

(7) The sheaves of all blocks shall fit the size and type of rope used.

(8) No more than two employees shall be required to be on a two-point suspension scaffold designed for a working load of five hundred pounds (226.8 kilograms) at any time. No more than three employees shall be required to be on a two-point suspension scaffold designed for a working load of seven hundred fifty pounds (340.2 kilograms), at any time. Each employee shall be protected by an approved safety harness attached to a lifeline. The lifeline shall be securely attached to substantial members of the structure and not the scaffold, or to securely rigged lines, which will safely suspend the employee in case of a fall.

(9) Two-point suspension scaffolds shall be securely lashed to the building or structure to prevent from swaying. Window cleaners' anchors shall not be used for this purpose.

(10) The platform of every two-point suspension scaffold shall be one of the following types:

(a) Ladder-type platforms.

Ladder-type platforms shall be capable of sustaining four times the maximum rated load and shall be constructed in accordance with "Table 10-11."

(b) Plank-type platforms.

Plank-type platforms shall be composed of no less than "Scaffold Grade" two-inch (5.1 centimeters) by ten-inch (25.4 centimeters) unspliced planks, properly cleated together on the underside, starting six inches (15.2 centimeters) from each end; intervals in between shall not exceed four feet (1.2 meters). The plank-type platform shall not extend beyond the hangers more than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters). A bar or other effective means shall be securely fastened to the platform at each end to prevent its slipping off the hanger. The span between hangers for plank-type platforms shall not exceed eight feet (2.4 meters).

Beam-type platforms shall have side stringers of lumber no less than two inches (5.1 centimeters) by six inches (15.2 centimeters) set on edge. The span between hangers shall not exceed twelve feet (3.7 meters) when beam platforms are used. The flooring shall be supported on two-inch 5.1 centimeters) by six-inch (15.2 centimeters) cross beams, laid flat, and set into the upper edge of the stringers with a snug fit, at intervals of no more than four feet (1.2 meters), securely nailed in place. The flooring shall be of one inch (2.5 centimeters) by six inch (15.2 centimeters) material, or equivalent, properly nailed. Floor boards shall be spaced no more than one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) apart.

(d) Light metal-type platforms.

Approved light metal-type platforms shall meet the requirements of paragraph (C)(2) of this rule.

Table 10-11. Schedule for ladder-type platforms.

(L) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.

(1) The scaffolding, including power units or manually operated winches, shall be of an approved type and meet the requirements of paragraph (C)(2) of this rule.

(2) All power-operated gears and brakes shall be enclosed.

(3) In addition to the normal operating brake, all power-driven units shall have an emergency brake which engages automatically when the normal speed of descent is exceeded.

(4) The units may be combined to form a two-point suspension scaffold. This two-point suspension scaffold shall then comply with paragraph (K) of this rule.

(5) The supporting cable shall be vertical for its entire length.

(6) Suspension methods shall conform to applicable provisions of paragraphs (J) and (K) of this rule.

(7) The employee shall be protected by a safety harness and lifeline in accordance with paragraph (J) of rule 4123:1-3-03 of the Administrative Code. The attachment point of the lifeline to the structure shall be appropriately changed as the work progresses.

(M) Boatswains' chairs.

(1) When constructed of wood, the chair seat shall be no less than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) by twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters) by one inch (2.5 centimeters) thickness, reinforced by cleats on the underside to prevent splitting. A chair of the same size may be constructed of material of equal strength.

(2) Seat slings shall be of no less than five-eights inch (sixteen millimeters) diameter, "First Grade" manila rope, or its equivalent, which shall be reeved through the four seat holes so as to cross each other on the underside of the seat.

(3) Seat slings shall be of no less than three-eights inch (ten millimeters) wire rope when an employee is conducting a heat-producing process, such as gas or arc welding.

(4) The employee shall be protected by a safety harness and lifeline in accordance with paragraph (J) of rule 4123:1-3-03 of the Administrative Code. The attachment point of the lifeline to the structure shall be appropriately changed as the work progresses.

(5) The tackle shall consist of correct size ball bearing or bushed blocks and properly spliced five-eights inch (sixteen millimeters diameter, "First Grade" manila rope, or equivalent.

(6) The roofirons, hooks, or the object to which the tackle is anchored, shall be securely installed. Tiebacks shall be installed at right angles to the face of the building and securely fastened when using wall hooks.

(N) Carpenters' bracket scaffolds.

(1) The brackets shall consist of a triangular wood frame no less than two inches (5.1 centimeters) by three inches (7.6 centimeters) in cross section, or of metal of equivalent strength. Each member shall be properly fitted and securely joined.

(2) Each bracket shall be secured to the structure by a means which shall provide a factor of safety of no less than four.

(3) The brackets shall be spaced no more than eight feet (2.4 meters) apart.

(4) The platform shall consist of no less than two two-inch (5.1 centimeters) by ten-inch (25.4 centimeters) "Scaffold Grade" planks extending no more than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters )or less than six inches (15.2 centimeters) beyond each and support.

(O) Bricklayers' square scaffolds.

(1) Bricklayers' square scaffolds shall conform to "Table 10-12," and the square shall not exceed five feet (1.5 meters) in width and five feet (1.5 meters) in height.

(2) The squares shall be reinforced on both sides of each corner with one inch (2.5 centimeters) by six-inch (15.2 centimeters) gusset pieces. They shall also have diagonal braces one inch (2.5 centimeters) by eight inches (20.3 centimeters) on both sides running from center to center of each member, or other means to secure equivalent strength and rigidity.

(3) The squares shall be set no more than five feet (1.5 meters) apart for medium duty scaffolds, and no more than eight feet (2.4 meters) apart for light duty scaffolds. Bracing, one inch (2.5 centimeters) by eight inches (20.3 centimeters), extending from the bottom of each square to the top of the next square, shall be provided on both front and rear sides of the scaffold.

(4) Platform planks shall be no less than two-inch (2.5 centimeters) by ten-inch (25.4 centimeters) "Scaffold Grade." The ends of the planks shall overlap the bearers of the squares, and each plank shall be supported by no less than three squares.

(5) Bricklayers' square scaffold shall not exceed three tiers in height and shall be so constructed and arranged that one square shall rest directly above the other. The upper tiers shall stand on a continuous row of planks laid across the next lower tier and be nailed down, or otherwise secured, to prevent displacement.

(6) Scaffolds shall be level and plumb and set upon a firm foundation.

Table 10-12. Minimum dimensions for bricklayers' square scaffold members.

| Members | Dimensions | | --- | --- | | Bearers or horizontal members | 2 x 6 in. (5.1 x 15.2 cm) | | Legs | 2 x 6 in. (5.1 x 15.2 cm) | | Braces at corners | 1 x 6 in. (2.5 x 15.2 cm) | | Braces diagonally from center frame | 1 x 8 in. (2.5 x 20.3 cm) |

(P) Foot scaffolds.

(1) Foot scaffolds shall not exceed eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) in height, measured from the level upon which the supports are placed.

(2) Foot scaffolds imposed on other scaffolds when supported on brick or tile, shall be limited to eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) in height and have a bearing surface of no less than ninety-six square inches (619.3 square centimeters). Supports shall be no more than seven feet (2.1 meters) center to center.

(Q) Horse scaffolds.

(1) Horse scaffolds shall not be constructed or arranged more than two tiers in height.

(2) The members of the horses shall be no less than those specified in "Table 10-13."

(3) Horses shall be spaced no more than five feet (1.5 meters) for medium duty and no more than eight feet (2.4 meters) for light duty.

(4) When arranged in tiers, each horse shall be placed directly over the horse in the tier below.

(5) On all scaffolds arranged in tiers, the legs shall be nailed down or otherwise secured to the planks to prevent displacement or thrust, and each tier shall be substantially cross braced.

(6) Defective or damaged horses or parts shall not be used.

Table 10-13. Minimum dimensions for horse scaffold members.

| Members | Dimensions | | --- | --- | | Horizontal members or bearers | 3 x 4 in. (7.6 x 10.2 cm) | | Legs | 1-1/4 x 4-1/2 in. (3.2 x 11.4 cm) | | Longitudinal brace between legs | 1 x 6 in. (2.5 x 15.2 cm) | | Gusset brace at top of legs | 1 x 8 in. (2.5 x 20.3 cm) | | Half diagonal braces | 1-1/4 x 4-1/2 in. (3.2 x 11.4 cm) |

(R) Chimney, stack, or tank bracket scaffolds.

(1) Minimum width.

The minimum width of platform shall be no less than eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters).

(2) Spacer blocks.

Spacer blocks, large enough to hold the suspending cable away from the structure, shall be provided.

(3) Ascending and descending.

For ascending to and descending from a chimney, stack, or tank bracket scaffold, a scaling ladder or boatswain's chair shall be provided.

(4) Platforms on masonry chimneys or stacks.

Platforms supported on the rim of masonry chimneys or stacks are prohibited.

(5) Inside scaffolds.

In construction of chimneys or stacks where an inside scaffold is being used, the working platform shall be no less than eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) below the top of the wall.

(6) Guardrails.

Chimney, stack, or tank bracket scaffolds shall be provided with standard guardrails, but no guardrail is required when safety harnesses with lifelines are provided.

(S) Needle beam scaffolds.

(1) Wood needle beams shall be no less than four inches (10.2 centimeters) by six inches (15.2 centimeters) in size, with the greater dimensions placed in a vertical direction. Metal beams or the equivalent, conforming to paragraph (C)(2) of this rule, may be used and shall not be altered or moved horizontally while they are in use.

(2) Ropes or hangers shall be provided for supports. The span between supports on the needle beam shall not exceed ten feet (three meters) for four-inch (10.2 centimeters) by six-inch (15.2 centimeters) timbers. Rope supports shall be equivalent in strength to one inch (thirteen millimeters) diameter "First Grade" manila rope.

(3) The scaffold shall be rigged so as to prevent the needle beam from rolling or becoming otherwise displaced.

(4) The platform span between the needle beams shall not exceed eight feet (2.4 meters) when using two-inch (5.1 centimeters) "Scaffold Grade" planks. For spans greater than eight feet (2.4 meters), platforms shall be constructed based on design requirements for the special span. The overhang of each end of the platform planks shall be no less than six inches (15.2 centimeters) and no more than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters). Planks shall be secured against displacement.

(5) All unattached tools, bolts, and nuts used on needle beam scaffolds shall be kept in suitable containers, properly secured.

(6) One end of a needle beam scaffold may be supported by a permanent structural member conforming to paragraph (C)(2) of this rule.

(7) Each employee working on a needle beam scaffold shall be protected by a safety harness and lifeline in accordance with paragraph (J) of rule 4123:1-3-03 of the Administrative Code.

(T) Interior hung scaffolds.

(1) An interior hung scaffold shall be hung or suspended from a structure capable of providing a factor of safety of no less than four.

(2) The suspending wire or fiber rope shall be capable of supporting no less than six times the maximum rated load.

(3) The scaffold shall be designed to sustain a working load with a factor of safety of no less than four.

(4) For wood scaffolds, the following minimum "Scaffold Grade" material shall be used:

(a) Supporting bearers, two inches (5.1 centimeters) by ten inches (25.4 centimeters) on edge;

(b) Planking, two inches (5.1 centimeters) by ten inches (25.4 centimeters), with maximum span of seven feet (2.1 meters) for heavy duty and ten feet (three meters) for light duty or medium duty.

(5) Steel tube and coupler members may be used for such type scaffolds.

(U) Ladder jack scaffolds.

(1) All ladder jack scaffolds shall be limited to light duty and shall not exceed a height of twenty feet (6.1 meters) above the floor or ground.

(2) All ladders used in connection with ladder jack scaffolds shall be heavy duty ladders. Cleated ladders shall not be used for this purpose.

(3) The ladder jack shall be so designed and constructed that the ladder jack will bear on the side rails in addition to the ladder rungs, or if bearing on rungs only, the bearing area shall be no less than ten inches (25.4 centimeters) on each rung.

(4) Ladders used in conjunction with ladder jacks shall be so placed, fastened, held, or equipped with devices so as to prevent slipping.

(5) The platform shall be "Scaffold Grade," two-inch (5.1 centimeters) by ten-inch (25.4 centimeters) plank, or material of equal strength. Planks shall overlap the bearing surface no less than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters). The span between supports shall not exceed eight feet (2.1 meters). Platform width shall be no less than eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) and provide a factor of safety of no less than four.

(V) Window jack scaffolds.

(1) Window jack scaffolds shall be used only for the purpose of working at the window opening through which the jack is placed.

(2) Window jacks shall not be used to support planks spaced between one window jack and another or for other elements of scaffolding.

(3) Window jack scaffolds shall be provided with standard guardrails unless safety harnesses with lifelines are attached and provided for the employee.

(4) No more than one employee shall be required to occupy a window jack scaffold.

(W) Float or ship scaffolds.

See appendix to this rule for examples of float or ship scaffolds.

(1) No more than three employees shall be required to occupy a float or ship scaffold.

(2) The platform shall be no less than three feet (91.4 centimeters) wide and six feet (1.8 meters) long, made of three-quarter inch (nineteen millimeters) plywood, equal to "American Plywood Association Grade B-B, Group I, Exterior," or other equivalent material.

(3) Under the platform, there shall be two supporting bearers made from two inch (5.1 centimeters) by four inch (10.2 centimeters), or one inch (2.5 centimeters) by ten inch (25.4 centimeters), rough, select lumber or better. Bearers shall be free of knots or other flaws and project six inches (15.2 centimeters) beyond the platform on both sides. The ends of the platform shall extend six inches (15.2centimeters) beyond the outer edges of the bearers. Each bearer shall be securely fastened to the platform.

(4) An edging of wood no less than three-fourths inch (nineteen millimeters) by one and one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) shall be placed around all sides of the platform to prevent tools from rolling off.

(5) Supporting ropes shall be one inch (thirteen millimeters) diameter manila rope, or equivalent, providing a factor of safety of no less than six. Rope connections shall be such that the platform cannot shift or slip. Two ropes shall be used with each float, arranged so as to provide four ends which are to be securely fastened to an overhead support. Each of the two supporting ropes shall be securely fastened around one end of the bearer and pass under the platform to the other end of the bearer where it shall be securely fastened again, leaving sufficient rope at each end for the supporting ties.

(X) Form scaffolds.

See appendix to this rule for examples of various types of form scaffolds covered under this rule.

(1) General requirements for all form scaffolds.

(a) All form scaffolds and their components shall be capable of supporting without failure no less than four times the maximum rated load.

(b) Maximum permissible spans shall not exceed eight feet (2.4 meters) on centers for two inch (5.1 centimeters) by ten inch (25.4 centimeters) "Scaffold Grade" planking. Scaffold planks shall be securely fastened to the ledgers or of such length that they overlap the ledgers no less than six inches (15.2 centimeters). Unsupported projecting ends of scaffolding planks of all form scaffolds shall be limited to a maximum overhang of twelve inches (30.5 centimeters).

(2) Figure-four form scaffolds.

Figure-four form scaffolds are intended for light duty and shall not be used to support loads exceeding twenty-five pounds per square foot (122.1 kilograms per square meter) unless specifically designed for heavier loading. Frames shall be spaced no more than eight feet (2.4 meters) on centers. (For minimum design criteria, see "Table 10-14."

Table 10-14. Minimum design criteria for figure-four form scaffolds.

| Members | Dimensions | | --- | --- | | Uprights | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm)or 2 x 6 in. 5.1 x 15.2 cm) | | Outrigger ledgers (two) | 1 x 6 in. (2.5 x 15.2 cm) | | Braces | 1 x 6 in. (2.5 x 15.2 cm) | | Guardrails | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | | Guardrail height | Approximately 42 in. (106.7 cm) | | Intermediate guardrails | 1 x 6 in. (2.5 x 15.2 cm) | | Toeboards | 4 in. (10.2 cm) (minimum) | | Maximum length of ledgers | 42 in.(106.7 cm) (unsupported) | | Planking | 2 x 10 in. (2.5 x 25.4 cm) | | Upright spacing | 8 ft. 0 in. (2.4 m) (on centers) |

(3) Metal bracket form scaffolds.

(a) Metal brackets or scaffold jacks which are an integral part of the form shall be securely bolted or welded to the form. Folding type brackets shall be either bolted or secured with a locking type pin when extended for use.

(b) "Clip-on" or "hook-over" brackets may be used, provided the form walers are bolted to the form or secured by snap ties orshea-bolts extending through the form and securely anchored.

(d) Scaffold planks shall be either bolted to the metal brackets or of such length that they overlap the brackets at each end by no less than six inches (15.2 centimeters). Unsupported projecting ends of scaffolding planks shall be limited to a maximum overhang of twelve inches (30.5 centimeters).

(e) Metal bracket form scaffolds shall be equipped with standard guardrails and toeboards, meeting the minimum dimensions shown in "Table 10-15."

Table 10-15. Minimum design criteria for metal bracket form scaffolds.

| Members | Dimensions | | --- | --- | | Uprights | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | | Guardrails | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | | Guardrail height | Approximately 42 in. (106.7 cm) | | Intermediate guardrails | 1 x 6 in. (2.5 x 15.2 cm) | | Toeboards | 4 in. 10.2 cm) (minimum) | | Planking | 2 x 9 in. (5.1 x 22.9 cm) |

(4) Wooden bracket form scaffolds.

Wooden bracket form scaffolds shall be an integral part of the form panel. The minimum design criteria set forth herein and in "Table 10-16" cover scaffolding intended for light duty and shall not be used to support loads exceeding twenty-five pounds per square foot (122.1 kilograms per square meter), unless specifically designed for heavier loading.

Table 10-16. Minimum design criteria for wooden bracket form scaffolds.

| Members | Dimensions | | --- | --- | | Uprights | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) or 2 x 6 in. (5.1 x 15.2 cm) | | Support ledgers | 2 x 6 in. 5.1 x 15.2 cm) | | Maximum scaffold width | (42 in. (106.7 cm) | | Braces | 1 x 6 in. (2.5 x 15.2 cm) | | Guardrails | 2 x 4 in. (5.1 x 10.2 cm) | | Guardrail height | Approximately 42 in. (106.7 cm) | | Intermediate guardrails | 1 x 6 in. (2.5 x 15.2 cm) | | Toeboards | 4 in. (10.2 cm) (minimum) | | Upright spacing | 8 ft. 0 in. (2.4 m) (on centers) |

(Y) Pump jack scaffolds.

(1) Pump jack scaffolds shall:

(a) Not carry a working load exceeding five hundred pounds (226.8 kilograms);

(b) Be capable of supporting no less than four times the maximum rated load; and

(2) Each pump jack bracket shall have two gripping mechanisms to prevent any failure or slippage.

(3) The platform bracket shall be fully decked and the planking secured. Planking, or equivalent, shall conform with paragraph (C)(7) of this rule.

(4) Poles and bracing.

(a) When wood scaffold planks are used as platforms, poles for pump jacks shall be spaced no more than ten feet (three meters) center to center. When fabricated platforms are used that fully comply with all other provisions of this section, pole spacing may exceed ten feet (three meters) center to center.

(b) Poles shall not exceed thirty feet (9.1 meters) in height.

(c) Poles shall be secured to the work surface by rigid triangular bracing, or equivalent, at the bottom, top, and other points as necessary, to provide a maximum vertical spacing of no more than ten feet (three meters) between braces. Each brace shall be capable of supporting a minimum of two hundred twenty-five pounds (102.1 kilograms) tension and compression.

(d) For the pump jack bracket to pass bracing already installed, an extra brace shall be used approximately four feet (1.2 meters) above the one to be passed until the original brace is reinstalled.

(e) All poles shall bear on mud sills or other firm foundations.

(f) Pole lumber shall be two inches (5.1 centimeters) by four inches (10.2 centimeters), of Douglas fir, or equivalent, straight-grained, clear, free of cross-grain, shakes, large knots, and other defects which might impair strength.

(g) When poles are constructed of two continuous lengths, they shall be two-by-fours, spiked together with the seam parallel to the bracket, and with ten-penny common nails, no more than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) center to center, staggered uniformly from opposite outside edges.

(h) If the lumber is spliced to make up the pole, the splices shall be so constructed as to develop the full strength of the member.

(5) A ladder shall be provided for access to the platform during use.

(6) No more than two employees shall be required at any time to be on a pump jack scaffold between any two supports.

(7) Pump jack scaffolds shall be provided with standard guardrails, but no guardrail is required when safety harnesses with lifelines are provided for employees.

(8) When a work bench is used at an approximate height of forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters), the top guardrail may be omitted in the space occupied by the work bench, if the work bench is fully decked, the decking is secure, and is capable of withstanding two hundred pounds (90.7 kilograms) pressure in any direction.

(9) Employees shall not be required to use a work bench as a scaffold platform.

(Z) Stilts.

Stilts shall be equipped with "feet" of skid resistant material. Means shall be provided to securely fasten the stilts to employee's feet and legs. The floor in the work area shall be maintained free of debris and other possible hazards.

View Appendix

Last updated July 13, 2026 at 3:35 PM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-11 Ladders.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Cleat ladder" means a ladder consisting of one section having two side rails and steps formed of cleats attached to the side rails with fillers between the cleats.

(2) "Extension ladder" means a portable ladder, adjustable in length, consisting of two or more sections traveling in guides or brackets so arranged as to permit length adjustment. The size of the ladder is designated by the sum of the lengths of the sections measured along the side rails.

(3) "Extension trestle ladder" means a portable ladder consisting of an "A" or trestle ladder with an additional vertical single ladder, having parallel sides, which adjusts perpendicularly and is provided with a device to lock the ladder into place. The size of the ladder is designated by the length of the trestle ladder base.

(4) "Fixed ladder," as used in this rule, means a ladder is securely fastened in a fixed position, whether to remain as part of the structure or for use during a part or all of the construction period.

(5) "Ladder" means a piece of equipment usually consisting of two side rails joined at regular intervals by cross-pieces called steps, treads, rungs, or cleats, on which an employee may step on ascending or descending.

(6) "Sectional ladder" means a portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of two or more sections so constructed that the sections may be combined to function as a single ladder. The size of the ladder is designated by the over-all length of the assembled sections.

(7) "Single ladder" means a portable, nonadjustable ladder consisting of one section.

(8) "Step ladder" means a self-supporting portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, having flat steps or treads and a hinged back. The size of the ladder is designated by the over-all length of the ladder measured along the front edge of the side.

(9) "Trestle ladder" or "'A' ladder," means a self-supporting portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of two sections hinged at the top and form equal angles with the base. The size of the ladder is designated by the length of the side rail measured along the front edge.

(1) Construction.

All ladders shall be constructed of wood, metal, or other equivalent material and shall be capable of supporting all loads without failure with a factor of safety of no less than four, except that each extra-heavy-duty type 1A metal, plastic, or composite ladder shall sustain at least 3.3 times the maximum intended load.

(a) Side rails.

(i) Side rails shall be parallel or shall vary uniformly in separation along the tapered length of the ladder or shall flare at the base.

(ii) Wood side rails shall be of sound material free from shakes, cross grain, checks, or decay. Knots shall not exceed one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) diameter and shall not be nearer than one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) to the edge of the rail or within three inches (7.6 centimeters) of the rung, step, or tread.

(b) Rungs, steps, cleats, or treads.

All rungs, steps, cleats, or treads shall have a uniform spacing which shall be no less than ten inches (25.4 centimeters) and no more than fourteen inches (35.6 centimeters) on center.

(2) Defective ladders.

Defective ladders shall be repaired to meet original specifications or shall be withdrawn from service. Cleats shall not be used to repair rung ladders.

(D) Portable ladders.

(1) General requirements for all portable ladders.

(a) Metal rungs, steps, or treads.

All metal rungs, steps, or treads shall be corrugated, knurled, dimpled, or coated with skid-resistant material.

(b) Safety shoes, spikes, or spurs.

All portable ladders shall be equipped with safety shoes, metal spikes, or spurs. Safety shoes shall be surfaced with cork, carborundum, rubber, or other material with equivalent coefficient of friction. This provision does not apply to step ladders, lash ladders, or hook ladders.

Ladders designed for use by hooking shall be equipped with two or more substantial metal hooks at the top of the ladder. For chicken or roof ladders, see paragraph (H) of rule 4123:1-3-09 of the Administrative Code.

(d) Ladders shall not be placed in passageways, doorways, driveways, or any locations where they may be displaced by activities being conducted on any other work, unless protected by barricades or guards.

(e) Portable metal ladders shall not be used for electrical work or where they may contact electrical conductors.

(2) Extension ladders.

Extension ladders shall be equipped with two automatic locks of malleable iron, cast aluminum, or equivalent material attached to the side rails of the upper extension and of such construction as to make the extension ladder equal in strength to a ladder constructed of continuous side rails.

(3) Step ladders.

A substantial spreader shall be provided on step ladders to hold the ladder in the open position.

(4) Sectional ladders.

(a) Sectional ladders shall not exceed thirty-seven feet (11.3 meters) in extended length.

(b) The distance between rungs shall be twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) on center.

(c) Adjacent sections shall be joined by means of groove in the ends of each rail of each section so that the two sections of the ladder enjoined are set together firmly, the grooves of the rails of one section gripping the rung inside or adjacent extensions of the rung outside of the adjoining section. The fit between rail grooves and rungs shall provide a good fit without binding or unnecessary play.

(d) The grooved ends of the sections shall be reinforced with a steel plate no less than eighteen-gauge steel, manufacturing standard, properly secured thereto with a rivet adjacent to the groove, extending through the depth of the rail, or equivalent reinforcement.

(5) Trestle and extension trestle ladders.

(a) The width between the side rails at the base of the trestle ladder and base sections of the extension trestle ladder shall be no less than twenty-one inches (53.3 centimeters) for all ladders and sections up to and including six feet (1.8 meters). Longer lengths shall be increased no less than one inch (2.5 centimeters) for each additional foot of length. The width between the side rails of the extension sections of the trestle ladder shall be no less than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters).

(b) The tops of the side rails of the trestle ladder and of the base section of the extension trestle ladder shall be beveled, or of equivalent construction, and shall be provided further with a metal hinge to prevent spreading.

(c) A metal spreader or locking device to hold the front and back sections in an open position, and to hold the extension section securely in the elevated position, shall be a component of all extension trestle ladders and all trestle ladders over twelve feet (3.7 meters) in length.

(d) Where a single rung support holds an entire rung of the upper extension and the support is attached to both side rails of the lower section, two automatic locks shall not be required.

(e) Rungs shall be parallel and level. On the trestle ladder, or on the base sections of the extension trestle ladder, rungs shall be spaced no less than eight inches (20.3 centimeters) or more than eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) apart; on the extension section of the extension trestle ladder, rungs shall be spaced no less than six inches (15.2 centimeters) or more than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) apart.

(f) Trestle ladders or extension sections or base sections of extension trestle ladders shall be no more than twenty feet (6.1 meters) in length.

(g) The minimum distance between side rails of the trestle or extension sections or base sections at the narrowest point shall be no less than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters). The width spread shall be no less than one inch (2.5 centimeters) per foot (30.5 centimeters) of length of side rail.

(E) Fixed ladders that can not be readily moved or carried because it is an integral part of a building or structure.

(1) Maintained in place.

Fixed ladders shall be provided and maintained in place until temporary or permanent stairways are ready for use.

(2) Fixed ladders exceeding fifty feet (15.2 meters) in length.

Ladder landings, or rest platforms, shall be installed on fixed ladders each fifty feet (15.2 meters) or major fraction thereof in length. This provision shall not apply to water towers, masts, smokestacks, or material hoists.

(3) Fixed ladder landings.

All fixed ladder landings shall be equipped with standard guard railing, intermediate rail, and toeboards. The platform of such landings shall be no less than twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters) in width.

(4) Extension of side rail above landing.

At least one side rail of fixed ladders to landings shall extend a distance of no less than thirty-six inches (91.4 centimeters) above the landing. The rungs may be omitted above the landing. Where an employee must step a greater distance than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) from the ladder to the roof or structure, a landing shall be provided.

(5) Vertical distance between landing and top rung.

The vertical distance between the platform of the landing and the top rungs of the fixed ladder shall not exceed the rung spacing of the fixed ladder.

(F) Ladders constructed on the job.

Ladders constructed on the job shall comply with the provisions of paragraphs (C)(1) of this rule and the following table. (See the appendix to this rule for examples of ladders constructed on the job.)

Single section cleat construction ladders.

| | Min. Inside Width,inches (centimeters) | Max. InsideWidth, inches (centimeters) | NominalCross Section of Rails, inches (centimeters) | Nominal Cross Section of Cleats, inches(centimeters) | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Up to 16feet 4.9 meters | 20"(50.8) | 24" (61) | 2" 4" (5.1 x 10.1) | 1" 3" (2.5 x7.6) | | More than 16 feet(4.9 meters) and up to 24 feet (7.3 meters) | 20" (50.8) | 24" (61) | 2"6" (5.1 x 15.2) | 1"4" (2.5 x 10.2) |

View Appendix

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:54 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-12 Portable explosive-actuated fastening tools.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Portable explosive-actuated fastening tool " means a powder-actuated tool which depends upon an explosive charge to propel or discharge a stud, pin, or fastener for the purpose of impinging it upon, affixing it to, or penetrating another object or material.

(a) "High velocity tool" means a tool or machine which, when used with a load, propels or discharges a stud, pin, or fastener, at velocities in excess of three hundred feet (91.4 meters) per second when measured six and one-half feet (two meters) from the muzzle end of the barrel, for the purpose of impinging it upon, affixing it to, or penetrating another object or material.

(b) "Low velocity tool" means a tool or machine which by means of a powder-load, actuates a piston, which, in turn, propels or discharges a stud, pin, or fastener, at velocities not in excess of three hundred feet (91.4 meters) per second when measured six and one-half feet (two meters) from the muzzle end of the barrel, for the purpose of impinging it upon, affixing it to, or penetrating another object or material.

(2) "Protective shield or guard" means a device or guard attached to the muzzle end of the tool which is designed to confine flying particles.

(3) "Stud, pin, or fastener" means a fastening device specifically designed and manufactured for use in portable explosive-actuated fastening tools.

(4) "Tool" means a portable explosive-actuated fastening tool, unless otherwise indicated, and shall include all accessories pertaining thereto.

Tools of this type shall have the following characteristics:

(1) The muzzle end of the tool shall have a protective shield or guard no less than three and one-half inches (8.9 centimeters) in diameter, mounted perpendicular to and concentric with the barrel, and designed to confine any flying fragments or particles that might otherwise create a hazard at the time of firing.

(2) Where a standard protective shield or guard cannot be used, or where the standard protective shield or guard does not cover all apparent avenues through which flying particles might escape, a special shield, guard, fixture, or jig designed and built by the manufacturer of the tool being used, which provides this degree of protection, shall be used as a substitute.

(3) The tool shall be so designed that the tool cannot be fired unless the tool is equipped with a standard protective shield or guard, or a special shield, guard, fixture, or jig.

(4) Firing the tool.

(a) The firing mechanism shall be so designed that the tool cannot fire during loading or preparation to fire, or if the tool should be dropped while loaded.

(b) Firing of the tool shall be dependent upon no less than two separate and distinct operations of the operator, with the final firing movement separate from the operation of bringing the tool into the firing position.

(5) The tool shall be so designed as not to be operable other than against a work surface, with the operator holding the tool against the work surface with a force no less than five pounds (2.3 kilograms) greater than the total weight of the tool.

(6) The tool shall be so designed that the tool will not operate when equipped with the standard protective shield or guard indexed to the center position if any bearing surface of the standard protective shield or guard is tilted more than eight degrees from contact with the work surface.

(7) The tool shall be so designed that positive means of varying the power are available or can be made available to the operator as part of the tool, or as an auxiliary, to allow the operator to select a power level adequate to perform the desired work without excessive force.

(8) The tool shall be so designed that all breeching parts will be reasonably visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be present.

(D) Low velocity piston type tools.

Low velocity piston type tools shall have the following characteristics:

(1) The muzzle end of the tool shall be designed so that suitable protective shields, guards, jigs, or fixtures, designed and built by the manufacturer of the tool, can be mounted perpendicular to the barrel. A standard spall shield, when supplied, shall be utilized with each tool.

(2) Firing the tool.

(a) The tool shall be designed so that the tool cannot fire during loading or during preparation to fire, or if the tool should be dropped while loaded.

(3) The tool shall be so designed as not to be operable other than against a work surface, with the operator holding the tool against the work surface with a force no less than five pounds (2.3 kilograms) greater than the total weight of the tool.

(4) The tool shall be so designed that positive means of varying the power are available or can be made available to the operator as part of the tool, or as an auxiliary, to allow the operator to select a power level adequate to perform the desired work without excessive force.

(5) The tool shall be so designed that all breeching parts will be reasonably visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be present.

(E) Minimum instructions for qualifying operators.

Instructions to operators in order to teach them the use of portable explosive-actuated fastening tools shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following items:

(1) Only employees who have been trained in the operation of that particular tool in use shall be allowed to operate a powder-actuated tool.

(2) The tool shall be tested each day before loading to see that safety devices are in proper working condition. The method of testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure.

(3) Before using a tool, the operator shall inspect the tool to determine that the tool is clean, that all moving parts operate freely, and that the barrel is free from obstructions.

(4) When a tool develops a defect during use, the operator shall immediately cease to use the tool until the tool is properly repaired.

(5) Tools shall not be loaded until just prior to the intended firing time. Neither loaded nor empty tools are to be pointed at any person, and hands shall be kept clear of the open barrel end.

(6) No tools shall be loaded unless being prepared for immediate use, nor shall an unattended tool be left loaded.

(7) In case of a misfire, the operator shall hold the tool in the operating position for no less than thirty seconds, and then try to operate the tool a second time. The operator shall wait another thirty seconds, holding the tool in the operating position and only then shall proceed to remove the explosive load which shall be done in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Misfired cartridges shall be placed carefully in a metal container filled with water and returned to the supervisor for disposal.

(8) A tool shall never be left unattended in a place where the tool would be available to unauthorized persons.

(9) Studs, pins, and fasteners shall not be driven into very hard or brittle materials, including but not limited to cast iron, glazed tile, surface-hardened steel, glass block, living rock, face brick, or hollow tile.

(10) Driving into materials easily penetrated shall be avoided unless such materials are backed by a substance that will prevent the stud, pin, or fastener from passing completely through and creating a flying missile hazard on the other side.

(11) Driving distance from edge.

(a) For high velocity tools, studs, pins, and fastners shall not be driven directly into materials such as brick or concrete closer than three inches (7.6 centimeters) from the unsupported edge or corner, or into steel surfaces closer than one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) from the unsupported edge or corner, unless a special guard, fixture, or jig is used.

(b) For low velocity tools, studs, pins, and fasteners cannot be driven closer than two inches (5.1 centimeters) from an edge in concrete or one-fourth inch (six millimeters) in steel.

(c) When fastening other materials, such as a two inch (5.1 centimeters) by four inch (10.2 centimeters) wood section to a concrete surface, a stud, pin, or fastener of no greater than seven-thirty-seconds inch (5.6 millimeters) shank diameter, may be driven, provided the stud, pin, or fastener is driven no closer than two inches (5.1 centimeters) from the unsupported edge or corner of the work surface.

(12) Studs, pins, and fasteners shall not be driven through existing holes unless a positive guide is used to secure accurate alignment.

(13) No stud, pin, or fastener shall be driven into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory fastening.

(14) Tools shall not be used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere.

(15) All tools shall be used with the correct protective shield, guard, or attachment recommended by the manufacturer.

(16) Any tool found not in proper working order shall be immediately removed from service. The tool shall be inspected each day before loading and shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.

(F) Strength of charge identification.

All explosive charges, i.e., cartridges and shells, to be used in portable explosive-actuated fastening tools shall be marked by color, in accordance with "Table 12-1 Identification of cased loads," to designate the strength of the charge.

Table 12.1 Identification of cased loads.

| | Color Identification | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Power Level | Case Color | Load Color | Nominal Velocity = 45 feetper second (13.7 meters per second) | | 1 | Brass | Gray | 300 (91.4) | | 2 | Brass | Brown | 390 (118.9) | | 3 | Brass | Green | 480 (146.3) | | 4 | Brass | Yellow | 570(173.7) | | 5 | Brass | Red | 660 (201.2) | | 6 | Brass | Purple | 750(228.6) | | 7 | Nickel | Gray | 840 (256) | | 8 | Nickel | Brown | 930(283.5) | | 9 | Nickel | Green | 1020 (310.9) | | 10 | Nickel | Yellow | 1110 (338.3) | | 11 | Nickel | Red | 1200 (365.8) | | 12 | Nickel | Purple | 1290(393.2) |

The nominal velocity applies to 3/8-inch (9.5 millimeters) diameter 350-grain (22.7 grams) ballistic slug fired in a test device and has no reference to actual fastener velocity developed in any specific size or type of tool.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:54 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-13 Trenches and excavations.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Accepted engineering requirements " means those requirements or practices which are compatible with standards required by a registered architect, a registered professional engineer, or other duly licensed or recognized authority.

(2) "Angle of repose" means the greatest angle above the horizontal plane at which material will lie without sliding.

(3) "Braces" means the horizontal members of the shoring system with ends bearing against the uprights or stringers.

(4) "Excavation" means any manmade cavity or depression in the earth's surface, including the manmade cavity's sides, walls, or faces, formed by earth removal and producing unsupported earth conditions by reasons of the excavation. If installed forms or similar structures reduce the depth-to-width relationship, an excavation may become a trench.

(5) "Hard compact soil" means all earth materials not classified as unstable.

(6) "Kickouts" means accidental release or failure of a shore or brace.

(7) "Shaft" means an excavation made from the surface of the ground the longer axis of which forms an angle with the vertical of no more than forty-five degrees.

(8) "Sheet piling" means the act of making a pile, or sheeting, that may form one of a continuous interlocking line, or a row of timber, concrete, or steel piles, driven in close contact to provide a tight wall to resist the lateral pressure of water, adjacent earth, or other materials.

(9) "Sides", "walls," or "faces" means the vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a result of trenching or excavation work.

(10) "Stringers" or "wales" means the horizontal members of a shoring system with sides bearing against the uprights or earth.

(11) "Trench," when used as a noun, means a narrow excavation made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench at the bottom is no greater than fifteen feet (4.6 meters).

(12) "Trench boxes," "safety cages," or "trench shields" means a shoring system capable of supporting the walls of a trench from the ground level to the trench bottom and which can be moved along as work progresses.

(13) "Trench jack" means screw or hydraulic type jacks used as cross bracing in a trench shoring system.

(14) "Unstable soil" means earth material that, because of its nature or the influence of related conditions, cannot be depended upon to remain in place without extra support, such as would be furnished by a system of shoring.

(15) "Uprights" means the vertical members of a shoring system.

(1) Utility companies and municipally owned utilities shall be contacted and advised of proposed work prior to the start of actual excavation. Prior to opening an excavation, effort shall be made to determine whether any underground installations, including sewer, telephone, water, fuel, and electric lines, will be encountered and, if so, where such underground installations are located.

(2) Additional precautions by way of shoring and bracing shall be taken to prevent slides or cave-ins where trenches or excavations are made in locations adjacent to backfilled trenches or excavations, or where trenches or excavations are subjected to vibrations from railroad or highway traffic, the operation of machinery, or any other source.

(3) Undercutting of the exposed faces of trenches or excavations is prohibited, unless the exposed faces of such undercutting are supported by one or more of the methods prescribed for the support of exposed faces of trenches.

(4) Material placement.

(a) Excavated material or other material shall be placed a minimum of twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters) from the top edge of the trench or excavation.

(b) As an alternative to the clearance prescribed in paragraph (C)(4)(a) of this rule, the employer may use effective barriers or other effective retaining devices in lieu thereof in order to prevent excavated or other materials from falling into the trench or excavation.

(5) Wells, pits, and shafts.

(a) All wells, pits, and shafts shall be barricaded or covered.

(b) Upon completion of exploration and similar operations, temporary wells, pits, and shafts shall be backfilled.

(D) Trenches.

(1) The exposed faces of all trenches more than five feet (1.5 meters) high shall be shored, laid back to a stable slope, or some other equivalent means of protection shall be provided where employees may be exposed to moving ground or cave-ins. See "Table 13-1" of the appendix to this rule.

(2) Sides of trenches in unstable or soft material, five feet (1.5 meters) or more in depth, shall be shored, sheeted, braced, sloped, or otherwise supported by means of sufficient strength to protect the employees working within them. See "Table 13-1" and "Table 13-2" of the appendix to this rule.

(3) Sides of trenches in hard compact soil, including embankments, shall be shored, or otherwise supported, when the trench is more than five feet (1.5 meters) in depth and eight feet (2.4 meters) or more in length. In lieu of shoring, the sides of the trench above the five-foot (1.5 meters) level may be sloped to preclude collapse but shall not be steeper than a one-foot (30.5 centimeters) rise to each one-half-foot (15.2 centimeters) horizontal.

(4) Materials used for sheeting, sheet piling, bracing, shoring, and underpinning shall be in good serviceable condition, and timbers used shall be sound, free from large or loose knots, and designed and installed so as to be effective to the bottom of the trench.

(5) Minimum requirements, trench shoring.

(a) Minimum requirements for trench bracing and shoring shall be in accordance with "Table 13-2" of the appendix to this rule

(b) Braces and diagonal shores in a wood shoring system shall not be subjected to compressive stress in excess of value given by the following formula:

S = 1300 - (20 x L/D)

Maximum ratio L/D = 50

Where: L = Length, unsupported, in inches

D = Least side of the timber in inches

S = Allowable stress in pounds per square inch of cross-section.

(6) When employees are required to be in trenches four feet (1.2 meters) deep or more, an adequate means of exit, such as a ladder or steps, shall be provided and located so as to require no more than twenty-five feet (7.6 meters) of lateral travel.

(7) When bracing or shoring of trenches is required, the bracing and shoring shall be carried along with the excavation.

(8) Cross braces or trench jacks shall be placed in true horizontal position, spaced vertically, and secured to prevent sliding, falling, or kickouts.

(9) Portable trench boxes, safety cages, or sliding trench shields may be used for the protection of employees in lieu of shoring system or sloping. Where used, the trench boxes, safety cages, or sliding trench shields shall be designed, constructed, and maintained in a manner which will provide protection equal to or greater than the sheeting or shoring required for the trench. When a trench box is used in combination with other protective systems, such as sloping or benching, the trench box must extend at least eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) above the vertical face to prevent dirt, rocks, and other debris from rolling into the trench. If the top of the trench box is at ground level, the trench box does not need to extend above grade.

(10) Backfilling and removal of trench supports shall progress together from the bottom of the trench. Jacks or braces shall be released slowly, and in unstable soil, ropes shall be used to pull out the jacks or braces from above after employees have cleared the trench.

(E) Excavations.

(1) The walls and faces of all excavations in which employees are exposed to danger from moving ground shall be guarded by a shoring system, sloping of the ground, or some other equivalent means. See "Table 13-1" and "Table 13-2" of the appendix to this rule.

(2) Supporting systems, i.e., piling, cribbing, or shoring, shall be designed by a qualified person and shall meet accepted engineering requirements.

(3) Excavations sloped to the angle of repose shall be flattened when an excavation has water conditions, silty materials, loose boulders, and areas where erosion, deep frost action, and slide planes appear.

(4) Sides, slopes, and faces of all excavations shall meet accepted engineering requirements by scaling, benching, barricading, rock bolting, wire meshing, or other equally effective means.

(5) Materials used for sheeting, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, and underpinning shall be in good serviceable condition, and timbers shall be sound, free from large or loose knots, and of proper dimensions, in accordance with "Table 13-2" of the appendix to this rule.

(6) Excavations below the level of the base of the footing of any foundation or retaining wall is prohibited, except in hard rock, unless the wall is underpinned, and appropriate precautions taken, to ensure the stability of adjacent walls.

(7) If deemed necessary to place or operate power shovels, derricks, trucks, materials, or other heavy objects on a level above and near an excavation, the side of the excavation shall be sheet-piled, shored, braced, or sloped as necessary to resist the extra pressure due to such superimposed loads.

(8) When mobile equipment is utilized or allowed adjacent to excavations, substantial stop logs or barricades shall be installed. If possible, the grade should be away from the excavation.

(9) Walkways shall be provided where employees or equipment are required to cross over excavations, and standard guardrails shall be provided where the walkways are six feet (1.8 meters) or more above lower levels.

View Appendix

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:54 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-14 Electrical conductors, wires and equipment.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Circuit" means a conductor or system of conductors through which an electric current is intended to flow.

(2) "Conductor" means a metallic material, usually in the form of a wire or cable, suitable for carrying an electric current. Conductor does not include bus bars.

(3) "Current-carrying" means a conducting part intended to be connected in an electric circuit to a source of voltage. Noncurrent-carrying parts are those not intended to be connected.

(4) "De-energized" means being free from any electrical connection to a source of a potential different from that of the earth.

(5) "Energized" means anything connected to an electrical source having a greater potential than that of the earth.

(6) "Ground connection" means the equipment used in establishing a path between an electric circuit or equipment and earth. A ground connection consists of a ground conductor, a ground electrode, and the earth which surrounds the electrode.

(7) "Grounded" means connected to earth or to some extended conducting body which serves instead of the earth, whether the connection is intentional or accidental.

(8) "Grounded effectively" means permanently connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance, and having sufficient current-carrying capacity, to prevent the building up of voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to employees.

(9) "Insulated" means separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric substance or air space permanently offering a high resistance to the passage of current and to disruptive discharge through the substance or space. When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be insulated in a suitable manner for the conditions to which it is subjected; otherwise, the object is, within the purpose of this rule, uninsulated.

(10) "Insulating," where applied to the covering of a conductor or to clothing, guards, rods, and other safety devices, means that a device, when interposed between an employee and current-carrying parts, protects the employee making use of the device against electric shock from the current-carrying parts with which the device is intended to be used; insulating is the opposite of conducting.

(11) "Phase" means one energized conductor of an electrical system.

(12) "Switch" means a device for opening and closing, or for changing the connection of, a circuit. In this rule, a switch will always be understood to be manually operated, unless otherwise stated.

(13) "Voltage, " as applied to a circuit, means the greatest effective root-mean-square difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit concerned. On various systems, such as three-phase four-wire, single-phase three-wire and three-wire, direct current, there may be various circuits of various voltages.

(14) "Voltage" or "volts" means the highest effect electrical potential between any two conductors of the circuit concerned.

(1) All temporary wiring shall be installed with approved overload protection and maintained in accordance with the following:

(a) Main feed and secondary conductors shall be no less than eight feet (2.4 meters) above the floor or ground level unless in rigid or other conduit, such as nonmetallic sheathed cable, or metallic sheathed cable which provides equivalent protection and support. Extension cords shall not be considered as secondary conductors. No branch circuits or feeder conductors shall be laid on the floor except properly maintained extension cords feeding portable powered tools.

(b) All receptacles shall be grounded effectively.

(c) All lamps for general illumination shall be protected from accidental contact or breakage. Protection shall be provided by elevation of no less than seven feet (2.1 meters) from working surface or by a suitable fixture or lampholder with a guard.

(d) All temporary circuits shall be grounded effectively.

(2) Bare conductors and earth returns.

No bare conductors nor earth returns shall be used for the wiring of any temporary circuit.

(3) Disconnecting means.

Approved disconnecting switches or plug connectors shall be installed to permit the disconnection of all ungrounded conductors of each temporary circuit.

(4) Construction sites.

All one-hundred-twenty-volt single-phase fifteen and twenty ampere receptacle outlets which are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure shall have ground fault circuit interrupters or the implementation of an assured equipment grounding program on construction sites.

(5) All energized equipment exposed to contact shall be guarded.

(6) Portable lights in damp locations shall not exceed twelve volts, except that one hundred twenty volt lights may be used if protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter.

(D) Extension cords.

(1) Extension cords used with portable electric tools and appliances shall be of three-wire type.

(2) Three-wire type extension cords to lights or electrically powered tools or devices shall be equipped with a three-wire grounding type receptacle and attachment plug of nonconductive material. Splicing shall be done by vulcanized or plastic molded splice method. Insulation shall be equal to the cable being spliced, and wire connections shall be soldered.

(3) Where different voltages, frequencies, or type of current, i.e., alternating or direct, are to be supplied by portable cords, receptacles shall be of such design that attachment plugs used on such circuits are not interchangeable.

(E) Lockout and tagging of de-energized equipment or circuits.

The employer shall instruct employees to lock out all de-energized equipment or circuits and attach tags at all points where the de-energized equipment or circuits can be energized.

(F) Circuits in excess of two hundred fifty volts.

(1) The employer shall instruct employees to de-energize and effectively ground circuits in excess of two hundred fifty volts before working on the circuits unless personal protective equipment is provided in accordance with paragraph (H)(3) of rule 4121:1-3-03 of the Administrative Code.

(2) All circuits shall be worked as energized unless grounded effectively.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:55 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-15 Explosives and blasting.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Approved storage facility" means a facility for the storage of explosive materials covered by a license or permit issued under authority of the appropriate federal agency.

(2) "Blast area" means the area in which explosives loading and blasting operations are being conducted.

(3) "Blaster" means the person having a comprehensive knowledge of the installation and use of appliances associated with the type of blasting operations being performed, designated by the employer to perform and direct the functions of placing and fixing explosives, firing explosives, approaching misfires of explosives, thawing explosives, and all other duties in connection with the blasting operation.

(4) "Blasting agent" means any material or mixture consisting of a fuel and an oxidizer used for blasting, but not classified an explosive, and in which none of the ingredients is classified as an explosive provided the furnished mixed product cannot be detonated with a number 8 test blasting cap.

(5) "Blasting cap" means a metallic tube closed at one end, containing a charge of one or more detonating compounds, and designed for, and capable of, detonation from the sparks or flame from a safety fuse inserted and crimped into the open end.

(6) "Bus wire" means an insulated expendable wire used between connecting wires and leading wires.

(7) "Connecting wire" means an insulated expendable wire used between electric blasting caps and the bus wires or leading wires.

(8) "Detonating cord" means a flexible cord containing a center core of high explosives which, when detonated, will have sufficient strength to detonate other cap-sensitive explosives with which the detonating cord is in contact.

(9) "Detonator" means igniters, blasting caps, electric blasting caps, or similar devices used to explode explosives.

(10) "Explosive" means any chemical compound or mixture that is intended for the purpose of producing an explosion. An explosive contains any oxidizing and combustible units, or other ingredients in such proportions, quantities, or packing that an ignition by fire, by friction, by concussion, by percussion, or by a detonator, of any part of the compound mixture may cause such a sudden generation of highly heated gases that the resultant gaseous pressures are capable of producing destructive effects on contiguous objects, or of destroying life or limb.

(11) "Fuse lighters" means special devices for the purpose of igniting safety fuse.

(12) "Leading wire" means an insulated wire used between the electric power source and the electric blasting cap circuit.

(13) "Magazine" means any building or other structure used for the storage of explosives.

(14) "Primed cartridge" means a cartridge of explosives to which a detonator has been attached as a means of firing and intended to be placed in the bore hole or other explosive chamber for the purpose of exploding the remainder of the charge.

(15) "Safety fuse" means the slow burning commercially used blasting fuse, usually consisting of a core of powder overspun with yarns and tapes, which may be treated with a waterproofing compound, and intended to convey fire to the blasting caps or explosive mass while minimizing the danger to the employee lighting it.

(1) The employer shall designate one employee qualified as a blaster in charge of blasting at each location where blasting operations are being performed.

(2) The use of black powder is prohibited.

(3) No explosives or blasting agents shall be abandoned.

(4) Smoking, firearms, matches, open flame lamps, and other fire, flame, heat, or spark-producing devices are prohibited in or near explosive magazines or while explosives are being handled, transported, or used.

(5) When blasting is done employees shall be removed from the area, or the blast shall be covered, before firing, with a mat or mats so constructed as to control the throw of fragments.

(6) The blaster shall be responsible for using every reasonable precaution, such as visual and audible warning signals, flags, and barricades, to ensure employee safety.

(7) Blasting operations in the proximity of overhead power lines, communication lines, utility services, other services, or structures shall not be carried on until the operators or owners have been notified, and measures have been taken to ensure the safety of the employer's employees.

(8) Due precautions shall be taken to prevent accidental discharge of electric blasting caps by current induced by radar, radio transmitters, lightning, adjacent power lines, dust storms, or other sources of extraneous electricity. These precautions shall include:

(a) The suspension of all blasting operations and removal of employees from the blasting area during the approach and progress of an electrical storm.

(b) The posting of signs warning against the use of mobile radio transmitters on all roads within one thousand feet (304.8 meters) of the blasting operations.

(9) Empty boxes, paper, and fiber packing materials which have previously contained high explosives shall not be used again for any purpose but shall be destroyed by burning at a location approved by the blaster, and no employee shall be permitted closer than one hundred feet (30.5 meters) after the burning has started.

(10) Containers of explosive materials shall not be opened within fifty feet (15.2 meters) of any magazine. In opening cases, non sparking tools shall be used, except that metal slitters may be used for opening fiberboard boxes.

(11) Explosive materials that are obviously deteriorated or damaged shall not be used and shall be destroyed by, or under the direction of, the blaster.

(12) Flagmen posted on highways to stop traffic during blasting operations shall be stationed far enough away from the blasting for their own safety.

(D) Transportation of explosives.

(1) Surface transportation of explosives.

Any vehicle used to transport explosives on the job site shall have a non sparking floor and side members and shall contain a suitable fire extinguisher. Explosives and blasting caps shall not be transported in the same vehicle.

(2) Underground transportation of explosives.

(a) No employee shall ride in any shaft conveyance transporting explosives and blasting agents.

(b) Detonators and other explosives shall not be transported at the same time in any shaft conveyance.

(c) Explosives or blasting agents, not in original containers, shall be placed in a suitable container when transported manually.

(d) Detonators, primers, and other explosives shall be carried in separate containers when transported manually.

(e) When detonators or explosives are brought into an air lock, no employee except the blaster, lock tender, and the employees necessary for carrying, shall be permitted to enter the air lock. No other material, supplies, or equipment shall be locked through with the explosives.

(f) Detonators and explosives shall be taken separately into pressure working chambers.

(g) The blaster shall be responsible for the receipt, unloading, storage, and on-site transportation of explosives and detonators.

(E) Storage of explosives and blasting agents.

(1) Blasting caps, electric blasting caps, or other detonating devices shall not be stored in the same magazine with other explosives or blasting agents.

(2) Primed cartridges shall not be stored.

(3) All explosives stored on the job site shall be stored in approved storage facilities. All brush and combustible materials shall be kept clear of the magazine to a distance of twenty-five feet 7.6 meters).

(4) Detonators and explosives shall not be stored or kept in tunnels, shafts, or caissons. Detonators and explosives for each round shall be taken directly from the magazines to the blasting zone and immediately loaded. Detonators and explosives left over after loading a round shall be removed from the working chamber before the connecting wires are connected.

(F) Loading of explosives or blasting agents.

(1) All drill holes shall be sufficiently large to admit freely the insertion of the packages of explosive materials.

(2) Tamping shall be done only with non sparking tools without exposed metal parts, except that non sparking metal connectors may be used for jointed poles. Violent tamping is prohibited. Primed cartridges shall not be tamped.

(3) No holes shall be loaded except those to be fired in the next round of blasting. After loading, all remaining explosives shall be immediately returned to the magazine or removed from the area to a distance of no less than one hundred feet (30.5 meters).

(4) Drilling shall not be started until all remaining butts of old holes are examined for unexploded charges, and if any are found, the unexploded cartridges shall be disposed of before work proceeds.

(5) No person shall be allowed to deepen drill holes which have contained explosives or blasting agents.

(6) No loaded holes shall be left unattended or unprotected.

(7) The explosives used in wet holes or holes, that may become wet, shall be water-resistant.

(G) Initiation of explosive charges.

(1) General.

(a) When a safety fuse is used, the blasting cap shall be securely attached to the safety fuse with a standard ring type cap crimper. All primers shall be assembled no less than fifty feet (15.2 meters) from any magazine.

(b) Primers for use in blasting shall be made up only as required for each round of blasting.

(c) No blasting cap shall be inserted in the explosive materials without first making a hole in the cartridge for the cap with a non sparking punch.

(d) If there are any misfires while using cap and fuse, all employees shall be required to remain away from the charge for at least an hour. If electric blasting caps are used and a misfire occurs, this waiting period may be reduced to thirty minutes.

(2) Electric blasting caps.

(a) Bus wires, connecting wires, and lead wires shall be insulated single solid wires of sufficient current-carrying capacity.

(b) Blasters, when testing circuits to charged holes, shall use only blasting galvanometers or other instruments that are specifically designed for the purpose.

(c) Only the employee making the final check on the wire connections shall fire the shot. All connections shall be made from bore hole back to the source of firing current, and the leading wires shall remain shorted, and not connected to the blasting machine or other source of current, until the charge is to be fired.

(d) In any single blast using electric blasting caps, all caps shall be of the same style, function, manufacture.

(e) Electric blasting shall be carried out by using blasting circuits or power circuits in accordance with the electric blasting cap manufacturer's recommendations or the recommendations of an approved contractor or their designated representative.

(f) When firing a circuit of electric blasting caps, every reasonable precaution shall be exercised to ensure that an adequate quantity of delivered current is available, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

(3) Use of safety fuse.

(a) No one shall be permitted to carry detonators or primers of any kind on the person.

(b) The minimum length of safety fuse to be used in blasting shall be as required by applicable state law but shall be no less than thirty inches (76.2 centimeters).

(d) No more than twelve fuses may be lighted by any individual when hand lighting devices are used, provided that when two or more safety fuses in a group are lighted as one by means of igniter cord, or other similar fuse-lighting devices, the safety fuses may be considered as one fuse.

(e) The "drop fuse" method of dropping or pushing a primer, or any explosive, with a lighted fuse attached is prohibited.

(4) Use of detonating cord.

(a) Care shall be taken to select a detonating cord consistent with the type and physical condition of the bore hole and stemming and type of explosives used.

(b) Detonating cord shall be handled and used with the same precaution as with other explosives.

(c) The line of detonating cord extending out of a bore hole, or from a charge, shall be cut from a supply spool before loading the remainder of the bore hole or placing additional charges.

(d) Detonating cord shall be handled and used with care to avoid damaging or severing the cord during loading, after loading, and hooking-up.

(e) Detonating cord connections shall be made in accordance with approved methods. Knot-type or other cord-to-cord connections shall be made only with detonating cord in which the explosive core is dry.

(f) All detonating cord trunklines and branchlines shall be free of loops, sharp kinks, or angles that direct the cord back toward the oncoming line of detonation.

(g) All detonating cord connections shall be inspected before firing the blast.

(h) When detonating cord millisecond-delay connectors or short-interval-delay electric blasting caps are used with detonating cord, the practice shall conform strictly to the manufacturer's recommendations.

(i) When connecting a blasting cap or an electric blasting cap to detonating cord, the blasting cap shall be taped or otherwise attached securely along the side or the end of the detonating cord, with the end of the blasting cap containing the explosive charge pointed in the direction in which the detonation is to proceed.

(j) Detonators for firing the trunkline shall not be brought to the loading area, nor attached to the detonating cord, until everything else is in readiness for the blast.

(H) Underwater blasting.

(1) Loading tubes and casings of dissimilar metals shall not be used in electric blasting because of possible electric transient currents from galvanic action of the metals and water.

(2) In marine blasting only water-resistant blasting caps and detonating cords shall be used. When a loading tube is necessary, a non sparking loading tube shall be used.

(3) No blast shall be fired while any vessel under way is closer than one thousand five hundred feet (457.2 meters) to the blasting area. Those on board vessels or craft moored or anchored within one thousand five hundred feet (457.2 meters) shall be notified before a blast is fired.

(4) If swimming or diving operations are in progress in the vicinity of the blasting area, signals and arrangements shall be agreed upon to assure that no blast shall be fired while any employee is in the water.

(5) Blasting flags shall be displayed.

(6) When more than one charge is placed under water, a float device shall be attached to an element of each charge in such manner that the float device will be released by the firing. Misfires shall be handled in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (G)(1)(d) of this rule.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:55 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-16 Tunnels and shafts, caissons, cofferdams, and compressed air.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Air lock" means a chamber designed for the passage of employees and materials from one air pressure to a greater or lesser air pressure.

(2) "Bulkhead" means an airtight structure separating the working chamber from free air or from another chamber under a greater or lesser pressure than the working pressure.

(3) "Caisson" means a wood, steel, concrete, or reinforced concrete air-tight and water-tight chamber in which it is possible for men to work under air pressure greater than atmospheric pressure to excavate material below water level.

(4) "Emergency lock" means a lock designed to hold and permit the quick passage of an entire shift of employees.

(5) "Hazardous concentration" as applied to air contaminants, means a concentration which is known to be in excess of recognized occupational exposure limits such as, but not exclusively, the occupational safety and health administration permissible exposure limits (OSHA-PEL), national institute for occupational safety and health recommended exposure limits (NIOSH-REL) or American conference of governmental industrial hygienists' threshold limit values (ACGIH TLV).

(6) "Low air" means air supplied to pressurize working chambers and locks.

(7) "Manlock" means an airlock for personnel.

(8) "Medical lock" means a special chamber in which employees are treated for decompression illness.

(9) "Normal condition" means one during which exposure to compressed air is limited to a single continuous working period followed by a single decompression in any given twenty-four-hour period. A second exposure should not occur for at least twelve hours after normal atmospheric pressure has passed.

(10) "Safety screen" means an air-tight and water-tight diaphragm placed across the upper part of a compressed air tunnel between the face and bulkhead in order to prevent flooding the crown of the tunnel.

(11) "Shafting" means an air-tight and water-tight enclosure built in the roof of the caisson and extended upward until above the normal ground or water level.

(12) "Working chamber" means the space or compartment under air pressure in which the work is being done.

(13) "Working face" or "work face" means the transverse face of the tunnel heading at the point of greatest advancement of the tunnel excavation.

(1) Access to unattended underground openings shall be restricted by gates or doors. Unused chutes, manways, or other openings shall be tightly covered, made a bulkhead, or fenced off, and posted.

(2) Where hazardous settlement of the earth has occurred, the area shall be fenced and posted.

(3) Each operation shall have a check-in and check-out system that provides identification of every employee underground.

(4) All pipe, fittings, and wires extending in shafts, tunnels, and caissons shall be securely fastened in place.

(D) Tunnels and shafts.

(1) Emergency provisions.

(a) Evacuation plans and procedures shall be developed and made known to the employees.

(b) Emergency hoisting facilities shall be readily available at shafts more than fifty feet (15.2 meters) in depth unless the regular hoisting facilities are independent of electrical power failures.

(c) Approved self-contained breathing apparatus shall be available near the advancing face, adequate in number to equip each employee at the face. The approved self-contained breathing apparatus shall be on the haulage equipment and in other areas where employees might be trapped by smoke or gas.

(d) A method of affording instant communications shall be provided between the work face and the tunnel portal, the such method shall be independent of the tunnel power supply.

(e) Safety belts or safety harnesses shall be worn on skips and platforms used in shafts unless guardrails or cages are provided.

(2) Ground support.

(a) The exposed faces of tunnel excavations, except the portion being worked on at the particular time, and shafts made in material other than rock shall be supported and held in place by a securely fastened bracing system.

(b) Damaged or dislodge tunnel supports, whether steel sets or timber, shall be repaired or replaced. New supports shall be installed whenever possible before removing the damaged supports.

(c) All sets, including horseshoe-shaped or arched rib steel sets, shall be designed and installed so that the bottoms shall be securely anchored to prevent pressures from pushing them inward into the excavation. Lateral bracing shall be provided between sets to further stabilize the support.

(3) Ventilation.

(a) Employees shall be evacuated from the tunnel or shaft if ventilation fails. Before employees are permitted to enter or reenter the tunnel or shaft, ventilation shall be restarted, and the area shall be examined for gas and other atmospheric hazards by an employee designated by the employer. The employee checking air quality shall be knowledgeable in direct reading instruments and how to interpret readings from the instruments.

(b) Under no circumstances shall a tunnel or shaft be entered, unless the following prescribed tests and procedures are completed.

(i) Qualified, trained personnel shall test the atmosphere within the tunnel or shaft, without themselves entering, to verify the tunnel or shaft:

(a) Contains an adequate oxygen concentration, i.e., between 19.5 per cent and 23.5 per cent oxygen; and

(b) Does not contain a hazardous concentration of combustible gas or toxic contaminants.

(ii) If the tunnel or shaft contains inadequate oxygen concentration, or a hazardous concentration of combustible gas or toxic contaminants is detected, then appropriate control measures shall be instituted. Control measures may consist of forced or natural ventilation, use of personal protective equipment, i.e., supplied air respirators or self-contained breathing apparatus, a combination of forced or natural ventilation and personal protective equipment, or equivalent effective control techniques.

(c) During occupancy of the tunnel or shaft, qualified, trained personnel shall periodically monitor the atmosphere of the tunnel or shaft under the tests and procedures provided in paragraph (D)(3)(b) of this rule.

(d) Internal combustion engines other than approved mobile diesel powered equipment shall not be used underground.

(4) Illumination.

Lighting of no less than ten foot candles (one hundred eight lux) shall be provided at the tunnel and shaft headings and no less than five foot candles (fifty-four lux) elsewhere in the tunnel or shaft where employees are required to work.

(5) Fire prevention and control.

(a) Signs warning against smoking and open flames shall be posted so that they can be readily seen in areas or places where fire or explosion hazards exist.

(b) The carrying of matches, lighters, or other flame-producing smoking materials is prohibited in all underground operations.

(d) Oil and grease stored underground shall be kept in tightly sealed containers in fire-resistant enclosures at least three hundred feet (91.4 meters) from underground explosive magazines and at least one hundred feet (30.5 meters) from shaft stations and steep incline passageways.

(e) Air that has passed through underground oil storage areas shall not be used to ventilate working areas.

(f) Approved fire-resistant hydraulic fluids shall be used in hydraulically actuated underground machinery and equipment.

(g) Fires shall not be built underground.

(h) Noncombustible barriers shall be installed below welding or burning operations that are performed in or over a shaft.

(i) Fire extinguishers or equivalent protection shall be provided at the head and tail pulleys of underground belt conveyors and at three hundred foot (91.4 meters) intervals along the belt line.

(j) Sufficient employees trained in the use, care, and limitations of self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) and fire fighting equipment shall be on duty on each shift in tunnel operations.

(6) Personal protective equipment.

Protective clothing or equipment shall be worn as specified in rule 4123:1-3-03 of the Administrative Code.

(7) Hearing protection.

Employees exposed to a time-weighted average (TWA) of noise levels of ninety or more decibels (90 dBA TWA) slow response shall be provided with approved hearing protection.

(8) Drilling.

(a) Employees shall not be required to be on a drill mast while the drill bit is in operation.

(b) When a drill is being moved from one drilling area to another, drill steel, tools, and other equipment shall be secured, and the mast placed in a safe position.

(d) The employer shall be required to provide, and employee shall use, a warning system to warn all employees below jumbo decks before the drilling cycle is started.

(e) Drills on columns shall be anchored firmly before drilling is started and shall be retightened when necessary.

(f) The employer shall provide mechanical means for lifting drills, roof bolts, mine straps, and other unwieldy heavy material to the top decks of jumbos over ten feet (three meters) in height.

(g) Jumbo decks wide enough to accommodate two employees and more than ten feet (three meters) in height shall be provided with stair or ladder access.

(h) On jumbo decks over ten feet (three meters) in height, standard guardrails, which may be removable, shall be provided on all sides and back platforms.

(i) Scaling bars shall be in good condition at all times, and blunted or severely worn bars shall not be used.

(j) When jumbos are being moved, only the driver and those assisting the driver shall be permitted on the jumbo.

(k) Before commencing the drill cycle, the face and lifters shall be examined for misfires of residual explosives, and if any are found, the misfires shall be removed before drilling commences at the face. Lifters shall not be drilled through blasted rock, muck, or water.

(l) Air lines that are buried in the invert shall be identified by signs posted nearby, warning all personnel.

(9) Blasting.

(a) All blasting and explosives-handling operations shall be conducted in compliance with rule 4123:1-3-15 of the Administrative Code.

(b) When using explosives in tunnels, shafts, and caissons, all metal pipes, rails, air locks, and steel tunnel lining shall be electrically bonded together and grounded at or near the portal or shaft, and the pipes, rails, air locks, and steel tunnel lining shall be cross-bonded together at no less than one thousand foot (304.8 meters) intervals throughout the length of the tunnel. In addition, each low air supply shall be grounded at its delivery end.

(10) Haulage.

(a) Powered mobile equipment shall be provided with adequate brakes.

(b) Powered mobile haulage equipment shall be provided with audible warning devices. Lights shall be provided at both ends.

(d) Adequate backstops or brakes shall be installed on inclined conveyor drive units. A conveyor of this type, which would cause injury when run in reverse, shall not be reversed until employees in the area are alerted by a signal or by a designated person that the conveyor is about to start.

(e) No employees shall be permitted to ride a power-driven chain, belt, or bucket conveyor, unless the conveyor is specifically designed for the transportation of employees.

(f) The employer shall not permit employees to be transported in dippers, shovel buckets, forks, clamshells, in the beds of the dump trucks, or on other haulage equipment not specifically designed or adapted for the transportation of employees.

(g) Electrically powered mobile equipment shall not be left unattended unless the master switch is in the off position, all operations controls are in the neutral position, and the brakes are set, or other equivalent precautions are taken against rolling.

(h) When dumping cars by hand, the car dumps shall be provided with tie-down chains or bumper blocks to prevent cars from overturning.

(i) Rocker-bottom or bottom-dump cars shall be equipped with positive locking devices.

(j) Equipment which is to be hauled shall be so loaded and protected as to prevent sliding or spillage.

(k) Parked railcars shall be blocked securely.

(l) Berms, bumper blocks, safety hooks, or similar means shall be provided to prevent over-travel and overturning at dumping locations.

(m) Where necessary, bumper blocks, or the equivalent, shall be provided at all track dead ends.

(n) Supplies, materials, and tools, other than smallhand tools, shall not be transported with employees in mantrip cars.

(11) Electrical equipment.

Oil-filled transformers shall not be used underground unless the oil-filled transformers are located in a fire-resistant enclosure and surrounded by a dike to contain contents of the transformers in event of a rupture.

(12) Hoisting.

(a) Hoisting machines, either powered or hand operated, shall be worm-geared or powered both ways. The design must be such that when the power is stopped, the load cannot move.

(b) Controls for powered hoists shall be of the deadman type with a nonlocking switch or control.

(d) Hand-operated release mechanisms, which can permit the load to descend faster than the speed rating, may be performed if shaft conditions permit.

(e) Hoist machines with cast metal parts shall not be used.

(f) Every hoist shall be tested with twice the maximum load before being put into operation, at least annually thereafter, and whenever any repairs or alteration are made. Records of inspection must be kept on file.

(g) All anchorages of hoists shall be inspected at the beginning of each shift.

(h) An enclosed covered metal cage shall be used to raise and lower employees in the shaft. The cage shall be designed with a factor of safety four and shall be load-tested prior to use. The exterior of the cage shall be free of projections or sharp corners. Only closed shackles shall be used in the cage rigging.

(i) If the cage is equipped with a door, a locking device shall be installed to prevent the door from opening accidentally while the cage is lowered or raised while hoisting or lowering employees.

(E) Caissons.

(1) Sinking of caissons.

(a) Bracing of caissons.

Caissons shall be substantially braced before loading with concrete or other weight.

(b) Concreting caissons.

When two or more caissons are sunk together, employees shall be removed from adjacent caissons during concreting operations.

All outside air locks shall be provided with a platform no less than forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) wide, and the platform shall be provided with a standard guard railing and toeboard.

(d) Fifteen or more employees, two locks.

All caissons in compressed air environments in which there are fifteen or more employees, or are ten feet (three meters) or more in diameter, shall have two locks, one of which shall be used as a manlock. It shall be the duty of one or more trained employees to be in charge of and operate the manlock and any associated man shafts.

(e) Door opening of locks.

The bottom of the lowest door opening of locks shall be no less than three feet above water level.

(2) Where the working chamber is less than eleven feet (3.4 meters) in length, and the caisson is at any time suspended or hung while work is in progress so that the bottom of the excavation is more than nine feet (2.7 meters) below the deck of the working chamber, a shield shall be erected therein for the protection of the employees.

(3) Shafting shall be subjected to a hydrostatic or air-pressure test, at which pressure such shafting shall be tight. Shafting shall be stamped on the outside shell about twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) from each flange to show the pressure to which it has been subjected.

(4) Whenever used, the shafting shall be provided, where space permits, with a safe, proper, and suitable staircase for its entire length, including landing platforms, no more than twenty feet (6.1 meters) apart. Where this is impracticable, suitable ladders shall be installed with landing platforms located about twenty feet (6.1 meters) apart to break the climb.

(5) All caissons having diameter or side greater than ten feet (three meters) shall be provided with a manlock and shafting for the exclusive use of employees.

(6) In addition to the gauge in the locks, gauges shall also be maintained on the outer and inner side of each bulkhead. These gauges shall be accessible at all times and kept in accurate working order.

(7) Where employees are exposed to compressed air working environments in caissons, the requirements contained in paragraph (G) of this rule shall be complied with.

(F) Cofferdams.

(1) If overtopping of the cofferdam by high waters is possible, means shall be provided for controlled flooding of the work area.

(2) Warning signals for evacuations of employees in case of emergency shall be developed and instructions posted.

(3) Cofferdam walkways, bridges, or ramps with no less than two means of rapid exit shall be provided and equipped with standard guardrails.

(4) Cofferdams located close to navigable shipping channels shall be appropriately marked to protect them from vessels in transit.

(G) Compressed air.

(1) General provision.

When work is in progress which requires employees to work in compressed air, there shall be present a representative of the employer, who is thoroughly trained and experienced in compressed air techniques.

(2) Medical attendance, examination, and regulations.

(a) A licensed physician shall be designated for each job who is knowledgeable of compressed air work, who shall at all times be available for immediate service, and who shall be responsible for all matters on the job pertaining to the health of employees, treatment on the job of illness and injuries, and medical and first aid equipment. The physician shall make all required physical examinations and shall make and sign all required reports of such examinations.

(b) No employee shall be assigned to work in a compressed air environment until examined by the physician and reported to be physically qualified to engage in such work.

(c) After being employed continuously in compressed air work for a period designated by the physician, but not to exceed one year, the employee shall be reexamined by the physician to determine if such employee is still physically qualified to engage in compressed air work.

(d) An ambulance or transportation suitable for a litter case shall be provided at each project, and at each portal of a project, when the portals are more than five road miles (eight road kilometers) apart.

(e) A medical lock shall be established and maintained in immediate working order whenever air pressure in the working chamber is increased above the normal atmosphere.

(f) Identification badges shall be furnished to all employees, indicating that the wearer is a compressed air worker. A permanent record shall be kept of all identification badges issued. The badge shall give the employee's name, address of the medical lock, the telephone number of the licensed physician for the compressed air project, and instructions that in case of emergency of unknown or doubtful cause of illness, the wearer shall be rushed to the medical lock. The employer shall advise the employee to wear the badge at all times, off the job as well as on the job.

(3) Telephone and signal communication.

Effective and reliable means of communication, such as bells, whistles, or telephones, shall be maintained at all times between all the following locations:

(a) The working chamber face;

(b) The working chamber side of the manlock near the door;

(d) The lock attendant's station;

(e) The compressor plant;

(f) The medical lock;

(g) The emergency lock, if one is required; and

(h) The special decompression chamber, if one is required.

(4) Signs and records.

(a) The time of decompression shall be posted in each manlock as follows:

"Time of Decompression for this Lock"

................pounds (or kilograms) to................pounds (or kilograms) in.....................minutes.

| (Signed by) | ______________________________________ | | --- | --- | | | (Superintendent) |

This form shall be posted in the manlock at all times.

(b) Any code of signals used shall be conspicuously posted near workplace entrances and other locations as may be necessary to bring the code of signals to the attention of all employees concerned.

(c) For each eight-hour shift, a record of employees employed under air pressure shall be kept by another employee who shall remain outside the lock near the entrance. This record shall show the period each employee spends in the air chamber and the time taken for decompression. A copy shall be submitted to the appointed physician after each shift.

(5) Compression.

(a) During the compression of employees, the pressure shall not be increased to more than three pounds per square inch (20.7 kilopascals) gauge within the first minute. The pressure shall be held at three pounds per square inch (20.7 kilopascals) gauge and again at seven pounds per square inch (48.3 kilopascals) gauge sufficiently long to determine if any employees are experiencing discomfort.

(b) After holding at seven pounds per square inch (48.3 kilopascals) gauge, the pressure shall be raised uniformly and at a rate not to exceed ten pounds per square inch (68.9 kilopascals) per minute.

(c) If any employee complains of discomfort, the pressure shall be held to determine if the symptoms are relieved. If, after five minutes the discomfort does not disappear, the lock attendant shall gradually reduce the pressure until the employee signals that the discomfort has ceased. If the employee does not indicate that the discomfort has disappeared, the lock attendant shall reduce the pressure to atmospheric, and the employee shall be released from the lock.

(d) No employee shall be subjected to pressure exceeding fifty pounds per square inch (344.7 kilopascals) except in emergency.

(6) Decompression.

(a) Decompression to normal condition shall be in accordance with the decompression tables in the appendix to this rule.

(b) Except in emergencies, no employee working in compressed air shall be permitted to pass from the place in which the work is being done to normal air pressure except after decompression in accordance with the decompression tables in the appendix to this rule.

(7) Compressor plant and air supply.

(a) At all times there shall be a thoroughly experienced, competent, and reliable person, designated by the employer, on duty at the air control valves as a gauge tender who shall regulate the pressure in the working areas. During tunneling operations, one gauge tender may regulate the pressure in no more than two headings, provided the gauge and controls are all in one location. In caisson work, there shall be a gauge tender for each caisson.

(b) The low air compressor plant shall be of sufficient capacity to not only permit the work to be done safely but shall also provide a margin to meet emergencies and repairs.

(c) Low air compressor units shall have no less than two independent and separate sources of power supply, and each power supply shall be capable of operating the entire low air plant and its accessory systems.

(d) All high-pressure and low-pressure air supply lines shall be equipped with check valves.

(e) Low-pressure air shall be regulated automatically, and manually operated valves shall be provided for emergency conditions.

(f) The air intakes for all air compressors shall be located at a place where fumes, exhaust gases, and other air contaminants will be at a minimum.

(g) Gauges indicating the pressure in the working chamber shall be installed in the compressor building, the lock attendant's station, and at the employer's field office.

(8) Ventilation and air quality.

(a) Exhaust valves and exhaust pipes shall be provided and operated so that the working chamber shall be well ventilated, and there shall be no pockets of dead air.

(b) The air in the workplace shall be analyzed by the employer no less than once each shift, and records of such tests shall be kept on file at the place where the work is in progress. The test results shall be within established, recognized occupational exposure limits. If these limits are not met, immediate action to correct the situation shall be taken by the employer.

(c) The temperature of all working chambers which are subjected to air pressure shall be maintained at a temperature not to exceed eighty-five degrees Fahrenheit (29.4 degrees Celsius).

(9) Electricity.

(a) All lighting in compressed air chambers shall be by electricity exclusively, and two independent electric lighting systems with independent sources of supply shall be used. The emergency source shall be arranged to become automatically operative in the event of failure of the regularly used source.

(b) The minimum intensity of light of any walkway, ladder, stairway, or working level shall be no less than ten foot candles (one hundred eight lux), and in all workplaces the lighting shall at all times allow employees to see clearly.

(c) All electrical equipment, and wiring for light and power circuits, shall be suitable for use in damp, hazardous, high temperature, and compressed air environments.

(d) External parts of lighting fixtures and all other electrical equipment, when within eight feet (2.4 meters) of the floor, shall be constructed of noncombustible, nonabsorptive, insulating materials, except that metal may be used if the metal is effectively grounded.

(e) Portable lamps shall be equipped with noncombustible, nonabsorptive, and insulating sockets, approved handles and cords, and basket.

(f) The use of worn or defective portable and pendant conductors is prohibited.

(10) Fire prevention and protection.

(a) Firefighting equipment shall be available at all times and shall be maintained in working condition.

(b) While welding or flame-cutting is being done in compressed air, an employee with a fire hose or approved extinguisher shall stand by until the welding or flame-cutting is completed.

(c) Shafts and caissons containing flammable material of any kind, either above or below ground, shall be provided with a waterline and a fire hose connected thereto, so arranged that all points of the shaft or caisson are within reach of the hose stream.

(d) Fire hose shall be no less than one and one-half inches (3.8 centimeters) in nominal diameter; the water pressure shall at all times be adequate for efficient operation of the type of nozzle used; and the water supply shall be such as to ensure an uninterrupted flow. Fire hose, when not in use, shall be located or guarded to prevent damage thereto.

(e) The power house, compressor house, and all buildings housing ventilating equipment, shall be provided with at least one hose connection in the waterline, with a fire hose connected thereto. A fire hose shall be maintained within reach of wood structures over or near shafts.

(f) Tunnels shall be provided with a two-inch (5.1 centimeters) minimum diameter waterline extending into the working chamber and to within one hundred feet of the working face. The waterline shall have hose outlets with one hundred feet (30.5 meters) of fire hose attached and maintained as follows: one at the working face; one immediately inside of the bulkhead of the working chamber; and one immediately outside the bulkhead. In addition, hose outlets shall be provided at two hunded foot (sixty-one meter) intervals throughout the length of the tunnel, and one hundred feet (30.5 meters) of fire hose shall be attached to the outlet nearest to any location where flammable materials is kept or stored or where any flame is used.

(g) In addition to fire hose protection required by this section, on every floor of every building not under compressed air, but used in connection with the compressed air work, there shall be provided at least one approved fire extinguisher of the proper type for the hazard involved. At least two approved fire extinguishers shall be provided in the working chamber as follows: one at the working face, and one immediately outside the pressure side of the bulkhead. Extinguishers in the working chamber shall use water as the primary extinguishing agent and shall not use any extinguishing agent which could be harmful to the employees in the working chamber. The fire extinguishers shall be protected from damage.

(h) Highly combustible materials shall not be used or stored in the working chamber. Wood, paper, and similar combustible material shall not be used in the working chamber in quantities which could cause a fire hazard. The compressor building shall be constructed of noncombustible material.

(i) Manlocks shall be equipped with a manual fire extinguisher system that can be activated inside the manlock and also by the outside lock attendant. A fire hose and portable fire extinguisher shall be provided inside and outside the manlock. The portable fire extinguisher shall be the dry chemical type.

(j) Equipment, fixtures, and furniture in manlocks and special decompression chambers shall be constructed of noncombustible material. Bedding shall be chemically treated so as to be fire resistant.

(k) Head frames shall be constructed of structural steel or open frame-work fire-proofed timber. Head houses and other temporary surface buildings or structures within one hundred feet (30.5 meters) of the shaft, caisson, or tunnel opening shall be built of fire-resistant materials.

(l) No oil, gasoline, or other combustible material shall be stored within one hundred feet (30.5 meters) on any shaft, caisson, or tunnel opening, except that oils may be stored in suitable tanks in isolated fireproof buildings, provided such buildings are no less than fifty feet (15.2 meters) from any shaft, caisson, or tunnel opening, or any building directly connected thereto.

(m) Leaking flammable liquids shall be prevented from flowing into the areas specifically mentioned in the preceding paragraph.

(n) All explosives used in connection with compressed air work shall be selected, stored, transported, and used as specified in rule 4123:1-3-15 of the Administrative Code.

(11) Bulkheads and safety screens.

(a) Intermediate bulkheads with locks, intermediate safety screens, or both, are required where there is the danger of rapid flooding.

(b) In tunnels sixteen feet (4.9 meters) or more in diameter, hanging walkways shall be provided from the face to the manlock as high in the tunnel as practicable, with no less than six feet (1.8 meters) of head room. Walkways shall be constructed of noncombustible material. Standard railings shall be securely installed throughout the length of all walkways on open sides in accordance with rule 4123:1-3-04 of the Administrative Code. Where walkways are ramped under safety screens, the walkway surface shall be skidproofed by cleats or by equivalent means.

(c) Bulkheads used to contain compressed air shall be tested, where practicable, to prove their ability to resist the highest air pressure which may be used.

View Appendix

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:55 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-17 Cutting and welding.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Fire-resistive construction" means a method of construction which prevents or retards the passage of hot gases or flames, as defined by the fire-resistance rating.

(2) "Fire-resistance rating" means the measured time in hours, or fractions thereof, that the material or construction will withstand fire exposure, as determined by fire tests conducted in conformity to recognized standards.

(1) The employer shall verbally, and through demonstration, instruct the employee in the safe operation and maintenance of cutting and welding equipment.

(2) Employees shall have the duty to operate such equipment in accordance with instructions provided by the employer in paragraph (C)(1) of this rule.

(D) Maximum pressure.

Under no condition shall acetylene be generated, piped .except in approved cylinder manifolds, or utilized at a pressure in excess of fifteen pounds per square inch (103.4 kilopascal) gauge pressure.

(E) Gas welding and cutting.

(1) Equipment.

Only approved equipment, such as torches, regulators, or pressure-reducing valves, acetylene generators, manifolds, cylinders, and containers shall be used.

(2) Cylinders and containers.

(a) Marking.

Compressed gas cylinders shall be legibly marked, for the purpose of identifying the content, with either the chemical or the trade name of the gas. Such marking shall be by means of stenciling, stamping, or labeling and shall not be readily removed.

(b) Storage.

(i) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or combustible materials, especially oil or grease, a minimum distance of twenty feet (6.1 meters) or by a noncombustible barrier no less than five feet (1.5 meters) high, having a fire-resistance rating of no less than one-half hour.

(ii) Cylinders, when not in use, shall be protected from any heat-radiating objects or open flame which could cause the cylinder to rupture or the fusible plug to melt.

(i) All cylinders with a water weight capacity of over thirty pounds (13.6 kilograms) shall be equipped with means of connecting a valve protection cap or with a collar or recess to protect the valve.

(ii) Employees shall be responsible for using valve protection caps when cylinders are moved from place to place or put in storage.

(iii) Where carriers are provided for moving cylinders which are connected for use, capping shall not be required, but employees shall be responsible for seeing that cylinder valves are closed, and pressure is released from regulators, hoses, and torches.

(d) Regulator protection.

Welders and cutters shall be instructed to close valves on oxygen and acetylene cylinders and bleed off hose pressure at the end of each work shift, to prevent malfunction of the regulators.

(e) Transporting cylinders by crane or derrick.

When cylinders are hoisted, they shall be secured on a cradle, slingboard, or pallet. Cylinders shall not be hoisted or transported by means of magnets or choker slings.

(f) Employer responsible to provide facilities for securely fastening cylinders.

The employer shall provide facilities for securely fastening cylinders of compressed gas in an upright position.

(3) Hose and hose connections.

(a) Hose.

(i) Identification.

The color red shall be used for acetylene and other fuel-gas hose. The color green shall be used for oxygen hose. The color black shall be used for inert-gas hose and air hose.

(ii) Hose in which flashback has occurred.

Any length of hose in which a flashback has occurred and burned in the hose shall be taken out of service.

(iii) Single hose with more than one gas passage.

The use of a single hose having more than one gas passage, in which a wall failure would permit the flow of one gas into the other gas passage, is prohibited.

(iv) Hoses taped together, limitation.

When parallel lengths of oxygen and acetylene hoses are taped together for convenience and to prevent tangling, no more than four inches (10.2 centimeters) out of twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) shall be covered by tape.

(v) Damaged or defective hose.

Hose showing leaks, burns, worn places, or other defects rendering it unfit for service shall have the damaged portion removed.

(b) Hose connections and couplings.

(i) Hose connections for oxygen and fuel-gas shall be distinguished from each other. Hose connections shall be clamped or otherwise securely fastened in a manner that will withstand, without leakage, twice the pressure to which they are normally subjected in service, but in no case less than three hundred pounds per square inch (2068.4 kilopascal).

(ii) Hose couplings shall be of the type that cannot be unlocked or disconnected by means of a straight pull without rotary motion.

Oxygen and fuel-gas pressure regulators, including their related gauges, shall be in proper working order while in use.

(F) Arc welding and cutting.

(1) Manual electrode holders.

(a) Only manual electrode holders which are specifically designed for arc welding and cutting, and are of a capacity capable of safely handling the maximum rated current required by the electrodes, shall be used.

(b) Any current-carrying parts passing through the portion of the holder which the arc welder or cutter grips by hand, and the outer surfaces of the jaws of the holder, shall be fully insulated against the maximum voltage encountered to ground.

(2) Welding cables and connectors.

(a) All arc welding and cutting cables shall be of the completely insulated, flexible type, and be capable of handling the maximum current requirements of the work in progress, considering the duty cycle under which the arc welding or cutting unit is working.

(b) Cables with splices within ten feet (three meters) of the holder shall not be used, except that cables with standard insulated connectors, or with splices whose insulating quality is equal to that of the cables, are permitted.

(c) When necessary to connect or splice lengths of cable one to another, substantial insulated connectors of a capacity at least equivalent to that of the cable shall be used. If connections are effected by means of cable lugs, the connections shall be securely fastened together to give good electrical contact, and the exposed metal parts of the lugs shall be completely insulated.

(d) Cables in need of repair shall not be used.

(3) Ground returns and machine grounding.

(a) A ground return cable shall have a safe current-carrying capacity equal to or exceeding the specified maximum output capacity of the arc welding or cutting unit which the ground return cable services. When a single ground return cable services more than one unit, the safe current-carrying capacity shall equal or exceed the total specified maximum output capacities of all the units which the ground return cable services.

(b) Pipelines containing gases or flammable liquids, or conduits containing electrical circuits, shall not be used as a ground return.

(c) When a structure or pipeline is employed as a ground return circuit, the required electrical contact has to exist at all joints. The generation of an arc, sparks, or heat at any point shall cause rejection of the structure or pipeline as a ground circuit.

(d) When a structure or pipeline is continuously employed as a ground return circuit, all joints shall be bonded, and periodic inspections shall be conducted to ensure that no condition of electrolysis or fire hazard exists by virtue of such use.

(e) The frames of all arc welding and cutting machines shall be grounded either through a third wire in the cable containing the circuit conductor or through a separate wire which is grounded at the source of the current. Grounding circuits, other than by means of the structure, shall be checked to ensure that the circuit between the ground and the grounded power conductor has resistance low enough to permit sufficient current to flow to cause the fuse or circuit breaker to interrupt the current.

(f) All ground connections shall be inspected to ensure that the ground connections are mechanically secure and electrically adequate for the required current.

(4) Operating instructions.

Employers shall instruct employees in the safe means of arc welding and cutting as follows:

(a) When electrode holders are to be left unattended, the electrodes shall be removed, and the holders shall be so placed or protected that the holders cannot make electrical contact with employees or conducting objects.

(b) Hot electrode holders shall not be dipped in water.

(c) When the arc welder or cutter leaves or stops work for any appreciable length of time, or when the arc welding or cutting unit is to be moved, the power supply switch to the equipment shall be opened.

(5) Shielding.

Arc welding and cutting operations shall be shielded by noncombustible or flameproof screens which will protect employees working in the vicinity from the direct rays of the arc.

(6) Overcurrent protection.

All welding machines shall be protected by an overcurrent device.

(7) Disconnecting means.

(a) A disconnecting means shall be provided in the supply for each alternating-current transformer and direct-current rectifier arc welder which is not equipped with a disconnect mounted as an integral part of the welder.

(b) The disconnecting means shall be a switch or circuit breaker, and its rating shall be no less than that necessary to accommodate overcurrent protection.

(G) Welding or cutting of containers.

No welding, cutting, or work utilizing a torch shall be performed on used drums, barrels, tanks, or other containers until they have been cleaned and purged of materials which, when subjected to heat, might produce flammable or toxic vapors.

(H) Eye and ear protection.

See rule 4123:1-3-03 of the Administrative Code.

(I) Protection from sparks or falling objects.

(1) Cutting or welding shall be permitted only in areas that are, or have been made, fire safe.

(2) Screens or shields shall be provided for the protection of employees or combustible materials exposed to falling objects or sparks.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:55 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-18 Heating, ventilating and exhaust equipment.

(A) Scope.

This rule relates to methods of controlling air contaminants, as defined in paragraph (B) of this rule, which have been established as hazardous.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Air contaminants" as used in this rule, means airborne concentrations of fibrosis-producing or toxic dusts, toxic fumes, toxic mists, toxic vapors, or toxic gases, or a combination of these, suspended in the atmosphere.

(2) "Collector," see "separator."

(3) "Confined space" means any tank, vessel, container, or pit so enclosed that adequate ventilation is not obtained by natural air movement.

(4) "Duct" means any pipe, flue, or channel forming a part of a ventilating system used to convey air, dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, or gases.

(5) "Dust" means solid particulate matter, other than fumes, generally less than one hundred micrometers in aerodynamic diameter.

(6) "Exhaust system" means a complete suction system, including all hoods, ducts, fans, separators, and receptacles, when required, and any other part necessary for the proper installation and operation thereof.

(7) "Fan" means the equipment which creates the movement of air in a mechanical system of ventilation.

(8) "Fume" means solid particulates generated by the condensation of vapors or gases, usually of metallic elements.

(9) "Gas" means a formless fluid occupying the space of enclosure.

(10) "Hazardous concentrations" as applied to air contaminants, means concentrations which are known of recognized occupational exposure limits such as, but not exclusively, the occupational safety and health administration permissible exposure limits (OSHA-PEL), national institute for occupational safety and health recommended exposure limits (NIOSH-REL) or American conference of governmental industrial hygienists' threshold limit values (ACGIH-TLV).

(11) "Hood" means that part of an exhaust system into which air contaminants first enter.

(12) "Mist" means liquid droplets or wet solids suspended in air.

(13) "Separator" or "collector" means that part of an exhaust system designed to separate the entrained material from the conveying air.

(14) "Transport velocity" means the velocity of air required to keep the material entrained in the conveying air.

(15) "Vapor" means the gaseous form of a substance normally in the liquid or solid state.

(16) "Ventilation," dependent on the type of ventilation, means any of the following:

(a) "Dilution ventilation" means ventilation provided to reduce the concentration of air contaminants in the atmosphere of all of or part of the place of employment.

(b) "General ventilation" means ventilation of the general atmosphere in the place of employment.

(c) "Local exhaust ventilation" means that type of ventilation in which suction is applied at the point of generation or escape of air contaminants.

(1) General.

When heaters are used, ventilation shall be provided to maintain the health and safety of employees.

(2) Solid fuel salamanders.

Solid fuel salamanders are prohibited in buildings and on scaffolds.

(3) Oil-fired heaters.

(a) Flammable liquid-fired heaters shall be equipped with a primary safety control to stop the flow of fuel in the event of flame failure.

(b) Heaters designed for barometric or gravity oil feed shall be used only with the integral tanks.

(c) Heaters specifically designed and approved for use with separate supply tanks may be directly connected for gravity feed, or an automatic pump, from a supply tank.

(4) Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-gas).

(a) Approval of equipment and systems.

Each system shall have containers, valves, connectors, manifold valve assemblies, and regulators of an approved type.

(b) Container valves and container accessories.

Valves, fittings, and accessories connected directly to the container, including primary shut-off valves, shall have a rated working pressure of no less than two hundred fifty pounds per square inch (1724.7 kilopascal) gauge and shall be of material and design suitable for LP-gas service.

Filling of portable containers mounted on skids from storage containers shall be performed no less than fifty feet (15.2 meters) from the nearest building.

(d) Containers and regulating equipment installed outside of buildings or structures.

Containers shall be upright upon firm foundations or otherwise firmly secured. The possible effect on the outlet piping of settling shall be guarded against by a flexible connection or special fitting.

(e) Containers and equipment used inside of buildings or structures.

(i) When operational requirements make use of portable containers necessary, and their location outside of buildings or structures is impracticable, containers and equipment shall be permitted to be used inside of buildings or structures in accordance with paragraphs (C)(4)(e)(ii) to (C)(4)(e)(x) of this rule.

(ii) "Containers in use" means connected for use.

(iii) Valves on containers having water capacity greater than fifty pounds (22.7 kilograms), or nominal twenty pounds (9.1 kilograms) LP-gas capacity, shall be protected from damage while in use or storage.

(iv) Hose used for LP-gas shall have a working pressure of no less than two hundred fifty pounds per square inch (1724.7 kilopascal) gauge. Hose design, construction, and performance shall be determined by listing by a national recognized testing agency. The use of aluminum piping or tubing is prohibited.

(v) Portable heaters, including salamanders, shall be equipped with an approved automatic device to shut off the flow of gas to the main burner and pilot in the event of flame failure, except that this provision does not apply to portable heaters under seven thousand five hundred British thermal units (7.9 megajoules) per hour input when used with containers having a maximum water capacity of two and one-half pounds (1.1 kilograms). Portable heaters having inputs above fifty thousand British thermal units (52.8 megajoules) per hour, shall be equipped with either a pilot, which must be lighted and proved before the main burner can be turned on, or an electrical ignition system.

(vi) Containers, regulating equipment, manifolds, piping, tubing, and hoses shall be located to avoid exposure to high temperatures or physical damage.

(vii) Containers having a water capacity greater than two and one-half pounds (1.1 kilograms), or nominal one pound (454 grams) LP-gas capacity. connected for use shall stand on a firm and level surface and shall be secured in an upright position.

(viii) The maximum water capacity of individual containers shall be two hundred forty-five pounds (111.1 kilograms), or nominal one hundred pounds (45.4 kilograms) LP-gas capacity.

(ix) For temporary heating, heaters, other than integral heater-container units, shall be located no less than six feet (1.8 meters) from any LP-gas container.

(x) When heaters are connected to containers for use in an unpartitioned area on the same floor, the total water capacity of containers, manifolded together for connection to a heater or heaters, shall be no greater than seven hundred thirty-five pounds (333.4 kilograms), or nominal three hundred pounds (136.1 kilograms) LP-gas capacity. Such manifolds shall be separated by no less than twenty feet (6.1 meters).

(f) Multiple container systems.

(i) Valves in the assembly of multiple container systems shall be arranged so that replacement of containers can be made without shutting off the flow of gas in the system.

(ii) Heaters shall be equipped with an approved regulator in the supply line between the fuel cylinder and the heater unit. Cylinder connectors shall be provided with an excess flow valve.

(g) Storage of LP-gas containers.

Storage of LP-gas within buildings is prohibited.

(h) Storage outside of buildings.

(i) Storage outside of buildings for containers awaiting use shall be located away from the nearest building or group of buildings, in accordance with the following:

(ii) Containers shall be in a ventilated enclosure and protected against tampering.

(D) Control of air contaminants.

(1) General.

Air contaminants shall be minimized by one or more of the following methods:

(a) Substitute nonhazardous, or less hazardous material;

(b) Confine or isolate the contaminant;

(d) Reduce the airborne concentration by dilution ventilation;

(e) Reduce the airborne concentration by general ventilation; or

(f) Using wet methods to allay dust generation.

(2) Asbestos.

(a) Mixing asbestos shall be done wet or in an enclosed, ventilated area.

(b) The employer shall provide and shall require the employee to wear approved respirators when mixing, sawing, spraying, applying, and cleaning up where asbestos is used.

(d) When cleaning up, all surfaces shall be sprayed with water or shall be vacuumed by high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filtered equipment capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 per cent of all monodispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter or larger.

(E) Exhaust systems: machinery and equipment.

(1) Grinding, polishing, and buffing.

(a) Abrasive wheels and belts.

(i) Abrasive wheels and belts shall be hooded and exhausted when there is a hazardous concentration of air contaminants.

(ii) This provision does not apply to abrasive wheels or belts:

(a) Upon which water, oil, or other liquid substance is used at the point of the grinding contact; or

(b) Small abrasive wheels used occasionally for tool grinding or other routine maintenance tasks.

(b) Separate exhaust systems.

Abrasive wheel and buffing wheel exhaust systems shall be separate when the dust from the buffing wheel is of flammable or combustible material.

(2) Manufacturing processes.

When toxic materials are generated in hazardous concentrations during their application, drying, or handling, the toxic materials shall be minimized or eliminated.

(3) Internal combustion engines.

Hazardous concentrations of air contaminants produced by internal combustion engines shall be exhausted.

(F) Exhaust systems, structural requirements.

(1) Exhaust or ventilating fan.

Each exhaust or ventilating fan located seven feet (2.1 meters) or less above the floor or normal working level shall be guarded.

(2) Ducts.

The exhaust system shall be ducts of a size suitable for conducting the contaminated air outdoors, or the exhaust ducts shall provide no less than the minimum transport velocity necessary to remove the particulate material to a collector.

(3) Discharge.

The outlet from every separator, or from every collector, shall discharge the air contaminants collected by the exhaust system in such manner that the discharged materials shall not re-enter the working area in hazardous concentrations.

(4) Location of air supply openings or inlets.

Air supply openings or inlets through which air enters the building or room in which the local exhaust system is in operation shall be isolated from any known source of contamination.

(G) Confined spaces.

Under no circumstances shall a confined space be entered unless the following prescribed tests and procedures are completed.

(1) Qualified, trained personnel shall test the atmosphere within the confined space, without themselves entering, to verify the confined space:

(a) Contains an adequate oxygen concentration, i.e., between 19.5 per cent and 23.5 per cent oxygen;

(b) Does not contain vapor or gas in excess of ten per cent of its lower flammability limit (LFL) through the use of a combustible gas indicator; and

(2) If the confined space contains inadequate oxygen concentration, a concentration of vapor or gas in excess of ten per cent of its LFL, or a hazardous concentration of a toxic contaminant, then appropriate control measures shall be instituted. Control measures may consist of forced or natural ventilation, use of personal protective equipment, i.e., supplied air respirators or self-contained breathing apparatus, a combination of forced or natural ventilation and personal protective equipment, or equivalent effective control techniques.

(H) Procedures.

(1) Procedure for safe entry.

(a) A procedure for safe entry into confined spaces shall be established and used.

(b) The following are recommended procedures to comply with standards:

(i) Designate at least one trained person to be responsible for adherence to entry procedures and require written approval by that person before permitting anyone to enter the confined space;

(ii) Post danger signs, or mark by any other equally effective means, the existence and location of the permit spaces, such as with a sign reading "Danger -- Permit - Required Confined Space, Do Not Enter," or using similar language;

(iii) Provide periodic instruction and training in proper entry procedures to be used;

(iv) Standby personnel where provided shall be required at all times to be in communication with the employee within the confined space, and an alarm or two-way radio system for the standby employee will be effective;

(v) Approved rescue equipment should be available, and since entry ports for confined spaces vary in size, precaution should be used in obtaining proper size equipment;

(vi) Establish procedures to prevent ignition of combustible atmospheres or re-entry of gases or liquids by locking out switches, blanking off transmission pipes, and using nonsparking tools;

(vii) Prevent generation of contaminants by neutralizing or flushing out residual materials;

(viii) In testing for air contaminants use only approved instruments maintained in proper working order;

(ix) Continual monitoring of oxygen and contaminant concentrations during occupancy;

(x) If atmosphere-supplying respiratory equipment is used off this system shall meet the specifications of the "Compressed Gas Association (CGA)," to assure a supply of grade D or better air;

(xi) When atmospheric-supplying respiratory apparatus is used, personnel should be trained in the proper use of such apparatus; and

(xii) Many employers use tags to show that a confined space may be entered safely. An example of such a tag is as follows:

(2) Emergency rescue procedures.

(a) In all cases when an employee is stationed outside a compartment, tank, or space, as a tender for the employees working inside, the tender shall have immediately available for emergency use all necessary personal protective equipment. The tender shall wear the personal protective equipment if exposed for prolonged periods which are hazardous to the tender's health.

(b) When entering a toxic or flammable atmosphere, an employee shall be provided with, and use, an adequate, attended lifeline.

View Appendix

Last updated July 13, 2026 at 3:37 PM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-19 Demolition.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Chute" means a trough or tube used to guide and transport sliding objects, material, or debris from a higher to a lower level.

(2) "Demolition" means to dismantle, raze, destroy, or wreck any fixed building or structure.

(1) Except where necessary to maintain a utility service, all steam, gas, sanitary sewer, and electric lines shall be shut off from beyond the building or structure before demolition operations begin. Sanitary sewer connections shall be closed with a plug of concrete or some other suitable material at the entrance to the building, inside the building wall or immediately outside the building wall. Where it is necessary to maintain all or any of the service utilities, the service lines shall be protected from damage. In each case, any utility company which is involved shall be notified in advance.

(2) When employees are required to work within a structure to be demolished which has been damaged by fire, flood, explosion, or other cause, the walls or floor shall be shored or braced.

(3) When any type of hazardous chemicals, gases, explosives, flammable materials, or similarly dangerous substances has been used in the pipes, tanks, or other equipment on the property, the hazardous situation shall be eliminated.

(4) Where a hazard exists from fragmentation of glass, the hazard shall be removed.

(5) During the period before demolition begins in a particular area, wall openings less than forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) above the floor and floor, openings, other than material drops, shall be protected.

(D) Material and debris.

(1) Chutes for removal of material and debris.

(a) Chutes provided for the removal of material and debris from areas above the first floor level shall be so constructed that the material and debris cannot leave the chute before reaching the discharge end.

(b) When employees are required to work in, or pass through, the area at the discharge end of chutes, the area shall be guarded, except where the chute discharges into a bin, conveyor, truck, or other container.

(c) Chute openings into which employees dump debris shall be protected by a guardrail approximately forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) in height, and where material is dumped from mechanical equipment or wheelbarrows, toeboards shall be provided.

(2) Existing elevators used for removal of material and debris.

When existing elevators are used for the removal of material and debris, employees shall be instructed not to load elevators beyond the rated capacity. Material hoists, when used, shall conform to the requirements of paragraph (D)(2) of rule 4123:1-3-07 of the Administrative Code.

(3) Removal of material and debris through floor openings.

Any openings cut in a floor for the disposal of material and debris shall be no larger in size than twenty-five per cent of the aggregate of the total floor area, unless the lateral supports of the removed flooring remain in place. Floors weakened, or otherwise made unsafe, by demolition operations shall be shored to carry safely the intended imposed load from demolition operations.

(4) Storage.

Storage space into which material and debris are dumped shall be blocked off, except for openings necessary for their removal. The openings shall be kept closed at all times when material or debris is not being removed.

(E) Removal of employees.

All employees shall be removed from areas directly below floors or similar elevations prior to the demolition of walls, sections of walls, chimneys, or other parts of the building which may fall in mass upon the upper floors or elevations.

(F) Scaffolding and walkways.

(1) Scaffolding.

In demolishing masonry walls with hand labor, scaffolding shall be provided unless an interior floor is located no more than twelve feet (3.7 meters) below the working level. All scaffolds used in demolition work shall be substantially supported and shall conform to the requirements of rule 4123:1-3-10 of the Administrative Code.

(2) Walkways.

Walkways or ladders shall be provided to enable employees to safely reach or leave any scaffold or wall.

(G) Stairways.

Stairways in use shall be substantially supported.

(H) Removal of steel construction.

(1) Employees not required to work from, or ride, demolition equipment.

Employees shall not be required to work from, or ride, crane loads, hooks, demolition balls, or buckets designed to carry materials.

(2) Dropping structural steel.

Employees shall not be required to drop structural steel except into a specially barricaded or otherwise fully protected area.

(3) Shoring floor.

Prior to erecting any derrick or other hoisting device on any floor support, shoring shall be designed and erected to provide a factor of safety of no less than four.

(I) Demolition balls and clamshell buckets.

(1) Barricading area.

The area affected by demolition balls and clamshell buckets shall be barricaded to protect employees. Only those employees necessary for the performance of these operations shall be required to be in the barricaded area when these operations are being performed.

(2) Attachment and weight.

A demolition ball shall be attached to the load line with a swivel-type connection to prevent twisting of the load line and shall be attached so that the weight cannot become accidentally disconnected. The weight of the demolition ball shall not exceed fifty per cent of the crane's rated load based on the maximum length and angle of the boom.

(3) Protection of windows in crane cabs.

Windows in crane cabs used with balling operations shall be protected with heavy-gauge metal screening having openings large enough that the operator's vision is not obscured, but no larger than two inches (5.1 centimeters), or with safety glass that will provide equivalent protection.

(J) Selective demolition by explosives.

Selective demolition by explosives shall be conducted in accordance with rule 4123:1-3-15 of the Administrative Code.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:55 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-20 Steel erection.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) Permanent flooring - skeleton steel construction in tiered buildings.

(a) The permanent floors shall be installed as the erection of structural members progresses, and there shall be no more than eight stories between the erection floor and the uppermost permanent floor, except where the structural integrity is maintained as a result of the design.

(b) At no time shall there be more than four floors or forty-eight feet (14.6 meters) of unfinished bolting or welding above the foundation or uppermost permanently secured floor, except where the structural integrity is maintained as a result of the design.

(2) Temporary flooring - skeleton steel construction in tiered buildings.

(a) The derrick or erection floor shall be solidly planked or decked over its entire surface except for access openings. Planking or decking of equivalent strength shall be of proper thickness to carry the working load. Planking shall be no less than two inches thick (5.1 centimeters), full size undressed, and shall be laid tight and secured to prevent movement.

(b) On buildings or structures not adaptable to temporary floors, and where scaffolds are not used, each employee exposed to a potential fall distance exceeding two stories or thirty feet (9.1 meters) shall have a personal fall arrest system, or safety nets shall be installed and maintained. The nets shall be hung with sufficient clearance to prevent contacts with the surface or structures below.

A safety railing of one-quarter inch (six millimeters) wire rope or equal shall be installed, approximately forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) high, around the periphery of all temporary-planked, temporary-metal-decked floors of tier buildings, and other multi-floored structures during structural steel assembly.

(d) Where skeleton steel erection is being done, a tightly planked and substantial floor shall be maintained within two stories or thirty feet (9.1 meters), whichever is less.

(e) When gathering and stacking temporary floor planks from the last panel, the employees assigned to such work shall be protected by a safety harness with safety lines attached to the structure.

(3) Flooring - other construction.

(a) In the erection of a building having double wood floor construction, the rough flooring shall be completed as the building progresses, including the tier below the one on which floor joists are being installed.

(b) For single wood floor or other flooring systems, the floor immediately below the story where the floor joists are being installed shall be kept planked or decked over.

(D) Structural steel assembly.

(1) During the final placing of solid web structural members, the load shall not be released from the hoisting line until the members are secured with no less than two bolts, or the equivalent, at each connection, drawn up wrench tight.

(2) Open web steel joists shall not be placed on any structural steel framework unless such framework is securely bolted or welded.

(3) In steel framing, where bar joists are utilized, and columns are not framed in at least two directions with structural steel members, bar joists shall be field-bolted at columns to provide lateral stability during construction.

(4) Where longspan joists or trusses, sixty feet (18.3 meters) or longer, are used, a row or rows of bolted bridging shall be installed to provide lateral stability during construction prior to slacking of hoisting line.

(5) No load shall be placed on open web steel joists until they are permanently anchored.

(6) Tag lines shall be used for controlling loads.

(E) Bolting, riveting, fitting-up, and plumbing-up.

(1) General requirements.

(a) Containers shall be provided for storing or carrying rivets, bolts, and drift pins, and be secured against accidental displacement when aloft.

(b) Before any adjustments or repairs are made on pneumatic hand tools, the pressure in hose lines shall be released, and the tool shall be disconnected from the power source.

(c) Air hose couplings shall be linked together at each joint by a chain or other device or method to reduce whipping in the event of accidental disconnect.

(2) Bolting.

(a) When bolts or drift pins are being knocked out, means shall be provided to keep them from falling.

(b) Impact wrenches shall be provided with a locking device for retaining the socket.

(3) Riveting.

(a) When rivet heads are knocked off, or backed out, means shall be provided to keep them from falling.

(b) A safety wire shall be properly installed on the snap and on the handle of the pneumatic riveting hammer. The wire size shall be no less than "No. 9 (B&S Gauge)", or equivalent, leaving the handle and annealed "No. 14", or equivalent, on the snap.

(4) Plumbing-up.

(a) Connections of the equipment used in plumbing-up shall be properly secured.

(b) Plumbing-up guys and related equipment shall be placed so that employees can get at the connection points.

(5) Planking shall be of proper thickness and width to carry the intended working load and shall provide a factor of safety of no less than four.

(6) Metal decking of sufficient strength shall be laid tight and secured to prevent movement.

(7) Planks shall overlap the bearing on each end by no less than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters).

(8) Wire mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent, shall be used around columns where planks do not fit tightly.

(9) Provisions shall be made to secure temporary flooring against displacement.

(10) All unused openings in floors, temporary or permanent, shall be completely planked over or guarded.

(11) Employees shall be provided with a safety harness and lifelines, securely fastened to a permanent part of the structure, when they are working on float scaffolds.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:56 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-21 Diving operations.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) Supervision.

A diver, lead diver, or dive supervisor, hereafter referred to only as 'supervisor', shall be designated and shall be in charge of all diving operations.

(2) Timekeeper.

One member selected from within the crew shall be designated and instructed by the supervisor to perform the duties of timekeeper for each dive.

(3) Activities of others.

All parties whose activities in the area could create a hazard to the diving operations shall be so notified by the supervisor and be kept informed when such operations commence and when they are concluded.

(D) Personnel.

All diving personnel shall be properly qualified physically and by training or experience to safely conduct a diving operation.

(1) Diver physical condition.

Divers suffering from severe colds, sinus infections, ear trouble, alcoholic intoxication or its after-effects, acute illness or under the influence of drugs shall not be required to dive.

(a) Frequency of examination.

All diving personnel must undergo a thorough physical examination prior to initial exposure to hyperbaric conditions. Subsequent to initial exam, all diving personnel shall be re-examined at twelve-month intervals.

(b) Physician statement.

A statement is to be provided to the diver's employer certifying the diver's physical qualification or lack of qualification to engage in diving activities. The statement is to include the name of the diver, date and location of the examination, name of examining physician, address of location at which the medical record is stored, and the qualification or disqualification of the diver.

(2) Diver equipment.

Divers shall only use equipment with which they have been thoroughly trained.

(E) Equipment.

(1) Responsibility.

The employer shall be responsible for furnishing all safety equipment. Where divers provide their own protective equipment, such equipment shall give equal or greater protection than that furnished by the employer.

(2) Operating conditions.

All equipment used in diving operations shall be in proper operating condition and thoroughly tested, under the supervision of the supervisor, prior to use.

(3) Gas supply.

There shall be both a primary and a secondary source of compressed air for each dive.

(4) Protection of hoses.

All hoses leading to and from the diver's life support which are exposed to potential damage from external hazards, such as falling objects, personnel, or traffic, shall be protected.

(5) Decompression chambers.

(a) For any dives in excess of one hundred feet (30.5 meters) of water requiring stage decompression, a decompression chamber and a qualified attendant shall be available at the job site.

(b) The decompression chamber shall be located to provide easy access and allow for recompression to the required depth within a maximum of five minutes unless the decompression schedule in use requires a shorter surface interval.

(F) Procedures during dive.

(1) Water entry and exit.

(a) A means capable of supporting the diver shall be provided for entering and exiting the water.

(b) The means provided for exiting the water shall extend below the water surface.

(2) In the absence of a physician, an employee who has a valid certificate in first aid training, including training in oxygen resuscitation equipment, shall be available at the job site at all times.

(3) The diver's hose shall be attached to a safety harness and not the weight belt except on deep-sea gear.

(4) The diver shall carry a sharp knife as a standard piece of diving equipment.

(G) Surface-supplied diving operations.

(1) Topside jobsite.

(a) Warning signals, such as an international "A" flag, shall be displayed during diving operations.

(b) All diving compressors must be situated so that exhaust fumes or other harmful contaminants do not enter the compressor intake.

(d) Divers shall not be required to dive if work is being performed by other personnel overhead, and the overhead work creates a hazard to the diver.

(e) A diving safety manual that cover all diving operations, emergency care, recompression, and a set of appropriate decompression tables shall be available at the diving site.

(f) At the job site there shall be a list of telephone numbers and locations for: nearest decompression chamber, medical doctor, and transportation.

(g) A propeller guard shall be installed on all craft used in all liveboating operations.

(h) Voice communications shall be provided between the dive tender and the boat operator.

(2) Underwater jobsite.

(a) A diver's bottom time, or the "residual nitrogen time," from repetitive dives must not exceed those limits spelled out in the employer's diving safety manual that cover all diving operations, emergency care, and recompression. A dive performed within twelve hours of surfacing from a previous dive is a repetitive dive. The period between dives is the surface interval. Excess nitrogen requires twelve hours to effectively leave the body, as referenced in appropriate decompression tables.

(b) A diver shall wear a bail-out bottle during all liveboating operations, i.e., boat underway.

(c) Prior to all lifting operations a signal system shall be established and reviewed with all personnel involved with the dive.

(3) Standby diver.

(a) A standby diver must be ready to reach the primary diver when the operation involves dives in excess of one hundred feet (30.5 meters), any dive requiring stage decompression, or during any operation where the primary diver cannot surface by straight ascent. When two divers are in the water working together, they can be considered as standing by for each other if one can reach the other within three minutes.

(b) The standby diver is required to tend the primary diver at the point of entry into underwater structures, such as wrecks and tunnels.

(H) Self-contained diving (scuba).

(1) Basic in-water requirements.

Scuba procedures may only be used in situations in which one of the following techniques is provided:

(a) A "buddy" system, i.e. two divers in the water maintaining constant visual or physical contact with each other;

(b) Voice communications between the scuba diver and the surface and if wireless communications are used, a locating means must be provided; or

(c) A safety line between the diver and a surface tender which provides a means of communications through the use of pull signals on the safety line.

(2) Equipment.

(a) Equipment shall be the open circuit, demand regulator type with a valid interstate commerce commission stamp on the air tank.

(b) Both tank and weight belt shall be equipped with quick release buckles.

(I) Emergency procedures.

Emergency procedures shall be established to provide for the following circumstances as may be applicable and shall be reviewed by the diver and the surface support crew before the dive:

(1) Loss of voice communications in the water or in the chamber;

(2) Interruption of the surface gas supply;

(3) Severance of the diver's hose bundle;

(4) Entanglement or entrapment;

(5) Occurrence of oxygen poisoning;

(6) Occurrence of decompression sickness; and

(7) Occurrence of unplanned buoyant ascent.

(J) Underwater cutting and welding.

(1) Disconnect switch.

A disconnect switch shall be used in the electrical circuit and shall be located in such a position that the diving tender on the intercommunication system can operate or oversee its operation at all times when the diver is below the surface. The disconnect switch shall be in the open position except when the diver is actually cutting or welding.

(2) Insulated gloves.

Rubber or other insulated gloves shall be provided and shall be used by the diver during underwater electric cutting and welding operations.

(K) Record keeping - diving operations.

An individual record or log entry for each diving exposure, that includes all the following data, is to be maintained:

(1) Location;

(2) Divers', tenders', and supervisors' names;

(3) Water depth;

(4) Bottom time;

(5) Type of equipment used;

(6) Estimated environmental conditions;

(7) Decompression schedule used;

(8) Gas used and composition;

(9) Type of work performed;

(10) Unusual conditions;

(11) Repetitive dive designations or time of last exposure;

(12) Record of hospitalizations; and

(13) Safe practices manuals.

(L) Hose and fittings.

(1) Testing and replacement.

(a) Hoses and fittings shall be tested at least once a year to one and one-half times their maximum working pressure. If exposed to rough usage or unusual conditions, hoses and fittings shall be inspected more frequently.

(b) Hose showing abrasion of outer cover which exposes the reinforcement, shall be replaced.

(d) Hose which has sustained other damage must be pressure tested to one and one-half times the maximum working pressure plus one hundred pounds per square inch, (6.9 bar) prior to use.

(e) Records shall be kept of all pressure tests and the test dates, and the records shall be signed by the individual responsible for each of them.

(2) Marking.

Each hose section shall be given a serial number for record keeping purposes.

(3) Fittings.

Connections shall be of a type that cannot be accidentally disengaged from the gas supply.

(4) Oxygen piping.

Hard piping systems, fittings, and tubings carrying pure, high pressure, i.e., capable of withstanding pressure of to two thousand five hundred pounds per square inch (172.4 bar), oxygen shall be of corrosion resistant metals, such as copper, brass, "300" series stainless steel, or monel.

Last updated November 3, 2025 at 7:39 AM

History

Effective: November 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-22 Woodworking machines, power saws, and other tools and equipment.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Cutting wheels" means organic bonded wheels designed for use with power driven equipment for a multitude of operations variously known as cutting, cutting-off, grooving, slotting, coping, or jointing.

(2) "Grinding wheels" means wheels composed of a uniform mixture of an abrasive material and a bond formed or molded into a single piece and designed for use with power driven equipment to reduce the dimensions of other materials held against them on the periphery or a side surface.

(1) Boring and mortising machines.

(a) Mortising machines, except hollow chisel mortisers.

Mortising machines, except hollow chisel mortisers, shall be provided with thumb stops at each side of the chisel or with equivalent protection.

(b) Chain mortisers.

The top of the cutting chain and driving mechanism shall be guarded.

Bits on all automatic boring machines shall be guarded at the points of operation.

(d) Chuck design.

Safety bit chucks with no projecting set screws shall be used.

(e) This section shall not apply to lock and butt mortising machines.

(2) Sanding machines.

(a) Belt sanders.

Belt sanders shall have both pulleys guarded in such manner as to guard the points where the belt runs onto the pulleys. The edges of the unused run of the belt shall be guarded.

(b) Disc sanders.

Disc sanders shall have a guard so arranged as to enclose the periphery and back of the revolving disc, except such portion of the face of the disc above the table, if a table is used, as may be required for the application of the material to be finished.

Drum sanders shall have a guard so arranged as to enclose the revolving drum, except such portion of the drum above the table, if a table is used, as may be required for the application of the material to be finished.

(3) Wood shapers.

(a) Cutting heads.

The cutting heads of each wood shaper, hand-fed panel raiser, or other similar machine, not automatically fed, shall be guarded. The diameter of circular shaper guards shall be no less than the greatest diameter of the cutter. When single cutter knives in shaper heads are used, the shaper heads shall be balanced.

(b) Routers.

The pulleys, spindles, and cutting tools shall be guarded. Turnplates, jigs, and fixtures which keep the operator's hands out of the danger zone may be provided as an alternative.

(D) Power driven saws.

All cracked saw blades shall be removed from service.

(1) Circular saws.

The exposed portion of the saw blade above the table and under the table shall be guarded.

(a) Rip saw, manual feed.

A hood type guard shall be provided, the design of which shall:

(i) When not in use, cover the saw blade at all times;

(ii) When in use, automatically adjust the guard to the thickness of, and remain in contact with, the material being cut when the stock encounters the saw blade, or may be a fixed or manually adjusted hood or guard, provided the space between the bottom of the guard and the material being cut does not exceed three-eighths inch (ten millimeters) at any time;

(iii) Prevent a kick-back, or a separate attachment that will prevent a kick-back shall be provided, effective for all thickness of material that are cut; and

(iv) Have a spreader securely fastened at the rear of the saw in alignment with the saw blade, except where a roller wheel is provided at the back of the saw, and the spreader shall be slightly thinner than the saw kerf, and slightly thicker than the saw disc, to prevent the material from squeezing the saw blade.

(v) Alternate method.

Where the method of guarding as specified in paragraphs (D)(1)(a)(i) to (D)(1)(a)(iv) of this rule is impossible, a substantial jig, fixture, or template may be used which shall be designed to keep the hands of the operator out of the danger zone.

(b) Portable circular power saws.

Portable circular power saws shall have a hood type guard over the upper half of the blade. The lower half of the saw blade shall be guarded with a retracting guard designed to automatically adjust to the material being cut.

(i) A hood type guard shall be attached to the frame and shall completely cover the upper half of the saw blade, the arbor end, and the point of operation at all positions of the saw.

(ii) Automatic return.

The saw shall return automatically to the back of the table when released at any point of its travel without rebound of the blade.

(d) Radial arm saws.

(i) The upper hood shall completely enclose the upper portion of the blade down to a point that will include the end of the saw arbor. The upper hood shall be constructed in such a manner and of such material that it will protect the operator from flying objects, such as splinters and broken saw teeth, and will deflect sawdust away from the operator. The sides of the lower exposed portion of the blade shall be guarded to the full diameter of the blade by a device that will automatically adjust itself to the thickness of the stock and remain in contact with stock being cut.

(ii) The hood type guard shall be so designed as to prevent a kick-back when used for ripping, or a separate attachment that will prevent a kick-back shall be provided, effective for all thicknesses of material that are cut.

(iii) A stop shall be installed which shall prevent the saw from traveling beyond the front edge of the table.

(iv) The direction of the saw rotation shall be conspicuously marked on the hood.

(v) The saw shall return automatically to the back of the table when released at any point of its travel without rebound of the blade.

(e) Masonry saws.

(i) Guarding.

A hood type guard shall be provided over the wheel of masonry saws.

(ii) Blades.

Only reinforced abrasive blades or diamond blades shall be used on masonry saws.

(2) Band saws and band knives.

All portions of the saw blade or band blade shall be enclosed or guarded, except for the working portion of the blade between the bottom of the guide rolls and the table. Band saw wheels shall be fully enclosed. The outside of the periphery of the enclosure shall be solid. The front and back of the band wheels shall be enclosed by solid material, wire mesh, or perforated metal, the dimensions and material of which shall be in accordance with the appendix to rule 4123:1-3-05 of the Administrative Code.

(E) Portable chain saws.

Portable chain saws shall have all guards and handles, as provided by the manufacturer, in place, with all controls functioning properly and mufflers operative. Electrically powered chain saws shall comply with paragraph (H) of this rule.

(F) Power grinders.

(1) External grinding machines.

On all portable grinding machines used for external grinding, a substantial guard shall be provided unless the grinding wheels are equipped with protection flanges, bands, or chucks, except that these requirements shall not apply if grinding wheels are less than two inches (5.1 centimeters) in diameter and are operated at a peripheral speed not exceeding three thousand feet (914.4 meters) per minute. The exposure, or unguarded portion, of the grinding wheel periphery shall be as small as the work will permit for external grinding. Where the nature of the work is such that the material acts as a shield to the periphery of the grinding wheel, the material shall be construed as constituting a guard, and no additional guard shall be required.

(2) Bench or floor stand.

The angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on machines known as bench or floor stands shall not exceed ninety degrees or one-fourth of the periphery, and the angular exposure shall begin at a point no more than sixty-five degrees above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle, as shown in "Figure 22-1" and "Figure 22-2," provided that whenever the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle, the angular exposure shall not exceed one hundred twenty-five degrees, as shown in "Figure 22-3" and "Figure 22-4."

(3) Work rests.

On off-hand grinding machines work rests shall be used to support the work. They shall be of rigid construction and designed to be adjustable to compensate for wheel wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted to a maximum opening of one-eighth inch (three millimeters) to prevent the work from being jammed between the wheel and the rest. The employer shall instruct the employee to securely clamp the work rest after each adjustment. The employer shall also instruct the employee not to adjust the work rest with the wheel in motion.

(G) Pneumatically powered tools.

All pneumatically powered portable tools shall be equipped with an automatic shutoff valve, or "dead-man" control, so arranged as to close the air inlet valve when the pressure of the operator's hand is removed. Each tool shall be equipped with a retainer where accidental ejection is possible.

(H) Grounding.

All electrically powered portable tools and equipment with exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts shall be grounded. Portable tools and equipment protected by an approved system of double insulation, or its equivalent, need not be grounded. Where such an approved system is employed the equipment shall be distinctively marked.

(I) Power cutoff and pressure control devices.

(1) Portable powered tools.

All hand-held powered drills, tappers, fastener drives, horizontal, vertical, and angle grinders with wheels greater than two inches (5.1 centimeters) in diameter, disc sanders with discs greater than two inches (5.1 centimeters) in diameter, belt sanders, reciprocating saws, saber, scroll, and jig saws with blade shanks greater than a nominal one-fourth inch (six millimeters), and other similarly operating powered tools shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch or control, and may have a lock-on control provided that turn-off can be accomplished by a single motion of the same finger or fingers that turn it on.

(2) Use of compressed air tools.

(a) In operations requiring the use of compressed air tools, the wearing of eye protection is required in all cases.

(b) The employer shall instruct the employee that compressed air shall not be used for personal cleaning purposes.

(J) Portable pneumatically powered fasteners.

(1) Actuating mechanism.

(a) Two separate and distinct operations shall be required to activate the fastener. The final activating movement, such as depressing a trigger, shall be separate from the prerequisite that the fastener be held firmly against the work surface before it will operate.

(b) The fastener shall be designed so that it cannot fire during loading or during preparation to fire, or if the fastener should be dropped while loaded.

(2) Air hose.

Hose and hose connections used for conducting compressed air to utilization equipment shall be those designed for the pressure and service to which they are subjected.

(3) Pressure regulator.

The fastener shall be equipped with a pressure regulator or other device to prevent air pressure from exceeding the maximum design capacity of the fastener.

(K) Portable safety containers.

Approved portable safety containers shall be provided for handling flammable liquids with a flash point below one hundred forty degrees Fahrenheit (sixty degrees Celsius) in quantities of one gallon (3.8 liters) or more. The containers shall be legibly marked as flammable.

Last updated July 13, 2026 at 3:39 PM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-23 Helicopters.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

Loads shall be balanced and securely fastened. Tag lines, where used, shall be of a length that will not permit their being drawn up into the rotors. Pressed sleeve, swedged eyes, or equivalent means shall be used for all freely suspended loads to prevent hand splices from spinning open or cable clamps from loosening.

(D) Cargo hooks.

All electrically operated cargo hooks shall have the electrical activating device so designed and installed as to prevent inadvertent operation. In addition, the cargo hooks shall be equipped with an emergency mechanical control for releasing the load. Hooks shall be tested prior to each day's operation to determine that the release functions properly, both electrically and mechanically.

(E) Personal protective equipment.

Personal protective equipment shall be provided and shall consist of complete eye protection and a hard hat secured by a chinstrap.

(F) Housekeeping.

Good housekeeping shall be maintained in all helicopter loading and unloading areas.

(G) Weight limitation.

The weight of an external load shall not exceed the helicopter manufacturer's rating.

(H) Signal systems.

The employer shall instruct the aircrew and ground personnel on the signal systems to be used and shall review the system with the employees in advance of hoisting the load. This applies to both radio and hand signal systems. Hand signals, where used, shall be as shown in the appendix to this rule, "Helicopter Hand Signals."

(I) Communications.

There shall be constant reliable communication between the pilot and a designated employee of the ground crew who acts as a signalman during the period of loading and unloading. The signalman shall be clearly distinguishable from other ground personnel.

(J) Fires.

Open fires are prohibited in areas where they could be spread by the rotor downwash.

View Appendix

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:56 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-3-24 Roof car suspended platforms - construction.

(A) Roof car.

(1) The horizontal speed of a roof car shall be no more than fifty feet (15.2 meters) per minute.

(2) A roof car may not be moved horizontally unless means are in place to prevent the car from moving outside the areas provided for roof car travel.

(3) The roof car shall be designed and installed in such a manner as to remain stable and upright under every loading condition.

(4) A roof car shall be so positioned and anchored to the structure as to ensure that the working platform is placed and retained in proper position for vertical travel.

(5) The operating device controlling movement of a roof car shall be of the continuous pressure weatherproof electric type and be located on the roof car, the working platform, or both. If located on both, such operating devices shall be interlocked so that control is possible only from one at a time.

(6) The operating device controlling movement of a roof car shall not be operable until the working platform is at its uppermost position for travel and is not in contact with the building face or fixed vertical guides in the face of the building, and until all protective devices and interlocks are in a position for movement.

(7) If the access to the roof car at any point of its travel is not over the roof area, standard guardrails with self-closing, self-locking gates shall be provided on the roof car.

(B) Working platforms.

(1) Each suspended unit component, except suspension ropes and guardrail systems, shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least four times the maximum intended live load applied or transmitted to that component.

(2) Each working platform shall bear the manufacturer's load rating plate, conspicuously posted and legible, stating the maximum permissible load.

(3) The vertical speed of a working platform suspended by four or more hoisting ropes shall be no more than seventy-five feet (22.9 meters) per minute.

(4) The vertical speed of a working platform suspended by less than four hoisting ropes shall be no more than thirty-five feet (10.7 meters) per minute.

(5) The working platform shall be no less than twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters) wide.

(6) The working platform shall be provided with toeboards and with permanent guardrails no less than thirty-six inches (91.4 centimeters) high, and no more than forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) high at the front (building side). At the rear, and on the sides, a standard guardrail and toeboard shall be provided. An intermediate guardrail shall be provided around the entire platform between the top guardrail and the toeboard.

(7) The platform flooring shall be of the nonskid type.

(8) Access gates shall be self-closing and self-locking. Access gates are required where access to the working platform is not over the roof area.

(9) A means shall be provided to prevent inadvertent horizontal movement of the working platform.

(10) The operating device controlling vertical movement of the working platform shall be of the continuous pressure weatherproof electric type and be located on the working platform.

(11) The operating device controlling vertical movement shall be operable only when all electrical protective devices and interlocks on the working platform are in normal operating position, and the roof car is at an established operating point.

(12) On roof-powered platforms, an emergency electric operating device shall be provided near the hoisting machine for use in the event of failure of the normal operating device for the working platform or failure of the traveling cable system. This emergency device shall be mounted in a secured compartment and be labeled with instructions for use. A means for opening the compartment housing the emergency operating device shall be mounted in a break-glass receptacle located near the operating device.

(1) Hoisting equipment shall consist of a power-driven drum or drums contained in the roof car, i.e., roof-powered platform, or contained on the working platform, i.e., self-powered platform.

(2) Hoisting equipment shall be power-operated in both up and down directions.

(3) Where exposed to contact, rotating shafts, drums, couplings, and other mechanisms and gears shall be guarded.

(4) Friction devices or clutches shall not be used for connecting the main driving mechanism to the drum or drums. Belt- or chain-driven machines are not permitted.

(5) Hoisting motors shall be electric and of weatherproof construction.

(6) Hoisting motors shall be directly connected to the hoisting machinery. Motor couplings, if used, shall be of steel construction.

(7) Hoisting machines shall have two independent braking means, each designed to stop and hold the working platform with one hundred twenty-five per cent of rated load.

(D) Hoisting ropes and winding drums.

(1) Each hoisting rope shall be made of wire and shall be no less than five-sixteenths inch (eight millimeters) in diameter.

(2) Working platforms shall be suspended by no less than two ropes with a safety factor of ten as calculated under the following formula:

F = S x N/W

Where

S = manufacturer's rated breaking strength of one rope

N = number of ropes under load

W = maximum static load on all ropes with the platform and its rated load at any point of its travel

(3) Where winding drums are used, the rope shall be wound in level layers.

(4) Winding drums shall have no less than three turns of rope remaining when the working platform is at its lowest possible point of travel.

(5) Where the working platform is suspended by more than two ropes, the nondrum ends of the ropes shall be provided with individual shackle rods which will permit individual adjustment of rope lengths.

(6) The lengthening or repairing of wire ropes by splicing is not permitted.

(7) More than one reverse bend in the length of each rope is not permitted.

(8) Wire rope shall not be used if the wire rope is not maintained and used in accordance with procedures recommended by the wire rope manufacturer; contains broken wires exceeding three wires in one strand or six wires in one rope lay; contains a broken wire within eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) of the end attachments; the outer wire wear exceeds one-third of the original outer wire diameter; or the rope shows other signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or defect.

(E) Electrical protective devices.

(1) Electrical protective devices and interlocks shall be of the weatherproof type.

(2) When a traveling cable storage reel is used, an electric contact shall be provided and so connected that the electric contact will cause the relay for vertical travel to open if the tension on the traveling cable exceeds safe limits.

(3) An automatic overload device shall be provided to cut off electrical power to the circuit in all hoisting motors for travel in the up direction, should the load applied to the hoisting ropes at either end of the working platform exceed one hundred twenty-five per cent of its normal tension with rated load as shown on the manufacturer's data plate on the working platform.

(4) An automatic device shall be provided for each hoisting rope which will cut off electrical power to the hoisting motor or motors in the down direction and will apply the brakes if any hoisting rope becomes slack.

(5) Upper and lower directional limit devices shall be provided to prevent the travel of the working platform beyond the normal upper and lower limits of travel.

(6) Directional limit devices, if driven from the hoisting machine by chains, tapes, or cables, shall incorporate a device to disconnect the electric power from the hoisting machine and apply both the primary and secondary brakes in the event of failure of the driving means.

(7) On platforms with four or more ropes, final terminal stopping devices for the working platform shall be provided as a secondary means of preventing the working platform from over-traveling at the terminals.

(8) Emergency stop switches shall be provided in, or adjacent to, each operating device.

(9) Electrical cord strain relief anchors and grip or equivalent means shall be provided to prevent the electrical cord from pulling on the receptacle.

(F) Emergency communications.

A means of two-way communication shall be provided for each roof car suspended platform for use in an emergency.

(G) Fall protection.

Each employee on working platforms shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system.

Last updated June 30, 2025 at 7:56 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Chapter 4123:1-5 Workshops and Factories

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-01 Scope and definitions.

(A) Scope.

The purpose of this chapter of the Administrative Code is to provide reasonable safety for life, limb, and health of employees. In cases of practical difficulty or unnecessary hardship, the Ohio bureau of workers' compensation may grant exceptions from the literal specifications of the rules of this chapter to permit the use of other devices or methods when, in the opinion of the bureau, the equivalent protection is thereby secured.

The specific provisions of this chapter pertain to the employer for the protection of such employer's employees and no others and apply to all workshops and factories subject to the Workers' Compensation Act (sections 4123.01 to 4123.99 of the Revised Code). Specific provisions of other chapters of the Administrative Code adopted by the Ohio bureau of workers' compensation apply to the particular industry covered by any such other chapter, and, to the extent of conflict between this chapter and such other chapter, the latter will govern, but in all other respects this chapter is deemed to apply and the other to be a supplement of this chapter.

Installations or constructions built or contracted for prior to the effective date (shown at the end of each rule) of any specification are deemed to comply with the provisions of these rules if such installations or constructions comply either with the provisions of the current rules or with the provisions of any applicable rule which was in effect at the time contracted for or built.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Access board (hot board)": a platform designed to be fastened to a pole or structure and having dielectric properties equal to dry wood.

(2) "Adjustable barrier guard": a barrier that is adjustable for each job setup or die setup.

(3) "Aerial device": any vehicle-mounted telescoping or articulating device which is used to position personnel at job sites.

(4) "Air contaminants": concentrations of dust, mist, fume, gas or vapor, or any combination thereof when suspended in the atmosphere.

(5) "Air-lift hammer": (see "gravity hammers").

(6) "Angle of repose": the greatest angle above the horizontal plane at which unexcavated material will lie without sliding.

(7) "Anti-repeat": the part of the clutch/brake control system designed to limit a mechanical power press to a single stroke if the tripping means is held on the operating position. Anti-repeat requires release of all tripping mechanisms before another stroke can be initiated. Anti-repeat is also called "single stroke reset" or "reset circuit."

(8) "Approved": sanctioned, endorsed, accredited, certified, or accepted as satisfactory by a duly constituted and nationally recognized authority or agency.

(9) "Approved storage facility (magazine)": a facility for the storage of explosive materials covered by a license or permit issued under authority of the appropriate governmental agencies.

(10) "Bearer": a horizontal member of a scaffold upon which the platform rests and which may be supported by ledgers.

(11) "Blast area": the area in which explosives loading and blasting operations are being conducted.

(12) "Blaster": a person qualified to be in charge of and responsible for the loading and firing of a blast.

(13) "Blasting agent": any material or mixture consisting of a fuel and oxidizer intended for blasting, not otherwise classified as an explosive, and in which none of the ingredients are classified as an explosive, provided that the finished product, as mixed and packaged for use or shipment, cannot be detonated by means of a no. 8 test blasting cap when unconfined.

(14) "Blasting cap": (see "detonator").

(15) "Board-type drop hammer": (see "gravity hammers").

(16) "Boatswain's chair": a seat supported by slings attached to a suspended rope, designed to accommodate one employee in a sitting position.

(17) "Bolster plate": the plate attached to the top of the bed of a power press having drilled holes or T-slots for attaching the lower die or die shoe.

(18) "Brace":

(a) Scaffold

A tie that holds one scaffold member in a fixed position with respect to another member.

(b) Trench

The horizontal members of the shoring system with ends bearing against the uprights or stringers.

(19) "Brake (mechanical power press)": the mechanism used to stop and hold the crankshaft, either directly or through a gear train, when the clutch is disengaged.

(20) "Brake monitor": a sensor designed, constructed, and arranged to monitor the effectiveness of a mechanical power press braking system.

(21) "Bulldozers": stationary power-driven machines used chiefly for bending operations. They have a movable head operated by links attached to the main drive gears and moving in a horizontal plane.

(22) "Circuit" a conductor or system of conductors through which an electric current flows or may flow.

(23) "Cleats": ladder crosspieces of rectangular cross-sections placed on edge on which an employee may step in ascending or descending.

(24) "Climbers": lineman's tools used on the legs and feet to enable the lineman to climb wooden poles.

(25) "Clutch": the coupling mechanism used on a mechanical power press to couple the flywheel to the crankshaft, either directly or through a gear train.

(26) "Collector" (see "separator").

(27) "Conductor": metallic material suitable for carrying an electric current.

(28) "Confined space": meets all of the following three criteria:

(a) Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned work;

(b) Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry.); and

(29) "Contact distance (electrical)": that distance within which contact in doing the work or contact in the event of reaching, slipping, or falling may possibly occur.

(30) "Control system": sensors, manual input, and mode selection elements, interlocking and decision-making circuitry, and output elements to a mechanical power press operating mechanism.

(31) "Counterbalance": the mechanism that is used to balance or support the weight of the connecting rods, slide, and slide attachments on a power press.

(32) "Coupler": a device for locking together the component parts of a tubular metal scaffold.

(33) "Cutting-off wheels": organically bonded wheels designed for use with power-driven equipment for a multitude of operations variously known as cutting, cutting-off, grooving, slotting, coping, jointing, etc.

(34) "Danger zone": the point of operation where a known hazard exists.

(35) "Deenergized": free from any electrical connection to a source of potential different from that of the earth.

(36) "Designated employee": an employee selected or assigned by the employer or the employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties.

(37) "Detonating cord": a flexible cord containing a center core of high explosives and used to initiate other explosives.

(38) "Detonator": any device containing a detonating charge that is used for initiating detonation in an explosive; the term includes, but is not limited to, electric blasting caps of instantaneous and delay types, blasting caps for use with safety fuse, detonating cord delay connectors, and non-electric instantaneous and delay blasting caps.

(39) "Dielectric": a nonconductor of electric current which will not absorb moisture, such as fiberglass, or equivalent.

(40) "Die setting": the process of placing or removing dies in or from a power press, and the process of adjusting the dies, other tooling, and safeguarding means to cause them to function properly and safely.

(41) "Die shoe": a plate or block upon which a die holder is mounted. A die shoe functions primarily as a base for the complete die assembly, and, when used, is bolted or clamped to the bolster plate or the face of the slide.

(42) "Dockboard (bridge plate)": a movable plate (usually metal) for bridging the gap between motor vehicle or freight car and a dock or loading platform.

(43) "Energized": anything connected to an electrical source having a greater potential than that of the earth.

(44) "Excavation": any man made cavity or depression in the earth's surface, including its sides, walls, or faces, formed by earth removal and producing unsupported earth conditions by reason of the excavation. If installed forms or similar structures reduce the depth-to-width relationship, an excavation may become a trench.

(45) "Exhaust system": includes suction systems, hoods, ducts, fans, separators, receptacles, and other parts necessary for the proper installation and operation thereof.

(46) "Explosive": any chemical compound or mixture that is intended for the purpose of producing an explosion.

(47) "Exposed to contact": the location of the material or object which, during the course of operation, is accessible to an employee in performance of the employee's regular or assigned duty.

(48) "Face of slide": the bottom surface of the slide to which the punch or upper die of a power press is generally attached.

(49) "Factor of safety": the ratio between the ultimate breaking stress and the working stress of the material, structure, or device. For example, the term "factor of safety of four" means that the material, structure, or device is constructed of such strength that the maximum load will be one-fourth the designed ultimate breaking load. Where other factors of safety appear, they will apply in the same manner. The standard of "The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)" will be used in determining the strength of material except as otherwise provided herein.

(50) "Feed rolls": in-running rolls which perform no other function than to feed material to the point of operation.

(51) "Feeding": the process of placing or removing material within or from the point of operation. This may be done automatically, semi-automatically, or manually.

(52) "Fire-resistance rating": the measured time in hours or fractions thereof that the material or construction will withstand fire exposure, as determined by fire tests conducted in conformity with recognized standards.

(53) "Fire-resistive construction": a method of construction which prevents or retards the passage of hot gases or flames as defined by the fire-resistance rating.

(54) "Flanges": collars, discs, or plates between which grinding wheels are mounted and are referred to as adaptor, sleeve, or back-up type.

(55) "Floor hole": A gap or open space in a floor, roof, horizontal walking-working surface, or similar surface that is two inches or more in its least dimension.

(56) "Floor opening": an opening measuring twelve inches or more in its least dimension, in any floor, platform, pavement, or yard, through which a person may fall; such as a hatchway, stair or ladder opening, pit or large manhole.

(57) "Foot control (part revolution clutch press)": the foot-operated control mechanism designed to be used with a clutch or clutch/brake control system.

(58) "Foot pedal (full revolution clutch press)": the foot-operated lever designed to operate the mechanical linkage that trips a full revolution clutch.

(59) "Forging": the product of work on metal formed to a desired shape by impact or pressure in hammers, forging machines (upsetters), presses, rolls, and related forming equipment.

(60) "Forging presses": a class of forging equipment wherein the shaping of metal between dies is performed by mechanical or hydraulic pressure.

(61) "Full revolution clutch (mechanical power press)": a type of clutch that, when tripped, cannot be disengaged until the crankshaft has completed a full revolution and the press slide a full stroke.

(62) "Fumes": small solid particles formed by the condensation of vapors of solid materials.

(63) "Gas": a formless fluid which tends to occupy an entire space uniformly at ordinary temperatures and pressures.

(64) "Gate" or "movable barrier device": a movable barrier arranged to enclose the point of operation before a power stroke can be started.

(65) "Grab bars": individual handholds placed adjacent to or as an extension above ladders for the purpose of providing access beyond the limits of the ladder.

(66) "Gravity hammers": A class of forging hammer wherein energy for forging is obtained by the mass and velocity of a freely falling ram and the attached upper die. Examples: board-type drop hammers and air-lift hammers.

(67) "Ground":

(a) "Ground connection": the equipment used in establishing a path between an electric circuit or equipment and earth. A ground connection consists of a ground conductor, a ground electrode, and the earth which surrounds the electrode.

(b) "Grounded": connected to earth by a ground connection.

(c) "Grounded effectively": connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the building up of voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to employees.

(68) "Grounding conductor": a conductor which is used to connect the equipment or the wiring system with a grounding electrode or electrodes.

(69) "Guard": the covering, fencing, railing, or enclosure which shields an object from accidental contact. (See also "safety guard.")

(70) "Guarded": means that the object is covered, fenced, railed, enclosed, or otherwise shielded from accidental contact.

(71) "Guide post": the pin attached to the upper or lower die shoe, operating within the bushing on the opposing die shoe, to maintain the alignment of the upper and lower dies of a power press.

(72) "Handhold (handgrip)": a device attached to a manlift which can be grasped by the passenger to provide a means of maintaining balance.

(a) "Closed type": a cup-shaped device into which the passenger may place his fingers, open at the top in the direction of travel of the step for which it is to be used, and closed at the bottom.

(b) "Open type": one which has a handgrip surface fully exposed and capable of being encircled by the passenger's fingers.

(73) "Handrail": a a lengthwise member mounted directly on the wall, floor or partition by means of brackets that will furnish an adequate handhold for anyone grasping it to avoid falling.

(74) "Hazardous concentrations (as applied to air contaminants)": concentrations of air contaminants which are in excess of established occupational exposure limits.

(75) "Head protection devices":

(a) "Bump cap or hat": a thin-shelled plastic headgear worn to provide protection to the head from bumps or lacerations but does not meet the specifications for protective helmets.

(b) "Crown straps": that part of the suspension which passes over the head.

(c) "Hair enclosure": a hat or cap (other than a protective helmet or bump cap) or a hairnet specifically designed to protect the wearer from entanglement in moving parts of machines, equipment, or from exposure to sparks, hot metal, or ignition.

(d) "Protective helmet": a rigid headgear also known as a safety or hard hat, or as a safety or hard cap, that is worn to provide protection for the head, or portions thereof, against impact, flying articles, or electric shock, or any combination thereof, and which is held in place by a suitable suspension.

(e) "Suspension": the internal cradle of a protective helmet or bump cap which holds it in place on the head and is made up of the headband and crown straps.

(76) "Hood": that part of an exhaust system into which the contaminated air or dust, fumes, mist, vapor, or gas first enters.

(77) "Hot line (live line) tools": those tools which are especially designed for work on energized high voltage conductors and equipment.

(78) "Inch": an intermittent motion imparted to the slide (on mechanical power presses using part revolution clutches) by momentary operation of the inch operating means.

(79) "Kickouts": accidental release or failure of a shore or brace used in trenching.

(80) "Ladder":

(a) "Extension ladder": a portable ladder, adjustable in length. It consists of two or more sections traveling in guides or brackets so arranged as to permit length adjustment. Its size is designated by the sum length of the sections measured along the side rails.

(b) "Extension trestle ladder": a self-supporting portable ladder, adjustable in length, consisting of a trestle ladder base and a vertically adjustable single ladder, with an effective means for locking the ladders together. The size is designated by the length of the trestle ladder base.

(i) "Ladder cage": an enclosure which encircles the climbing space of the ladder and is securely fastened to the side rails of the ladder or to the structure.

(ii) "Ladder well": a permanent complete enclosure around a fixed ladder, which is securely fastened to the walls of the well.

(d) "Individual-rung ladder": a fixed ladder, each rung of which is individually attached to a structure, building, equipment, or manhole.

(e) "Platform stepladder": a modification of a portable stepladder with a working platform provided near the top.

(f) "Rail ladder": a fixed ladder consisting of side rails joined at regular intervals by rungs or cleats and fastened in full length or in sections to a building, structure, or equipment.

(g) "Sectional ladder": a portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of two or more sections so constructed that the sections may be combined to function as a single ladder. Its size is designated by the overall length of the assembled sections.

(h) "Side-rolling ladder": a semifixed ladder, nonadjustable in length, supported by attachments to a guide rail, which is generally fastened to shelving, the plane of the ladder being also its plane of motion.

(i) "Side-step ladder": one from which an employee getting off at the top steps sideways in order to reach the landing.

(j) "Single ladder": a portable, nonadjustable ladder consisting of only one section.

(k) "Stepladder": a self-supporting portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, having flat steps or treads and a hinged back. Its size is designated by the overall length of the ladder measured along the front edge of the side.

(l) "Through ladder": one from which an employee getting off at the top steps through the rails in order to reach the landing.

(m) "Trestle ladder": a self-supporting portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of two sections hinged at the top to form equal angles with the base. The size is designated by the length of the side rails measured along the front edge.

(81) "Lanyard": a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap, which generally has a connector at each end for connecting the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline, or anchorage.

(82) "Leading wire": an insulated wire used between the electric power source and the electric blasting cap circuit.

(83) "Ledger (stringer)": a horizontal scaffold member which extends from post to post and which supports the putlogs or bearer forming a tie between the posts.

(84) "Lifeline": a component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline) and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage.

(85) "Limit switch": a device on a manlift for the purpose of cutting off the power to the motor and applying the brake to stop the carrier in the event that a loaded step passes the terminal landing.

(86) "Magazine": (see "approved storage facility").

(87) "Manlift": a device consisting of a power-driven endless belt with steps or platforms and handholds attached to it for the transportation of personnel from floor to floor.

(88) "Mist": small droplets of materials that are ordinarily liquid at normal temperature and pressure.

(89) "Nominal": in name or form, but not in fact; for example, a piece of lumber described as four inches by four inches but which, in fact, meets a standard which is less.

(90) "Non-current carrying": not intended to be energized.

(91) "Off-hand grinding": the grinding of any material or part which is held in the operator's hand.

(92) "Operator": any employee assigned or authorized to work at the specific equipment.

(93) "Part revolution clutch": a type of clutch that can be disengaged at any point before the crankshaft has completed a full revolution and the press slide a full stroke.

(94) "Pinch, nip, or shear point": the point or points at which it is possible to be caught between the moving parts of a machine, or between the moving and stationary parts of a machine, or between the material and the moving part or parts of a machine.

(95) "Pitch": the included angle between the horizontal and the ladder measured from the opposite side of the ladder from the climbing side.

(96) "Platform": a working space for employees elevated above the surrounding floor or ground.

(97) "Point of operation": the area where material is actually positioned and work is being performed during any process.

(98) "Polishing wheels": wheels designed for use with power-driven equipment to apply a luster or polish to materials.

(99) "Portable explosive-actuated fastening tool": a tool which depends upon an explosive charge to propel or discharge a stud, pin, or fastener, for the purpose of impinging it upon, affixing it to, or penetrating another object or material.

(a) "High-velocity tool": a tool or machine which, when used with a load, propels or discharges a stud, pin, or fastener at velocities in excess of three hundred feet per second.

(b) "Low-velocity tool": a tool or machine which, when used with a load, propels or discharges a stud, pin, or fastener at velocities not in excess of three hundred feet per second.

(100) "Power shears": power-driven machines used for cutting bars, slabs, sheets, or other material.

(101) "Presence sensing device": a device that creates a sensing field or area and deactivates the clutch control and activates the brake of a power press when any part of the operator's body or a hand tool is within such field or area.

(102) "Press": a powered machine that shears, punches, forms, or assembles metal or other material by means of cutting, shaping, or by combination dies attached to slides. A press consists of a stationary bed or anvil, and a slide (or slides) having a controlled reciprocating motion toward and away from the bed surface, the slide being guided in a definite path by the frame of the press.

(103) "Primed cartridge": a cartridge of explosives to which a detonator has been attached as a means of firing.

(104) "Protective shield or guard": a device, attached to the muzzle end of a portable explosive-actuated fastening tool, which is designed to confine flying particles.

(105) "Pull-out device": a mechanism attached to the operator's hands and connected to the upper die or slide of a power press, that is designed, when properly adjusted, to withdraw the operator's hands as the dies close when the operator's hands are inadvertently within the point of operation.

(106) "Railing": a vertical barrier erected above exposed edges of a floor opening, wall opening, ramp, platform, or runway to prevent falls of employees.

(107) "Rated load (roof car suspended platforms)": the combined weight of employees, tools, equipment, and other material which the working platform is designed to lift.

(108) "Rated speed": the speed for which a tool or piece of equipment is designed.

(109) "Repeat": an unintended or unexpected successive stroke of a power press resulting from a malfunction.

(110) "Respiratory devices":

(a) "Air-purifying respirator": a respirator with an air-purifying filter, cartridge, or canister that removes specific air contaminants by passing ambient air through the air-purifying element. These include:

(i) "Mechanical-filter respirator": a respirator which provides respiratory protection against particulate matter, such as nonvolatile dust, mists, or metal fumes.

(ii) "Chemical-cartridge respirator": a respirator equipped with a filter, sorbent, or catalyst, or combination of these items, which removes specific contaminants from the air passing through the air-purifying element.

(b) "Supplied-air respirator": an atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the source of breathing air is not designed to be carried by the user.

(c) "Self-contained breathing apparatus": an atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the source of breathing air is designed to be carried by the user.

(111) "Roof car": (see "scaffolds").

(112) "Roof car suspended platform": (see "scaffolds").

(113) "Roof-powered platform": (see "scaffolds").

(114) "Runway": a passageway for employees elevated above the surrounding floor or ground level.

(115) "Safety belt" or " body belt": a strap with means both for securing it around the waist and for attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration device.

(116) "Safety block": a prop that, when inserted between the upper and lower dies of a power press or between the bolster plate and the face of the slide, prevents the slide from falling of its own dead weight.

(117) "Safety guard (grinding wheel)": a device designed to restrain the pieces of a grinding wheel in the event the wheel is broken in operation.

(118) "Safety harness" or "body harness": a design of straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to other components of a personal fall arrest system.

(119) "Scaffold":

(a) " Mobile scaffold": a powered or unpowered, portable, caster or wheel-mounted supported scaffold.

(b) "Mobile work platform": generally a fixed work level, one frame high, on casters or wheels, with bracing diagonally from platform to vertical frame.

(c) "Roof car": a structure for the suspension of a working platform, providing for its horizontal movement to working positions.

(d) "Roof car suspended platform": equipment to provide access to the exterior of a building consisting of a suspended power-operated working platform, a roof car, and the operating and control devices.

(e) "Roof-powered platform": the working platform of a roof car suspended platform having the raising and lowering mechanism located on a roof car.

(f) "Self-powered platform": a working platform, of a roof car suspended platform, having the raising and lowering mechanism located on the working platform.

(g) "Swinging scaffold": a power- or manually operated platform suspended by two or more lines and independent of the building except for attachment at the roof or parapet.

(h) "Tube and coupler scaffold": an assembly consisting of tubing which serves as posts, bearers, braces, ties, and runners, a base supporting the posts, and special couplers which serve to connect the uprights and to join the various members.

(i) "Tubular welded frame scaffold": a sectional panel, or frame metal scaffold substantially built up of prefabricated welded sections which consist of posts and horizontal bearer with intermediate members. Panels or frames shall be braced with diagonal or cross braces.

(j) "Two-point suspension scaffolds": a scaffold suspended from overhead supports, the platform of which is supported by stirrups or hangers at two points to permit raising or lowering.

(120) "Securely fastened": the object or thing referred to is substantially fixed in place.

(121) "Self-powered platform": (see "scaffold").

(122) "Separator (collector)": that part of an exhaust system, the purpose of which is to separate material from the air which conveys it.

(123) "Shaft": an excavation made from the surface of the ground the longer axis of which forms an angle with the vertical of no more than forty-five degrees.

(124) "Shall": to be construed as mandatory.

(125) "Sheet pile": a pile, or sheeting, that may form one of a continuous interlocking line, or a row of timber, concrete, or steel piles, driven in close contact to provide a tight wall to resist the lateral pressure of water, adjacent earth, or other materials.

(126) "Sides," "walls," or "faces": the vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a result of trenching or excavation work.

(127) "Single-stroke mechanism (mechanical power press)": an arrangement used on a full revolution clutch to limit the travel of the slide to one complete stroke at each engagement of the clutch.

(128) "Slide": the main reciprocating member of a power press. A slide is also called a ram, plunger, or platen.

(129) "Sling": an assembly which connects the load to the material handling equipment.

(130) "Split-rail switch": an electric limit switch operated mechanically by the rollers of manlift steps. It consists of an additional hinged or "split" rail, mounted on the regular guide rail, over which the step rollers pass. It is springloaded in the "split" position. If the step supports no load, the rollers will "bump" over the switch; if a loaded step should pass over the section, the split rail will be forced straight, tripping the switch and opening the electrical circuit.

(131) "Standard guard railing": a substantial barrier, constructed in accordance with paragraph (E) of rule 4123:1-5-02 of the Administrative Code.

(a) "Top rail": the top lateral member of a standard guard railing.

(b) "Intermediate rail": the lateral member or members of a standard guard railing, installed at intervals of no more than twenty-one inches.

(132) "Steam hammers": a type of drop hammer where the ram is raised for each stroke by a double-action steam cylinder and the energy delivered to the workpiece is supplied by the velocity and weight of the ram and attached upper die driven downward by steam pressure. Energy delivered during each stroke may be varied.

(133) "Stop control": an operator control on a mechanical power press designed to immediately deactivate the clutch control and activate the brake to stop slide motion.

(134) "Stripper": a mechanism or die part on a power press for removing the parts or material from the punch.

(135) "Stud, pin, or fastener (as used in portable fastening tools)": a fastening device specifically designed and manufactured for use in portable explosive-actuated fastening tools.

(136) "Substantial (referring to material things)": constructed of such strength, or of such materials, and of such workmanship that the object will withstand the wear, usage, or shock for which it is designed.

(137) "Sweep device": a single or double arm (rod) attached to the upper die or slide of the press and designed to move the operator's hands to a safe position as the dies close, if the operator's hands are inadvertently within the point of operation. The sweep device may not be used for point of operation safeguarding.

(138) "Swinging scaffold": (see "scaffold").

(139) "Toeboard": a vertical barrier erected along exposed edges of a floor opening, platform, runway, ramp, or scaffold to prevent falls of material.

(140) "Travel" (manlifts): the distance between the centers of the top and bottom pulleys.

(141) "Traveling cable": a cable made up of electrical or communication conductors or both, and providing electrical connection between the working platform and the roof car or other fixed point.

(142) "Trench (when used as a noun)": a narrow excavation made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench at the bottom is no greater than fifteen feet.

(143) "Trench boxes (safety cages, trench shields)": a shoring system composed of steel plates and bracing, welded or bolted together, which can be moved along as work progresses and protects employees from movement of earth and cave-ins.

(144) "Trench jack": a screw or hydraulic-type jack used as cross bracing in a trench shoring system.

(145) "Turnover bar": a bar used in die setting to turn manually the crankshaft of a mechanical power press.

(146) "Two-point suspension scaffold": (see "scaffold").

(147) "Unitized tooling": a type of die in which the upper and lower members are incorporated into a self-contained unit so arranged as to hold the die members in alignment.

(148) "Uprights": the vertical members of a shoring system.

(149) "Upsetting machines (forging machines, headers)": a type of forging equipment in which the main forming energy is applied horizontally to the workpiece which is gripped and held by prior action of the dies.

(150) "Ventilation":

(a) "Dilution ventilation": ventilation provided to reduce the concentration of air contaminants in the atmosphere of all or part of the place of employment.

(b) "General ventilation": ventilation of the general atmosphere in the place of employment.

(c) "Local exhaust ventilation": that type of ventilation in which suction is applied at the point of generation or escape of air contaminants.

(151) "Wales (stringers)": the horizontal members of a shoring system with sides bearing against the uprights or earth.

(152) "Wall and chute openings": openings in any wall or partition from which there is a drop of more than four feet and which are thirty inches or more in height and eighteen inches or more in width through which an individual may inadvertently fall. Windows will not be considered wall openings except when located at the foot of any flight of stairs or at any platform on stairs. Where windows or openings are filled in with glass block, metal frame with sash bars, or wire mesh types, they will not be considered wall openings.

(153) "Wall hole": an opening less than thirty inches but more than one inch high, of unrestricted width, in a wall or partition, such as a ventilation hole or drainage scupper.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-02 Guarding floor and wall openings and holes.

(A) Scope.

This rule coves the guarding of floor and wall openings and holes. It does not apply to industrial grating holes nor to the working face of floor openings which are occupied by elevators, dumbwaiters, conveyors, machinery, piping or containers; the loading and unloading areas of automotive truck and railroad docks, or platforms, scaffolds, pits and trenches which are occupied for the purpose of providing access to a product, facility or process equipment while being worked upon.

(B) Reserved.

(1) Floor openings.

(a) Guarding.

(i) Floor openings four feet or more above a lower level will be guarded by one or more of the following: covers, standard guardrail systems, travel restraint systems, or personal fall arrest systems.

(ii) When an overhead obstruction prevents the use of standard railing, the top of the railing will be constructed not more than ten inches below the overhead obstruction.

(iii) Removable or hinged railings or a substantial chain or wire rope section will be installed when operations prevent installation of standard railing or fixed safety covers with flush hinges.

(b) Work below floor openings.

Where employees are working below a floor opening, toeboards will be installed.

When a safety cover is used to protect an opening, the unused sides of the opening will be guarded when the cover is raised.

(d) Guarding manholes, handholes, gratings and excavations.

Barriers, barricades or standard guard railings will be provided for guarding open manholes, handholes, gratings or excavations and are to be visible at all times.

(2) Floor holes - guarding.

(a) Every floor hole into which employees can accidentally walk will be guarded by one or more of the following:

(i) A standard guardrail system and toeboard on all exposed sides,

(ii) A fixed, hinged floor hole cover of substantial strength and construction. While the cover is not in place, the floor hole will be attended by an employee designated by the employer or shall be guarded by a removable standard railing,

(iii) Travel restraint systems, or

(iv) Personal fall arrest systems.

(b) Every floor hole into which employees cannot accidentally walk (on account of fixed machinery, equipment, or walls) will be protected by a cover that leaves no openings more than one inch wide. The cover shall be securely held in place to prevent tools or materials from falling through.

(3) Wall openings and holes, including chute openings.

(a) Wall opening - guarding.

(i) Wall openings will be guarded by standard railings and toeboards, or with doors or gates or substantial screens which will extend to a minimum height of forty-two inches, plus or minus three inches, measured from the floor or platform level.

(ii) When the top of the wall openings, protected by a railing, prevents installation of standard guard railing, the top rail will be not be more than ten inches below the top of the wall opening.

(b) Wall hole - guarding.

Where there is a hazard of materials falling through a wall hole, and the lower edge of the near side of the hole is less than four inches above the floor, and the far side of the hole more than five feet above the next lower level, the hole will be guarded by a toeboard, or an enclosing screen either of solid construction, or as specified in rule 4123:1-5-99 of the Administrative Code.

(i) Openings used for unloading material into chutes, hoppers or bins when not in use, will be guarded.

(ii) Area at discharge end of chutes:

The area at the discharge end of chutes will be guarded if employees work in, or pass through the area. If the chute discharges into a bin, conveyor, truck, railroad car, or other container, guarding is not required, but warning signs of conspicuous and easily read style will be posted to warn employees when there is a hazard from falling, flying, moving or sliding objects.

(4) Working pits.

Working pits will be guarded when not in use.

(5) Open vats, open soaking pits and open tanks.

(a) Sides of such vats, soaking pits, and tanks, containing injurious chemicals or other materials, will extend to a height of not less than thirty-six inches above the working floor level or be guarded by standard guard railing. Employees will not be required to work over such vats, soaking pits and tanks except on elevated runways, platforms and walkways (see paragraph (D)(1) of this rule).

(b) The specifications in paragraph (C)(5)(a) of this rule do not apply to open vats, soaking pits and open tanks designated as restricted areas where product is handled by conveyor or cab-controlled overhead crane.

(6) Galvanizing tanks.

Galvanizing tanks will have a minimum height of thirty inches. At such height the wall thickness or bench will be no less than thirty-two inches in width. For each increase in height of one inch the wall thickness or bench may be reduced by four inches.

(D) Elevated platforms, runways and walkways.

This rule does not apply to scaffolding.

(1) Guarding.

(a) Elevated platforms, runways and walkways four feet or more above floor or ground level will be guarded with standard railings and toeboards. All elevated runways, platforms and walkways, regardless of height, located over or adjacent to water, machinery, open vats, open soaking pits or open tanks will be provided with standard railing and toeboards.

(b) When the guarding prescribed above would result in an impairment of the work being performed and is not feasible, alternative protection shall be provided with a safety equivalent to or greater than the guarding specified in paragraph (D)(1)(a) of this rule.

(2) Support.

Elevated runways, platforms, and walkways made of planks will be supported at least every five feet and the planks will be securely fastened together with cleats underneath.

(3) Openings (drainage, ventilation, etc.).

Openings for drainage, ventilation, etc. in floors, elevated runways, platforms and walkways four feet or more above floor or ground level where employees work below, cannot be greater than one inch in width.

(4) Special purpose runways.

Runways used exclusively for special purposes, such as oiling, shafting, or filling tank cars, may have the railing on one side omitted where operating conditions necessitate such omission, provided the falling hazard is minimized by using a runway of not less than eighteen inches wide.

(E) Standard guard railings, intermediate rail and toeboards.

A standard guard railing will be constructed as a substantial barrier, securely fastened in place, and free from protruding objects, such as nails, screws and bolts, to protect openings or prevent accidental contact with some object, which barrier will consist of a top rail not less than forty-two inches, plus or minus three inches above the working level, and unless the space between the top rail and the working level is covered with substantial material, an intermediate rail. Minimum material dimensions are:

(1) Metal.

Top rail and intermediate railings will be at least one and one half inch nominal diameter pipe, or two by two by three eighths inch angle structural steel, steel cable at least one-quarter inch in diameter or in thickness, or other metal shapes of equivalent bending strength with posts spaced not more than eight feet on centers.

(2) Wood.

For wood railings, the posts will be of at least two inch by four inch stock spaced not to exceed six feet; the top and intermediate rails will be of at least two inch by four inch stock. If top rail is made of two right-angle pieces of one inch by four inch stock, posts may be spaced on eight foot centers, with two inch by four inch intermediate rail.

(3) Toeboards.

A standard toeboard will be four inches nominal in vertical height from its top edge to the level of the floor, platform, runway, or ramp. It will be securely fastened in place and with not more than one fourth inch clearance above floor level. It may be made of any substantial material either solid or with openings not over one inch in greatest dimension.

Where material is piled to such height that a standard toeboard does not provide protection, paneling from floor to intermediate rail, or to top rail will be provided.

(F) Stairway railings, guards and treads.

(1) Standard stair railings and standard handrails.

Every flight of stairs having four or more risers will be equipped with standard stair railings or standard handrails as specified in the following, the width of the stair to be measured clear of all obstructions except handrails:

(a) On stairways less than forty-four inches wide having both sides enclosed, at least one handrail, preferably on the right side descending;

(b) On stairways less than forty-four inches wide having one side open, at least one stair railing on the open side;

(d) On stairways more than forty-four inches but less than eighty-eight inches wide, one handrail on each enclosed side and one stair railing on each open side;

(e) On stairways eighty-eight or more inches wide, one handrail on each enclosed side, one stair railing on each open side, and one intermediate stair railing located approximately midway of the width.

(2) Winding stairs.

Winding stairs will be equipped with a handrail offset to prevent walking on all portions of the treads having width less than six inches.

(3) Uniform treads.

All stairways will have risers and treads of uniform dimensions in each run, except winding stairs as covered in paragraph (F)(2) of this rule.

(G) Dockboards (bridge plates).

(1) Portable and powered dockboards will be substantial enough to carry the load imposed on them.

(2) Portable dockboards will be secured in position, either being securely fastened or equipped with devices which will prevent slipping.

(3) Handholds, or other effective means will be provided on portable dockboards.

(4) Positive protection will be provided to prevent railroad cars or motor vehicles from moving or being moved while dockboards or bridge plates are in position.

(H) Stairways.

(1) "Stairway" means one or more flights of stairs and the necessary landings and platforms connecting them to form a continuous and uninterrupted passage from one floor or level to another.

(2) Flight of stairs.

(a) Four or more risers between landings will be considered a flight of stairs.

(b) This does not apply to steps over a conveyor or to a working platform in connection with production lines or process units where access is for the performance of work, and the steps are not considered a passageway for general travel.

(I) Handrails.

Handrails will be free of protruding nails or screws and not less than thirty inches and not more than thirty-eight inches in height, as measured from the leading edge of the stair tread to the top surface of the handrail.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-03 Ladders and scaffolds.

This rule was filed with the Legislative Service Commission in PDF format and is presented here as filed.

View Rule Text

Last updated June 20, 2024 at 8:21 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-04 Mechanical power transmission apparatus.

(A) Scope.

This rule applies to mechanical power transmission apparatus and facilities to transmit power to operating equipment or machine tools. This rule does not apply to power transmission facilities located within the frame or the equipment and exposure is necessary to its operation or adjustment.

(B) Reserved.

This paragraph covers all types and shapes of power-transmission belts, except the following when operating at two hundred fifty feet per minute or less: flat belts one inch or less in width, flat belts two inches or less in width which are free from metal lacings or fasteners, round belts one-half inch or less in diameter; and single strand V-belts, the width of which is thirteen thirty-seconds inch or less.

(1) Horizontal belts (not including conveyors or conveyor belts).

Horizontal belts and pulleys seven feet or less above floor or platform will be guarded as follows:

(a) Where both runs of horizontal belts are seven feet or less from floor level, the guard will extend to at least fifteen inches above the belt or to a standard height, except that where both runs of a horizontal belt are forty-two inches or less from the floor, the belt will be fully enclosed in accordance with rule 4123:1-5-99 of the Administrative Code. Note: In power or power development plants a standard guard railing may be used in lieu of this specification.

(b) If lower part of belt is seven feet or less above platform or floor level and upper part of belt more than seven feet above platform or floor level, the lower part of belt and pulley will be guarded on bottom, sides, and ends, to a height of seven feet above floor or platform level. Guarding will be in accordance with rule 4123:1-5-99 of the Administrative Code.

(c) Horizontal overhead belts more than seven feet above floor or platform will be guarded for their entire length under the following conditions:

(i) If located over passageways or work places and traveling eighteen hundred feet or more per minute;

(ii) If center to center distance between pulleys is ten feet or more;

(iii) If belt is eight inches or more in width.

(d) Where passageway is provided between upper and lower parts of belts, the passageway will be guarded on sides, top and bottom.

(2) Vertical and inclined belts (not including conveyors or conveyor belts).

Vertical and inclined belts and their pulleys seven feet or less above floor or platform level will be guarded in accordance with rule 4123:1-5-99 of the Administrative Code.

(3) Vee belts.

Vee belts and their pulleys, where exposed to contact, will be guarded.

(4) Rope drives.

Rope drives and their pulleys, where exposed to contact, will be guarded.

(D) Gears, sprockets, link belts, and friction drives.

(1) Set or train of gears.

(a) A set or train of gears is two or more power-driven gears that move and intermesh. This does not apply to adjusting gears which do not normally revolve and are not power operated, or to adjusting gears which require access to the gears for manual manipulation.

(b) Guarding.

All or any part of a set or train of gears seven feet or less above floor or platform level will be completely guarded or have a band guard around the face of the gear with the side flanges extending inward beyond the root of the teeth. Where there are openings of more than two and one-half inches between arm or through web, the entire gear will be guarded. Guarding will be in accordance with rule 4123:1-5-99 of the Administrative Code and will be securely fastened in place.

(2) Frictional disc, link belt, and sprocket drives.

Frictional disc, link belt, and sprocket drives will be guarded.

(E) Shafts, collars couplings, and flywheels.

(1) Guarding of horizontal shafting.

(a) All exposed parts of horizontal shafting seven feet or less from floor or working platform, excepting runways used exclusively for oiling or running adjustments, will be protected by a stationary casing enclosing shafting completely or by a trough enclosing sides and top or sides and bottom of shafting as location requires.

(b) Shafting under bench machines will be enclosed by a stationary casing, or by a trough at sides and top or sides and bottom as location requires. The sides of the trough shall come within at least six inches of the underside of table, or if shafting is located near the floor, within six inches of the floor. In every case the sides of the trough shall extend at least two inches beyond the shafting or protuberance.

(2) Guarding vertical and inclined shafting.

Vertical and inclined shafting seven feet or less from floor or work platform, excepting maintenance runways, will be guarded in accordance with rule 4123:1-5-99 of the Administrative Code.

(3) Projecting shaft ends.

(a) Projecting shaft ends will present a smooth edge and end and cannot project more than one-half the diameter of the shaft unless guarded by nonrotating caps or safety sleeves.

(b) Unused keyways will be filled up or covered.

(4) Set screws, keys, and other projections.

Set screws, keys, and other projections, protruding beyond the surface of revolving parts will be guarded.

(5) Collars and couplings.

(a) Collars.

All revolving collars, including split collars, will be cylindrical, and screws or bolts used in collars cannot project beyond the largest periphery of the collar.

(b) Couplings.

Shaft couplings will be so constructed as to present no hazard from bolts, nuts, setscrews will, however, be permitted where they are covered with safety sleeves or where they are used parallel with the shafting and are countersunk or else do not extend beyond the flange of the coupling.

(6) Universal joints.

Universal joints will be guarded.

(7) Revolving face plates and chucks.

Revolving face plates and chucks will be cylindrical with no projecting parts on the rim unless such projecting parts are guarded. This does not apply to those face plates and chucks revolving less than five revolutions per minute.

(8) Flywheels.

Flywheels located so that any part is seven feet or less above floor or platform will be guarded in accordance with the specifications of paragraphs (E)(8)(a) to (E)(8)(d)(i)(c) of this rule:

(a) With an enclosure of sheet, perforated, or expanded metal, or woven wire;

(b) With standard guard railings placed not less than fifteen inches nor more than twenty inches from rim. When flywheel extend into a pit or is within twelve inches of the floor, a standard toeboard will also be provided.

(c) When the upper rim of a flywheel protrudes through a working floor, it will be entirely enclosed or surrounded by a standard guard railing and toeboard.

(d) Alternate methods.

(i) For flywheels with smooth rims five feet or less in diameter, where the preceding methods cannot be applied, the following may be used:

(A) A disc attached to the flywheel in such manner as to cover the spokes of the wheel on the exposed side and present a smooth surface and edge, at the same time providing means for periodic inspection;

(B) An open space, not exceeding four inches in width, may be left between the outside edge of the disc and the rim of the wheel if desired, to facilitate turning the wheel over;

(ii) Paragraph (E)(8) of this rule does not apply to flywheels with solid web centers.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-05 Auxiliary equipment.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) Horizontal, overhead, vertical and inclined conveyors.

(a) Overhead protection.

Where overhead conveyors carry material with a clearance of seven feet or more above the floor level, and cross designed walkways or roads, or pass over areas where employees are normally at work, a substantial barrier will be installed to catch falling material.

(b) Screw conveyors.

In addition to the specifications of paragraph (C)(1)(a) of this rule, the auger of screw conveyors will be operated with covers secured in place. Covers will be solid or of wire mesh, in accordance with rule 4123:1-5-99 of the Administrative Code, and covers designed for regular removal will be interlocked so that removal will disconnect power source.

(2) Conveyors exposed to contact.

All conveyors, where exposed to contact, will be equipped with means to disengage them from their power supply at such points of contact.

(3) Safe means of passage.

Where employees cross conveyors, a fixed platform equipped with standard guard railing and toeboards will be provided.

(4) Pinch (nip) points.

Pinch points created by travel of conveyor belts over or around end, drive and snubber, or take-up pulleys of chain conveyors running over sprocket wheels will be guarded or a means will be provided at the pinch point to disengage the belt or chain from the source of power.

(D) Machinery control.

(1) Disengaging from power supply.

Means will be provided at each machine, within easy reach of the operator, for disengaging it from its power supply. This does not apply to rolling departments of iron and steel mills nor to electrical power generation or conversion equipment.

(2) When machines are shut down.

The employer will furnish and the employees will use a device to lock the controls in the "off" position or the employer will furnish and the employees will use warning tags when machines are shut down for repair, adjusting, or cleaning.

(3) Mechanical belt shifters.

Tight and loose pulleys will be equipped with mechanical belt shifters.

(a) Cone pulley drive belts.

Cone pulley drive belts will be equipped with a mechanical belt shifter permanently attached.

(b) Where any part of the lower cone pulley is seven feet or less above the floor, the belt and pulley will be guarded.

(4) Treadles or extensions.

Treadles or extensions for starting machinery will be so located or guarded as to minimize accidental tripping.

(E) Anchoring and mounting of machinery.

(1) Stationary machinery.

All stationary machinery will be positioned or installed on floors or foundations so to prevent walking, moving, or tipping.

(2) Portable machinery.

Portable machinery mounted upon trucks or bases will be securely fastened thereto, and such truck or base will be so locked or blocked as to prevent movement or shift while such machine is in operation.

(F) Counterweights.

Counterweights exposed to contact will be guarded, or secured with safety chain or wire rope so the counterweight will not descend to a level less than eight feet above the floor or working level, where employees perform their assigned duties or where employees pass through in the performance of their assigned duties.

(G) Grounding of electric-powered equipment.

(1) Application.

This paragraph applies only to grounding of non-current carrying parts.

(2) Permanent equipment.

All permanently installed equipment and machinery connected to electric circuits in excess of eighty volts will be permanently grounded.

(3) Portable electric tools.

Portable electric tools and equipment will be provided with a means of grounding or will be protected by a system of double insulation. Where such approved system is employed, the equipment will be distinctively marked.

(H) Feed rolls.

Power-driven feed rolls, when exposed to contact, will be guarded so as to prevent the hands of the operator from coming into contact with in-running rolls at any point.

(I) Fan blades.

Guarding - when the periphery of the blades of a fan is less than seven feet above the floor or working level, the blades will be guarded. The guard will have openings no larger than one-half inch.

(J) Steam pipes (pressure pipes).

All steam pipes will be covered where exposed to contact. Pipe supports or other effective means will be provided to prevent failure from vibration, expansion, or contraction.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-06 Portable explosive-actuated fastening tools.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) High-velocity tools.

Tools of the high-velocity type will have the following characteristics:

(a) The muzzle end of the tool will have a protective shield or guard at least three and one-half inches in diameter, mounted perpendicular to and concentric with the barrel, and designed to confine any flying fragments or particles that might otherwise create a hazard at the time of firing.

(b) Where a standard shield or guard cannot be used, or where it does not cover all apparent avenues through which flying particles might escape, a special shield, guard, fixture, or jig, designed and built by the manufacturer of the tool being used, which provides this degree of protection, will be used as a substitute.

(c) The tool will be so designed that it cannot be fired unless it is equipped with a standard protective guard or shield, or a special shield, guard, fixture or jig.

(d) Firing the tool.

(i) The firing mechanism will be so designed that the tool cannot fire during loading or preparation to fire, or if the tool should be dropped while loaded.

(ii) The firing of the tool will be dependent upon at least two separate and distinct operations of the operator, with the final firing movement being separate from the operation of bringing the tool into the firing position.

(e) The tool will be so designed as not to be operable other than against a work surface, and unless the operator is holding the tool against the work surface with a force at least five pounds greater than the total weight of the tool.

(f) The tool will be so designed that it will not operate when equipped with the standard guard indexed to the center position if any bearing surface of the guard is tilted more than eight degrees from contact with the work surface.

(g) The tool will be so designed that positive means of varying the power are available or can be made available to the operator as part of the tool, or as an auxiliary, in order to make it possible for the operator to select a power level adequate to perform the desired work without excessive force.

(h) The tool will be so designed that all breeching parts will be reasonably visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be present.

(2) Low-velocity - piston-type tools.

Tools of the low-velocity piston type will have the following characteristics:

(a) The muzzle end of the tool will be designed so that suitable protective shields, guards, jigs, or fixtures, designed and built by the manufacturer of the tool being used, can be mounted perpendicular to the barrel. A standard spall shield will be supplied with each tool.

(b) Firing the tool.

(i) The tool will be designed so that it will not in ordinary usage propel or discharge a stud, pin, or fastener, while loading or during preparation to fire, or if the tool should be dropped while loaded.

(ii) Firing of the tool will be dependent upon at least two separate and distinct operations of the operator, with the final firing movement being separate from the operation of bringing the tool into the firing position.

(c) The tool will be so designed as not to be operable other than against a work surface, and unless the operator is holding the tool against the work surface with a force at least five pounds greater than the total weight of the tool.

(d) The tool will be so designed that positive means of varying the power are available or can be made available to the operator as part of the tool, or as an auxiliary, in order to make it possible for the operator to select a power level adequate to perform the desired work without excessive force.

(e) The tool will be so designed that all breeching parts will be reasonably visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be present.

(D) Minimum instructions for qualifying operators.

Instructions to operators in order to teach them the use of portable explosive-actuated fastening tools will include, but will not be limited to, the following items:

(1) Before using a tool, the operator will inspect it to determine to his satisfaction that it is clean, that all moving parts operate freely, and that the barrel is free from obstruction.

(2) When a tool develops a defect during use, the operator will immediately cease to use it, until it is properly repaired.

(3) Tools will not be loaded until just prior to the intended firing time. Neither loaded nor empty tools are to be pointed at any employee, and hands should be kept clear of the open barrel end.

(4) No tools will be loaded unless being prepared for immediate use, nor will an unattended tool be left loaded.

(5) In case of a misfire, the operator will hold the tool in the operating position for at least thirty seconds. He will then try to operate the tool a second time. He will wait another thirty seconds, holding the tool in the operating position; then he will proceed to remove the explosive load in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Misfired cartridges should be placed carefully in a metal container filled with water, and returned to the supervisor for disposal.

(6) The tool will never be left unattended in a place where it would be available to unauthorized persons.

(7) Fasteners will not be driven into very hard or brittle materials, including, but not limited to, cast iron, glazed tile, surface-hardened steel, glass block, living rock, face brick, or hollow tile.

(8) Driving into materials easily penetrated will be avoided unless such materials are backed by a substance that will prevent the pin or fastener from passing completely through and creating a flying missile hazard on the other side.

(9) Driving distance from edge

(a) Fasteners will not be driven directly into materials such as brick or concrete closer than three inches from the unsupported edge or corner, or into steel surfaces closer than one-half inch from the unsupported edge or corner, unless a special guard, fixture, or jig, is used.

(b) Exception: Low-velocity tools may drive no closer than two inches from an edge in concrete or one-fourth inch in steel.

(c) When fastening other materials, such as a two- by four-inch wood section, to a concrete surface, it is permissible to drive a fastener of no greater than seven-thirty-seconds-inch shank diameter not closer than two inches from the unsupported edge or corner of the work surface.

(10) Fasteners will not be driven through existing holes unless a positive guide is used to secure accurate alignment.

(11) No fastener will be driven into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory fastening.

(12) Tools will not be used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere.

(13) All tools will be used with the correct shield, guard, or attachment recommended by the manufacturer.

(14) Any tool found not in proper working order will be immediately removed from service. The tool will be inspected at regular intervals and will be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.

(E) Strength of charge - identification.

All explosive charges (cartridges and shells) to be used in portable explosive-actuated tools will be marked by color, in accordance with table Table 6-1 to this rule, "Identification of Cased Loads," to designate the strength of the charge.

Table 6-1

IDENTIFICATION OF CASED LOADS

| | Color Identification | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Power Level | Case Color | Load Color | Nominal Velocity (= 45 f.p.s.) | | 1 | Brass | Gray | 300 | | 2 | Brass | Brown | 390 | | 3 | Brass | Green | 480 | | 4 | Brass | Yellow | 570 | | 5 | Brass | Red | 660 | | 6 | Brass | Purple | 750 | | 7 | Nickel | Gray | 840 | | 8 | Nickel | Brown | 930 | | 9 | Nickel | Green | 1020 | | 10 | Nickel | Yellow | 1110 | | 11 | Nickel | Red | 1200 | | 12 | Nickel | Purple | 1290 |

Note: The nominal velocity applies to 3/8-inch diameter 350-grain ballistic slug fired in a test device and has no reference to actual fastener velocity developed in any specific size or type of tool.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-07 Hand tools, hand-held portable powered tools, other hand-held equipment and portable safety containers.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

All hand tools and hand-held portable powered tools and other hand-held equipment whether furnished by the employee or the employer will be maintained in a safe condition, free of worn or defective parts.

(D) Power saws.

(1) General.

All portable power-driven saws with blades more than two inches in diameter will be equipped with guards above and below the base plate shoe. The upper guard will cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc needed to permit the base to be tilted for bevel cuts. The lower guard will cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc needed to allow proper retraction and contact with the work. When the tool is withdrawn from the work, the lower guard will automatically and instantly return to covering position. The specifications of this paragraph do not apply to circular saws used in the meat industry for meat-cutting purposes.

(2) Portable chain saws.

(a) Portable chain saws will have all guards and handles, provided by the manufacturer, in place, all controls functioning properly and mufflers operative.

(b) Electrically powered chain saws will be provided with proper grounding devices.

(E)

(1) Vertical portable grinders: Safety guards used on right angle head or vertical portable grinders will have a maximum exposure angle of one hundred eighty degrees, and be located so as to be between the operator and wheel during use.

(2) Other portable grinders: The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on other portable grinders will not exceed one hundred eighty degrees and the top half of the wheel will be enclosed at all times.

(F) Pneumatically powered tools.

All pneumatically powered portable tools will be equipped with an automatic shutoff valve ("dead-man" control) so arranged as to close the air inlet valve when the pressure of the operator's hand is removed. Each tool will be equipped with a retainer where accidental ejection is possible.

(G) Grounding.

All electrically powered portable tools with exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts will be grounded. Portable tools protected by an approved system of double insulation, or its equivalent, need not be grounded. Where such an approved system is employed the equipment will be distinctively marked.

(H) Power cut-off and pressure control devices.

(1) Woodworking tools.

Hand-held, power-driven woodworking tools will be equipped with a constant pressure switch or control that will shut off the power when the pressure is released.

(2) Hand-held powered tools-switches and controls.

(a) All hand-held powered circular saws having a blade diameter greater than two inches, electric, hydraulic or pneumatic chain saws, and percussion tools without positive accessory holding means will be equipped with a constant pressure switch or control that will shut off the power when the pressure is released. All hand-held gasoline powered chain saws will be equipped with a constant pressure throttle control that will shut off the power to the saw chain when the pressure is released.

(b) All hand-held powered drills, tappers, fastener drivers, horizontal, vertical and angle grinders with wheels greater than two inches in diameter, disc sanders with discs greater than two inches in diameter, belt sanders, reciprocating saws, saber, scroll, and jig saws with blade shanks greater than a nominal one-fourth inch, and other similarly operating powered tools will be equipped with a constant pressure switch or control, and may have a lock-on control provided that turnoff can be accomplished by a single motion of the same finger or fingers that turn it on.

(c) All other hand-held powered tools, such as, but not limited to, platen sanders, grinders with wheels two inches in diameter or less, disc sanders with discs two inches in diameter or less, routers, planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, shears saber, scroll, and jig saws with blade shanks a nominal one-fourth of an inch wide or less, may be equipped with either a positive "on-off" control, or other controls as described by paragraphs (H)(2)(a) and (H)(2)(b) of this rule.

(3) Use of compressed air.

The employer will instruct the employees that compressed air shall not be used to clean themselves off.

(I) Jacks.

All jacks will have the rated load legibly and permanently marked in a prominent location, except jacks supplied as standard equipment in passenger cars.

(J) Block and tackle equipment.

(1) All blocks will fit the size of rope they carry, and shall be so constructed as not to chafe the rope running through them.

(2) Where ropes are subjected to chafing by dragging across an intervening object, such object will be padded.

(K) Hand tools, miscellaneous.

Employers will not issue or permit the use of unsafe hand tools, such as:

(1) Wrenches when jaws are sprung to the point that slippage occurs;

(2) Impact tools, such as drift pins, wedges, and chisels, with mushroomed heads;

(3) Tools with splintered or cracked wooden handles or wooden handles that cannot be kept tight in the tool.

(L) Portable pneumatically powered fastener tools.

(1) Except for portable pneumatically powered fastener tools authorized in paragraph (L)(2) of this rule, two separate and independent releases are required before any such tool activates. They are:

(a) A device on the muzzle that prevents activation except during the time the tool is held firmly against the work surface.

(b) A trigger or similar device that prevents activation except during the time it is held in depressed or active position by the operator.

(2) Fastener tools that do not meet the specifications of paragraph (L)(1) of this rule may be used if they comply with all of the following requirements.

(a) The tool may only be actuated by compressed air with a driving piston having an area no greater than one square inch, with an operating air pressure of no more than one hundred pounds per square inch gauge and with a driving velocity no greater than seventy-five feet per second as measured at the muzzle.

(b) The tool may only accommodate fasteners of the wire staple or pin types with a cross sectional area no greater than .00177 square inches.

(3) The operator of the tool will be furnished the personal protective equipment specified in paragraph (D) of rule 4123:1-5-17 of the Administrative Code. Such protection will also be furnished for any other employees who work in the immediate area and who are exposed to the hazards of the operation.

(4) When not in use the tool will be disconnected from the compressed air hose.

(5) Air hose.

Hose and hose connections used for conducting compressed air to the tool will be designed for the pressure and service to which it is subjected.

(6) Pressure regulator.

The compressed air system will be equipped with pressure regulators or other devices to prevent air pressure in the system from exceeding the maximum design capacity of the tools in use.

(M) Portable safety containers.

Approved safety cans or department of transportation approved containers will be used for handling and use of flammable liquids in quantities of five gallons or less.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-08 Power-driven saws and knives.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

All portions of the saw blade or band blade will be enclosed or guarded, except for the working portion of the blade between the bottom of the guide rolls and the table. Bandsaw wheels will be fully enclosed. The outside of periphery of the enclosure will be solid. The front and back of the band wheels will be either enclosed by solid material, or by wire mesh, or perforated metal. Such mesh or perforated metal will be not less than 0.037 inch (U.S. gage no. twenty), and the openings will be not greater than three-eighths inch.

(D) Circular saws.

All circular saws will have the exposed portion of the saw blade under the table guarded.

(1) Circular rip saw (manual feed).

(a) Guarding.

A hood-type guard will be provided that will cover the exposed portion of the saw blade. When in use the hood type guard will automatically adjust itself to the thickness of and remain in contact with the material being cut when the stock encounters the saw, or may be a fixed or manually adjusted guard, provided the space between the bottom of the guard and the material being cut does not exceed three-eighths inch at any time.

(b) Design.

The hood-type guard will be so designed as to prevent a kickback, or a separate attachment that will prevent a kickback will be provided. Anti-kickback devices will be effective for all thicknesses of material that are cut.

A spreader will also be provided and securely fastened at the rear of the saw in alignment with the saw blade, except where a roller wheel is provided at the back of the saw. The spreader will be slightly thinner than the saw kerf and slightly thicker than the saw disc to prevent material from squeezing the saw.

(2) Circular rip saw (power feed).

(a) Guarding.

A hood-type guard will be provided but need not rest upon the table nor upon the material being cut, but will extend to a line not more than three-eighths of an inch above the plane formed by the bottom of the top feed rolls. This distance (three-eighths inch) may be increased to three-fourths inch, provided the lead edge of the hood is extended to be not less than five and one-half inches in front of the nip point between the front roll and the work.

(b) Spreader.

A spreader will be provided and fastened securely at the rear of the saw in alignment with the saw blade, except where a roller wheel is provided at the back of the saw. The spreader will be slightly thinner than the saw kerf and slightly thicker than the saw disc to prevent material from squeezing the saw.

(3) Circular cross-cut saw.

(a) Guarding.

A hood-type guard will be provided that will cover the exposed portion of the saw blade. When in use the hood-type will automatically adjust to the thickness of and remain in contact with the material being cut when the stock encounters the saw, or may be a fixed or manually adjusted hood or guard, provided the space between the bottom of the guard and the material being cut does not exceed three-eighths of an inch at any time.

(b) Automatic return.

A device will be installed which will return the saw automatically to the back of the table when released at any point of its travel. A device will be installed which will be designed to prevent a rebound of the saw blade.

(4) Circular resaws.

(a) Guarding.

A hood-type guard will be provided that will cover the saw at all times, except where the material is being cut.

(b) Spreader.

A spreader will be provided and securely fastened at the rear of the saw in alignment with the saw blade, except where a roller wheel is provided at the back of the saw. The spreader will be slightly thinner than the saw kerf and slightly thicker than the saw disc and will be placed not more than one-half inch from the ends of the saw teeth.

(5) Swing cutoff saws.

The specifications of this paragraph are also applicable to sliding cutoff saws mounted above the table.

(a) Each swing cutoff saw will be provided with a hood that will completely enclose the upper half of the saw at the arbor end, and the point of operation at all positions of the saw. The hood will be constructed in such a manner and of such material that it will protect the operator from flying splinters and broken saw teeth. Its hood will be so designed that it will automatically cover the lower portion of the blade, so that when the saw is returned to the back of the table the hood will rise on top of the fence, and when the saw is moved forward the hood will drop on top of and remain in contact with the table or material being cut.

(b) Each swing cutoff saw will be provided with an effective device to return the saw automatically to the back of the table when released at any point of its travel. Such a device will not depend for its proper functioning upon any rope, cord or spring. If there is a counterweight, the bolts supporting the bar and counterweight will be provided with cotter pins; and the counter-weight will be prevented from dropping by either a bolt passing through both the bar and counterweight, or a bolt put together through the extreme end of the bar, or, where the counterweight does not encircle the bar, a safety chain attached to it.

(c) Limit chains or other equally effective devices will be provided to prevent the saw from swinging beyond the front or back edges of the table, or beyond a forward position where the gullets of the lowest saw teeth will rise above the table top.

(6) Inverted swing cutoff saws.

Inverted swing cutoff saws will be provided with a hood that will cover the part of the saw that protrudes above the top of the table or above the material being cut. It will automatically adjust itself to the thickness of and remain in contact with material being cut.

(7) Radial saws.

(a) Guarding.

The upper hood will completely enclose the upper portion of the blade down to a point that will include the end of the saw arbor. The upper hood will be constructed in such a manner and of such material that it will protect the operator from flying splinters, broken saw teeth, etc., and will deflect sawdust away from the operator. The sides of the lower exposed portion of the blade will be guarded to the full diameter of the blade by a device that will automatically adjust itself to the thickness of the stock and remain in contact with stock being cut to give maximum protection possible for the operation being performed.

(b) Anti-kickback device.

Each radial saw used for ripping will be provided with an anti-knocked device, which will be designed to provide adequate holding power for all the thicknesses of material being cut.

Ripping and ploughing will be against the direction in which the saw turns. The direction of the saw rotation will be conspicuously marked on the hood. In addition, a permanent label not less than one and one-half inches by three-fourths inch will be affixed to the rear of the guard at approximately the level of the arbor, reading as follows: "Danger: do not rip or plough from this end."

(d) Automatic return.

A device will be installed which shall return the saw automatically to the back of the table when released at any point of its travel. A device will be installed which shall be designed to prevent a rebound of the saw blade.

(e) Positive stop.

A positive stop will be installed which will prevent the saw from traveling beyond the front edge of the table.

(E) Cracked saw blades.

All cracked saw blades will be removed from service.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-09 Woodworking machinery.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) Manual-feed jointers and planers - cutting head.

(a) Guarding - point of operation.

Manual-feed jointers and planers with horizontal head will be equipped with a cylindrical cutting head, the knife projection of which cannot exceed one-eighth inch beyond the cylindrical body of the head.

(b) Table openings.

The opening in the table will be as small as productive operation of the jointer permits. The clearance between the edge of the rear of the table and the cutter head cannot be more than one-eighth inch.

Manual-feed jointers and planers with horizontal cutting heads will have an automatic guard which will:

(i) Cover the section of the head on the working side of the fence.

(ii) Automatically adjust itself to recover the cutting head after the material has passed through.

(d) Guard - cutting head back of fence or gage.

Each manual-feed jointer with horizontal cutting head will have a guard which will cover the section of the head back of the gage or fence.

(2) Vertical head jointers.

Each wood jointer with vertical head will have either an exhaust hood or other guard so arranged as to guard completely the revolving head, except for a slot of such width as may be needed for the application of the material to be jointed.

(D) Planer, molder, sticker, and matcher.

(1) Guarding - cutting heads.

Each planer, molder, sticker, and matcher will have all cutting heads and saws, if used, covered by a metal guard. If such a guard is constructed of:

(a) Sheet metal - the material used will be not less than one-sixteenth inch in thickness.

(b) Cast iron - the material used will be not less than three-sixteenths inch in thickness.

(2) Guarding - where exhaust systems are used.

Where an exhaust system is used, the guards will form part or all of the exhaust hood and will be constructed of metal of a thickness not less than that specified in paragraph (D)(1)(a) or (D)(1)(b) of this rule.

(3) Guarding - feed rolls.

Power-driven feed rolls, when exposed to contact, will be guarded so as to prevent the hands of the operator from coming into contact with in-running rolls at any point.

(a) Sectional in-feed rolls.

Surfaces of planers used in sizing multiple pieces of material simultaneously will be provided with sectional in-feed rolls having sufficient yield in the construction of the sections to provide feeding contact pressure on the stock, over the permissible range of variation in stock thickness for which the machine was designed.

(b) Alternate method.

In lieu of such yielding sectional rolls, suitable section kickback finger devices will be provided at the in-feed end.

(E) Boring and mortising machines.

(1) Guarding.

(a) Mortising machines (except hollow chisel mortisers).

Mortising machines, except hollow chisel mortisers, will be provided with thumb stops at each side of the chisel or equivalent protection.

(b) Bits.

Bits on all automatic boring machines will be guarded at the points of operation.

The top of the cutting chain and driving mechanism will be guarded.

(d) Counterweight.

(e) Universal joint.

Universal joints on spindles of boring machines will be completely enclosed in such a way as to prevent accidental contact by the operator.

(2) Chuck design.

Safety bit chucks with no projecting set screws will be used.

(F) Stationary sanding machines.

(1) Drum sanders.

Drum sanders will have a guard so arranged as to enclose the revolving drum, except such portion of the drum above the table (if table is used) as may be needed for the application of the material to be finished. Where an exhaust system is used, the hood of the exhaust system will be construed as comprising all, or part, of the guard.

(2) Disc sanders.

Disc sanders will have a guard so arranged to enclose the periphery and back of the revolving disc, except such portion of the face of the disc above the table (if table is used) as may be needed for the application of the material to be finished. Where an exhaust system is used, the hood of the exhaust system will be construed as comprising all, or part, of the guard.

(3) Belt sanders.

Belt sanders will have both pulleys guarded in such manner as to guard the points where the belt runs onto the pulleys. The edges of the unused run of the belt will be guarded.

(4) Feed rolls of self-feed sanding machines.

Power-driven feed rolls, when exposed to contact, will be guarded so as to prevent the hands of the operator from coming into contact with in-running rolls at any point.

(G) Wood shapers.

(1) Guarding.

(a) Cutting heads.

(i) The cutting heads of each wood shaper, hand-fed panel raiser or other similar machine, not automatically fed, will be guarded. The diameter of circular shaper guards will be not less than the greatest diameter of the cutter.

(ii) When single cutter knives in shaper heads are used, the shaper heads will be balanced.

(b) Alternate method.

A substantial jig, fixture, or template may be used which is designed to keep the hands of the operator out of the danger zone.

(2) Starting and stopping devices.

All shapers will be provided with a spindle starting and stopping device for each spindle.

(H) Tenoners.

Tenoners will have all cutting heads or saws guarded. An exhaust hood may comprise part or all of the guard. If such a guard is constructed of sheet metal, the material used will be not less than one-sixteenth inch in thickness, and if cast iron is used, it will be not less than three-sixteenths inch in thickness.

(I) Lathes.

Each profile and swing-head lathe will have the cutting head guarded. An exhaust hood may comprise all, or part, of the guard.

(J) Veneer machinery and equipment.

(1) Vats and soaking pits.

(a) Guarding.

Sides of vats and soaking pits will extend to a height of not less than thirty-six inches above the working floor level. When loading or unloading operations are performed from the sides and/or ends of vats and soaking pits, standard guard railing and toeboards will be installed.

(b) Walkways between sections.

Large vats and soaking pits divided into sections will be provided with substantial walkways between sections. Each walkway will be provided with a standard guard railing.

(2) Drag saws.

Drag saws will be so located as to give at least four feet clearance for passage when the saw is at extreme end of stroke or if such clearance is not obtainable, the saw and its driving mechanism will be guarded.

(3) Clippers and wringers.

(a) Clippers.

Veneer clippers will have automatic feed or will be provided with a guard when stock is manually fed or removed.

(b) Wringers.

In-running sides of veneer wringers will be guarded leaving only sufficient space to insert stock.

(K) Cooperage machinery.

(1) Bolt, stave and heading equalizers.

Each bolt, stave and heading equalizer will have the saws guarded except that portion immediately adjacent to the feeding device.

(2) Barrel stave saws.

Each machine of this type will have the saw and the revolving part to which the saw blade is bolted, guarded, except that part of the saw immediately adjacent to the feeding device.

(3) Heading, rip, flat-stave and head-rounders.

All machines coming under this heading will have the saws guarded.

(4) Stave and heading planers.

All cutting heads and knives of single and double planers will be guarded. An exhaust hood may comprise all or part of the guard.

(5) Stave jointing machines (wheel).

Machines for jointing staves will be guarded.

(6) Stave croziers.

The cutting heads will be guarded except that part which actually imbeds itself in the stock.

(7) Pail and barrel lathes.

The specifications of paragraph (I) of rule 4123:1-5-09 of the Administrative Code, Lathes, where applicable, govern the guarding of pail and barrel lathes.

(L) Miscellaneous woodworking machines.

(1) Combination or universal woodworking machines.

(a) Guarding.

Each point of operation will be guarded as required for such a tool in a separate machine.

(b) Stopping and starting devices.

Such machines will be provided with a separate stopping and starting device for each separate operation.

(2) Routers.

The pulleys, spindles, and cutting tools will be guarded. Turnplates, jigs, and fixtures which keep the operator's hands out of the danger zone may be provided as an alternative.

(3) Glue spreaders (roll type).

The feed rolls will be guarded. The bottom of the guard will be not more than three-eighths inch above a plane formed by the contact face of the feed roll where it contacts the stock.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-10 Mechanical power presses.

(A) Scope.

The specifications of this rule pertain to mechanical power presses. Excluded from the specifications of this rule are press brakes (when used for bending, see paragraph (F) of this rule), hydraulic and pneumatic power presses, bulldozers, hot bending and hot metal presses, forging presses and hammers, riveting machines and similar types of fastener applicators. For guarding of these excluded machines, see rule 4123:1-5-11 of the Administrative Code.

(B) Reserved.

(1) Brakes.

Friction brakes provided for stopping or holding the slide movement will be inherently self-engaging by requiring power or force from an external source to cause disengagement. Brake capacity will be sufficient to stop the motion of the slide quickly and capable of holding the slide and its attachments at any point in its travel.

(2) Machines using full revolution clutches.

(a) Single-stroke mechanism.

Machines using full revolution clutches will incorporate a single-stroke mechanism.

(b) Compression-type springs.

If the single-stroke mechanism is dependent upon spring action, the spring(s) will be of the compression type, operating on a rod or guided within a bore or tube and designed to prevent interleaving of the spring coils in event of breakage.

A two-hand trip will have the individual operator's hand controls protected against unintentional operation and have the individual operator's hand controls arranged by design and construction and/or separation to require the use of both hands to trip the press and use a control arrangement requiring concurrent operation of the individual operator's hand controls.

(d) Anti-repeat feature.

Two-hand trip systems on full revolution clutch machines will incorporate an anti-repeat feature.

(e) Multiple-station presses.

Where two-hand trip systems are used on multiple-station presses, there will be a separate set of controls for each assigned employee.

(3) Foot pedals (treadle).

(a) Pedal mechanism.

The pedal mechanism will be protected to prevent unintended operation from falling or moving objects or by accidental stepping onto the pedal.

(b) Pedal return springs.

If pedal return springs are provided they will be of the compression type, operating on a rod or guided within a bore or tube, and designed to prevent interleaving of spring coils in event of breakage.

If pedal counterweights are provided, the path of the travel of the weight will be enclosed.

(4) Hand-operated levers.

(a) Spring latch.

Hand-lever-operated power presses will be equipped with a spring latch on the operating lever to prevent premature or accidental tripping.

(b) More than one operating station.

The operating levers on hand-tripped presses having more than one operating station will be interlocked to prevent the tripping of the press except by the concurrent use of all levers.

(5) Machines using part revolution clutches.

(a) Clutch/brake control.

The clutch will release and the brake will be applied when the external clutch engaging means is removed, deactivated or deenergized.

(b) Stop control.

A red color stop control will be provided with the clutch/brake control system. Momentary operation of the stop control will immediately deactivate the clutch and apply the brake. The stop control will override any other control, and reactuation of the clutch will require use of the operating (tripping) means which has been selected.

A means of selecting "off," "inch," "single stroke," and "continuous" (when the "continuous" function is furnished) will be supplied with the clutch/brake control to select type of operation of the press.

(d) Inch operating means.

An inch operating means will be provided and will prevent exposure of the employee's hands within the point of operation by:

(i) Requiring the concurrent use of both hands to actuate the clutch, or

(ii) Being a single control protected against accidental actuation and so located that the employee cannot reach into the point of operation while operating the single control.

(e) Two-hand controls for single stroke.

Two-hand controls for single stroke will conform to the following specifications:

(i) All controls will be protected against unintended operation.

(ii) The two-hand control system will permit an adjustment which will require concurrent pressure from both hands during the die closing portion of the stroke.

(iii) The two-hand control system will incorporate an anti-repeat feature.

(iv) The control system will require the operator to release all hand controls before an interrupted stroke can be resumed.

(v) Where two-hand trip controls are used on multiple-station presses, there will be a separate set of controls for each designated employee. Controls will be activated and deactivated in sets of two. The clutch/brake control system will prevent actuation of the clutch if all operating stations are bypassed.

(vi) The starting of a continuous run will require a separate action by the operator in addition to the setting for continuous stroking of the press before actuation of the operating controls will result in continuous stroking.

(vii) If foot control is provided, the selection method between foot or hand control will be separate from the stroking selector and will be designed so that the selection may be supervised by the employer.

(viii) Foot-operated controls will be guarded to prevent accidental operation.

(ix) Clutch/brake control systems will automatically deactivate in the event of failure of power or pressure supply for clutch engaging or failure of air supply. Reactivation will require restoration of normal power or air and the use of the tripping mechanisms.

(x) Turnover bar operation will be performed only when the power source is deenergized.

(6) Electrical.

(a) Disconnect switch.

A main power disconnect switch capable of being locked only in the "off" position will be provided with every power press control system.

(b) Motor start button.

The motor start button will be protected against accidental operation.

All mechanical power press controls will incorporate a type of drive motor starter that will disconnect the drive motor from the power source in the event of control voltage or power source failure, and require operation of the motor start button to restart the motor when voltage conditions are restored to normal.

(d) Accidental ground.

All clutch/brake control electrical circuits will be protected against the possibility of an accidental ground in the control circuit causing false operation of the press.

(7) Slide counterbalance systems.

(a) Spring counterbalance systems.

Spring counterbalance systems when used will:

(i) Incorporate means to retain system parts in event of breakage, and

(ii) Have the capability to hold the slide and its attachments at midstroke, without brake applied.

(b) Air counterbalance cylinders.

Air counterbalance cylinders will:

(i) Incorporate means to retain the piston and rod in case of breakage or loosening;

(ii) Have adequate capability to hold the slide and its attachments at any point in stroke, without brake applied; and

(iii) Incorporate means to prevent failure of capability (sudden loss of pressure) in event of air supply failure.

(8) Air controlling equipment.

Air controlling equipment will be protected against foreign material and water entering the pneumatic system of the press. A means of air lubrication will be provided when needed.

(9) Hydraulic equipment.

The maximum anticipated working pressures in any hydraulic system on a mechanical power press cannot exceed the safe working pressure rating of any component used in that system.

(10) Pressure vessels.

All pressure vessels used in conjunction with power presses will conform to the most current edition of "American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code for Pressure Vessels."

(11) Control reliability.

When specified by paragraph (D)(5) of this rule, the control system will operate so that a failure within the system does not prevent the normal stopping action from being applied to the press when specified, but will prevent initiation of a successive stroke until the failure is corrected. The failure will be detectable by a simple test, or indicated by the control system. This specification does not apply to those elements of the control system which have no effect on the protection against point of operation injuries.

(12) Brake system monitoring.

When specified by paragraph (D)(5) of this rule, the brake monitor will:

(a) Automatically prevent the activation of a successive stroke if the stopping time or braking distance deteriorates to a point where the safety distance being utilized does not meet the specifications set forth in paragraphs (D)(3)(c)(v) and (D)(3)(g)(iii) of this rule.

The brake monitor used with the type B gate or movable barrier device will be installed in a manner to detect slide top-stop overrun beyond the limit established by the employer.

(b) Indicate when the performance of the braking system has deteriorated to the extent described in paragraph (C)(12)(a) of this rule; and

(D) Safeguarding the point of operation.

(1) General specifications.

(a) It is the responsibility of the employer to provide and require the usage of "point of operation guards" or properly applied and adjusted "point of operation devices" on every operation performed on a mechanical press. (See Table 10-1 to this rule.)

(b) The specification of paragraph (D)(1)(a) of this rule does not apply when the point of operation opening is one-fourth inch or less. (See Table 10-1 to this rule.)

(2) Point of operation guards.

(a) Every point of operation guard will meet the following specifications:

(i) It will prevent entry of hands or fingers into the point of operation by reaching through, over, under, or around the guard;

(ii) It will conform to the maximum permissible openings of Table 10-1 to this rule;

(iii) It will , in itself, create no pinch point between the guard and moving machine parts;

(iv) It will utilize fasteners not readily removable by the operator, so as to minimize the possibility of misuse or removal of essential parts;

(v) It will be easy to inspect; and

(vi) It will offer maximum visibility of the point of operation consistent with the other specifications.

(b) When used, a die enclosure guard will be attached to the die shoe or stripper or both in a fixed position.

(d) Interlocked press barrier guard.

(i) When used, an interlocked press barrier guard will be attached to the press frame or bolster plate and will be interlocked with the press clutch control so that the clutch cannot be activated during normal production unless the guard itself, or the hinged or movable sections of the guard are in position to conform to the specifications of Table 10-1 to this rule.

(ii) The hinged or movable sections of an interlocked press barrier guard cannot be used to actuate the press during manual feeding. The guard will prevent opening of the interlocked section and reaching into the point of operation prior to the die closure or prior to the cessation of slide motion. See paragraph (D)(3)(b) of this rule regarding manual feeding through interlocked press barrier devices.

(e) When used, the adjustable barrier guard will be securely attached to the press bed, bolster plate, or die shoe, and will be adjusted and operated in conformity with Table 10-1 to this rule and the specifications of this paragraph.

(f) A point of operation enclosure which does not meet the specifications of paragraphs (D)(2)(a) to (D)(2)(e) of this rule and Table 10-1 to this rule will be used only in conjunction with point of operation devices.

(3) Point of operation devices.

(a) Point of operation devices will protect the operator by:

(i) Preventing and/or stopping normal stroking of the press if the operator's hands are inadvertently placed in the point of operation; or

(ii) Preventing the operator from inadvertently reaching into the point of operation or withdrawing his hands if they are inadvertently located in the point of operation, as the dies close; or

(iii) Preventing the operator from inadvertently reaching into the point of operation at all times; or

(iv) Requiring application of both of the operator's hands to machine operating controls and locating such controls at such a safety distance from the point of operation that the slide completes the downward travel or stops before the operator can reach into the point of operation with his hands; or

(v) Enclosing the point of operation before a press stroke can be initiated and maintaining this closed condition until the motion of the slide has ceased; or

(vi) Enclosing the point of operation before a press stroke can be initiated, so as to prevent an operator from reaching into the point of operation prior to die closure or prior to cessation of slide motion during the downward stroke.

(b) A gate or movable barrier device will protect the operator as follows:

(i) A type A gate or movable barrier device will protect the operator in the manner specified in paragraph (D)(3)(a)(v) of this rule; and

(ii) A type B gate or movable barrier device will protect the operator in the manner specified in paragraph (D)(3)(a)(vi) of this rule.

(c) A presence sensing point of operation device will protect the operator as provided in paragraph (D)(3)(a)(i) of this rule, and will be interlocked into the control circuit to prevent or stop slide motion if the operator's hand or other part of his body is within the sensing field of the device during the down-stroke of the press slide.

(i) The device will not be used on machines using full revolution clutches.

(ii) The device will not be used as a tripping means to initiate slide motion.

(iii) The device will be constructed so that a failure within the system does not prevent the normal stopping action from being applied to the press when specified , but does prevent the initiation of a successive stroke until the failure is corrected. The failure will be indicated by the system.

(iv) Muting (bypassing of the protective function) of such device, during the up-stroke of the press slide, is permitted for the purpose of parts ejection, circuit checking and feeding.

(v) The safety distance (D_s) from the sensing field to the point of operation will be greater than the distance determined by the following formula:

D_s = sixty-three inches/second x T_s; where:

D_s = minimum safety distance (inches); sixty-three inches/second = hand speed constant; and

T_s = stopping time of the press measured at approximately ninety degree position of crankshaft rotation (seconds).

(vi) Guards will be used to protect all areas of entry to the point of operation not protected by the presence sensing device.

(d) The pull-out device will protect the operator as specified in paragraph (D)(3)(a)(ii) of this rule and will include attachments for each of the operator's hands.

(i) Attachments will be connected to and operated only by the press slide or upper die.

(ii) Attachments will be adjusted to prevent the operator from reaching into the point of operation or to withdraw the operator's hands from the point of operation before the dies close.

(iii) A separate pull-out device will be provided for each operator if more than one operator is used on a press.

(e) Sweep devices will not be used.

(f) A holdout or restraint device will protect the operator as specified in paragraph (D)(3)(a)(iii) of this rule and will include attachments for each of the operator's hands. Such attachments will be securely anchored and adjusted in such a way that the operator is restrained from reaching into the point of operation. A separate set of restraints will be provided for each operator if more than one operator is needed on a press.

(g) The two-hand control device will protect the operator as specified in paragraph (D)(3)(a)(iv) of this rule.

(i) When used in press operations needing more than one operator, separate two-hand controls will be provided for each operator and will be designed to require concurrent application of all controls to activate the slide. The removal of a hand from any control button will cause the slide to stop.

(ii) Each two-hand control will meet the construction specifications of paragraph (C)(5)(e) of this rule.

(iii) The safety distance (D_s) between each two-hand control device and the point of operation will be greater than the distance determined by the following formula:

D_s = sixty-three inches/second x Ts; where:

D_s = minimum safety distance (inches); sixty-three inches/second = hand speed constant; and

T_s = stopping time of the press measured at approximately ninety degree position of crankshaft rotation (seconds).

(h) The two-hand trip device will protect the operator as specified in paragraph (D)(3)(a)(iv) of this rule.

(i) When used in press operations needing more than one operator, separate two-hand trips will be provided for each operator, and will be designed to require concurrent application of all operators to activate the slide.

(ii) Each two-hand trip will meet the construction specifications of paragraph (C)(5)(e) of this rule.

(iii) The safety distance (D_m) between the two-hand trip and the point of operation will be greater than the distance determined by the following formula:

Dm = sixty-three inches/second x Tm; where:

Dm = minimum safety distance (inches); sixty-three inches/second = hand speed constant; and

Tm = the maximum time the press takes for the die closure after it has been tripped (seconds).

For full revolution clutch presses with only one engaging point, Tm is equal to the time necessary for one and one-half revolutions of the crank shaft. For full revolution clutch presses with more than one engaging point, Tm will be calculated as follows:

Tm = [1/2 + (one divided by number of engaging points per revolution)] x time necessary to complete one revolution of the crankshaft (seconds).

(4) Hand-feeding tools.

Hand-feeding tools are intended for placing and removing materials in and from the press. Hand-feeding tools are not a point of operation guard or protection device and will not be used in lieu of the guards or devices spedified in this paragraph.

(5) Additional specifications for safeguarding.

Where the operator feeds or removes parts by placing one or both hands in the point of operation, and a two-hand control, presence sensing device, type B gate, or movable barrier (on a part revolution clutch) is used for safeguarding:

(a) The employer will use a control system and a brake monitor which comply with paragraphs (C)(11) and (C)(12) of this rule;

(b) The control of air clutch machines will be designed to prevent a significant increase in the normal stopping time due to a failure within the opening valve mechanism, and to inhibit further operation if such failure does occur, where a part revolution clutch is employed.

(E) Design, construction, setting, and feeding of dies.

(1) General specifications.

The employer will furnish and require the use of hand tools for freeing and removing stuck work or scrap pieces from the dies, so that no employee need reach into the point of operation for such purposes.

(2) Scrap handling.

The employer will provide means for handling scrap from roll feed or random length stock operations. Scrap cutters used in conjunction with scrap handling systems will be safeguarded in accordance with paragraph (D) of this rule.

(3) Guide post hazard.

The hazard created by a guide post (when it is located in the immediate vicinity of the operator) when separated from its bushing by more than one-fourth inch will be considered as a point of operation hazard and be protected in accordance with paragraph (D) of this rule.

(4) Unitized tooling.

If unitized tooling is used, the opening between the top of the punch holder and the face of the slide, or striking pad, will be safeguarded in accordance with the specifications of paragraph (D) of this rule.

(5) Weight designation.

All dies will be stamped to indicate complete die weight when handling equipment may become overloaded.

(6) Die fastening.

Provision will be made in both the upper and lower shoes for securely mounting the die to the bolster plate and slide. Where clamp caps or setscrews are used in conjunction with punch stems, additional means of securing the upper shoe to the slide will be used.

(7) Die handling.

Handling equipment attach points will be provided on all dies needing mechanical handling.

(8) Diesetting.

(a) The employer will provide spring loaded turnover bars for presses designed to accept such turnover bars.

(b) The employer will provide die stops or other means to prevent losing control of the die while setting or removing dies in presses which are inclined.

(c) The employer will provide and require the use of safety blocks for use whenever dies are being adjusted or repaired in the press.

(d) The employer will provide and require the use of brushes, swabs, lubricating rolls, and automatic, or manual pressure guns to lubricate material, punches or dies.

(F) Power press brake (when used as a power press).

The specifications of this rule are applicable to power press brakes when used for other than bending operations.

(G) Hydraulic and pneumatic presses.

Hydraulic and pneumatic presses will be guarded in accordance with paragraph (E) of rule 4123:1-5-11 of the Administrative Code.

(H) Exceptions.

The specifications set forth in this rule do not apply to setting up or trying out dies.

Table 10-1

| Distance of opening from point of operation hazard (inches) | Maximum width of opening (inches) | | --- | --- | | 1/2 to 1-1/2 | 1/4 | | 1-1/2 to 3-1/2 | 3/8 | | 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 | 1/2 | | 3-1/2 to 5-1/2 | 5/8 | | 5-1/2 to 6-1/2 | 3/4 | | 6-1/2 to 7-1/2 | 7/8 | | 7-1/2 to 12-1/2 | 1-1/4 | | 12-1/2 to 15-1/2 | 1-1/2 | | 15-1/2 to 17-1/2 | 1-7/8 | | 17-1/2 to 31-1/2 | 2-1/8 |

This diagram shows the accepted safe openings between the bottom edge of a guard and feed table at various distances from the danger line (point of operation)

The clearance line marks the distance needed to prevent contact between guard and moving parts.

The minimum guarding line is the distance between the infeed side of the guard and the danger line which is one-half inch from the danger line.

The various openings are such that for average size hands an operator's fingers will not reach the point of operation.

After installation of point of operation guards and before a job is released for operation a check should be made to verify that the guard will prevent the operator's hands from reaching the point of operation.

Last updated July 13, 2026 at 3:42 PM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-11 Forging machines, other power machines and machine tools, hydraulic and pneumatic presses, and power press brakes.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) Hammers and presses.

(a) The ram will be blocked when dies are being changed or other work is being done on the hammer. Blocks or wedges will be made of material, the strength and construction of which will meet or exceed the specifications and dimensions shown in Table 11-1 to this rule.

(b) Tongs will be of sufficient length to enable the employee to keep himself in the clear in case of kickback and the tongs will not have sharp handle ends.

(c) Oil swabs, or scale removers, or other devices to remove scale, will be provided. These devices will be long enough to enable an employee to reach the full length of the die without placing hands or arms between the dies.

(2) Power-driven hammers.

(a) Safety cylinder head.

Every steam or airhammer will have a safety cylinder head to act as a cushion if the rod should break or pull out of the ram.

(b) Stop valve - shutoff valve.

Steam hammers will be provided with a quick closing emergency valve in the admission pipe line at a convenient location. This valve will be closed and locked in the off position while the hammer is being adjusted, repaired, or serviced, or when the dies are being changed.

The steam hammer cylinder will be constructed with a self-draining arrangement, or a quick-acting type drain cock will be provided, which should be piped to a sump or drain pipe. If it discharges into the air, it will be located so as not to endanger employees.

Table 11-1

Strength and Dimension for Wood Ram Props

| Size of timber inches (1) | Square inches in cross section | Minimum allowable crushing strength parallel to grain p.s.i. (2) | Maximum static load within short column range (3) | Safety factor | Maximum recommended weight of forging hammer for timber used | Maximum allowable length of timber, inches | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 4x4 | 16 | 5,000 | 80,000 | 10 | 8,000 | 44 | | 6x6 | 36 | 5,000 | 180,000 | 10 | 18,000 | 66 | | 8x8 | 64 | 5,000 | 320,000 | 10 | 32,000 | 88 | | 10x10 | 100 | 5,000 | 500,000 | 10 | 50,000 | 100 | | 12x12 | 144 | 5,000 | 720,000 | 10 | 72,000 | 132 |

Footnote(1) Actual dimension.

Footnote(2) Adapted from U.S. department of agriculture technical bulletin 479. Hardwoods recommended are those whose ultimate crushing strengths in compression parallel to grain are five thousand p.s.i. (pounds per square inch) or greater.

Footnote(3) Slenderness ratio formula for short columns is L/d=11, where L=length of timber in inches and d=least dimension in inches; this ratio should not exceed eleven.

(3) Air-lift hammers.

Air-lift hammers will be provided with two drain cocks; one on main head cylinder, and one on clamp cylinder.

(4) Board-type drophammers.

(a) Guarding.

A suitable enclosure will be provided to prevent damaged or detached boards from falling. The board enclosure will be securely fastened to the hammer.

(b) Releasing lever.

Means will be provided to prevent releasing lever from falling in case the front rod or releasing lever breaks.

Means will be provided to prevent the front rod (friction rod) from falling in case it breaks.

(d) Protection over workplace.

A screen or other guard will be installed over the workplace of hammer operator at the normal operating position.

(e) Board clamp rod.

Means will be provided to prevent the board clamp rod from falling in case it breaks.

(5) Forging presses.

The employer will provide and require the use of safety blocks for use whenever dies are being adjusted or repaired in all forging presses.

(6) Mechanically-operated hammers.

(a) Where only one hand is used for holding materials.

On mechanically-operated hammers where only one hand is used for holding the material, a safety stop, dog, or catch will be provided which prevents the hammer from coming down until such device has been released and held out of the way by the other hand; or a hand lever instead of the foot treadle will be provided for tripping the hammer.

(b) Where neither hand is used for holding material.

On hammers where neither hand is used for holding the material:

(i) A safety stop or tripping lever will be provided which will require the use of both hands to trip the hammer; or

(ii) A pull guard will be provided.

(D) Other power machines and machine tools.

(1) Upsetting machines.

Tension and safety springs will be covered to prevent the bolt or nut from being thrown out in case of breakage.

(2) Bulldozers.

A guard will be provided which will prevent employees from stepping between the dies.

(3) Power shears

(a) Alligator shears.

(i) Alligator shears facing an aisle or passageway will be located a minimum of four feet therefrom, unless guarded.

(ii) A guard will be installed which will prevent a kickup. This specification does not apply to alligator shears which operate automatically or by remote control on production lines.

(b) Squaring shears.

Squaring shears, where material is fed or removed by hand, will have the blade guarded at feed and discharge sides of the shear.

(4) Hollow spindle lathes, cutting-off machines, etc.

On hollow spindle lathes, cutting-off machines or any machine used on bar stock, pipe tubing, etc., where the material is revolved by power, substantial troughs or guards will be provided which will prevent the operator or other employees from coming in contact with the projecting unused portion of the revolving material.

(5) Machines with reciprocating tables.

Machines with reciprocating tables will have the openings guarded; guards will also be provided at each end and the sides of the table if the clearance of the table, which includes the work being machined and its chuck does not exceed twenty-four inches.

(6) Die casting machines.

Danger zones on die casting machines will be guarded.

(7) Hopper fed machinery.

(a) All hopper fed machinery, such as rotaries, die machines, and extruders, will have the entire opening protected with substantial grid type guards to prevent access of the employee's hands into the danger zone, or the hopper will be extended high enough to prevent entry into moving parts. The guards will be permanently attached to the hopper. If the hopper is removable, it will be provided with an interlock device so that the machine cannot operate when the hopper is removed.

(b) Exception.

Machinery covered expressly by specifications contained in other rules of the Ohio bureau of workers' compensation.

(8) Guillotine cutters.

(a) All power guillotine cutters where the blade is exposed to contact will be equipped with a two-hand control device.

(b) Exception.

Machinery covered expressly by specifications contained in other rules of the Ohio bureau of workers' compensation.

(9) Tumblers.

Power driven tumblers, rattlers, drums, barrels, containers, or similar machines that rotate, spin, or rock will be guarded on an area or individual basis. The guard will be interlocked with the drive mechanism so that the machine cannot operate unless the guard or enclosure is in place.

(10) Nip points.

(a) Means will be provided to protect employees exposed to contact with nip points created by power driven in-running rolls, rollover platen, or other flat surface material being wound over roll surface.

(b) Exception.

Machinery covered expressly by requirements contained in other rules of the Ohio bureau of workers' compensation.

(11) Food mixers.

All power driven food mixers will be equipped with a two-hand control device to keep agitator in motion under power when bowl is opened more than one-fifth of its total opening.

(12) Fastening machines.

All power driven fixed fastening machinery, such as riveting machines, wire stitchers, staplers, sewing machines, and similar fastening machinery will be guarded.

(13) Knives.

(a) All power driven knives or cutting blades, such as reciprocating knives, endless band knives, flying knives, slicer blades, and similar cutting machines, where exposed to contact, will be guarded except for the necessary working portion of the blade while being used.

(b) Exception.

Machinery covered expressly by specifications contained in other rules of the Ohio bureau of workers' compensation.

(E) Hydraulic or pneumatic presses.

Every hydraulic or pneumatic (air-powered) press will be constructed, or will be guarded, to prevent the hands or fingers of the operator from entering the danger zone during the operating cycle. Acceptable methods of guarding are:

(1) "Fixed barrier guard" - an enclosure to prevent hands or fingers from entering the danger zone;

(2) "Gate guard" - a movable gate operated with a tripping device to interpose a barrier between the operator and the danger zone and to remain closed until the down stroke has been completed;

(3) "Two-hand control" - an actuating device which requires the simultaneous use of both hands outside the danger zone during the entire closing cycle of the press;

(4) Pull guard - attached to hands or wrists and activated by closing of press so that movement of the ram will pull the operator's hands from the danger zone during the operating cycle;

(5) Restraint or hold-back guard - with attachments to the hands or wrists of the operator to prevent hands or fingers entering the danger zone during the operating cycle;

(6) Other practices, means or methods which will provide safeguards, preventing the hands or fingers of the operator from entering the danger zone during the operating cycle and which are equivalent in result to one of the types specified above.

(F) Power press brake (when used as a power press).

The specifications of rule 4123:1-5-10 of the Administrative Code will be applicable to power press brakes when used for other than bending.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-12 Abrasive grinding and cutting, polishing and wire buffing equipment.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) The employer will verbally and through demonstration instruct the employee in the safe operation and maintenance of abrasive grinding and cutting and polishing equipment.

(2) It is the duty of the employee to operate such equipment in accordance with such instruction.

(D) Abrasive wheel machinery.

(1) General specifications.

(a) Machine guarding.

Abrasive wheels will be used only on machines provided with safety guards as defined in the following paragraphs of this rule, except:

(i) Wheels used for internal work while within the work being ground;

(ii) Mounted wheels, used in portable operations, two inches and smaller in diameter; and

(iii) Types 16, 17, 18, and 18R and 19 cones, plugs, and threaded hole pot balls where the work offers protection (see appendix to this rule.)

(b) Guard design.

The safety guard will cover the spindle end, nut, and flange projections. The safety guard will be mounted so as to maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the strength of the fastenings will exceed the strength of the guard, except:

(i) Safety guards on all operations where the work provides protection to the operator, may be so constructed that the spindle end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; and where the nature of the work is such as to entirely cover the side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be omitted; and

(ii) The spindle end, nut and outer flange may be exposed on machines, designed as portable saws, when used with abrasive wheels.

Grinding machines will be equipped with flanges in accordance with paragraph (D)(3) of this rule.

(d) Work rests.

(i) On off-hand grinding machines (see appendix to this rule) work rests will be used to support the work. They will be of rigid construction and designed to be adjustable to compensate for wheel wear. Work rests will be kept adjusted to a maximum opening of one-eighth inch to prevent the work from being jammed between the wheel and the rest. The employer will instruct the employee to securely clamp the work rest after each adjustment. The employer will also instruct the employee not to adjust the work rest with the wheel in motion.

(ii) The work rest will be used to support the work wherever practicable.

(e) Excluded machinery.

Natural sandstone wheels and metal, wooden, cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of abrasive on the surface are not covered by paragraph (D) of this rule.

(2) Guarding of abrasive wheel machinery.

(a) Cup wheels.

Cup wheels types 6 and 11 (see appendix to this rule) will be protected by:

(i) Safety guards as specified in paragraph (D)(2)(a)(i) of this rule, applies to paragraphs (D)(2)(a) to (D)(2)(j) of this rule;

(ii) Band type guards as specified in paragraph (D)(2)(k) of this rule; and

(iii) Special "revolving cup guards" which mount behind the wheel and turn with it. They will be made of steel or other material with strength enough to withstand the shock of the bursting wheel and will enclose the wheel sides upward from the back for one-third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features will conform with all specifications of paragraph (D) of this rule. It is necessary to maintain clearance between the wheel side and the guard. This clearance cannot exceed one-sixteenth inch.

(b) Guard exposure angles.

The maximum exposure angles specified in paragraphs (D)(2)(a) to (D)(2)(h) of this rule cannot be exceeded. Visors or other accessory equipment will not be included as a part of the guard when measuring the guard opening, unless such equipment has strength equal to that of the guard.

(i) The angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on machines known as bench and floor stands cannot exceed ninety degrees or one-fourth of the periphery. This exposure will begin at a point not more than sixty-five degrees above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle (see figures 12-1 and 12-2 to this rule, and paragraph (D)(2)(i) of this rule).

(ii) Where the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle, the exposure cannot exceed one hundred twenty-five degrees (see figures 12-3 and 12-4 to this rule).

(d) Cylindrical grinders.

The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on cylindrical grinding machines will not exceed one hundred eighty degrees. This exposure will begin at a point not more than sixty-five degrees above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle (see figures 12-5 and 12-6 to this rule, and paragraph (D)(2)(i) of this rule).

(e) Surface grinders and cutting-off machines.

The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on cutting-off machines and on surface grinding machines which employ the wheel periphery will not exceed one hundred fifty degrees. This exposure will begin at a point not less than fifteen degrees below the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle (see figures 12-7 and 12-8 to this rule).

(f) Swing frame grinders.

The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on machines known as swing frame grinding machines will not exceed one hundred eighty degrees, and the top half of the wheel will be enclosed at all times (see figures 12-9 and 12-10 to this rule).

(g) Automatic snagging machines.

The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on grinders known as automatic snagging machines cannot exceed one hundred eighty degrees and the top half of the wheel will be enclosed at all times (see figures 12-9 and 12-10 to this rule).

(h) Top grinding.

Where the work is applied to the wheel above the horizontal centerline, the exposure of the grinding wheel periphery cannot exceed sixty degrees (see figures 12-11 and 12-12 to this rule).

(i) Exposure adjustment.

Safety guards of the type described in paragraphs (D)(2)(c) and (D)(2)(d) of this rule, where the operator stands in front of the opening, will be constructed so that the peripheral protecting member can be adjusted to the constantly decreasing diameter of the wheel. The maximum angular exposure above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle as specified in paragraphs (D)(2)(c) and (D)(2)(d) of this rule will never be exceeded, and the distance between the wheel periphery and the adjustable tongue or the end of the peripheral member at the top will never exceed one-fourth inch (see figures 12-13, 12-14, 12-15, 12-16, 12-17 and 12-18 to this rule).

(j) Material specifications and minimum dimensions.

(i) See figures 12-31 and 12-32 and table 12-J to this rule for minimum basic thickness of peripheral and side members for various types of safety guards and classes of service.

(ii) If operating speed does not exceed eight thousand surface feet per minute cast iron safety guards, malleable iron guards or other guards as described in paragraph (D)(2)(j)(iii) of this rule will be used.

(iii) Cast steel, or structural steel safety guards as specified in figures 12-31 and 12-32 and table 12-J to this rule will be used where operating speeds of wheels are faster than eight thousand surface feet per minute up to a maximum of sixteen thousand surface feet per minute.

(iv) For cutting-off wheels sixteen inches diameter and smaller and where speed does not exceed sixteen thousand surface feet per minute, cast iron or malleable iron safety guards as specified in figures 12-31 and 12-32 to this rule, and in table 12-J to this rule will be used.

(v) For cutting-off wheels larger than sixteen inches diameter and where speed does not exceed fourteen thousand two hundred surface feet per minute, safety guards as specified in figures 12-22 and 12-23 to this rule and in table 12-A to this rule will be used.

(vi) For thread grinding wheels not exceeding one inch in thickness cast iron or malleable iron safety guards as specified in figures 12-31 and 12-32 to this rule and in table 12-J to this rule will be used.

(k) Band type guards - specifications.

Band type guards will conform to the following specifications:

(i) The bands will be of steel plate or other material of equal or greater strength. They will be continuous, the ends being either riveted, bolted, or welded together in such a manner as to leave the inside free from projections.

(ii) The inside diameter of the band will not be more than one inch larger than the outside diameter of the wheel, and will be mounted as nearly concentric with the wheel as practicable.

(iii) The band will be of sufficient width and its position kept so adjusted that at no time will the wheel protrude beyond the edge of the band a distance greater than that indicated in figure 12-24 and table 12-B to this rule or the wall thickness (W), whichever is smaller.

(3) Flanges.

(a) General specifications.

(i) All abrasive wheels will be mounted between flanges which are not less than one-third the diameter of the wheel.

(ii) Exceptions.

(a) Mounted wheels;

(b) Portable wheels with threaded inserts or projecting studs;

(d) Plate mounted wheels;

(e) Cylinders, cup, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks;

(f) Types 27 and 28 wheels;

(g) Certain internal wheels;

(h) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo);

(i) Cutting-off wheels, types 1 and 27A (see paragraphs (D)(3)(a)(ii)(i)(i) and (D)(3)(a)(ii)(i)(ii) of this rule);

(i) Type 1 cutting-off wheels are to be mounted between properly relieved flanges which have matching bearing surfaces. Such flanges will be at least one-fourth the wheel diameter;

(ii) Type 27A cutting-off wheels are designed to be mounted by means of flat, not relieved, flanges having matching bearing surfaces and which may be less than one-third but not less than one-fourth the wheel diameter (see figure 12-19 to this rule for one such type of mounting);

(iii) There are three general types of flanges: straight relieved flanges (see figure 12-27 to this rule); straight unrelieved flanges (see figure 12-25 to this rule); and adaptor flanges (see figures 12-28 and 12-29 to this rule);

(iv) Regardless of flange type used, the wheel will always be guarded. Blotters will be used in accordance with paragraph (D)(3)(f) of this rule.

(b) Design and material.

(i) Flanges will be of such design as to satisfactorily transmit the driving torque from the spindle to the grinding wheel.

(ii) Flanges will be made of steel, cast iron, or other material of equal or greater strength and rigidity.

(iii) Flanges will be designed with respect to rigidity so that when tightened, the radial width of bearing surface of contact on wheel is maintained (see table 12-F and figure 12-27 to this rule).

Flanges will be dimensionally accurate and in good balance. There will be no rough surfaces or sharp edges.

(d) Uniformity of diameter.

(i) Both flanges, of any type, between which a wheel is mounted, will be of the same diameter and have equal bearing surface. Exceptions are set forth in the remaining specifications of this rule.

(ii) Type 27 and type 28 wheels, because of their shape and usage, need specially designed adaptors. The back flange will extend beyond the central hub or raised portion and contact the wheel to counteract the side pressure on the wheel in use. The adaptor nut which is less than the minimum one-third diameter of wheel fits in the depressed side of wheel to prevent interference in side grinding and serves to drive the wheel by its clamping force against the depressed portion of the back flange. The variance in flange diameters, the adaptor nut being less than one-third wheel diameter, and the use of side pressure in wheel operation limits the use to reinforced organic bonded wheels. Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the manufacturer cannot be reused. Type 27 and type 28 wheels will be used only with a safety guard located between wheel and operator during use (see figure 12-19a to this rule).

(iii) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo) with tapered K dimension.

(e) Recess and undercut.

(i) Straight relieved flanges made according to table 12-F to this rule and figure 12-27 to this rule will be recessed at least one-sixteenth inch on the side next to the wheel for a distance as specified in table 12-F to this rule.

(ii) Straight flanges of the adaptor or sleeve type (see table 12-G to this rule and figures 12-28 and 12-29 to this rule) will be undercut so that there will be no bearing on the sides of the wheel within one-eighth inch of the arbor hole.

(f) Blotters.

(i) Blotters (compressible washers) will always be used between flanges and abrasive wheel surfaces to ensure uniform distribution of flange pressure (see paragraph (D)(4)(e) of this rule).

(ii) Exceptions.

(a) Mounted wheels;

(b) Abrasive discs (inserted washer, and projecting stud type);

(d) Cylinders, cups, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks;

(e) Types 27 and 28 wheels;

(f) Type 1 and type 27A cutting-off wheels;

(g) Certain internal wheels;

(h) Diamond and cubic boron nitride wheels; and

(i) Modified types 6 and 11 wheel (terrazzo) - blotters applied flat side of wheel only.

(g) Multiple wheel mounting.

The driving flange will be securely fastened to the spindle and the bearing surface will run true. When more than one wheel is mounted between a single set of flanges, wheels may be cemented together or separated by specially designed spacers. Spacers will be equal in diameter to the mounting flanges and have equal bearing surfaces.

(h) Dimensions.

(i) Tables 12-D and 12-F to this rule and figures 12-25 and 12-27 to this rule show minimum dimensions for straight relieved and unrelieved flanges for use with wheels with small holes that fit directly on the machine spindle. Dimensions of such flanges will never be less than indicated and should be greater where practicable.

(ii) Tables 12-E and 12-G to this rule and figures 12-26, 12-28 and 12-29 to this rule show minimum dimensions for straight adaptor flanges for use with wheels having holes larger than the spindle. Dimensions of such adaptor flanges will never be less than indicated and should be greater where practicable.

(iii) Table 12-H to this rule and figure 12-30 to this rule show minimum dimensions for straight flanges that are an integral part of wheel sleeves which are frequently used on precision grinding machines. Dimensions of such flanges will never be less than indicated and should be greater where practicable.

(i) Repairs and maintenance.

All flanges will be maintained in good condition. When bearing surfaces become worn, warped, sprung, or damaged they will be trued, refaced, or replaced. When refacing or truing, care will be exercised to make sure that proper relief and rigidity is maintained as specified in paragraphs (D)(3)(b) and (D)(3)(e) of this rule, and they will be replaced when they do not conform to these specifications and table 12-D to this rule, figure 12-25 to this rule, table 12-E to this rule, figure 12-26 to this rule, table 12-F to this rule, figure 12-27 to this rule, and table 12-H to this rule, figure 12-30 to this rule. Failure to observe these specifications might cause excessive flange pressure around the hole of the wheel. This is especially true of wheel-sleeve or adaptor flanges.

(4) Mounting.

(a) Inspection.

Immediately before mounting, all wheels will be closely inspected and sounded by the employer or a designated employee (ring test) to make sure they have not been damaged in transit, storage, or otherwise. The spindle speed of the machine will be checked before mounting of the wheel to be certain that it does not exceed the maximum operating speed marked on the wheel. Wheels shall be tapped gently with a light nonmetallic implement, such as the handle of a screwdriver for light wheels, or a wooden mallet for heavier wheels. If they sound cracked (dead), they will not be used. This is known as the "ring test."

(i) Wheels will be dry and free from sawdust when applying the ring test, otherwise the sound will be deadened. It should also be noted that organic bonded wheels do not emit the same clear metallic ring as do vitrified and silicate wheels.

(ii) "Tap" wheels about forty-five degrees each side of the vertical centerline and about one or two inches from the periphery as indicated by the spots in figure 12-20 and figure 12-21 to this rule. Then rotate the wheel forty-five degrees and repeat the test. A sound and undamaged wheel will give a clear metallic tone. If cracked, there will be a dead sound and not a clear ring.

(b) Arbor size.

Grinding wheels will fit freely on the spindle and remain free under all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance between the wheel hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or adaptors) is essential to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and spindle expansion. To accomplish this, the machine spindle will be made from a nominal (standard) size to plus .002 inch. A wheel which has to be forced on a spindle will not be used.

All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters and flanges will be flat and free of foreign matter.

(d) Bushing.

When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it will not exceed the width of the wheel and will not contact the flanges.

(e) Blotters.

A blotter will be used between the flange and the abrasive wheel. The blotter will cover the entire contact area of the flange. Blotters need not be used with the following types of wheels:

(i) Mounted wheels;

(ii) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer, and projecting stud type);

(iii) Plate mounted wheels;

(iv) Cylinders, cups, or segmented wheels that are mounted in chucks;

(v) Types 27 and 28 wheels;

(vi) Type 1 and type 27A cutting-off wheels;

(vii) Certain internal wheels; and

(viii) Diamond and cubic boron nitride wheels.

(E) Wire buffing wheels.

Wire buffing wheels will be guarded unless the nature of the work is such that the material being processed acts as a shield to the periphery of the wheel, such as internal buffing.

(F) Polishing equipment.

(1) When dry grinding, dry polishing, or buffing is being performed, suitable hoods, or enclosures, connected to exhaust systems will be used.

(2) Such exhaust systems will be operated continuously whenever such operations are being done and shall be capable of preventing contaminants from entering the breathing zone.

View Appendix

Last updated July 13, 2026 at 3:44 PM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-13 Motor vehicles, mobile mechanized equipment, and marine operations.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) A safety tire rack, cage, or equivalent protection will be provided and used when inflating, mounting, or dismounting tires installed on split rims or rims equipped with locking rings or similar devices.

(2) Machinery, equipment, or parts thereof, being supported by slings, hoists, or jacks will be substantially blocked or cribbed. Bulldozer blades, scraper blades, end-loader buckets, dump bodies, and similar equipment will be either fully lowered or blocked when being repaired or not in use.

(3) Equipment parked on inclines will have the brakes set, and the blade, bucket, etc., fully lowered if the equipment is unattended (out of sight or more than twenty-five feet from the operator).

(4) All cab glass will be safety glass or equivalent with the vision unimpaired by its condition.

(5) All equipment which can contact power lines will also comply with the specifications of paragraph (D) of rule 4123:1-5-23 of the Administrative Code.

(6) At locations where gasoline is being transferred to the fuel tank of any machinery, a notice will be posted by the employer stating specifically that the engine will be shut down and that no smoking or open flames be permitted during the transfer.

(7) All motor vehicles operating within the confines of the owner's property will be equipped with an audible or visual warning device, in an operable condition, activated at the operator's station.

(D) Overhead protection.

(1) All haulage vehicles loaded by means of cranes, power shovels, loaders, or similar equipment will have a substantial cab shield or canopy to protect the operator from shifting or falling materials.

(2) High lift rider trucks will have a substantial overhead guard as protection against falling objects, constructed in a manner that does not interfere with visibility. Openings will not exceed six inches in one of the two dimensions, width or length, and will extend over the operator under all normal truck operations, including forward tilts.

(a) Where materials being handled are of such dimensions that objects could fall through the above protection, then substantial guarding, such as expanded metal, woven wire, or similar materials, will be used in addition to the above (see rule 4123:1-5-99 of the Administrative Code).

(b) Exception: Where headroom conditions are such that overhead protection cannot be used because of clearance, means of limiting the lift height will be provided and the load will not extend above the operator's head.

(3) In stacking or tiering operations, where the load extends above the backrest and may endanger the operator, load backrest extensions will be provided and used.

(E) Motor vehicles used to transport employees.

(1) Vehicles assigned to, or generally used for the transportation of employees will be equipped with securely fastened seats and backrests.

(2) Tools and material transported in the same compartment with employees will be secured to prevent movement.

(F) Powered industrial trucks.

(1) General specifications.

(a) All nameplates and markings will be affixed in place and maintained in legible condition.

(b) Modifications or additions which affect capacity will conform with manufacturer's specifications. Capacity, operation, and maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals will be changed accordingly.

(c) Where trucks are designed to permit the interchange of front-end attachments, each attachment will be marked to identify it and show its approximate weight and capacity, together with instructions to consult truck nameplate for combination capacity at maximum elevation with load laterally centered.

(d) Trucks will not be altered so that the relative positions of the various parts are different from what they were when originally received from the manufacturer, nor will they be altered either by the addition of extra parts not provided by the manufacturer or by the elimination of any parts, except as provided in paragraph (F)(1)(e) of this rule. Additional counterweighting of fork trucks will not be done unless authorized by the truck manufacturer.

(e) Trucks originally approved for the use of gasoline for fuel may be converted to liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) fuel; provided the conversion meets the manufacturer's specifications.

(f) Moving parts that represent a hazard to the operator in the normal operating position will be guarded.

(g) Employees will not be required to operate any truck that is not equipped with an adequate, properly maintained braking system.

(h) Only employees who have been trained and are authorized by their employer will be permitted to operate a powered industrial truck.

(2) Restricted locations for fire safety purposes.

(a) The location or atmosphere will be classified, as to whether it is hazardous or nonhazardous, prior to trucks being used therein.

(b) Only approved power-operated trucks designated as "EX" may be used in atmospheres containing explosive or flammable concentrations of liquids, gases, or vapors, such as, but not limited to, acetylene, butadiene, or hydrogen.

(c) Under the following described conditions trucks may be used only if designed and built specifically for use therein (see appendix to this rule for "Summary Table on use of Industrial Trucks in Various Locations"):

(i) Atmospheres containing explosives or flammable concentrations of metal dust, such as aluminum, magnesium, and their alloys, or other metals of similarly hazardous characteristics;

(ii) Atmospheres containing explosives or flammable concentrations of dust in grain processing operations, such as starch plants, malting plants, and other occupancies of similar nature;

(iii) Atmospheres containing explosive or flammable concentrations of dust from coal, coke, carbon black, or similar materials;

(iv) Locations hazardous due to the presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings which may or may not be in suspension in the air;

(v) Locations where deposits or accumulations of the aforementioned dusts may be ignited by arcs or sparks originating in the truck;

(vi) Locations where easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled, including outside storages.

(3) Lighting and ventilating for operating areas.

(a) Where general lighting is less than two lumens per square foot, auxiliary directional lighting will be provided on the truck.

(b) Adequate ventilation will be provided in enclosed areas as specified in rule 4123:1-5-18 of the Administrative Code (see also the current edition of "Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) for Chemical Substances in the Work Environment" adopted by the "American Conference of Governmental Hygienists (ACGIH)."

(4) Lifting of personnel.

Lift trucks equipped with vertical only, or vertical and horizontal travel controls using a lifting carriage or forks for lifting of personnel will:

(a) Have a platform with standard guardrails, intermediate rail, and toeboards, and protection for personnel in their normal working position on the platform from moving parts of the truck that represent a hazard, all securely fastened to the lifting carriage or forks;

(b) Have controls whereby personnel on the platform can shut off power to the truck and the platform, provided that such controls will not be required if there is a truck operator in attendance at the truck controls at all times when the platform is raised; and

(G) Highway-type trucks, trailers, and railroad cars.

(1) Wheel chocks will be provided and employees instructed to place them under the rear wheels to prevent highway-type trucks and trailers from rolling while they are being loaded or unloaded by powered industrial trucks. Equivalent protection may be provided instead of wheel chocks.

(2) Wheel stops or other recognized protective devices will be provided and used to prevent railroad cars from moving while they are being loaded or unloaded by powered industrial trucks.

(3) Positive protection will be provided to prevent railroad cars from being moved while dockboards or bridge plates are in position.

(H) Marine operations and equipment.

When employees step or operate a vehicle to or from a wharf, float, barge, or towboat, a ramp with side boards or a walkway substantial in construction and fastening will be provided.

View Appendix

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-14 Power-driven cranes and hoists.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved

The term "overhead electric traveling crane" means a crane consisting of a bridge mounted on trucks which runs on rails and the hoisting mechanism mounted on a trolley which moves transversely across the bridge, and may be controlled from a cab or from remote or pendant controls.

(1) Equipment.

(a) Brakes.

Holding brakes for hoist motors will have not less than the following percentage of the full load hoisting torque at the point where the brake is applied.

One hundred twenty-five per cent when used with a control braking means other than mechanical.

One hundred per cent when used in conjunction with a mechanical control braking means.

One hundred per cent each if two holding brakes are provided.

(b) Footwalk.

A footwalk with standard guard railing and toeboards will be placed along the cab access side of the bridge.

Rail stops will be provided at both ends of crane runway and at ends of trolley travel.

(d) Bumpers.

A crane will be provided with bumpers or other automatic means providing equivalent effect, unless the crane travels at a slow rate of speed and has a faster deceleration rate due to the use of sleeve bearings, or is not operated near the ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is restricted to a limited distance by the nature of the crane operation and there is no hazard of striking any object in this limited distance, or is used in similar operating conditions.

The bumpers will be capable of stopping the crane (not including the lifted load) at an average rate of deceleration not to exceed three ft/s/s when traveling in either direction at twenty percent of the rated load speed.

A trolley will be provided with bumpers or other automatic means of equivalent effect, unless the trolley travels at a slow rate of speed, or is not operated near the ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is restricted to a limited distance of the runway and there is no hazard of striking any object in this limited distance, or is used in similar operating conditions.

The bumpers will be capable of stopping the trolley (not including the lifted load) at an average rate of deceleration not to exceed 4.7 ft/s/s when traveling in either direction at one-third of the rated load speed.

(e) Warning device.

On cab-operated cranes, a warning device or signal will be provided for use in warning personnel of crane travel.

(2) Cabs.

(a) Enclosed cabs.

Enclosed crane cabs will be provided with windows in front and on both sides.

(b) Open cabs.

Open cabs will be provided with standard guard railing, and toeboard, and gate. If the opening height is inadequate for a standard guard railing, a chain or angle iron will be used to guard the opening.

Means of escape will be provided for operators of overhead cranes.

(d) Cabs subjected to excessive heat.

Cabs of cranes subjected to excessive heat from below will have floors insulated with a noncombustible material.

(e) Guarding of current-carrying parts.

All current-carrying parts in crane cabs will be guarded.

(3) Limiting devices.

A hoist limiting device will be provided for each hoist to limit the upward travel.

(D) Electric jib cranes.

(1) The term "electric jib crane" means a crane designed for lifting or lowering a load within the scope of a horizontal circle spanned by a rotating arm or jib equipped with a stationary or traveling hoist block.

(2) Equipment.

(a) Holding brake.

Holding brakes for hoist motors will have not less than the following percentage of the full load hoisting torque at the point where the brake is applied.

(i) One hundred twenty-five per cent when used with a control braking means other than mechanical.

(ii) One hundred per cent when used in conjunction with a mechanical control braking means.

(iii) One hundred per cent each if two holding brakes are provided.

Holding brakes on hoists will be applied automatically when power is removed.

(b) Rail stops.

Rail stops will be provided at the outer end of jib boom.

A hoist limiting device will be provided for each hoist.

(E) Electric single rail cranes and hoists.

(1) The term "electric single rail crane and hoist" means a hoist with or without an operator's cab, suspended from a single overhead track or rail.

(2) Equipment.

(a) Trolley stop.

A stop will be provided at all switches and turntables which will prevent the trolley from running off should the rail switch be turned to "open" or left in an open position.

(b) Rail stops.

Rail stops will be provided at the ends of crane runway.

A hoist limiting device will be provided for each hoist.

(d) Braking system - all power-driven hoists.

Holding brakes for hoist motors will have not less than the following percentage of the full load hoisting torque at the point where the brake is applied.

(i) One hundred twenty-five per cent when used with a control braking means other than mechanical.

(ii) One hundred per cent when used in conjunction with a mechanical control braking means.

(iii) One hundred per cent each if two holding brakes are provided.

Holding brakes on hoists will be applied automatically when power is removed.

(F) Electric gantry cranes.

(1) The term "electric gantry crane" means a crane with the bridge mounted on structural legs which may be mobile on rails or stationary. One leg may be at ground level, the other may be elevated or both legs may be at ground level.

(2) Equipment.

(a) Bridge track wheels.

All bridge track wheels will be equipped with sweeps.

(b) Bumpers, stops, and rail stops.

(i) A crane will be provided with bumpers or other automatic means providing equivalent effect, unless the crane travels at a slow rate of speed and has a faster deceleration rate due to the use of sleeve bearings, or is not operated near the ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is restricted to a limited distance by the nature of the crane operation and there is no hazard of striking any object in this limited distance, or is used in similar operating conditions

(ii) Rail stops will be installed on both ends of trolley travel.

An anchor or rail blocking device will be installed on all gantry cranes which are exposed to external weather.

(d) Hoist limiting device.

A hoist limiting device will be installed on each hoist.

(G) Specific specifications applicable to all paragraphs of this rule.

(1) Defective safety devices or load-carrying equipment.

Defective crane safety devices or load-carrying equipment will be repaired or replaced.

(2) Access ladders, stairways, and/or walkways.

Crane access ladders, stairways, and/or walkways will be provided on all cranes.

(3) Maximum capacity.

The maximum capacity recommended by the manufacturer will be posted on each crane.

(4) Warning signs.

Warning signs, "out-of-order" signs, or warning devices will be placed on each crane under repair.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-15 Hoisting and haulage equipment.

(A) Equipment such as slings, hoisting or haulage lines, wire rope, natural or synthetic fiber rope, chain, metal mesh and synthetic web, and attachments used to handle material or equipment will be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

(B) Equipment will be removed from service when there is evidence of a defect, damage, or distortion which may weaken such equipment.

(C) All such equipment will not be loaded in excess of its recommended safe working load as prescribed on the identification markings by the manufacturer.

(D) Employees will not be required to work or pass under suspended loads, nor will the crane operator be required to carry a suspended load over employees.

(E) Manila rope and other fiber rope will not be used when handling acid- or caustic-contaminated material or objects.

(F) Eyes in wire rope slings will not be formed by using knots. Eyes in wire rope slings for general repetitive use will not be formed by using wire rope clips. For special purpose unusual lifts, wire rope clips may be used to fabricate wire rope slings, provided the wire rope clips' manufacturer's recommendations are followed. When a newly installed rope has been in operation for an hour, all nuts on the clip bolts shall be re-tightened.

(G) The use of chain as a sling or choker in erection of steel is not permitted.

(H) The sheave diameter will be no less than that recommended in the manufacturer's specifications for the size of rope used. Sheaves or pulleys with eccentric bores, or with cracked hubs, spokes, or flanges will be repaired or removed from service.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-16 Cutting and welding.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) The employer will verbally and through demonstration instruct the employee in the safe operation and maintenance of cutting and welding equipment.

(2) It is the duty of the employee to operate such equipment in accordance with such instructions.

(D) Maximum pressure.

Under no condition willacetylene be generated, piped (except in approved cylinder manifolds), or utilized at a pressure in excess of fifteen pounds per square inch gauge pressure.

(E) Gas welding and cutting.

(1) Equipment.

Only approved equipment, such as torches, regulators, or pressure-reducing valves, acetylene generators, manifolds, cylinders, and containers will be used.

(2) Cylinders and containers.

(a) Marking.

Compressed gas cylinders will be legibly marked, for the purpose of identifying the gas content, with either the chemical or the trade name of the gas. Such marking will be by means of stenciling, stamping, or labeling and will not be readily removed.

(b) Storage.

(i) Oxygen cylinders in storage will be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or combustible materials (especially oil or grease), a minimum distance of twenty feet or by a noncombustible barrier at least five feet high, having a fire resistance rating of at least one-half hour.

(ii) Cylinders, when not in use, will be protected from any heat-radiating objects or open flame which could cause the cylinders to rupture or could cause the fusible plug to melt.

(i) All cylinders with a water weight capacity of over thirty pounds will be equipped with means of connecting a valve protection cap or with a collar or recess to protect the valve.

(ii) Employees will be responsible for using valve protection caps when cylinders are moved from place to place or put in storage.

(iii) Where carriers are provided for moving cylinders which are connected for use, capping will not be required but employees will be responsible for seeing that cylinder valves are closed and pressure is released from regulators, hoses and torches.

(d) Regulator protection.

Welders and cutters will be instructed to close valves on oxygen and acetylene cylinders and bleed off hose pressure at the end of each workshift, to prevent malfunction of the regulators.

(e) Transporting cylinders by crane or derrick.

When cylinders are hoisted, they will be secured on a cradle, slingboard, or pallet. They will not be hoisted or transported by means of magnets or choker slings.

(f) Facilities for securely fastening cylinders; responsibility.

The employer will provide facilities for securely fastening cylinders of compressed gas in an upright position.

(3) Hose and hose connections.

(a) Hose.

(i) Identification.

The color red will be used for acetylene and other fuel gas hose. The color green will be used for oxygen hose. The color black will be used for inert gas and air hose.

(ii) Hose in which flashback has occurred.

Any length of hose in which a flashback has occurred and burned in the hose will be taken out of service. Flash-back protection will be provided by an approved device that will prevent flame from passing into the fuel-gas system.

(iii) Single hose with more than one gas passage.

The use of a single hose having more than one gas passage, in which a wall failure would permit the flow of one gas into the other gas passage, is not permitted.

(iv) Hoses taped together - limitation.

When parallel lengths of oxygen and acetylene hoses are taped together for convenience and to prevent tangling, not more than four inches out of twelve inches will be covered by tape.

(v) Damaged or defective hose.

Hose showing leaks, burns, worn places, or other defects rendering it unfit for service will have the damaged portion removed, repaired or replaced.

(b) Hose connections and couplings.

(i) Hose connections for oxygen and fuel gas will be distinguished from each other. Hose connections will be clamped or otherwise securely fastened in a manner that will withstand, without leakage, twice the pressure to which they are normally subjected in service, but in no case less than three hundred pounds per square inch.

(ii) Hose couplings will be of the type that cannot be unlocked or disconnected by means of a straight pull without rotary motion.

(i) Oxygen and fuel gas pressure regulators, including their related gauges, will be in proper working order while in use.

(ii) Pressure-reducing regulators will be used only for the gas and pressures for which they are intended.

(F) Electric welding.

(1) Approved equipment.

Only approved electric welding equipment will be used.

(2) Design.

No connections for portable control devices such as push buttons to be carried by the operator will be connected to an alternating current circuit of higher than one hundred twenty volts. Exposed metal parts of portable control devices operating on circuits above fifty volts will be grounded by a grounding conductor in the control cable.

(3) Installation of arc welding equipment.

Installation, including power supply, will be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.

(a) The frame or case of the welding machine (except engine-driven machines) will be grounded under the conditions and according to the manufacturer's specifications.

(b) Supply.

(i) All direct current machines will be connected with the same polarity.

(ii) All alternating current machines will be connected to the same phase of the supply circuit and with the same instantaneous polarity.

Proper switching equipment for shutting down the machine will be provided.

(4) Electrode holders.

(a) Insulation. Electrode holders shall be insulated to protect the operator against shock.

(b) When not in use.

Electrode holders when not in use will be so placed that they cannot make electrical contact with persons, conducting objects, fuel or compressed gas tanks.

Cables with splices within ten feet of the holder will not be used.

(5) Maintenance.

(a) Defective equipment.

The operator will report any equipment or defect or safety hazard to his supervisor and the use of the equipment will be discontinued until its safety has been assured. Repairs will be made only by authorized qualified personnel.

(b) Cables.

Cables with damaged insulation or exposed bare conductors will be replaced. Joining lengths of work and electrode cables will be done by the use of connecting means specifically intended for the purpose. The connecting means will have insulation adequate for the service conditions.

(6) Installation and operation of resistance welding equipment.

(a) Thermal protection.

Ignition tubes used in resistance welding equipment will be equipped with a thermal protection switch.

(b) Guarding.

Controls of all automatic or air and hydraulic clamps will be arranged or guarded to prevent the operator from accidentally activating them.

(i) Voltage.

All external weld initiating control circuits will operate on low voltage, not over one hundred twenty volts.

(ii) Capacitor welding.

Stored energy or capacitor discharge type of resistance welding equipment and control panels involving high voltage (over five hundred fifty volts) will be insulated and protected by complete enclosures, all doors of which will be provided with interlocks and contacts wired into the control circuit (similar to elevator interlocks). Such interlocks or contacts will be so designed as to interrupt power and short circuit all capacitors when the door or panel is open. A manually operated switch or positive device will be installed, in addition to the mechanical interlocks or contacts, as an added safety measure assuring absolute discharge of all capacitors.

(iii) Interlocks.

All doors and access panels of all resistance welding machines and control panels will be kept locked and interlocked to prevent access by unauthorized employees, to live portions of the equipment.

(iv) Guarding.

All press welding machine operations, where there is a possibility of the operator's fingers being under the point of operation, will be guarded by the use of a device such as an electronic eye safety circuit, two-hand controls or protection similar to that prescribed for power press operations (see rule 4123:1-5-10 of the Administrative Code).

(v) Disengaging from power supply.

(vi) Safety blocks or pins.

The employer will provide and enforce the use of safety blocks or pins so that whenever safety blocks or pins are inserted in the platen or ram, the press becomes inoperative.

(vii) Grounding.

The secondary of all welding transformers used in multi-spot, projection, and seam welding machines will be grounded. This may be done by permanently grounding one side of the welding secondary current circuit, or a center tapped grounding reactor connected across the secondary or the use of a safety disconnect switch in conjunction with the welding control are acceptable alternatives. Safety disconnect will be arranged to open both sides of the line when welding current is not present.

(d) Portable welding machines.

(i) Counterbalance.

All portable welding guns will have counterbalancing devices for supporting the gun unless the design of the gun makes counterbalancing unnecessary.

(ii) Safety chains.

All portable welding guns, transformers and related equipment that is suspended from overhead structures, I-beams, trolleys, etc., will be equipped with safety chains or cables. Safety chains or cables will be capable of supporting the total shock load in the event of failure of any component of the supporting system.

(iii) Clevis.

When trolleys are used to support portable welding equipment, with a forged steel clevis for the attachment of safety chains, each clevis will be capable of supporting the total shock load of the suspended equipment in the event of trolley failure.

(iv) Switch guards.

All initiating switches located on the portable welding gun will be equipped with guards capable of preventing accidental initiation through contact with fixturing, operator's clothing, etc. Initiating switch voltage will not exceed twenty-four volts.

(v) Grounding.

The secondary and the case of all portable welding transformers shall be grounded. Secondary grounding shall be by:

(A) Center tapped secondary, or

(B) A center tapped grounding reactor connected across the secondary.

(vi) Butt (flash) welding equipment.

Butt welding machines will be equipped with a hood to control flying flash. In cases of high production, where materials may contain a film of oil and where toxic elements and metal fumes are given off, ventilation will be provided in accordance with rule 4123:1-5-18 of the Administrative Code.

(7) Welding or cutting of containers.

No welding, cutting, or work utilizing a torch will be performed on used drums, barrels, tanks, or other containers until they have been cleaned and purged of materials which when subjected to heat might produce flammable or toxic vapors.

(8) Eye and ear protection.

See rule 4123:1-5-17 of the Administrative Code, "Personal protective equipment."

(G) Protection from sparks or falling objects.

(1) Cutting or welding will be permitted only in areas that are or have been made fire safe.

(2) Screens or shields will be provided for the protection of employees or combustible materials exposed to sparks or falling objects.

Last updated June 30, 2023 at 12:20 AM

History

Effective: June 30, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-17 Personal protective equipment.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) Personal protective equipment furnished by the employer will be issued to the employee in sanitary and proper condition so that it will effectively protect against the hazard involved.

(2) Where employees provide their own protective equipment, such equipment has to give equal or greater protection than that furnished by the employer.

(D) Eye and face protection.

(1) Responsibility.

The employer will provide eye protection for all employees engaged in the operations listed in paragraph (D)(2) of this rule and exposed to an eye hazard. Eye protection will also be provided for any other employees in the immediate area and who are exposed to the hazards of the operations listed. It is the responsibility of the employee to use the eye protection provided by the employer (see appendix to this rule for eye and face protector selection guide).

(2) Operations requiring eye protection.

(a) Eye protection will be provided to employees performing the following operations:

(i) When using hand tools or mechanical equipment to cut, chip, drill, clean, buff, grind, polish, shape, or surface masonry, brick, concrete, plaster, stone, plastics, or other hardened substances. This also covers demolition work where the material listed are part of the operation;

(ii) Where acids, sand, or shot blast are used in building cleaning operations;

(iii) Welding, brazing, soldering, or cutting operations involving the use of gas flames or electric arc. (See appendix to this rule);

(iv) Where portland cement is taken from an elevated bin, hopper or similar structure by a chute;

(v) All spray paint operations where the operator's eyes are exposed to paint mist in the atmosphere;

(vi) All sand, or shot, or other abrasive blast operations where the operator's eyes are exposed to the blasting agent;

(vii) The opening or closing of the tap holes of cupolas or melting furnaces;

(viii) Exposure to molten metal, molten glass, and molten plastic;

(ix) Metal and plastic chipping, cutting, cleaning, grinding, conditioning, or machining where there is danger of flying particles;

(x) Dressing grinding wheels;

(xi) Cleaning operations where wire wheels are used;

(xii) Handling injurious acids, alkalis, or other chemicals;

(xiii) Cutting, drilling, turning, planing, jointing, and sanding of wood with power tools;

(xiv) Operating portable powder-actuated, pneumatically powered, and other powered fastening tools;

(xv) Operations involving the use of compressed air;

(xvi) When working in close proximity to a laser beam in excess of five milliwatts;

(xvii) Felling or pruning trees or cutting underbrush.

(3) Face shields.

(a) Face shields are secondary protection and will be used only in conjunction with primary protection, such as safety goggles or spectacles.

(b) Face shields, in addition to eye protection, will be provided where danger to the face exists, such as in the following operations:

(i) Welding operations;

(ii) All sand, or shot, or abrasive blast operations;

(iii) Cleaning operations where wire wheels are used;

(iv) Metal , wood and/or plastic chipping, cutting, cleaning, grinding, conditioning, or machining where there is danger of flying particles;

(v) The handling of molten metal, molten glass, and molten plastic;

(vi) The handling of injurious acids, alkalis, or other chemicals.

(4) Material specifications for eye and face protection shall meet the most current edition of ANSI Z87.1.

(E) Foot (toe) protection.

Foot protection will be worn by the employee where an employee is exposed to machinery or equipment that presents a foot hazard or where an employee is handling material which presents a foot hazard.

(F) Respiratory protection.

(1) Where there are air contaminants as defined in rule 4123:1-5-01 of the Administrative Code, the employer will provide respiratory protection equipment approved for the hazard. It is the responsibility of the employee to use the respirator or respiratory equipment provided by the employer, guard it against damage and report any malfunction to the employer. Note: See appendix to this rule for basic guides for the selection of respirators.

(2) This specification does not apply where an effective exhaust system (see rule 4123:1-5-18 of the Administrative Code) or other means of equal or greater protection have been provided.

(G) Head and hair protection.

(1) Responsibility.

(a) Employer.

(i) Whenever employees are present where a potential hazard to their head exists from falling or flying objects, or from physical contact with rigid objects, or from exposures where there is a risk of injury from electric shock, employers will provide employees with suitable protective head protection.

This head protection will meet the specifications of the most current edition of ANSI Z89.1.

(ii) When head protection is needed employers will provide accessories designed for use with the head protection.

(iii) Damaged parts of protective head protection will be replaced. Protective helmets and bump caps or parts thereof and hair enclosures will be sanitized before reissue.

(b) Employees.

Employees will not alter any head or hair protective equipment and will use such equipment in accordance with instructions and training received.

(i) A hat, cap or net will be provided where there is danger of hair entanglement in moving parts of machinery or equipment, or where there is exposure to means of ignition. It will be designed to enclose all loose hair and be adjustable to accommodate all head sizes. Material used for a hair enclosure will be durable, fast-dyed, nonirritating to the skin, and capable of withstanding frequent cleaning. It will not be reissued from one employee to another unless it has been thoroughly sanitized.

(ii) Hair enclosures used in areas where there is exposure to sparks, hot or molten metals, or ignition from heat, flames, or chemical reaction will be made of materials that are nonburning or flame retardant and do not melt.

(H) Hearing protection.

Employees exposed to continuous noise levels of ninety or more decibels (90 dBA slow response) will be provided with approved hearing protection. (If variations in noise level involve maxima at intervals of one second or less, the noise is considered continuous.) If hearing protection that needs fitting is provided, it will be fitted to the individual employees by a competent person.

(I) Protection of the body and exposed parts and other protective equipment.

(1) All persons who work in such a manner that their clothing may become wet with acids caustics or other injurious liquids will be provided with such gloves, aprons, coats, jackets, sleeves, or other garments made of rubber, or other materials impervious to such liquids as are needed to keep their clothing dry. Aprons will extend well below the top of boots to prevent such liquid from splashing into the boots. Provision of dry clean cotton clothing along with rubber shoes or short boots and an apron impervious to such liquids will be considered a satisfactory substitute where small parts are cleaned, plated, or acid-dipped in open tanks and rapid work is required.

(2) Facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes and body will be provided within the work area, where employees are exposed to injurious corrosive materials. Where plumbing is not available and where storage batteries of the enclosed type with explosion-proof vents are serviced exclusively, portable, self-contained eyewash equipment may be provided in lieu of the quick drenching or flushing facilities. Where portable self-contained eyewash equipment is used in lieu of drenching or flushing facilities, it will be capable of delivering to the eye no less than 1.5 liters (0.4 gallons) per minute for a minimum of fifteen minutes.

(3) Welding, cutting, brazing, and molten metal exposures.

All employees exposed to the hazards created by welding, cutting, brazing, or molten metal operations will be protected by protective clothing. This includes:

(a) Flameproof gauntlet gloves.

(b) Flameproof aprons made of leather, or other material which provides equivalent protection.

(d) Capes or shoulder covers made of leather or other material which provides equivalent protection.

(e) Protection for the ears from the overhead welding and cutting or welding and cutting in extremely confined spaces.

(4) Working by hand on energized circuits.

When an employee works on, or in proximity to, energized lines, the employer will provide and the employee will use protective equipment approved for the hazards involved.

(5) Climbers.

(a) Where employees climb poles or trees, the employer will provide climbers, the appropriate gaffs (spurs). Pole gaffs will measure at least one and seven-sixteenth inches (36.5 mm) on the underside. Tree gaffs will measure no more than three and one-half inches (88.9 mm) nor less than two and one-fourth inches (57.2 mm) on the underside.

(b) Storage.

Storage facilities will be provided so that the sharp points of the climber gaffs will not cause damage to other equipment or cause injury to employees.

(6) Safety belts, harness, lifelines and lanyards.

(a) Lifelines, safety belts or harnesses and lanyards will be provided by the employer, and it is the responsibility of the employee to wear such equipment when exposed to hazards of falling where the operation being performed is more than four feet above the ground or above a floor or platform, except as otherwise specified in this chapter, and when working on stored material in silos, hoppers, tanks, and similar storage areas. Lanyards and vertical lifelines will have a minimum breaking strength of five thousand pounds. Anchorage used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment will be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least five thousand pounds per employee attached.

(b) Where the lifeline may be subjected to cutting or abrasion, a minimum seven-eighths-inch wire core manila rope, or equivalent, will be provided. For all other lifeline applications, a minimum of three-fourths-inch manila rope, or equivalent, will be provided.

(c) Safety belt, harness, or strap lanyards will be a minimum of one-half inch nylon, or equivalent, with a maximum length to provide for a fall of no more than six feet. The lanyard will have a breaking strength of no less than five thousand pounds.

(d) All safety belt, harness, or strap and lanyard hardware will be drop-forged or pressed steel, cadmium plated. Surface will be smooth and free from sharp edges.

(e) All safety belt, harness, or strap and lanyard hardware will be capable of withstanding a tensile loading of five thousand pounds without cracking, breaking, or becoming permanently deformed.

(7) Safety nets.

(a) Safety nets will be provided when workplaces are more than twenty-five feet above the ground, water, or other surface where the use of ladders, scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary floors, safety lines, or safety belts is impractical.

(b) Where safety net protection is required by this rule, operations will not be undertaken until the net is in place and has been tested.

(c) Nets will extend outward from the outermost projection of the work surface in accordance with table 17-1 to this rule and will be installed as close under the work surface as practical but in no case more than thirty feet below such work surface with the exception of bridge construction where only one level of nets is needed. Nets will be hung with sufficient clearance to prevent the falling employee's contact with the surface or structures below. Such clearance will be determined by impact load testing.

Table 17-1

Table

| Vertical distance from working level to horizontal plane of the net. | Minimum required horizontal distance of net from the edge of the working surface. | | --- | --- | | Up to five feet | eight feet | | More than five feet up to ten feet | ten feet | | More than ten feet | thirteen feet |

(d) The mesh size of nets will not exceed six inches. All new nets will meet accepted performance standards of seventeen thousand five hundred foot-pounds minimum impact resistance as determined and certified by the manufacturer, and will bear a label of proof test. Edge ropes will provide a minimum breaking strength of five thousand pounds.

(e) Forged steel safety hooks or shackles will be used to fasten the net to its supports. Attachment of safety nets to the working platform is not permitted.

(f) Connections between net panels will maintain the full strength of the net.

(8) Working over or near water.

(a) Where employees are working over or near water, and where the depth or current of the water creates a danger of drowning, the employer will provide U.S. coast guard-approved life jackets or buoyant work vests for each employee.

(b) Ring buoys with no less than ninety feet of line attached will be provided and readily available for emergency rescue operations. Distance between ring buoys cannot exceed two hundred feet.

(c) At least one lifesaving skiff will be immediately available at locations where employees are working over or adjacent to water.

(d) In cribs and cofferdams where employees are exposed to danger of falling inside of the enclosure containing water, a life raft will be provided.

(9) Night work.

When working at night, spotlights or portable lights for emergency lighting will be provided as needed to perform the work safely.

(10) Barriers and warning devices.

The employer will provide barriers and effective warning devices such as flasher lights, "Men Working" signs, cones, flares, lanterns, flags and reflectors, for the protection of employees when work is performed in congested areas and where employees are exposed to traffic hazards or other working conditions where a hazard may exist.

(J) Employee's responsibility.

It is the responsibility of the employee to properly use the equipment provided by the employer as specified in this rule.

View Appendix

Last updated February 1, 2024 at 8:51 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2024
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-18 Control of air contaminants.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(C) Where employees are exposed to hazardous concentrations of air contaminants, the air contaminants will be minimized by at least one of the following methods:

(1) Substitute a non-hazardous, or less hazardous material;

(2) Confine or isolate the contaminants;

(3) Remove at or near source;

(4) Dilution ventilation;

(5) Exhaust ventilation;

(6) Using wet methods to allay dusts. Note: Good housekeeping is of definite value in minimizing air contaminants created by dusts.

(D) Exhaust systems: machinery and equipment.

(1) Grinding, polishing and buffing.

(a) Abrasive wheels and belts.

(i) Abrasive wheels and belts will be hooded and exhausted when there is a hazardous concentration of air contaminants.

(ii) This does not apply to abrasive wheels or belts:

(a) Upon which water, oil, or other liquid substance is used at the point of the grinding contact; or

(b) To small abrasive wheels used occasionally for tool grinding.

(b) Separate exhaust systems.

Abrasive wheel and buffing wheel exhaust systems will be separate when the dust from the buffing wheel is of flammable material.

(2) Generation of toxic materials.

When toxic materials are generated in hazardous concentrations during their application, drying, or handling, they will be minimized or eliminated by at least one of the methods described in paragraph (C) of this rule.

(3) Internal combustion engines.

Hazardous concentrations of air contaminants produced by internal combustion engines will be exhausted.

(E) Exhaust systems - structural specifications.

(1) Exhaust or ventilating fan.

Each exhaust or ventilating fan located less than seven feet above the floor or normal working level will be guarded.

(2) Ductwork.

Exhaust ductwork will be sized in accordance with good design practice which will include consideration of fan capacity, length of duct, number of turns and elbows, variation in size, volume, and character of materials being exhausted.

(3) Discharge.

The outlet from every separator or (collector) will discharge the air contaminants collected by the exhaust system, in such manner that the discharged materials will not re-enter the working area in hazardous concentrations.

(4) Location of air supply openings or inlets.

Air supply openings or inlets through which air enters the building or room in which the local exhaust system is in operation will be isolated from any known source of contamination from outside of the building.

Last updated September 1, 2023 at 9:24 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-19 Manlifts of the endless belt type.

(A) Reserved.

(B) Reserved.

(1) Floor openings.

(a) Allowable size.

Floor openings for both the up and down runs will be no less than twenty-eight inches nor more than thirty-six inches in width for a twelve-inch belt; no less than thirty-four inches nor more than thirty-eight inches for a fourteen-inch belt; and no less than thirty-six inches nor more than forty inches for a sixteen-inch belt and will extend no less than twenty-four inches, nor more than twenty-eight inches from the face of the belt.

(b) Uniformity.

All floor openings for a given manlift will be uniform in size and will be approximately circular, and each will be located vertically above the opening below it.

(2) Landings.

(a) Vertical clearance.

The clearance between the floor or mounting platform and the lower edge for the conical guard above it specified in paragraph (C)(3) of this rule will be no less than seven feet six inches. Where this clearance cannot be obtained no access to the manlift will be provided and the manlift runway will be enclosed where it passes through such floor.

(b) Clear landing space.

The landing space adjacent to the floor openings will be free from obstructions and kept clear at all times. This landing space will be no less than two feet in width from the edge of the floor opening used for mounting and dismounting.

Adequate lighting, no less than five foot candles, will be provided at each floor landing at all times when the lift is in operation.

(d) Landing surface.

The landing surfaces at the entrances and exits to the manlift will be constructed and maintained as to provide safe footing at all times.

(e) Emergency landings.

Where there is a travel of fifty feet or more between floor landings, one or more emergency landings will be provided so that there will be a landing (either floor or emergency) for every twenty-five feet or less of manlift travel.

(i) Emergency landings will be accessible from both the up and down runs of the manlift and will give access to the ladder specified in paragraph (C)(8) of this rule.

(ii) Emergency landings will be completely enclosed with a standard railing and toeboard.

(iii) Platforms constructed to give access to bucket elevators or other equipment for the purpose of inspection, lubrication and repair may also serve as emergency landings under this rule. All such platforms will then be considered part of the emergency landing and will be provided with standard guard railings and toeboards.

(3) Guards on underside of floor openings.

(a) Fixed type.

The ascending side of the manlift floor openings will be provided with a bevel guard or cone meeting the following specifications:

(i) Slope.

The cone will make an angle of no less than forty-five degrees with the horizontal. An angle of sixty degrees or greater will be used where ceiling heights permit.

(ii) Extent.

The lower edge of this guard will extend no less than forty-two inches outward from any handhold on the belt. It will not extend beyond the upper surface of the floor above.

(iii) Material and construction.

The cone will be made of no less than "No. 18 U.S. Gauge" sheet steel or material of equivalent strength or stiffness. The lower edge will be rolled to a minimum diameter of one-half inch and the interior will be smooth with no rivets, bolts or screws protruding.

(b) Floating type.

In lieu of the fixed guards specified in paragraph (C)(3)(a) of this rule, a floating type safety cone may be used, such floating cones to be mounted on hinges no less than six inches below the underside of the floor and so constructed as to actuate a limit switch should a force of two pounds be applied on the edge of the cone closest to the hinge. The depth of this floating cone will not exceed twelve inches.

(4) Protection of entrances and exits.

(a) Guardrail specifications.

The entrance and exits at all floor landings affording access to the manlift will be guarded by a maze (staggered railing) or a handrail equipped with self-closing gates.

(b) Construction.

The rails will be standard guardrails with toeboards meeting the provisions of rule 4123:1-5-02 of the Administrative Code.

Gates, if used, will open outward and will be self-closing. Corners of gates will be rounded.

(d) Maze.

Maze or staggered openings will offer no direct passage between enclosure and outer floor space.

(e) Except where building layout prevents, entrances at all landings shall be in the same relative position.

(5) Guards for openings.

(a) Construction.

The floor opening at each landing will be guarded on sides not used for entrance or exit by a wall, a railing and toeboard or by panels of wire mesh of suitable strength.

(b) Height and location.

Such rails or guards will be no less than forty-two inches in height on the up-running side and sixty-six inches in height on the down-running side. Rails or guards will be located no more than one foot from the edge of the floor opening.

(6) Bottom arrangement.

(a) Bottom landing.

At the bottom landing the clear area will be no smaller than the area enclosed by the guardrails on the floors above, and any wall in front of the down-running side of the belt will be no less than forty-eight inches from the face of the belt. This space will not be encroached upon by stairs or ladders.

(b) Location of lower pulley.

The lower (boot) pulley will be installed so that it is supported by the lowest landing served. The sides of the pulley support will be guarded to prevent contact with the pulley or the steps.

A mounting platform will be provided in front or to one side of the up-run at the lowest landing, unless the floor level is such that the following specification can be met: the floor or platform will be at or above the point at which the upper surface of the ascending step completes its turn and assumes a horizontal position.

(d) Guardrails.

To guard against employees walking under a descending step, the area on the down side of the manlift will be guarded in accordance with paragraph (C)(4) of this rule. To guard against an employee getting between the mounting platform and an ascending step, the area between the belt and the platform will be protected by a guardrail.

(7) Top arrangements.

(a) Clearance from floor.

A top clearance will be provided of no less than eleven feet above the top terminal landing. This clearance will be maintained from a plane through each face of the belt to a vertical cylindrical plane having a diameter two feet greater than the diameter of the floor opening, extending upward from the top floor to the ceiling on the up-running side of the belt. No encroachment of structural or machine supporting members within this space will be permitted.

(b) Pulley clearance.

(i) There will be a clearance of no less than five feet between the center of the head pulley shaft and any ceiling obstruction.

(ii) The center of the head pulley shaft will be no less than six feet above the top terminal landing.

An emergency grab bar or rail and platform will be provided at the head pulley when the distance to the head pulley is over six feet above the top landing, otherwise only a grab bar or rail is to be provided to permit the rider to swing free should the emergency stops become inoperative.

(8) Emergency exit ladder.

A fixed metal ladder accessible from both the up and down run of the manlift will be provided for the entire travel of the manlift. Such ladder will be in accordance with paragraph (C)(6) of rule 4123:1-5-03 of the Administrative Code, except that a safety cage will not be provided, notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (C)(6) of rule 4123:1-5-03 of the Administrative Code.

(9) Superstructure bracing.

Manlift rails will be secured in such a manner as to avoid spreading, vibration and misalignment.

(10) Illumination.

(a) General.

Both runs of the manlift will be illuminated at all times when the lift is in operation. An intensity of no less than one foot candle will be maintained at all points. (See paragraph (C)(2)(c) of this rule for illumination specifications at landings).

(b) Control of illumination.

Lighting of manlift runways will be by means of circuits permanently tied in to the building circuits (no switches), or will be controlled by switches at each landing. Where separate switches are provided at each landing, any switch will turn on all lights necessary to illuminate the entire runway.

(11) Weather protection.

The entire manlift and its driving mechanism will be protected from the weather at all times.

(D) Mechanical specifications.

(1) Machines.

(a) Brakes.

Brakes provided for stopping and holding a manlift will be inherently self-engaging, by requiring power or force from an external source to cause disengagement. The brake will be electrically released, and will be applied to the motor shaft for direct-connected units or to the input shaft for belt-driven units. The brake will be capable of stopping and holding the manlift when the descending-side is loaded with two hundred fifty pounds on each step.

(b) Belt.

(i) Material.

The belt will be of hard-woven canvas, rubber-coated canvas, leather, or other material meeting the strength specifications in paragraph (D)(1)(b)(iii) of this rule and having a coefficient of friction such that when used in conjunction with an adequate tension device it will meet the brake test specified in paragraph (D)(1)(a) of this rule.

(ii) Width.

The width of the belt will be no less than twelve inches for a travel not exceeding one hundred feet, no less than fourteen inches for a travel greater than one hundred feet but not exceeding one hundred fifty feet and sixteen inches for a travel exceeding one hundred fifty feet.

(iii) Strength.

The strength of the belt will be no less than one thousand five hundred pounds per inch of belt width for belts having a distance between pulley centers not in excess of one hundred feet, and one thousand eight hundred pounds per inch of belt width for belts having a distance between pulley centers of over one hundred feet but not in excess of two hundred feet; for over two hundred feet, two thousand four hundred fifty pounds per inch of belt width.

(iv) Belt fastenings.

Belts will be fastened by a lapped splice or will be butt-spliced with a strap on the side of the belt away from the pulley.

(a) For lapped splices, the overlap of the belt at the splice will be no less than three feet where the travel of the manlift does not exceed one hundred feet and no less than four feet, if the travel exceeds one hundred feet. Where butt splices are used the straps will extend no less than three feet on one side of the butt for a travel not in excess of one hundred feet and four feet for a travel in excess of one hundred feet.

(b) For twelve-inch belts, the joint will be fastened with no less than twenty special elevator bolts, each of a minimum diameter of one-fourth inch. These bolts will be arranged as to cover the area of the joint effectively.

(c) The minimum number of bolts for a belt width of fourteen inches will be no less than twenty-three and for a belt width of sixteen inches, the number of bolts will be no less than twenty-seven.

(v) Repairs not permitted.

A belt that has become torn while in use on a manlift will not be spliced and put back in service.

(vi) Flush bolt heads.

All bolts used for splicing the belt or securing handholds or steps to the belt will be installed and maintained so that the heads do not project beyond the inner surface of the belt.

Drive pulleys and idler (boot) pulleys will have a diameter no less than given in the following table to this rule.

Table 19-1

| BELT CONSTRUCTION | MINIMUM STRENGTH POUNDS PER INCH OF WIDTH | MINIMUM PULLEY DIAMETER INCHES | | --- | --- | --- | | 5 ply | 1500 | 20 | | 6 ply | 1800 | 20 | | 7 ply | 2100 | 22 |

(The above values are based on thirty-two-ounce duck; three hundred pounds per linear inch per ply.)

(d) Pulley protection.

The machine will be designed and constructed as to catch and hold the driving pulley in event of shaft failure.

(e) Belt location.

Manlift belts will be centered in the floor openings.

(f) Pulley lagging.

All head pulleys will be lagged (i.e., covered with non-slip material securely fastened in place).

(2) Speed.

No manlift designed for a speed in excess of eighty feet per minute will be installed.

(3) Steps.

(a) Minimum depth.

Steps will be no less than twelve inches nor more than fourteen inches deep, measured from the belt to the edge of the step.

(b) Width.

The width of the step will be no less than the width of the belt to which it is attached.

The distance between steps will be equally spaced and not less than sixteen feet measured from the upper surface of one step to the upper surface of the next step above it.

(d) Angle of step.

The surface of the step will make approximately a right angle with the up and down run of the belt, and will travel in the approximate horizontal position with the up and down run of the belt.

(e) Surfaces.

The upper or working surfaces of the step will be of a material having inherent nonslip characteristics (coefficient of friction no less than 0.5) or will be covered completely by a nonslip tread securely fastened to it.

(f) Strength of step supports.

When subjected to a load of four hundred pounds applied at the approximate center of the step, step frames or supports and their guides will be of adequate strength to:

(i) Prevent the disengagement of any step roller.

(ii) Prevent any appreciable misalignment.

(iii) Prevent any visible deformation of the step or its support.

(g) Prohibition of steps without handholds.

No step will be provided unless there is a corresponding handhold above or below it meeting the specifications in paragraph (D)(4) of this rule. If a step is removed for repairs or permanently, the handholds immediately above and below it will be removed before the lift is again placed in service.

(4) Handholds.

(a) Location.

Handholds attached to the belt will be provided and so installed that they are no less than four feet nor more than four feet eight inches above the step tread. These will be so located as to be available on both up and down run of the belt.

(b) Size.

The grab surface of the handhold will be no less than four and one-half inches in width, no less than three inches in depth and provide two inches of clearance from the belt. Fastenings for handholds will be located no less than one inch from the edge of the belt.

The handhold will be capable of withstanding, without damage, a load of three hundred pounds applied parallel to the run of the belt.

(d) Prohibition of handhold without steps.

No handhold will be provided without a corresponding step. If a handhold is removed permanently or temporarily, the corresponding step and handhold for the opposite direction of travel will also be removed before the lift is again placed in service.

(e) Type.

All handholds will be of the closed type.

(5) Up limit stops.

(a) Specifications.

Two separate automatic stop devices will be provided to cut off the power and apply the brake when a loaded step passes the upper terminal landing. One of these will consist of a split-rail switch or equivalent mechanically operated by the step roller and located no more than six inches above the top terminal landing. The second automatic stop device may consist of any of the following:

(i) A split-rail switch placed six inches above and on the side opposite the first limit switch.

(ii) An electronic device.

(iii) A switch actuated by a lever, rod or plate, the latter to be placed on the up side of the head pulley so as to just clear a passing step.

(b) Manual reset location.

After the manlift has been stopped by a stop device it will be necessary to reset the automatic stop manually. The device will be so located that a person resetting it will have a clear view of both the up and down runs of the manlift. It will not be possible to reset the device from any step or platform.

The initial limit stop device will function so that the manlift will be stopped before the loaded step has reached a point twenty-four inches above the top terminal landing.

(d) Electrical specifications.

(i) Where such switches open the main motor circuit directly they will be of the multipole type.

(ii) Where electronic devices are used they will be so designed and installed that failure will result in shutting off the power to the driving motor.

(iii) Where flammable vapors or dusts may be present all electrical installations will be of a type approved for use in such locations.

(iv) Unless of the oil-immersed type, controller contacts carrying the main motor current will be copper to carbon or equal, except where the circuit is broken at two or more points simultaneously.

(6) Emergency stop.

(a) Specifications.

An emergency stop means will be provided.

(b) Location.

This stop means will be within easy reach of the ascending and descending runs of the belt.

This stop means will be so connected with the control lever or operating mechanism that it will cut off the power and apply the brake when pulled in the direction of travel.

(d) Rope.

If rope is used, it will be no less than three-eighths inch in diameter. Wire rope, unless marlin-covered, will not be used.

(7) Factor of safety.

All parts of the machine will have a factor of safety of six based on a load of two hundred pounds on each horizontal step on the up and down runs.

(8) Instruction and warning signs and devices.

(a) Instruction signs at landings or belt.

Signs of conspicuous and easily read style giving instructions for the use of the manlift will be posted at each landing or stenciled on the belt.

(i) Size and legibility.

Such signs will be of letters no less than two inches in height and of a color having high contrast with the surface on which it is stenciled or painted (white or yellow on black or black on white or gray).

(ii) Inscription.

The instructions shall read approximately as follows: "Face the belt. Use the handholds. To stop - pull rope."

(b) Top floor warning sign and light.

(i) Specifications.

At the top floor an illuminated sign will be displayed bearing the following wording: "Top floor - get off". The sign will be in block letters no less than two inches in height. This sign will be located within easy view of an ascending passenger and no more than two feet above the top terminal landing.

(ii) Additional warning light.

In addition to the sign specified in paragraph (D)(8)(b)(i) of this rule, a red warning light of no less than forty-watt rating will be provided immediately below the upper landing terminal and so located as to shine in the passenger's face.

(c) A visual or audible warning system will be provided to alert passengers and others in the vicinity when a manlift is started or re-started.

(d) Visitor warning.

A conspicuous sign having the following legend, "Authorized Personnel Only", will be displayed at each landing. The sign will be of block letters no less than two inches in height and will be of a color offering high contrast with the background color".

(E) Recommended minimum instructions in the proper use of manlifts.

(1) Only authorized personnel, trained in their use, will be permitted to use manlifts.

(2) When riding a manlift, the passenger will stand squarely on the step, face the belt and grip the handhold securely. Jumping on the step, yanking on the handhold or engaging in horseplay of any kind is not permitted.

(3) No freight, packaged goods, pipe, lumber or construction materials of any kind will be handled on any manlift.

(4) No tools, except those which will fit entirely within a pocket in usual working clothes is carried on any manlift.

(5) Before starting or re-starting the manlift, it will be necessary to alert all passengers on the manlift and all others in its vicinity.

(F) Inspection and maintenance.

(1) Frequency.

All manlifts will be inspected by a competent designated person at intervals of no more than thirty days. Limit switches will be checked weekly. Manlifts found to be unsafe will not be operated until properly repaired.

(2) Items covered.

The inspection will cover but is not limited to the following items:

(a) Steps;

(b) Steps fastenings;

(d) Rail supports and fastenings;

(e) Rollers and slides;

(f) Belt and belt tension;

(g) Handholds and fastenings;

(h) Floor landings;

(i) Guardrails;

(j) Lubrication;

(k) Limit switches;

(l) Warning signs and lights;

(m) Illumination;

(n) Drive pulley;

(o) Bottom (boot) pulley and clearance;

(p) Pulley supports;

(q) Motor;

(r) Driving mechanism;

(s) Brake;

(t) Electrical switches;

(u) Vibration and misalignment;

(v) Skip on up or down run when mounting step (indicating worn gears).

Last updated September 1, 2023 at 9:25 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-20 Roof car suspended platforms.

(A) Roof car.

(1) The horizontal speed of a roof car will be no more than fifty feet per minute.

(2) A roof car will not be moved horizontally unless means are in place to prevent the car from moving outside the areas provided for roof car travel.

(3) The roof car will be designed and installed in such a manner as to remain stable and upright under every loading condition.

(4) A roof car will be so positioned and anchored to the structure as to ensure that the working platform is placed and retained in proper position for vertical travel.

(5) The operating device controlling movement of a roof car will be of the continuous pressure weatherproof electric type and will be located on the roof car, the working platform, or both. If located on both, such operating devices will be interlocked so that control is possible only from one at a time.

(6) The operating device controlling movement of a roof car will not be operable until the working platform is at its uppermost position for travel and is not in contact with the building face or fixed vertical guides in the face of the building, and until all protective devices and interlocks are in a position for movement.

(7) If the access to the roof car at any point of its travel is not over the roof area, standard guardrails with self-closing, self-locking gates will be provided on the roof car.

(B) Working platforms.

(1) The working platform will be of girder or truss construction and will be capable of supporting its rated load under any position of loading.

(2) Each working platform will bear the manufacturer's load rating plate, conspicuously posted and legible, stating the maximum permissible load.

(3) The vertical speed of a working platform suspended by four or more hoisting ropes will be no more than seventy-five feet per minute.

(4) The vertical speed of a working platform suspended by less than four hoisting ropes will be no more than thirty-five feet per minute.

(5) The working platform will be no less than twenty-four inches wide.

(6) The working platform will be provided with toeboards and with permanent guardrails no less than thirty-six inches high, and no more than forty-two inches high at the front (building side). At the rear, and on the sides, a standard guardrail and toeboard will be provided. An intermediate guardrail will be provided around the entire platform between the top guardrail and the toeboard.

(7) The platform flooring will be of the nonskid type.

(8) Where access gates are provided, they will be self-closing and self-locking. Such gates are required where access to the working platform is not over the roof area.

(9) A means will be provided to prevent inadvertent horizontal movement of the working platform.

(10) The operating device controlling vertical movement of the working platform will be located on the working platform and will be of the continuous pressure weatherproof electric type.

(11) The operating device controlling vertical movement will be operable only when all electrical protective devices and interlocks on the working platform are in normal operating position, and the roof car is at an established operating point.

(12) On roof-powered platforms, an emergency electric operating device will be provided near the hoisting machine for use in the event of failure of the traveling cable system. This emergency device will be mounted in locked compartment and will have a legend mounted thereon reading: "For Emergency Operation Only. Establish Communication With Personnel On Working Platform Before Use." A key for unlocking the compartment housing the emergency operating device will be mounted in a break-glass receptacle located near the device.

(1) Hoisting equipment will consist of a power-driven drum or drums contained in the roof car (i.e., roof-powered platform) or contained on the working platform (i.e., self-powered platform).

(2) Hoisting equipment will be power-operated in both up and down directions.

(3) Where exposed to contact, rotating shafts, drums, couplings, and other mechanisms and gears will be guarded.

(4) Friction devices or clutches cannot be used for connecting the main driving mechanism to the drum or drums. Belt-or chain-driven machines are not permitted.

(5) Hoisting motors will be electric and of waterproof construction.

(6) Hoisting motors will be directly connected to the hoisting machinery. Motor couplings, if used, will be of steel construction.

(7) Hoisting machines will have two independent braking means, each designed to stop and hold the working platform with one hundred twenty-five per cent of rated load.

(D) Hoisting ropes and winding drums.

(1) Each hoisting rope will be made of wire and will be no less than five-sixteenths-inch diameter.

(2) Working platforms will be suspended by no less than two ropes with a safety factor of ten as calculated under the following formula:

F = S NW

Where

S = manufacturer's rated breaking strength of one rope

N = number of ropes under load

W = maximum static load on all ropes with the platform and its rated load at any point of its travel

(3) Where winding drums are used, the rope will be wound in level layers.

(4) Winding drums will have no less than three turns of rope remaining when the working platform is at its lowest possible point of travel.

(5) Where the working platform is suspended by more than two ropes, the non-drum ends of the ropes will be provided with individual shackle rods which will permit individual adjustment of rope lengths.

(6) The lengthening or repairing of wire ropes by splicing is not permitted.

(7) More than one reverse bend in the length of six wire rope lays is not permitted.

(8) Wire rope will not be used if, in any length of eight diameters, the total number of visible broken wires exceeds ten percent of the total number of wires, or if the rope shows other signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or defect.

(E) Electrical protective devices.

(1) Electrical protective devices and interlocks will be of the weatherproof type.

(2) When a traveling cable storage reel is used, an electric contact will be provided and so connected that it will cause the relay for vertical travel to open if the tension on the traveling cable exceeds safe limits.

(3) An automatic overload device will be provided to cut off electrical power to the circuit in all hoisting motors for travel in the up direction, should the load applied to the hoisting ropes at either end of the working platform exceed one hundred twenty-five per cent of its normal tension with rated load as shown on the manufacturer's data plate on the working platform.

(4) An automatic device will be provided for each hoisting rope which will cut off electrical power to the hoisting motor or motors in the down direction and will apply the brakes if any hoisting rope becomes slack.

(5) Upper and lower directional limit devices will be provided to prevent the travel of the working platform beyond the normal upper and lower limits of travel.

(6) Directional limit devices, if driven from the hoisting machine by chains, tapes, or cables, will incorporate a device to disconnect the electric power from the hoisting machine and apply both the primary and secondary brakes in the event of failure of the driving means.

(7) On platforms with four or more ropes, final terminal stopping devices for the working platform will be provided as a secondary means of preventing the working platform from over-traveling at the terminals.

(8) Emergency stop switches will be provided in or adjacent to each operating device.

(9) Electrical cord strain relief anchors and grip or equivalent means will be provided to prevent the electrical cord from pulling on the receptacle.

(F) Emergency communications.

A means of two-way communication will be provided for each roof car suspended platform for use in emergency.

(G) Safety belts and lifelines.

Employees on working platforms will be protected by a personal fall arrest system.

Last updated September 1, 2023 at 9:25 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-21 Storage batteries.

(A) Battery charging areas will be designated for that purpose.

(B) Employees will be instructed that:

(1) When charging batteries, acid will be poured into water; water will not be poured into acid;

(2) When charging batteries, make certain vent caps are functioning: keep vent caps in place to avoid electrolyte spray, and open covers to dissipate heat; and

(3) Smoking and open flames are not permitted.

(1) Provide personal protective equipment as specified in rule 4123:1-5-17 of the Administrative Code;

(2) Provide fire protection;

(3) Provide protection to charging apparatus to prevent damage by trucks;

(4) Provide adequate ventilation for exhausting fumes;

(5) Provide racks, when needed for support, made of nonconductive materials with dielectric properties the equivalent of dry wood or made of other material coated or covered to achieve that objective;

(6) Provide material handling equipment, such as a conveyor, hoist, or similar equipment, for handling large batteries, such as those used in electrically powered industrial trucks;

(7) Provide a carboy tilter or siphon for handling electrolyte;

(8) Provide "no smoking" and "no open flames" signs.

Last updated September 1, 2023 at 9:25 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-22 Confined spaces.

(A) No employee will be required to enter into any confined space unless a confined space entry procedure, incorporating one of the following, is used (see appendix to this rule for recommended entry procedures):

(1) Air sampling will be performed by qualified, trained personnel prior to and periodically during occupancy to determine that the atmosphere within the confined space contains an adequate concentration of oxygen (minimum of nineteen and one-half per cent to a maximum of twenty-three and one-half per cent), and any known or expected harmful atmospheric contaminants have been reduced to safe concentrations.

(2) A supplied-air respirator or self-contained breathing apparatus is provided and used.

(B) When the confined space has been exposed to, contained, or is likely to have combustible gases within its confines (such as sewage treatment plants), it will not be entered unless the atmosphere contains a concentration of less than ten per cent of the lower explosive limit.

(C) Appropriate control measures, which may consist of forced or natural ventilation, use of personal protective equipment, a combination of these, or other effective control techniques, will be instituted if tests under paragraph (A)(1) or (B) of this rule indicate that the atmosphere in the space to be entered contains:

(1) Any concentration of flammable vapor or gas ten per cent or greater of the lower explosive limit; and/or,

(2) A hazardous concentration of any known or expected toxic contaminants; and/or,

(3) Less than nineteen and one-half per cent oxygen.

(D) Means of safe entry and exit will be provided for entering or leaving a manhole, vault or other similar underground area.

(E) Where electrical equipment is used in confined spaces subject to combustible atmospheres, the permanent fixtures to which the lamp socket and plugs are attached will be the type approved for that location. All extension cords will be made of heavy duty cord. All lamps will be guarded.

View Appendix

Last updated September 1, 2023 at 9:25 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-23 Electrical conductors and equipment.

(A) Unless the electrical conductors or equipment to be worked on are isolated from all possible sources of voltage or are effectively grounded, the employer will provide protective equipment approved for the voltage involved, such as rubber gloves with protectors, rubber sleeves, hot line tools, line hose, line guards, insulator hoods, blankets, and access boards. Employees will be instructed in the use of such tools and equipment and, when working on or when working within contact distance of an energized conductor, will use such tools and equipment.

(B) Effective grounding devices will be provided when work is performed on deenergized circuits or equipment. Employees will be instructed in the use of such grounding devices.

(C) Protective devices and equipment will be stored in a clean, dry compartment or box that will protect such equipment from punctures, snags, or moisture.

(D) Minimum clearance.

Before an employee moves or operates power cranes, shovels, backhoes or any other type of material hoisting equipment within ten feet of an energized electrical conductor, the employer will:

(1) Assure that the conductor is deenergized and grounded, or

(2) Assure that the conductor is moved, or

(3) Assure that the conductor is guarded from accidental contact and an employee is designated to act as signalman to direct the operator in the movement of the equipment, or

(4) Assure that an insulated boom or an insulated type guard about the boom or arm of the equipment and a dielectric insulator link between the load and the block are installed and an employee is designated to act as signalman to direct the operator in the movement of the equipment.

(E) Approach distances to exposed energized conductors and equipment.

(1) The specifications of this paragraph apply only to the electric utility and clearance tree-trimming industries.

(2) No employee will be required to approach or take any conductive object closer to any electrically energized power conductors and equipment than prescribed in table 23-1 to this rule unless:

(a) The employee is insulated or guarded from the energized parts (insulating gloves rated for the voltage involved are considered adequate insulation); or

(b) The energized parts are insulated or guarded from the employee and any other conductive object at a different potential; or

(F) Approach distances to exposed energized conductors and equipment.

(1) The provisions of this paragraph apply only to the telecommunications industry.

(2) No employee will be required to approach or take any conductive object closer to any electrically energized power conductors and equipment than prescribed in table 23-2 to this rule unless:

(a) The employee is insulated or guarded from the energized parts (insulating gloves rated for the voltage involved are considered adequate insulation); or

(b) The energized parts are insulated or guarded from the employee and any other conductive object at a different potential; or

Table 23-1

| ALTERNATING CURRENT - MINIMUM DISTANCES | | | --- | --- | | Voltage Range (phase to phase) kilovolt | Minimum Working and Clear Hot Stick Clearance | | 2.1 to 15 | 2 ft. 0 in. | | 15.1 to 35 | 2 ft. 4 in. | | 35.1 to 46 | 2 ft. 6 in. | | 46.1 to 72.5 | 3 ft. 0 in. | | 72.6 to 121 | 3 ft. 4 in. | | 133 to 145 | 3 ft. 6 in. | | 161 to 169 | 3 ft. 8 in. | | 230 to 242 | 5 ft. 0 in. | | 345 to 362 | *7 ft. 0 in. | | 500 to 552 | *11 ft. 0 in. | | 700 to 765 | *15 ft. 0 in. |

^*NOTE: For 345-362kv. 500-552kv. and 700-765kv. the minimum working distance and the minimum clear hot stick distance may be reduced provided that such distances are not less than the shortest distance between the energized part and a grounded surface.

Table 23-2

| Approach Distances to Exposed Energized Overhead Power Lines and Parts | | | --- | --- | | Voltage range (phase to phase, RMS) | Approach distance (inches) | | 300 V and less | ⁽¹⁾ | | Over 300V, not over 750V | 12 | | Over 750V not over 2kV | 18 | | Over 2kV, not over 15kV | 24 | | Over 15kV, not over 37kV | 36 | | Over 37kV, not over 87.5kV | 42 | | Over 87.5kV, not over 121kV | 48 | | Over 121kV, not over 140kV | 54 |

¹ Avoid contact.

(G) The provisions of paragraph (E) of this rule do not apply to employees in insulated vehicle-mounted elevating and rotating work platforms.

Last updated September 1, 2023 at 9:31 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-24 Poles.

(A) Unsafe poles.

When, upon examination, evidence reveals a pole to be unsafe for climbing, employees will not be required to climb such pole beyond the point where the unsafe condition begins, until the pole has been substantially reinforced.

(B) Foreign attachments.

An employee will be required to remove all foreign attachments such as signs, notices, and posters, as the employee proceeds up the pole, except where the foreign attachments cannot be legally removed.

When raising or lowering poles or equipment, tag or hand lines will be provided to maintain control of the pole or equipment.

Last updated August 4, 2025 at 7:39 AM

History

Effective: August 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-25 Vehicle-mounted elevating and rotating work platforms.

(A) Vehicle stability.

The employer will provide a vehicle that will assure a stable support for the aerial device.

(1) Alternative configuration.

(a) If the aerial device is capable of alternative configurations, these configurations, including the rated capacity in each situation, will be stated on the operating instruction plate(s). Examples of alternative configurations needing such a description on operating instruction plate(s) are as follows:

(i) Without extending outriggers vs. with outriggers extended to firm footing;

(ii) With spring lock-outs engaged vs. without spring lock-outs engaged.

(iii) With only one platform attached vs. with two platforms attached;

(iv) With digger attached to boom vs. with digger removed from boom;

(v) As a personal carrying device only vs. as a personnel carrying and material handling device.

(b) If the rated capacity of an alternative configuration is related to an angle which a boom makes with the horizontal, then a means will be provided by which the operator can determine if the boom is at a safe angle, using permanent and legible characters where marking is necessary.

(2) Stability on level surface.

Each aerial device when mounted on a vehicle and used in a specific configuration, will be capable of sustaining a static load one and one-half times its rated capacity when the vehicle is on a firm and level surface.

(3) Stability on slopes.

Each aerial device, when mounted on a vehicle and used in a specific configuration, will comprise a unit capable of sustaining a static load one and one-third times the rated capacity for that specific configuration in every position in which the load can be placed within the definition of the specific configuration, when the vehicle is on a slope of five degrees downward in the direction most likely to cause overturning. If having the outriggers extended to a firm footing is a part of the definition of the configuration, then outriggers will be extended to provide maximum leveling for the purpose of determining whether the unit meets the stability specifications. If other facilities, such as means of turntable leveling are provided to minimize the effect of sloping terrain, then those facilities will be utilized for the purpose of determining whether the unit meets the stability specification.

(B) Operating instruction plates.

Operating instruction plates will be provided and attached to all aerial devices. The plate or plates will be located in a readily accessible area, shall be clearly visible, and will state the following: make, model and manufacturer's serial number; rated capacity; platform height, manufacturer's recommended operating pressure of pneumatic and hydraulic systems; caution and restrictions of operation; operating instructions and manufacturer's rated line voltage. Alternative configurations (see paragraph (A)(1) of this rule) will need in addition to the above: chart, schematic or scale showing capacities of all combinations in their operating position, and caution and restrictions of operation of all alternate or combinations of alternate configurations.

(1) Mechanical ratings.

(a) Platform height.

Platform height will be measured at its maximum elevation from the floor of the platform to the ground.

(b) Capacity.

The load, in calculating the capacity rating, will be the platform load and supplemental loads which may be affixed directly to the boom. The capacity rating will be designated with boom or booms extended to the maximum horizontal reach attainable throughout full rotation of its pedestal. Capacities of the equipment in other positions will be specified separately.

Reach will be measured from the center line of pedestal (rotation) to outer edge (rail) of the platform.

(2) Electrical ratings.

(a) Required statement.

The operating instruction plate(s) shall state whether the aerial device is insulated or noninsulated. A label (minimum one-fourth-inch letters) will be placed at each operating control station.

(b) Rated line voltage.

In the case of insulated units, the operating instruction plate(s) will clearly state the rate line voltage for which the aerial device is designed.

(1) Structural factor of safety.

The basic structural elements of the aerial device which support the platform will be designed such that the yield point of the materials used for any such elements will not be exceeded with three times the rated load(s) on the aerial device. The same structural factor of safety will apply to the platform.

(2) Controls.

Articulating boom and extensible platforms, specifically designed as personnel carriers, will have both platform (upper) and lower controls. Upper controls will be in or beside the platform within easy reach of the operator. Lower controls will provide for overriding the upper controls. All controls will be guarded or will be of such type that they cannot be accidentally actuated. They will be plainly marked as to their function.

(3) System protection.

Where the elevation of the boom or operation of the outriggers is accomplished by means of a hydraulic cylinder assembly, a pneumatic system or an electrically operated system, pilot operated check valves or other appropriate "fail safe" devices will be provided to prevent free fall of the boom or collapse of the outriggers in the event of power failure.

(4) Platform rail and toeboard.

Each platform will be provided with a guardrail no more than forty-five inches and no less than thirty-nine inches above the floor of the platform, an intermediate rail, and a toeboard, or its equivalent, around the periphery.

(5) Bursting factor of safety.

All critical components of hydraulic or pneumatic systems will withstand a pressure of no less than four times the normal operating pressure of the system. Critical components are those in which a failure would result in a free fall or free rotation of the boom. All noncritical components will have a bursting safety factor of two.

(6) Insulated boom and platform specifications.

(a) The insulated boom and platform will be constructed of an insulating material which will meet the test requirements specified and will be of dielectric material which will not absorb moisture (fiberglass or equivalent). All components bridging the insulated portions of the boom structure will have an equivalent electrical insulating value.

(b) Test electrodes.

Test electrodes will be permanently located on the inside and outside surfaces of the insulated portion of the boom. Insulated units under sixty-nine kilovolts do not need permanent test electrodes. These electrodes will be two to six inches from the metal portion of the lower end of the insulated upper boom. All hydraulic and air lines bridging the insulated portion of the boom will have metallic couplings adjacent to the test electrodes. Couplings will be insulated from the metal portion of the boom and electrically connected to the test electrodes.

(c) When insulated booms and platforms are not used in proximity to electrical conductors, the specifications of paragraphs (C)(6)(a) and (C)(6)(b) of this rule do not apply.

(D) Testing.

(1) Employees will not be required to use aerial devices that have not been tested to withstand a static load of one and one-half the rated capacity through its entire range of motion.

(2) Employees will not be required to use insulated boom aerial devices or basket liners near energized conductors or equipment unless such devices or liners will withstand approved electrical tests.

(3) Any equipment specified in this paragraph will be subjected to the same tests as prescribed in paragraphs (D)(1) and (D)(2) of this rule after any modification.

(E) Transfer to or from aerial basket.

Employees of the electric utility and telecommunications industries and their contractors and subcontractors will not be required to transfer from an aerial basket to any object or structure, or from any object or structure to an aerial basket, while the aerial basket is elevated above the ground. This does not apply to operations where the aerial basket is extended over a flat surface and where the hazard of falling has been eliminated.

(F) Flasher lights.

Vehicles upon which elevating or rotating work platform are mounted will be provided with flasher lights.

Last updated September 1, 2023 at 9:30 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-26 Trenches and excavations.

(A) General specifications.

(1) Utility companies and municipally owned utilities will be contacted and advised of proposed work prior to the start of actual excavation. Prior to opening an excavation, effort will be made to determine whether underground installations, i.e., sewer, telephone, water, fuel, electric lines, etc., will be encountered and, if so, where such underground installations are located.

(2) An employee will not be required to use mechanical digging or trenching equipment within three feet of an energized underground electrical conductor whose location is known, unless the conductors are protected by concrete ducts or equivalent protection.

(3) Where trenches or excavations are made in locations adjacent to backfilled trenches or excavations or where trenches or excavations are subjected to vibrations from any source, such as railroad or highway traffic or the operation of machinery, additional precautions by way of shoring and bracing will be taken to prevent slides or cave-ins.

(4) Undercutting of the exposed faces of trenches or excavations is not permitted unless the exposed faces of such undercutting are supported by one or more of the methods prescribed for the support of exposed faces of trenches.

(5) Material placement.

(a) Excavated material or other material will be retained a minimum of twenty-four inches from the top edge of the trench or excavation.

(b) As an alternative to the clearance prescribed in paragraph (A)(5)(a) of this rule, the employer will use effective barriers or other effective retaining devices in lieu thereof in order to prevent excavated or other materials from falling into the trench or excavation.

(6) Wells, pits, shafts etc.

(a) All wells, pits, shafts, etc., will be barricaded or covered.

(b) Upon completion of exploration and similar operations, temporary wells, pits, shafts, etc., will be backfilled.

(B) Trenches.

(1) The exposed faces of all trenches more than five feet high will be shored, laid back to a stable slope, or some other equivalent means of protection will be provided where employees may be exposed to moving ground or cave-ins. (See table 26-1 to this rule.)

(2) Sides of trenches in unstable or soft material, five feet or more in depth, will be shored, sheeted, braced, sloped, or otherwise supported by means of sufficient strength to protect the employees working within them. (See table 26-1 and table 26-2 to this rule.)

(3) Sides of trenches in hard compact soil, including embankments, will be shored or otherwise supported when the trench is more than five feet in depth and eight feet or more in length. In lieu of shoring, the sides of the trench above the five-foot level may be sloped to preclude collapse, but will not be steeper than a one-foot rise to each one-half-foot horizontal.

(4) Materials used for sheeting and sheet piling, bracing, shoring, and underpinning, will be in good serviceable condition, and timbers used will be sound and free from large or loose knots, and will be designed and installed so as to be effective to the bottom of the trench.

(5) Minimum specifications - trench shoring.

(a) Minimum specifications for trench bracing and shoring will be in accordance with table 26-2 to this rule. The vertical planks in the bracing system will extend at least to the top of the trench face.

(b) Braces and diagonal shores in a wood shoring system will not be subjected to compressive stress in excess of values given by the following formula:

S = 1300 - 20L D

Maximum ratio: L D = 50

Where: L = length, unsupported, in inches.

D = least side of the timber in inches.

S = allowable stress in pounds per square inch of cross section.

(6) When employees are working in trenches four feet deep or more, an adequate means of exit, such as a ladder or steps, will be provided and located so as to require no more than twenty-five feet of lateral travel.

(7) When bracing or shoring of trenches is needed, such bracing and shoring will be carried along with the excavation.

(8) Cross braces or trench jacks will be placed in true horizontal position, be spaced vertically, and be secured to prevent sliding, falling, or kickouts.

(9) Portable trench boxes, safety cages or sliding trench shields may be used for the protection of employees in lieu of a shoring system or sloping. Where such trench boxes or shields are used, they will be designed, constructed, and maintained in a manner which will provide protection equal to or greater than the sheeting or shoring needed for the trench and will extend at least to the top of the trench face.

(10) Backfilling and removal of trench supports will progress together from the bottom of the trench. Jacks or braces will be released slowly, and, in unstable soil, employees will clear the trench before pulling out the jacks or braces with ropes.

(1) The walls and faces of all excavations in which employees are exposed to danger from moving ground will be guarded by a shoring system, sloping of the ground, or some other equivalent means. (See table 26-1 and table 26-2 to this rule.)

Table 26-1.

(2) Supporting systems, i.e., piling, cribbing, shoring etc., shall be designed by a qualified person and shall meet accepted engineering specifications.

(3) Excavations sloped to the angle of repose will be flattened when an excavation has water conditions, silty materials, loose boulders, and areas where erosion, deep frost action, and slide planes appear.

(4) Sides, slopes, and faces of all excavations will meet accepted engineering specifications by scaling, benching, barricading, rock bolting, wire meshing, or equally effective means.

(5) Materials used for sheeting, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, and underpinning will be in good serviceable condition, and timbers will be sound, free from large or loose knots, and of proper dimensions. (See table 26-2 to this rule for proper dimensions.)

(6) Excavations below the level of the base of the footing of any foundation or retaining wall are not permitted, except in hard rock, unless the wall is underpinned and appropriate precautions are taken to ensure the stability of adjacent walls.

(7) If it is necessary to place or operate power shovels, derricks, trucks, materials, or other heavy objects on a level above and near an excavation, the side of the excavation will be sheet-piled, shored, braced or sloped as necessary to resist the extra pressure due to such super-imposed loads.

(8) When mobile equipment is utilized or allowed adjacent to excavations, substantial stop logs or barricades will be installed.

(9) Where employees or equipment cross over excavations, walkways or bridges with standard guardrails will be provided.

Last updated July 13, 2026 at 3:49 PM

History

Effective: September 1, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-27 Lasers.

(A) Labeling of laser equipment.

The employer will furnish equipment provided with labels containing the following minimum information for continuous-wave (CW) lasers:

(1) Wavelength or wavelength range;

(2) Emergent beam size;

(3) Beam divergence;

(4) Maximum average power output;

(5) Maximum emergency beam irradiance;

(6) Manufacturer's name and address;

(7) Product identification number.

(B) Posting.

The employer will post notices in prominent locations in which lasers are being operated. (For examples see appendix to this rule.)

(C) Beam shutters or caps will be utilized, or the laser turned off, when laser transmission is not actually necessary. When the laser is left unattended for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour, overnight, or at change of shifts, the laser will be turned off.

(D) Atmospheric conditions.

The employer will require the employee to keep away from the source, range, and target of the laser when there is exposure to rain or snow or when there is dust or fog in the air.

(E) Laser protection.

(1) Employees whose occupation or assignment includes exposure to laser beams will be furnished suitable laser safety goggles which will protect for the specific wavelength of the laser and be of optical density (O.D.) adequate for the energy involved. The table below lists the maximum power or energy density for which adequate protection is afforded by glasses of optical densities from five through eight.

Selecting laser safety glass

| Intensity, CW maximum power density (watts/cm²) | Attenuation | | | --- | --- | --- | | Optical density(O.D.) | Attenuationfactor | | | 10² | 5 | 10⁵ | | 10¹ | 6 | 10⁶ | | 1.0 | 7 | 10⁷ | | 10.0 | 8 | 10⁸ |

Output levels falling between lines in this table will utilize the higher optical density.

(2) Label of eye protection.

(a) Output levels falling between lines in this table will use the higher optical density.

(b) All protective goggles will bear a label identifying the following data:

(i) The laser wavelengths for which use is intended;

(ii) The optical density of those wavelengths;

(iii) The visible light transmission.

View Appendix

Last updated February 1, 2024 at 8:51 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2024
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-28 Helicopters.

(A) Slings and tag lines.

Loads will be balanced and securely fastened. Tag lines where used will be of a length that will not permit their being drawn up into the rotors. Pressed sleeve, swedged eyes, or equivalent means will be used for all freely suspended loads to prevent hand splices from spinning open or cable clamps from loosening.

(B) Cargo hooks.

All electrically operated cargo hooks will have the electrical activating device so designed and installed as to prevent inadvertent operation. In addition, the cargo hooks will be equipped with an emergency mechanical control for releasing the load. Hooks will be tested prior to each day's operation to determine that the release functions properly, both electrically and mechanically.

Personal protective equipment will be provided consisting of complete eye protection and a hard hat secured by a chinstrap.

(D) Housekeeping.

Good housekeeping will be maintained in all helicopter loading and unloading areas.

(E) Weight limitation.

The weight of an external load will not exceed the helicopter manufacturer's rating.

(F) Signal systems.

The employer will instruct the aircrew and ground personnel on the signal systems to be used and will review the system with the employees in advance of hoisting the load. This applies to both radio and hand signal systems. Hand signals, where used, will be as shown in the appendix to this rule, "Helicopter Hand Signals."

(G) Communications.

There will be constant reliable communication between the pilot and a designated employee of the ground crew who acts as a signalman during the period of loading and unloading. The signalman will be clearly distinguishable from other ground personnel.

(H) Fires.

Open fires are not permitted in areas where they could be spread by the rotor downwash.

View Appendix

Last updated August 4, 2025 at 7:39 AM

History

Effective: August 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-29 Explosives and blasting.

(A) Specifications for all blasting operations.

(1) No explosives will be abandoned.

(2) Smoking, firearms, (except firearms carried by guards), matches, open flame lamps, and other fire, flame, heat or spark-producing devices are not permitted in or within fifty feet of explosive magazines or while explosives are being handled, transported or used.

(3) Persons authorized to prepare explosive charges or conduct blasting operations will use every reasonable precaution, including, but not limited to, warning signals, flags, barricades, or woven wire mats to protect employees.

(4) Before a charge is detonated, employees will be instructed to leave the blasting area.

(5) Blasting operations in the proximity of overhead power lines, communications lines, utility services, or other services and structures, the blaster will notify the appropriate representatives of such utilities at least twenty-four hours in advance of blasting, specifying the location and intended time of such blasting. Verbal notice will be confirmed with written notice.

(6) Signs will be posted warning against the use of mobile radio transmitters on all roads within one thousand feet of blasting operations where electric blasting caps are used.

(7) All blasting operations will be suspended and employees removed from the blasting area during the approach and progress of an electrical storm.

(8) Empty boxes, paper, and fiber packing materials which have previously contained explosive materials will be disposed of in a safe manner, or reused in accordance with the department of transportation's hazardous materials regulations (49 CFR parts 177-180).

(9) Containers of explosives will not be opened in any magazine or within fifty feet of any magazine. In opening kegs or wooden cases, no sparking metal tools will be used; wooden wedges and either wood, fiber or rubber mallets will be used. Nonsparking metallic slitters may be used for opening fiberboard cases.

(10) Explosive materials that are obviously deteriorated or damaged will not be used and will be disposed of in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.

(B) Transportation of explosives.

Any vehicle used to transport explosives on the job site will have a nonsparking floor and side members and will be equipped with a fully charged fire extinguisher of not less than ten-ABC rating. Blasting caps or electric blasting caps will not be transported over the highways on the same vehicles with other explosives, unless packaged, segregated, and transported in accordance with the department of transportation's hazardous materials regulations (49 CFR parts 177-180).

(1) Blasting caps, electric blasting caps, or other detonating devices will not be stored in the same magazine with other explosives or blasting agents.

(2) Primed cartridges will not be stored.

(3) All explosives stored on the job site will be stored in approved storage facilities. All brush and combustible materials will be kept clear of the magazine to a distance of no less than twenty-five feet.

(D) Loading of explosives or blasting agents.

(1) All drill holes will be sufficiently large to admit freely the insertion of the packages of explosive materials.

(2) Tamping will be done only with wooden rods or plastic tamping poles without exposed metal parts, except that nonsparking metal connectors may be used for jointed poles. Violent tamping is not permitted. Primed cartridges will not be tamped.

(3) No holes will be loaded except those to be fired in the next round of blasting. After loading, all remaining explosives shall be immediately returned to the magazine.

(4) Drilling will not be started until all remaining butts of old holes are examined with a wooden rod for unexploded charges, and, if any are found, they will be refired before work proceeds.

(5) Drill holes which have contained explosives or blasting agents will not be made deeper.

(6) No loaded holes will be left unattended.

(E) Initiation of explosive charges.

(1) General.

(a) When fuse is used, the blasting cap will be securely attached to it with a standard ring type cap crimper. All primers shall be assembled no less than fifty feet from any magazine.

(b) Primers for use in blasting will be made up only as needed for each round of blasting.

(c) No blasting cap will be inserted in the explosive materials without first making a hole in the cartridge for the cap with a wooden punch of proper size or standard cap crimper.

(d) If there are any misfires while using cap and fuse, all employees will be required to remain away from the charge for at least an hour. If electric blasting caps are used and a misfire occurs, this waiting period may be reduced to thirty minutes.

(2) Electric blasting caps.

(a) Blasters, when testing circuits to loaded holes, will use only blasting galvanometers or other instruments which have been designed and approved for the purpose.

(b) Only the employee making the final check on the wire connections will fire the shot. All connections will be made from bore hole back to the source of firing current, and the leading wires will remain shorted and not be connected to the blasting machine or other source of current until the charge is to be fired.

Last updated October 19, 2023 at 2:49 PM

History

Effective: September 1, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-5-99 Table of standard materials and dimensions.

This rule was filed with the Legislative Service Commission in PDF format and is presented here as filed.

View Rule Text

Last updated September 16, 2026 at 2:05 PM

History

Effective: September 1, 2023
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Chapter 4123:1-7 Metal Casting

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-01 Scope and definitions.

(A) Scope.

The purpose of this chapter of the Administrative Code is to provide reasonable safety for life, limb, and health of employees.

The specific provisions of this chapter supplement those of Chapter 4123:1-5 of the Administrative Code, and pertain to the employer for the protection of such employer's employees and no others and apply to the manufacture of castings containing iron, steel, brass, copper, tin, zinc, lead, aluminum, or any of the baser metals, but do not apply to steel making or any processes used in conjunction with steel manufacturing and fabricating.

Installations or constructions built or contracted for prior to the effective date of any specification are deemed to comply with the provisions of these rules if such installations or constructions comply either with the provisions of the curent rules or with the provisions of any applicable rule which was in effect at the time contracted for or built.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Core" means a preformed sand aggregate inserted into a mold to shape the interior of a casting.

(2) "Core box" means a wood, metal or plastic structure used to shape sand into a core.

(3) "Crucible" means a ceramic pot or receptacle used in melting molten metal, transporting it or both.

(4) "Cupola" means a cylindrical furnace lined with refractories for melting metal in direct contact with the fuel by forcing air under pressure through openings near its base.

(5) "Factor of safety" means the ratio between the ultimate breaking stress and the working stress of the material, structure, or device. For example, the term "factor of safety of four" means the material, structure, or device is constructed of such strength that the maximum load will be one-fourth the designed ultimate breaking load. Where other factors of safety appear, they will apply in the same manner. The standards of the "American Society for Testing Materials" will be used in determining the strength of material except as otherwise provided herein.

(6) "Flask" means the frame which holds the sand or other substance forming the mold.

(7) "Gallery" means a corridorlike platform, passage, or walkway, especially one projecting from a wall and open at the outer edge.

(8) "Guard" means the covering, fencing, railing, or enclosure which shields an object from accidental contact.

(9) "Guarded" means that the object is covered, fenced, railed, enclosed, or otherwise shielded from accidental contact.

(10) "Ladle" means a metal receptacle frequently lined with refractories used for transporting and pouring molten metal.

(11) "Mold" means the form into which molten metal is poured to produce a casting.

(12) "Operator" means any employee assigned or authorized to work at the specific equipment.

(13) "Passageway" means a well-defined aisle, gangway, or walkway used for movement of employees and equipment, but does not include the space between molds unless regularly used for such movement.

(14) "Pig hole" means the opening into which the excess molten metal is poured.

(15) "Pig mold" means a mold used to hold excess molten metal.

(16) "Pouring floor or area" means the floor or area where molten metal is poured.

(17) "Shall" is to be construed as mandatory.

(18) "Substantial" means construction of such strength, of such materials, and of such workmanship that the object will withstand the wear, usage, or shock for which it is designed.

(19) "Trunnion" means the cylindrical metal support attached to the side of a ladle or flask.

(20) "Tumbling mill" means a rotating barrel in which castings are cleaned.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:09 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-02 Floors and pits.

(A) General requirements.

(1) All floors and pits where molten metal is handled shall be kept free from puddles of liquid.

(2) Floors adjoining industrial tracks at the cross-over point shall be approximately flush with the top of the track rails.

(3) Pig holes in the floor shall be guarded. Pig molds and receiving stations for excess molten metal from ladles shall be located in such a manner as to maintain a clear passageway.

(B) Ladle pits.

(1) Pits for metal and slag ladles at melting equipment shall be kept clean and dry.

(2) Ladle pits shall have no less than one foot of clearance over the greatest overall dimension of the ladle.

(3) Employees shall not be in pits used for metal or slag ladles while metal or slag is being poured into the ladle.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:09 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-03 Galleries.

(A) Galleries where molten metal is poured into molds shall be:

(1) Provided with solid, leakproof floors, or

(2) Guarded to prevent access to the area below the pouring operation.

(B) Partitions of sheet steel no less than forty-two inches in height shall be installed on any open side of galleries described in paragraph (A) of this rule.

Last updated October 7, 2024 at 12:04 PM

History

Effective: January 1, 1981
Promulgated Under: Ch 119.

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-04 Passageways.

(A) Passageways shall be sufficiently firm to withstand the travel for which they are intended and be kept clear of obstructions.

(B) Passageways shall be no less than twenty-four inches wide where no more than two employees manually carry molten metal.

(D) Passageways where molten metal is transported in truck, sulky, or manually operated monorail ladles shall be no less than twenty-four inches wider than the extreme width of such ladles.

(E) Passageways used for parallel travel of truck ladles or manually operated monorail ladles shall be no less than twice the width necessary for a one-ladle operation.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:09 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-05 Ladles.

(A) General.

(1) Ladles shall be thoroughly dry before use.

(2) Powered monorail ladles, cars, trucks, and cranes used to transport molten metal ladles shall be equipped with audible or visual warning devices which shall be used whenever molten metal is being transported.

(3) An audible or visual warning device shall be used when a manually operated monorail ladle, transporting molten metal, crosses an intersecting passageway.

(B) Tilting (lip-pouring) ladles.

(1) Tilting ladles exceeding two thousand pounds capacity shall be of the gear-operated type.

(2) All mechanically or electrically operated tilting ladles shall be equipped with a suitable locking device or brake to prevent overturning or uncontrolled sway.

(3) The refractory rim or lip on hand or bull ladles shall be no more than one-half inch above the top of the metal shell, unless the refractory ladle lining is one and one-half inch thick or more at the rim, in which case the maximum height shall be one inch.

A pig or holding ladle shall be so positioned as to receive hot metal should the stopper malfunction or fail to fully shut off the metal flow.

(D) Ladle additions.

(1) Moist metal shall not be added to molten metal.

(2) Iron in a ladle shall not be treated with magnesium or its alloys while the ladle is suspended from a hoist or crane unless the cables are shielded.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:09 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-06 Trunnions.

(A) Trunnions and the devices used to attach them to flasks, buckets, ladles, and other equipment shall be constructed with a factor of safety of no less than ten.

(B) The diameter of the head on the outside end of the trunnion shaft shall be no less than one and one-half times the diameter of the shaft.

(C) When trunnions are used with wire rope slings or chain, the diameter of the head shall be no less than the diameter of the shaft plus one and one-half times the diameter of the sling or chain size used.

(D) The inside corners where the trunnion shaft joins the base and the head shall be filleted.

(E) The radius of the corner between the groove and the head shall be approximately equal to the radius of the sling used, the remainder of the inside edge of the head being straight.

Last updated October 7, 2024 at 12:04 PM

History

Effective: January 1, 1981
Promulgated Under: Ch 119.

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-07 Scrap breakers.

(A) The breaking of scrap or castings by the use of a demolition weight inside the foundry building during regular operating periods is not permitted.

(B) Where a demolition weight is used to break skulls and scrap outside the foundry building, the operation shall be performed in a restricted or guarded area identified by appropriate signs and away from employees not involved in demolition work.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:10 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-08 Cupolas.

(A) Charging.

(1) A substantial cover constructed to allow for ventilation shall be provided at the charging floor level and between the cupola shell and charging floor when employees are working inside the cupola and below the charging floor level.

(2) The area underneath cupola charging equipment shall be guarded to prevent material from dropping onto employees during charging operations.

(B) Dropping cupola bottom.

(1) The area underneath the cupola shall be free from liquid before the bottom is dropped.

(2) A whistle or other warning signal shall alert employees before the bottom is dropped.

(3) A block and tackle, wire rope, chain, or other mechanical means shall be used to drop the bottom.

(4) The area surrounding the operation shall be cleared of all employees at the time the bottom is dropped except for the employee(s) pulling the pin or posts, who shall be protected by shielding, protective clothing, or protective equipment.

(1) When the cupola is in operation, its bottom doors shall be supported by a drop leg and two adjustable screw props on a metal prop base set on a concrete or other fabricated footing of equivalent strength, provided that, where the bottom doors are supported by hydraulic door closers or equivalent, a drop leg or a door locking mechanism is necessary.

(2) Temporary supports, such as timbers, blocking, or shoring, shall be placed under the cupola bottom doors to prevent a premature bottom drop.

(3) Mechanical means shall be provided for raising the bottom doors of the cupola.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:10 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-09 Crucibles.

(A) Crucibles shall be maintained in good condition, free from cracks and other flaws.

(B) Crucibles shall be stored in a warm, dry place immediately prior to being used.

Last updated October 7, 2024 at 12:04 PM

History

Effective: January 1, 1981
Promulgated Under: Ch 119.

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-10 Sand mullers and mixers.

(A) Sand mullers and mixers shall be locked out to prevent operation while employees are inside the chamber.

(B) Openings used for the sampling of sand shall be guarded, and all other mixer openings shall be provided with a screen or equivalent protection.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:10 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-11 Molds and cores.

(A) Molds.

(1) No employee shall be required to work under suspended loads.

(2) All molding machines shall be equipped with two-hand controls or equivalent protective devices for each employee assigned to the machine.

(3) Automatic molding machines which go through a complete cycle without an operator shall be guarded.

(4) Where the clearance between the mold conveyor and any fixed or portable object is less than eighteen inches, the space or clearance shall be blocked to prevent passage.

(5) When a molding machine is to be repaired, all energy sources shall be shut off, locked out, and any pressure bled from the machine.

(B) Cores.

(1) The surfaces of all core boxes used in bench work shall be smooth and free from splinters or sharp edges.

(2) Automatic or semi-automatic core blowing machines shall be guarded.

(3) When a core machine is to be repaired, all energy sources shall be shut off, locked out, and any pressure bled from the machine.

(4) Walk-in ovens shall be provided with a means of escape from the inside, such as emergency exit doors, kickout panel or plate, or duplicate opening mechanism.

(5) In batch ovens, sufficient space shall be provided to allow unobstructed access for employees or machine loading.

(6) Batch ovens having vertically sliding doors shall be provided with devices which keep the door in the raised position.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:10 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-12 Sandblasting.

Where sandblasting occurs, employees shall be protected by personal protective equipment, dust-tight enclosures, or equivalent means of protection to prevent injurious exposures.

Last updated October 7, 2024 at 12:05 PM

History

Effective: January 1, 1981
Promulgated Under: Ch 119.

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-13 Tumbling mills.

(A) All tumbling mills shall be provided with a suitable guard to protect employees from the exposed parts of the mill during operation.

(B) Manually loaded tumbling mills shall be equipped with a locking device to prevent the mill from turning when the doors are opened.

Last updated October 7, 2024 at 12:05 PM

History

Effective: January 1, 1981
Promulgated Under: Ch 119.

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-7-14 Chipping and grinding.

Where castings are cleaned by chipping or grinding, employees shall be protected from flying chips or particles by personal protective equipment, screens, partitions, or equivalent protection.

Last updated October 7, 2024 at 12:05 PM

History

Effective: January 1, 1981
Promulgated Under: Ch 119.

Chapter 4123:1-9 Steel Making, Manufacturing, and Fabricating

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-9-01 Scope and definitions.

(A) Scope.

The purpose of this chapter of the Administrative Code is to provide reasonable safety for life, limb, and health of employees.

These specific provisions of this chapter supplement those of Chapter 4123:1-5 of the Administrative Code, and pertain to the employer for the protection of such employer's employees and no others and apply to steel making and the processes used in conjunction with steel manufacturing and fabricating but do not apply to the manufacture of foundry type operations.

Installations or constructions built or contracted for prior to the effective date of any specification are deemed to comply with the provisions of these rules if such installations or constructions comply either with the provisions of the current rules or with the provisions of any applicable specific rule which was in effect at the time contracted for or built.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Approved" means accepted or certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as "UL Solutions," "FM Approvals," or a responsible governmental agency.

(2) "Bosh tank" means a tank used to collect circulating discharge water from furnaces.

(3) "Danger zone" means the point of operation where a known critical hazard exists.

(4) "Guard" means the covering, fencing, railing, or enclosure which shields an object from accidental contact.

(5) "Guarded" means that the object is covered, fenced, railed, enclosed, or otherwise shielded from accidental contact.

(6) "Mixer" means a vessel that contains a supply of molten pig iron available when needed for charging into open hearth furnaces and for holding successive casts or lots of iron from blast furnaces to reduce irregularities in the iron.

(7) "Operator" means any employee assigned or authorized to work at the specific equipment.

(8) "Shall" is to be construed as mandatory.

(9) "Substantial" means construction of such strength, of such materials, and of such workmanship that the object will withstand the wear, usage, or shock for which it is designed.

(10) "Standard guard railing" means a substantial barrier constructed in accordance with paragraph (E) of rule 4123:1-5-02 of the Administrative Code.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:11 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-9-02 Coke plants.

(A) Warning signs and devices.

(1) Signs.

Warning signs that forbid smoking and open flames shall be posted near any entrance to rooms or buildings where coal dust or flammable gas may accumulate.

(2) Quenching car locomotives, pushers and larry cars, also known as charging cars, shall be equipped with audible and visual warning devices.

(B) Electrical equipment.

Approved electrical equipment shall be used in coal handling and by-product operations.

Lines carrying blast furnace gas or coke gas shall be purged before opening or entering.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:11 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-9-03 Blast furnaces.

(A) Communication system.

A means of communication shall be provided between the furnace, the cast house, the blower's office, and the skip operator's station. Additionally, a system for voice communication shall be provided between the furnace top and the cast house when employees are to perform work on the top of an operating blast furnace.

(B) Passageways under skip car tracks.

Passageways under skip car tracks shall be guarded from falling material.

Lines carrying blast furnace gas or coke gas shall be purged before opening or entering.

(D) Repairs to chimney stoves and furnace.

Before interior repairs are made to any chimney stove or furnace, gas lines shall be blanked off.

(E) Cast house.

The cast house shall have an exit on at least two different sides or two different ends.

(F) Iron and cinder runners.

All permanent gates in iron and cinder runners shall be operated at a distance of no less than three feet (0.9 meters) from the side of the runner.

(G) Dust catchers.

Operating devices for dumping dust catchers when pug mills are not provided shall be located a distance of no less than eight feet (2.4 meters) from the outlet of the hopper.

(H) Scale and transfer cars.

All scale and transfer cars shall be equipped with audible and visual warning devices and rail sweeps maintained in proper working order.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:11 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-9-04 Steel making.

(A) Mixers.

(1) All mechanically or electrically operated mixers shall be equipped with a counterbalance, automatic device, or the equivalent, designed to return the mixer to an upright position or to prevent it from further tipping in case of power failure.

(2) All hydraulically powered mixers shall be equipped with an emergency valve so arranged that if the main operating valve fails while the mixer is pouring, the emergency valve can be operated immediately to return it to an upright position or to prevent it from further tipping.

(3) Moist metal shall not be added to molten metal.

(B) Mixer building.

The mixer building shall be equipped with an audible warning device which shall operate automatically during any pouring operation.

Auxiliary hoists on mixer ladle cranes shall be equipped with a hook which can be attached to the ladle after the ladle has been hoisted into pouring position.

(D) Oxygen furnaces - blown basic steelmaking process.

(1) Each oxygen furnace - blown basic steelmaking process - shall be equipped with a means of communication connecting the charging crane, the charging floor, each operating floor, and each pulpit.

(2) Charging floors and operating floors shall be provided with approved handrails and toeboards. This specification does not apply to pouring and mold preparation platforms.

(3) Pit areas on charging and tapping sides of steelmaking processes shall be provided with drainage.

(4) The oxygen shall be shut off when a furnace is shut down for repairs.

(5) Tapping platforms and charging floors.

(a) Tapping platforms and charging floors shall be provided with standard guard railings. This specification does not apply to pouring and mold preparation platforms.

(b) A guard shall be provided to protect the opening in the railing of a tapping platform used for spouts and runners, which may be removed when work is being performed at that point.

(E) Electric furnaces.

(1) The source of power shall be locked out when work is performed in or on an electric furnace.

(2) Transformer vaults for electric furnaces shall be kept locked at all times and accessible only to authorized personnel.

(3) Tapping platforms and charging floors.

(a) Tapping platforms and charging floors shall be provided with standard guardrailings. This specification does not apply to pouring and mold preparation platforms.

(b) A guard shall be provided to protect the opening in the railing of a tapping platform used for spouts and runners, which may be removed when work is being performed at that point.

(F) Muffle furnaces.

Muffle furnaces shall be equipped with a safe means of lighting.

(G) Scrap breakers.

Where a demolition weight is used to break skulls and scrap, the operation shall be performed in a restricted or guarded area identified by appropriate signs and away from employees not involved in demolition work.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:11 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-9-05 Rolling operations.

(A) Subways or crossovers.

Subways with overhead protection or crossovers shall be provided at established passageways which cross the rolling line.

(B) Coupling boxes, spindles, and wobblers.

Coupling boxes, spindles, and wobblers seven feet (2.1 meters) or less above floor level shall be guarded.

Steps or equivalent means shall be provided for reaching the top of housing(s) four feet (1.2 meters) or more above floor level.

(D) Rolling tables.

Stop guards shall be placed at the dead end of all rolling tables.

(E) Bosh tank.

The top of the bosh tank shall be guarded unless it is at least forty-two inches (1.1 meters) above floor level.

(F) Stop guards.

Adjustable stop guards shall be installed at the outside of hot beds and skids.

(G) Looping posts.

Looping posts shall be used on small non-automatic repeater type mills where bars are being rolled in more than one pass in a continuous operation.

(H) Tubular products.

(1) Openings in welding and heating furnaces.

Charging and discharging openings in heating furnaces shall be provided with shields.

(2) Signal system.

A signal system shall be provided between the charging and discharging openings of all heating furnaces.

(3) Barring to prevent passage.

Space between ends of troughs, conveyors, or tables and roll stands shall be barred to prevent passage of employees.

(4) Butt weld mills.

Movable draw benches and chains on butt weld mills shall be guarded.

(5) Cross roll troughs.

Stops or guards shall be provided at the delivery end of cross roll troughs.

(I) Wire mills.

(1) Overhead protection - passageways.

Passageways under hot wires from annealing furnaces shall be provided with overhead protection.

(2) Wire drawing machines.

Wire drawing machines shall be equipped with an emergency stopping device such as an electric eye, trip cord, or similar means.

(3) Bull blocks.

All bull blocks shall be provided with a substantial back guard.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:11 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Chapter 4123:1-11 Laundering and Drycleaning

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-11-01 Scope and definitions.

(A) Scope.

The purpose of this chapter of the Administrative Code is to provide reasonable safety for life, limb, and health of employees.

These specific provisions of this chapter supplement Chapter 4123:1-5 of the Administrative Code and pertain to the employer for the protection of such employer's employees and no others and apply to places of employment wherein laundering or drycleaning processes are performed.

Installations or constructions built or contracted for prior to the effective date of any specification are deemed to comply with the provisions of these rules if such installations or constructions comply either with the provisions of the current rules or with the provisions of any applicable rule which was in effect at the time contracted for or built.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Air contaminants," as used in this rule, means hazardous concentrations of fibrosis-producing toxic dusts, toxic fumes, toxic mists, toxic vapors, or toxic gases, or a combination of these, suspended in the atmosphere.

(2) "Approved" means accepted or certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as "UL Solutions," "FM Approvals," or a responsible governmental agency.

(3) "Centrifugal extractor" means a machine used for removing moisture from textile articles by centrifugal action.

(4) "Drycleaning" means the process of removing dirt, grease, paints, and other stains from such items as wearing apparel, textiles, fabrics, and rugs by the use of nonaqueous liquids (solvents, nonwater based).

(5) "Drying box or cabinet" means a heated, stationary enclosure used for drying, smoothing, or finishing textile articles.

(6) "Flammable liquid" means a liquid having a closed cup flashpoint below one hundred degrees Fahrenheit (thirty-eight degrees Celsius).

(7) "Guard" means the covering, fencing, railing, or enclosure which shields an object from accidental contact.

(8) "Guarded" means that the object is covered, fenced, railed, enclosed, or otherwise shielded from accidental contact.

(9) "Ironer" means a machine with one or more rolls or heated surfaces used for drying, ironing, or smoothing textile articles.

(10) "Laundry press" or "drycleaning press" means a machine on which textile articles are dried or finished between two surfaces pressed together.

(11) "Nonflammable liquid" means any liquid or mixture of liquids which in its original state, or after continued use or agitation, or by distillation, will not burn in a closed cup tester, or which in any state, when mixed with air, gives off vapors which are noncombustible or nonexplosive.

(12) "Operator" means any employee assigned or authorized to work at the specific equipment.

(13) "Puff iron" means a heated device for smoothing or shaping textile articles.

(14) "Shall" is to be construed as mandatory.

(15) "Squeeze extractor" means any mechanically, pneumatically, or hydraulically operated compacting machine for removing excess liquid from textile articles by squeezing.

(16) "Still" means an appliance that receives contaminated flammable or combustible liquids or vapors and which distills the contents to remove contaminants and recover the solvents in the drycleaning process.

(17) "Substantial" means construction or such strength, of such materials, and of such workmanship that the object will withstand the wear, usage, or shock for which it is designed.

(18) "Tumbler" means a machine in which textile articles are shaken out or dried by tumbling within a rotating cylinder.

(19) "Washer/extractor" means any machine in which the washing and extraction operations are performed.

(20) "Wringer" means one or more power-driven rolls used for removing excess liquid.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:12 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-11-02 General requirements.

(A) Extractors.

(1) Centrifugal extractors.

(a) A centrifugal extractor or washer/extractor shall be equipped with an interlock that will disconnect the current to the drive motor and prevent starting rotation of the cylinder when the access door to the machine is open but will not prevent the operator from inching the machine with the access door open. The interlock shall further prevent opening of the access door or cover while the cylinder is rotating.

(b) A centrifugal extractor or washer/extractor shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations so as to minimize any transmittal of vibration to adjacent areas, and it shall not be operated in excess of the maximum speed which shall be shown on the machine nameplate.

(2) Squeeze extractor.

A squeeze extractor shall be provided with a cover and interlock to prevent unloading the machine unless the pressure has been released and also to prevent applying pressure unless the cover has been properly closed. A steam, hydraulically, or pneumatically operated device shall be provided with a safety pressure relief valve.

(3) Extractors used in drycleaning with flammable solvents shall be equipped with a cover and basket rim of nonferrous metal or other nonsparking material.

(B) Drying equipment.

(1) Tumblers.

(a) A tumbler shall be equipped with an interlock that will prevent energizing the drive motor unless the shell door is closed but will allow for the inching of the tumbler during loading and unloading.

(b) A tumbler shall be provided with means to prevent accidental self-closing of the shell door during loading and unloading of the machine; however, this specification does not apply to side-hinged doors that tend to remain open.

(c) These specifications do not apply to tumblers designed without doors, where the work is continuously loaded and discharged.

(2) Drying box or cabinet.

A drying box or cabinet shall have door latches or locks that will enable an operator to open the doors readily from the inside and the outside.

(1) Ironers.

(a) An iron shall be equipped with a safety bar across the entire length of the feed roll or shoe so arranged that the striking of the bar will stop the machine.

(b) Hazardous nip points and the uncovered heated surface of an iron shall be guarded.

(2) Laundry presses and drycleaning presses.

Laundry presses and drycleaning presses, excluding hand- or foot-powered presses, shall be equipped with:

(a) A control device needing concurrent use of both hands until the press has closed, and

(b) A release mechanism within easy reach of the operator that will instantly open the press; or

(3) Puff iron.

The working surface of each puff iron when not in use shall be covered with at least one thickness of double-faced flannel and suitable smooth cover cloth or equivalent.

(4) Spreaders, feeders, folders, and stackers.

Spreaders, feeders, folders, and stackers shall be equipped with emergency stop buttons or bars within easy reach of the operator.

(5) Steam/air finishing equipment.

Tunnel-type equipment which provides access for an employee to enter shall have door latches or locks that will enable an operator to open the doors readily from the inside and the outside. A means to shut off all power to the system shall be provided, capable of being actuated by an employee from anywhere inside the cabinet.

(D) Miscellaneous equipment.

(1) Marking machines.

A marking machine shall be equipped with one of the following:

(a) A spring compression device designed to prevent injury to fingers caught between the marking plunger and the platen;

(b) A two-hand control;

(d) Other equivalent protection.

(2) Sewing machines.

A sewing machine shall be equipped with a guard permanently attached to the machine so that the operator's fingers cannot pass under the needle. The guard shall be of such design that the needle can be conveniently threaded without removing the guard.

(3) Packaging machines.

Packaging and tying machines shall be guarded to avoid accidental hitting of the operator or any other employee by rotating or moving components of the machine.

(4) Steam pipes.

All steam pipes exposed to contact seven feet (2.1 meters) or less from the floor or working platform shall be insulated or covered with a heat-resistive material or be otherwise guarded.

(5) Stopping devices.

Each power driven machine shall be provided with a power disconnect device so located as to be operable from the front of the machine.

(6) Drycleaning machines and drying tumblers.

Drycleaning machines and drying tumblers shall be grounded.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:12 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-11-03 Laundering.

(A) Washing machines.

(1) A washing machine shall be equipped with an interlock that will disconnect the current to the drive motor and prevent starting rotation of the cylinder when the access door to the machine is open but will not prevent the operator from inching the machine with the access door open.

(2) A washing machine or washer/extractor shall be provided with a means to prevent accidental self-closing of the shell or cylinder doors during loading or unloading of the machine; however, this specification does not apply to side-hinged or over-the-center doors that tend to remain open.

(B) Wringers.

A wringer shall be equipped with a safety bar or other guard across the entire front of the feed or first pressure rolls, so arranged that the striking of the bar or guard will stop the machine.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:12 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-11-04 Drycleaning.

(A) Electrical equipment.

All electrical equipment shall be located outside the drycleaning room or be of an approved type for hazardous locations when any flammable liquid is used for drycleaning.

(B) Stills and condensers.

Stills and condensers shall be of substantial construction, mounted on fire-resistive foundations and of a type which will not expose the fluid or vapor to the atmosphere outside the still or condenser during any part of the process of reclamation.

(1) Brushing and prespotting operations with flammable liquid solvents shall be performed in a drycleaning room, on a brushing table or in a tub.

(2) Flammable liquid solvents used for brushing or prespotting shall be stored in approved portable safety containers.

(D) Drycleaning with nonflammable liquid solvents.

(1) Where nonflammable solvents giving off air contaminants are used for drycleaning in quantities of more than one gallon, such operations shall be performed in fluid-tight machines, systems, or apparatus.

(2) Such apparatus shall be vented to the open air at a point no less than twenty-five feet (7.6 meters) from any window or other openings, and so used and operated to prevent the escape of air contaminants therefrom into the workrooms and workspaces.

Last updated January 2, 2025 at 10:12 AM

History

Effective: January 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Chapter 4123:1-13 Rubber and Plastic Industries

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-13-01 Scope and definitions.

(A) Scope.

The purpose of these safety requirements is to provide reasonable safety for life, limb, and health of employees.

These specific requirements supplement those of Chapter 4123:1-5 of the Administrative Code and are minimum requirements of an employer for the protection of such employer's employees and no others and apply to the rubber and plastic industries where crude, synthetic, or reclaimed rubber or plastics are processed.

Equipment used in the laboratory varies greatly from manufacturing equipment in size, speed, and height and is specifically excepted from the detailed provisions of these rules; however, equivalent protection shall be provided.

Installations or constructions built or contracted for prior to the effective date of any specification are deemed to comply with the provisions of these rules if such installations or constructions comply either with the provisions of the current rules or with the provisions of any applicable rule which was in effect at the time contracted for or built.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Approved" means accepted or certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as "UL Solutions," "FM Approvals," or a responsible governmental agency.

(2) "Bite" or "nip point" means the point of meeting between any two in-running rolls.

(3) "Calender" means a machine equipped with two or more heavy internally heated or cooled rolls revolving in opposite directions and used for continuously sheeting or plying up rubber or plastic compounds and for frictioning or coating fabric with rubber or plastic compounds.

(4) "Danger zone" means the point of operation where a known critical hazard exists.

(5) "Factor of safety" means the ratio between the ultimate breaking stress and the working stress of the material, structure, or device. For example, the term "factor of safety of four" means that the material, structure, or device is constructed of such strength that the maximum load will be one-fourth the designed ultimate breaking load. Where other factors of safety appear, they will apply in the same manner. The standards of the "American Society for Testing Materials" will be used in determining the strength of material except as otherwise provided herein.

(6) "Guard" means the covering, fencing, railing, or enclosure which shields an object from accidental contact.

(7) "Guarded" means that the object is covered, fenced, railed, enclosed, or otherwise shielded from accidental contact.

(8) "Mill" means a machine consisting of two adjacent, heavy rolls, set horizontally, which revolve in opposite directions, i.e., toward each other as viewed from above, used for the mechanical working of rubber or plastic.

(9) "Operator" means any employee assigned or authorized to work at the specific equipment.

(10) "Pinch point" or "shear point" means any point at which it is possible to be caught between the moving parts of a machine, or between the moving and stationary parts of a machine, or between the material and the moving parts of a machine.

(11) "Point of operation" means the point at which the material is placed in or removed from the machine.

(12) "Securely fastened" means that the object or thing referred to is substantially fixed in place.

(13) "Safety trip" means a device for stopping the travel of rolls when the device is actuated in an emergency.

(14) "Shall" is to be construed as mandatory.

(15) "Substantial" means construction of such strength, of such materials, and of such workmanship that the object will withstand the wear, usage, or shock for which it is designed.

Last updated February 3, 2025 at 8:36 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-13-02 Mills.

(A) Mill roll height.

All mills shall be installed so that the top of the operating rolls is no less than fifty inches (one hundred twenty-seven centimeters) above the level on which the operator stands, irrespective of the size of the mill. This distance shall apply to the actual working level, whether the actual working level be at the general floor level, in a pit, or on a platform.

(B) Mill controls.

(1) Safety trip control.

A safety trip control shall be provided in front and in back of each mill to stop the mill when it is tripped. The safety trip control shall be accessible and operate readily on contact. The safety trip control shall be one of the following types or a combination thereof.

(a) Pressure-sensitive body bars.

Installed at front and back of each mill twenty inches (50.8 centimeters) horizontally from the crown face of the roll. Pressure-sensitive body bars shall operate readily by pressure of the mill operator's body and be installed on new equipment.

(b) Safety trip rod.

Installed in the front and in the back of each mill and located within two inches (5.1 centimeters) of a vertical plane tangent to the front and rear rolls. The trip rods shall be within easy reach of the operator but no more than seventy-two inches (182.9 centimeters) above the level on which the operator stands. The trip rods shall be accessible and operate readily whether the rods are pushed or pulled.

Installed at the front and back of each mill and located within two inches (5.1 centimeters) of a vertical plane tangent to the front and rear rolls. The cables shall be within easy reach of the operator but no more than seventy-two inches (182.9 centimeters) above the level on which the operator stands. The trip wire cable or wire center cord shall operate readily whether cable or cord is pushed or pulled.

(d) Fixed guards.

A fixed bar across the front and one across the back of the mill approximately forty inches (101.6 centimeters) vertically above the working level and twenty inches (50.8 centimeters) horizontally from the crown face of the roll should be used. A safety trip method as described in paragraph (B)(1)(a), (B)(1)(b), or (B)(1)(c) of this rule shall be used with a fixed bar.

(2) Other equipment.

All other equipment, such as a mill divider, support bars, spray pipes, feed conveyors, or strip knives, shall be located in such a manner as to avoid interference with access to or operation of safety devices.

Where a mill is so installed with fixed parts that persons cannot normally reach through, over, under, or around any element to come in contact with the roll bite or be caught between a roll and an adjacent object, safety control devices listed in paragraph (B) of this rule shall not apply.

(D) Trip and emergency switches.

All trip and emergency switches shall not be of the automatically resetting type but require manual resetting.

(E) Emergency stopping limits.

(1) Determination of distance of travel.

All measurements on mills shall be taken with the rolls running empty at maximum operating speed. Stopping distances shall be expressed in inches or centimeters of surface travel of the roll from the instant the emergency stopping device is actuated.

(2) When tripped by the emergency stopping device all mills, irrespective of the size of the rolls or their arrangement, individually or group-driven, shall stop within a distance, as measured in inches or centimeters of surface travel, no greater than one and one-half per cent of the peripheral no-load surface speeds of the respective rolls as determined in feet per minute or centimeters per minute. See "Fig. 1".

Last updated July 13, 2026 at 3:51 PM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-13-03 Calenders.

(A) Calender safety controls.

(1) Safety trip, face.

A safety trip rod, cable, or wire center cord shall be provided across each pair of in-running rolls, extending the length of the face of the rolls. The safety trip rod, cable, or wire center shall be readily accessible and operate whether pushed or pulled. The safety tripping devices shall be located within easy reach of the operator and the bite.

(2) Safety trip, side.

On both sides of the calender and near each end of the face of the rolls, there shall be a cable or wire center cord connected to the safety trip. These lines shall be no more than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) from the faces of the respective rolls and no less than two inches (5.1 centimeters) from the calender frame. They shall be anchored to the frame no more than six inches (15.2 centimeters) from the floor or operator's platform and operate readily when pushed or pulled.

(B) Protection by location.

Where a calender is so installed with fixed parts that employees cannot normally reach through, over, under, or around to come in contact with the roll bite or be caught between a roll and an adjacent object, safety control devices listed in paragraph (A) of this rule shall not apply.

All safety trip and emergency switches shall not be of the automatically resetting type but require manual resetting.

(D) Stopping limits for calenders.

(1) Determination of distance of travel.

All measurements on calenders shall be taken on the drive roll. All measurements shall be taken with the rolls running empty at maximum operating speed. Stopping distance shall be expressed in inches or centimeters of surface travel of the roll from the instant the emergency stopping device is actuated.

(2) Stopping limits.

(a) All calenders, irrespective of size of the rolls or their configuration, shall stop within a distance, as measured in inches or centimeters of surface travel, no greater than one and three-quarters per cent of the peripheral no-load surface speeds of the respective calender rolls as determined in feet per minute or centimeters per minute. See "Fig. 2".

(b) Exeption: Where speeds above two hundred fifty feet per minute (seven thousand six hundred twenty centimeters per minute), as measured on the surface of the drive roll are used, stopping distances of more than one and three-quarters per cent are permissible, subject to engineering determination.

Last updated July 13, 2026 at 3:56 PM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-13-04 Other rubber and plastic processing machines.

(A) Extruders, strainers, and tubing machines.

(1) Manually fed extruders, strainers, and tubing machines shall have a hopper so designed as to allow a distance of no less than ten inches (25.4 centimeters) from the top edge of the hopper to the highest point of the screw or worm of the extruder, strainer, or tubing machine.

(2) Rotating knives that may be located at the discharge end of extruders, strainers, and tubing machines shall be guarded with interlocks provided to shut off the power if the guard is opened or removed.

(B) Rubber and plastic cutters.

(1) Circular cut-off power knives or blades.

Circular cut-off power knives or blades, used to cut rubber or plastic stock to length, shall be guarded.

(2) Manually fed guillotine bale cutters.

All manually fed guillotine bale cutters shall be equipped with a two-hand continuous control or a one-hand continuous control so located that the operator cannot reach the control and the danger zone at the same time.

Wind-ups, power driven auxiliary rolls or drums, and festoon rolls, around which material travels, when exposed to contact, shall be provided with readily accessible safety trips or devices to disengage them from their immediate source of power.

(D) Hose winding machines.

Hose winding machines shall have a clutch or starting treadle running the full length of the machine so that the machine will stop automatically when the clutch or starting treadle is released.

(E) Curing or vulcanizing equipment.

An interlocking device shall be provided to prevent the admission of water, steam, or pressure into the unit before it is fully closed and locked to prevent the unit from being opened while it is under any residual pressure.

(1) Tire vulcanizers.

(a) Single or dual tire vulcanizers, which open and close by electrical power, shall be equipped with a safety bar or other mechanical sensing device installed at or across the front of the curing unit. The safety bar or other mechanical sensing device will prevent the closing motion of the unit if activated by contact with any portion of the employee's body as the unit closes.

(b) Brakes.

Brake capacity shall be sufficient to stop the motion quickly and capable of holding the moving parts at any point in their travel. Where friction brakes, equipped with release devices, are provided for stopping or holding moving parts of a press, post cure inflator, or accessories, the friction brakes shall be set with compression springs and released by electrical, pneumatic, or mechanical means. Brakes that require electrical or pneumatic power to apply a holding force shall not be used.

(2) Horizontal curing units or vulcanizers.

A locking device shall be provided on doors in the open position to prevent them from closing accidentally on employees working underneath.

(3) Platen presses.

(a) Inserting or removing molds.

Molds shall be provided with lugs, handles, or hooks for use when inserting or removing the molds from the platen presses by hand.

(b) Track stops.

Where tracks are used with platen presses, the tracks shall be equipped with stops to prevent the molds from being pulled or pushed off the tracks.

(i) Stops.

Work tables used with platen presses ranging in sizes up to and including twenty-four inches wide (sixty-one centimeters) by twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters) long shall be equipped with stops to prevent the molds from being accidentally pulled off the front of the bench.

(ii) Size.

Work tables used with platen presses shall be no smaller than the press platens.

(4) Molding machines.

(a) Compression and transfer molding.

Compression and transfer molding machines shall be equipped with either:

(i) A metal gate which, when closed, completely encloses the molding area between the two front tie rods or side columns of the press and between the fixed and moving platens of the press and which is interlocked so that the press will not operate unless the gate is closed, or

(ii) Two-hand controls which must remain depressed during press closing.

(b) Injection and blow molding.

(i) The molding area of injection and blow molding machines shall be guarded by an interlocked safety door or gate with an insert of safety glass, impact-resistant plastic, or expanded metal.

(ii) Moving parts of the machine and mold not guarded by the safety door or gate shall be guarded by fixed or interlocked guards.

Last updated February 3, 2025 at 8:37 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Chapter 4123:1-17 Window Cleaning

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-17-01 Scope and definitions.

(A) Scope.

The purpose of these requirements is to provide reasonable safety for life, limb, and health of employees.

These specific provisions of this chapter supplement those of Chapter 4123:1-5 of the Administrative Code, but to the extent of inconsistency between these and any provision of Chapter 4123:1-5 of the Administrative Code, these provisions shall apply. These provisions are minimum requirements of an employer for the protection of such employer's employees and no others. These provisions constitute protective standards for all employees while they are engaged in washing or cleaning windows on the outside and, where working from a level ten feet (three meters) or more above the floor, on the inside of buildings with the following exceptions. These provisions do not apply to employees so engaged in or on a building containing two or fewer full stories above ground level in which all of the units are residential. These provisions do not apply to employees so engaged in or on a single residential unit when employed to do so by the occupant of that unit. These provisions do not apply to a window opening onto a railed fire escape balcony or other railed balconies no less than two feet wide (sixty-one centimeters), nor more than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) below the window sill, provided that the railing is no less than forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) high.

Installations or constructions built or contracted for prior to the effective date of any specification are deemed to comply with the provisions of these rules if such installations or constructions comply either with the provisions of the current rules or with the provisions of any applicable rule which was in effect at the time contracted for or built.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Anchor" means an installation near a window to which a window cleaner's safety belt or safety harness is attached.

(2) "Approved" means accepted or certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as "UL Solutions," "FM Approvals," or a responsible governmental agency.

(3) "Boatswain's chair" means a seat supported by slings attached to a suspended rope, designed to accommodate one employee in a sitting position.

(4) "Equivalent" means alternative designs, materials, or methods to protect against a hazard which the employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than the designs, materials, or methods specified in the standard.

(5) "Factor of safety" means the ratio between the ultimate breaking strength and the working stress of the material, structure, or device. For example, the term "factor of safety of four" means the materials, structure, or device is constructed of such strength that the maximum load will be one-fourth the designed ultimate breaking load. Where other factors of safety appear, they will apply in the same manner. The standards of the "American Society for Testing Materials" will be used in determining the strength of material except as otherwise provided herein.

(6) "Personal fall arrest system" means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a walking-working surface. It consists of a safety harness, anchorage, and connector. The means of connection may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or a suitable combination of these.

(7) "Rated load" means the combined weight of employees, tools, equipment, and other material which the working platform is designed and installed to lift.

(8) "Roof car" means a structure for the suspension of the working platform, providing for its horizontal movement to working positions.

(9) "Roof car suspended platform" means equipment to provide access to the exterior of a building consisting of a suspended power-operated working platform, a roof car, and the necessary operating and control devices.

(10) "Roof-powered platform" means the working platform, of a roof car suspended platform, having the raising and lowering mechanism located on a roof car.

(11) "Safety belt" or "body belt" means a device worn around the body which, by reason of its attachment to a lanyard and lifeline or a structure, will prevent an employee from falling.

(12) "Safety harness" or "body harness" means a design of straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest, and shoulders with means for attaching it to the other components of a personal fall arrest system.

(13) "Self-powered platform" means a working platform, of a roof car suspended platform, having the raising and lowering mechanism located on the working platform.

(14) "Shall" is to be construed as mandatory.

(15) "Standard guard railing" means a substantial barrier constructed in accordance with paragraph (E) of rule 4123:1-5-02 of the Administrative Code.

(16) "Substantial" means construction of such strength, of such materials, and of such workmanship that the object will withstand the wear, usage, or shock for which it is designed.

(17) "Swinging scaffold" means a power- or manually-operated platform suspended by two or more lines and independent of the building except for attachment at the roof or parapet.

(18) "Traveling cable" means a cable made up of electrical or communication conductors or both and providing electrical connection between the working platform and the roof car or other fixed point.

(19) "Two-point suspension scaffold" means a scaffold suspended from overhead supports the platform of which is supported by stirrups or hangers at two points to permit raising or lowering.

(20) "Working platform" means the suspended structure arranged for vertical travel which provides access to the exterior of the building.

Last updated February 3, 2025 at 8:38 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-17-02 Ladders.

All ladders used in window cleaning operations shall comply with paragraph (C) of rule 4123:1-5-03 of the Administrative Code in addition to the following:

(A) Metal ladders shall not be provided for use where exposed electrical contacts are present.

(B) Metal ladders shall not be provided when damaging chemicals are to be used unless the ladder used has been appropriately treated to protect it from such chemicals.

(C) The use of ladders with hooks attached, to be hung on or over a parapet wall or other projection is not permitted in window cleaning operations unless tied back in the manner prescribed for scaffolds in paragraph (D) of rule 4123:1-17-03 of the Administrative Code, and safety belts or safety harnesses, with lifelines, are provided in compliance with rule 4123:1-17-06 of the Administrative Code.

Last updated February 3, 2025 at 8:38 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-17-03 Swinging scaffolds.

(A) Swinging scaffold platforms shall be no less than eighteen inches (forty-six centimeters) wide overall. The platform shall be securely fastened to the hangers by U-bolts or by other equivalent means.

(B) The hangers of swinging scaffolds shall be capable of sustaining four times the rated load.

(D) The roof irons or hooks shall be of proper size and design, securely installed and anchored. Tiebacks of three-quarter inch (nineteen millimeters) manilla rope, or the equivalent, shall serve as an additional means of anchorage, installed as nearly as possible at right angles to the face of the building, and secured to a structurally sound portion of the building. When no structurally sound portion of the building permits installation substantially at right angles to the face of the building, two tiebacks shall be used and secured at substantially equal and opposing acute angles to the right angle. Where outrigger beams, which shall consist of structural metal, or davits are used, they shall be securely fastened or anchored to the frame or floor system of the building or structure.

(E) Swinging scaffolds shall be suspended by wire, synthetic fiber, or natural fiber ropes capable of supporting no less than six times the rated load. All other components shall be capable of supporting no less than four times the rated load.

(F) Only treated or protected fiber rope or its equivalent shall be used for or near any work involving the use of corrosive chemicals.

(G) The sheaves of all blocks shall fit the size and type of rope used.

(H) No more than two employees shall be required to be on a two-point suspension scaffold designed for a working load of five hundred pounds. No more than three employees shall be required to be on a two-point suspension scaffold designed for a working load of seven hundred fifty pounds.

(I) The employer shall provide an approved safety belt or safety harness, with a lifeline, for each employee working on a swinging scaffold in compliance with rule 4123:1-17-06 of the Administrative Code.

(J) Employees shall not use a bridge, or move directly, between one swinging scaffold and another.

(K) Each swinging scaffold shall be securely fastened to the building or structure at each work location to prevent it from swaying. Window cleaners' anchors shall not be used for this purpose. Tie-in anchors designed for the rated load of the scaffold may be used.

(L) The platform of every swinging scaffold shall be capable of sustaining four times the rated load.

(M) All swinging scaffolds shall have standard guardrails and toeboards on all unprotected sides of platforms.

(N) The free ends of fall lines from scaffolds shall be guarded to prevent tangling or snagging.

Last updated February 3, 2025 at 8:39 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-17-04 Roof car suspended platforms - window cleaning.

(A) Roof car.

(1) The horizontal speed of a roof car shall be no more than fifty feet (15.2 meters) per minute.

(2) A roof car may not be moved horizontally unless means are in place to prevent the car from moving outside the areas provided for roof car travel.

(3) The roof car shall be designed and installed in such a manner as to remain stable and upright under every loading condition.

(4) A roof car shall be so positioned and anchored to the structure as to ensure that the working platform is placed and retained in proper position for vertical travel.

(5) The operating device controlling movement of a roof car shall be of the continuous pressure weather-proof electric type and located on the roof car, the working platform, or both. If located on both, such operating devices shall be interlocked so that control is possible only from one at a time.

(7) If the access to the roof car at any point of its travel is not over the roof area, standard guardrails with self-closing, self-locking gates shall be provided on the roof car.

(B) Working platforms.

(1) The working platform shall be of girder or truss construction and be capable of supporting its rated load under any position of loading.

(2) Each working platform shall bear the manufacturer's load rating plate, conspicuously posted and legible, stating the maximum permissible load.

(3) The vertical speed of a working platform suspended by four or more hoisting ropes shall be no more than seventy-five feet (22.9 meters) per minute.

(4) The vertical speed of a working platform suspended by less than four hoisting ropes shall be no more than thirty-five feet (10.7 meters) per minute.

(5) The working platform shall be no less than twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters) wide.

(7) The platform flooring shall be of the nonskid type.

(8) Access gates shall be self-closing and self-locking. Access gates are required where access to the working platform is not over the roof area.

(9) A means shall be provided to prevent inadvertent horizontal movement of the working platform.

(10) The operating device controlling vertical movement of the working platform shall be of the continuous pressure, weatherproof, and electric type and be located on the working platform.

(1) Hoisting equipment shall consist of a power-driven drum or drums contained in the roof car, i.e., roof-powered platform, or contained on the working platform, i.e., self-powered platform.

(2) Hoisting equipment shall be power-operated in both up and down directions.

(3) Where exposed to contact, rotating shafts, drums, couplings, and other mechanisms and gears shall be guarded.

(4) Friction devices or clutches shall not be used for connecting the main driving mechanism to the drum or drums. Belt or chain-driven machines are not permitted.

(5) Hoisting motors shall be electric and of weather-proof construction.

(6) Hoisting motors shall be directly connected to the hoisting machinery. Motor couplings, if used, shall be of steel construction.

(7) Hoisting machines shall have two independent braking means, each designed to stop and hold the working platform with one hundred twenty-five per cent of rated load.

(D) Hoisting ropes and winding drums.

(1) Each hoisting rope shall be made of wire and no less than five-sixteenths inch (eight millimeters) in diameter.

(2) Working platforms shall be suspended by no less than two ropes with a safety factor of ten as calculated under the following formula:

F = S x N W

Where

S = manufacturer's rated breaking strength of one rope

N = number of ropes under load

W = maximum static load on all ropes with the platform and its rated load at any point of its travel

(3) Where winding drums are used, the rope shall be wound in level layers.

(4) Winding drums shall have no less than three turns of rope remaining when the working platform is at its lowest possible point of travel.

(6) The lengthening or repairing of wire ropes by splicing is not permitted.

(7) More than one reverse bend in the length of each rope is not permitted.

(8) Wire rope shall not be used if, in any length of eight diameters, the total number of visible broken wires exceeds ten per cent of the total number of wires, or if the rope shows other signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or defect.

(E) Electrical protective devices.

(1) Electrical protective devices and interlocks shall be of the weather-proof type.

(2) When a traveling cable storage reel is used, an electric contact shall be provided and so connected that the traveling cable storage reel will cause the relay for vertical travel to open, if the tension on the traveling cable exceeds safe limits.

(5) Upper and lower directional limit devices shall be provided to prevent the travel of the working platform beyond the normal upper and lower limits of travel.

(8) Emergency stop switches shall be provided in, or adjacent to, each operating device.

(9) Electrical cord strain relief anchors and grip or equivalent means shall be provided to prevent the electrical cord from pulling on the receptacle.

(F) Emergency communications.

A means of two-way communication shall be provided for each roof car suspended platform for use in an emergency.

(G) Fall protection.

Each employee on working platforms shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system.

Last updated February 3, 2025 at 8:39 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-17-05 Boatswain's chairs.

(A) Boatswain's chairs shall be used for window cleaning operations only where the windows cannot be cleaned by other prescribed methods set forth in rules 4123:1-17-02, 4123:1-17-03, 4123:1-17-04, 4123:1-17-06, and 4123:1-17-07 of the Administrative Code.

(B) A boatswain's chair seat shall be constructed of wood or equivalent material, be no less than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) by twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters) by one inch (2.5 centimeters) thickness, and if constructed of wood, reinforced by cleats on the underside to prevent splitting.

(C) Seat slings shall be of no less than five-eighths inch (sixteen millimeters) diameter, first grade manila rope, or its equivalent, which shall be reeved through the four seat holes so as to cross each other on the underside of the seat.

(D) The employee shall be protected by a safety belt or a safety harness, with a lifeline, in accordance with rule 4123:1-17-06 of the Administrative Code. The attachment point of the lifeline to the structure shall be appropriately changed as the work progresses laterally.

(E) The tackle shall consist of correct size ball bearing or bushed blocks and properly spliced five-eighths inch (sixteen millimeters) diameter, first grade manila rope, or equivalent.

(F) The roof irons or hooks shall be of proper size and design, securely installed and anchored. Tiebacks of three quarter-inch (nineteen millimeters) manilla rope, or its equivalent, are to be used as an additional means of anchorage, which shall be installed as nearly as possible at right angles to the face of the building and secured to a structurally sound portion of the building. When no structurally sound portion of the building permits installation substantially at right angles to the face of the building, two tiebacks shall be used and secured at substantially equal and opposing acute angles to the right angle. Where outrigger beams, which shall consist of structural metal, or davits are used, they shall be securely fastened or anchored to the frame or floor system of the building or structure.

(G) Tie-ins or suction cups shall be provided and used for boatswain's chairs to prevent them from swaying during the window cleaning operation.

Last updated February 3, 2025 at 8:39 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-17-06 Safety belts, safety harnesses, lifelines and lanyards.

(A) Lifelines shall be securely fastened to the structure. Lifelines, safety belts, safety harnesses, and lanyards shall be used only for employee safeguarding and be able to sustain a static load of no less than five thousand pounds (two thousand two hundred sixty-eight kilograms). Any lifeline, safety belt, safety harness, or lanyard actually subjected to in-service loading, as distinguished from static load testing, shall be removed from service and never used again for employee safeguarding.

(B) Where the lifeline may be subjected to cutting or abrasion, a minimum seven-eighths inch (twenty-two millimeters) wire core manilla rope, or equivalent, shall be provided. For all other lifeline applications, a minimum of three-fourths inch (nineteen millimeters) manilla rope, or equivalent, shall be provided.

(C) Safety belt lanyards or safety harness lanyards shall be a minimum of one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) nylon, or equivalent, with a maximum length to provide for a fall of no more than six feet (1.8 meters).

(D) All safety belt, safety harness, and lanyard hardware shall be cadmium plated and made of either drop forged or pressed steel. Surfaces shall be smooth and free from sharp edges.

(E) All safety belt, safety harness, and lanyard hardware shall be capable of withstanding a tensile loading of four thousand pounds (one thousand eight hundred fifteen kilograms) without cracking, breaking, or becoming permanently deformed.

Last updated February 3, 2025 at 8:39 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-17-07 Miscellaneous requirements.

(A) Portable extension sills.

(1) Portable extension sills shall be no less than ten inches (25.4 centimeters) wide nor less than thirty inches (76.2 centimeters) long and shall be substantially constructed. The portable extension sill shall be securely fastened in place during window cleaning operations.

(2) Portable extension sills shall not be used when window sills extend six inches (15.2 centimeters) or more beyond the window frame.

(3) Portable extension sills shall be used only when the window cleaner is provided with a safety belt or a safety harness, with a lifeline, in compliance with rule 4123:1-17-06 of the Administrative Code, and anchors are available.

(B) Window jacks and other platform devices.

Window jacks and all other platform devices fastened to window sills shall be used only when the window cleaner is provided with a safety belt or a safety harness, with a lifeline, in compliance with rule 4123:1-17-06 of the Administrative Code, and anchors are available.

Where the distance between anchors is more than six feet (1.8 meters), a wire rope or corrosive resistant chain shall be provided on such windows to be used as a back support for the window cleaner.

(D) Stepping from window to window not permitted.

Window cleaners shall not step from window to window on the outside of the building.

(E) Anchors.

When a safety belt or a safety harness is required in window cleaning, no window cleaner shall work on a window if any anchor is found to be loose, insecure, or missing.

(F) Extension tools.

Each extension tool shall be equipped with a locking device which prevents accidental detachment of the window cleaning tool. The overall length of a tool with extensions shall not exceed six feet (1.8 meters) when used from any working position above the ground or alternatively above an unobstructed setback level having an outer balustrade or wall extending no less than forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) above the setback level.

Last updated February 3, 2025 at 8:39 AM

History

Effective: February 1, 2025
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Chapter 4123:1-21 Fire Fighting

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-21-01 Scope and definitions.

(A) Scope.

The purpose of Chapter 4123:1-21 of the Administrative Code is to provide reasonable safety for life, limb, and health of employees.

The specific requirements of this chapter are minimum requirements of an employer for the protection of such employer's employees and no others, and constitute protective standards for all regular members of lawfully constituted fire departments of municipal corporations and townships, whether paid or volunteer, and employees employed in private or contractual-type fire departments that serve the public, who are engaged in the act of fire fighting. The requirements of this chapter do not apply to employees employed in industrial fire brigades, industrial fire departments, and private or contractual-type fire departments that do not serve the public. To the extent that any other codes of specific requirements adopted by the bureau of workers' compensation may conflict with the requirements of this chapter, this chapter shall prevail.

Unless otherwise indicated, materials or equipment bought or contracted for prior to the effective date of any requirement of this chapter shall be deemed to comply with the provisions of these requirements, if such materials or equipment complies either with the provisions of these requirements or with the provisions of any applicable specific requirement that was in effect at the time contracted for or bought.

(B) Definitions.

(1) "Aerial device": An aerial ladder, elevating platform, aerial fire apparatus, or water tower that is designed to position personnel, handle materials, provide egress, and discharge water.

(2) "Aerial ladder": A self-supporting, turntable-mounted, power-operated ladder of two or more sections permanently attached to a self-propelled automotive fire apparatus and designed to provide a continuous egress route from an elevated platform to the ground.

(3) "Air flow control device": a manual or automatic device incorporated in the air flow system of a self-contained breathing apparatus to control the free flow of air to the facepiece during donning or doffing.

(4) "Angle of approach": the smallest angle made between the road surface and a line drawn from the front point of ground contact of the front tire to any projection of the apparatus in front of the front axle.

(5) "Angle of departure": the smallest angle made between the road surface and a line drawn from the rear point of ground contact of the rear tire to any projection of the apparatus behind the rear axle.

(6) "Attack hose": hose designed to be used to combat fires beyond the incipient stage to supply handline nozzles, distributor nozzles, master stream appliances, portable hydrants, manifolds, standpipe and sprinkler systems, pumps, and fire department pumpers.

(7) "Attic extension ladder": an extension ladder that is specifically designed to be used to gain entry through a scuttle, hatch, or other restricted opening.

(8) "Base section": the lowest, or widest, section of non-self-supporting ground ladders.

(9) "Beam" or "side rail": the main structural side of a ground ladder.

(10) "Bedded position": the position in which fly section(s) of extension ladders are stored in the nonextended position with the pawls resting on a rung of the supporting section.

(11) "Booster hose": a hose having a rubber tube, a braided or spiraled reinforcement, and an outer protective cover. It is intended for use on fire apparatus.

(12) "Butt": the end of the beam placed on the ground or other lower support surface when ground ladders are in the raised position. It may be the lower end of beams or added devices.

(13) "Butt spurs": Also known as "safety feet," that component of ground ladder support which is in contact with the lower support surface to reduce slippage. It may be the lower end of beams or added devices.

(14) "Chin strap": an adjustable strap fitting under the chin to secure the helmet to the head.

(15) "Coat" or "protective coat": a garment worn to protect the upper part of the body except the hands and head.

(16) "Combination ladder": a ground ladder capable of being used both as a step ladder and single or extension ladder.

(17) "Crown straps": the part of a suspension system that passes over the head.

(18) "Dangerous to life or health": conditions that pose a threat to life or health, or conditions that pose a threat of severe exposure to contaminants, such as radioactive materials, which are likely to have adverse cumulative or delayed effects on health.

(19) "Ear covers": an interface component of the protective helmet element that provides limited protection to the helmet/coat interface area.

(20) "Elevating platform": a self-supporting, turntable-mounted device consisting of a personnel-carrying platform attached to the uppermost boom of a series of power-operated booms that articulate, telescope, or both.

(21) "Employee": For purposes of this chapter, a member of a lawfully constituted fire department of a municipal corporation or township, whether paid or volunteer, or an employee of a private or contractual-type fire department that serves the public, that is engaged in the act of fire fighting.

(22) "Employer": For purposes of this chapter, a lawfully constituted fire department of a municipal corporation or township, including volunteer fire departments, or a private or contractual-type fire department that serves the public.

(23) "Energy-absorbing system": a material or suspension system, or combination thereof, incorporated into the design of a helmet to attenuate impact energy.

(24) "Escape rope": a single-purpose emergency self-escape/self-rescue rope which has a diameter of nineteen sixty-fourths inch (7.5 millimeters) or greater and less than one and three-sixteenths inches (30.2 millimeters).

(25) "Extension ladder": a non-self-supporting ground ladder that is adjustable in length. It consists of two or more sections traveling in guides, brackets, or equivalent, so arranged as to permit length adjustment.

(26) "Face/neck shroud": an item of protective clothing used in wildland fire fighting that attaches to the helmet to provide minimum thermal protection to the face and neck area.

(27) "Faceshield": limited protection for the face, eyes, or portions thereof.

(28) "Fire apparatus": the emergency vehicle(s) of the fire department used for fire suppression.

(29) "Fire shelter": an item of protective equipment configured as an aluminized tent to reflect radiant heat in a fire entrapment situation.

(30) "Flame-resistant": the property of a material whereby the application of a flaming or nonflaming source of ignition and the subsequent removal of the ignition source results in the termination of combustion.

(31) "Fluorescent": the property of a material by which radiant energy of certain wavelengths is absorbed and reradiated nonthermally in other, longer wavelengths.

(32) "Fly section": the upper section(s) of an extension ladder. The first section above the base section is the first fly section, and the second section above the base section is the second fly section.

(33) "Folding ladder": a single ladder designed so that the rungs can be folded or moved in a manner to allow the beams to be brought into a position of touching each other, or nearly touching each other, for storage or carrying purposes.

(34) "Gauntlet": the circular, flared, or otherwise expanded part of the glove that extends beyond the opening of the glove body.

(35) "Goggles": the helmet component intended to help protect the wearer's eyes and a portion of the face.

(36) "GAWR": acronym for gross axle weight rating. The value specified as the load-carrying rating of a single axle system, as measured at the tire ground interfaces.

(37) "GCWR": acronym for gross combination weight rating. The value specified as the loaded weight of a combination vehicle.

(38) "GVWR": acronym for gross vehicle weight rating. The value specified by the chassis manufacturer as the loaded weight rating of a single vehicle.

(39) "Ground ladder": ladders not mechanically or physically attached permanently to fire apparatus and not requiring mechanical power from the apparatus for ladder use and operation.

(40) "Halyard": rope used on extension ladders for the purpose of raising the fly section(s). A wire cable may be referred to as a halyard when used on the uppermost fly section(s) of three or four section extension ladders.

(41) "Hard suction": a rubber-lined, rubber-covered hose whose reinforcement contains a semi-rigid or rigid helix to resist collapse under vacuum.

(42) "Hazardous atmosphere":

(a) Any atmosphere containing a toxic or disease-producing gas, vapor, dust, fume, or mist dangerous to the life or health or where the concentration is unknown; or

(b) Any atmosphere containing an oxygen partial pressure of less than 19.5 per cent by volume at sea level.

(43) "Hazardous environment": the area where members might be exposed to a particular substance, device, event, circumstance, or condition that presents a danger to members of the fire department.

(44) "Headband": the portion of a suspension system that encircles the head.

(45) "Heat sensor label": a label that turns color at a preset temperature to indicate a specific heat exposure.

(46) "Inside width": the distance measured from the inside edge of one beam to the inside edge of the opposite beam of a ladder.

(47) "Ladder belt": a belt intended for use as a positioning device for a person on a ladder. It fastens around the waist only.

(48) "Ladder/escape belt": a belt intended as both a ladder belt and an escape belt for use by the wearer only as an emergency self-rescue device. It fastens around the waist only.

(49) "Large-diameter supply hose": hose of three and one-half inch (eighty-nine millimeters) diameter or larger used to move large volumes of water.

(50) "Life safety harness": harness used to support persons during fire service rescue.

(a) Class I: harness that fastens around the waist and around thighs or under buttocks; designed to be used for emergency escape with a design load of three hundred foot-pounds (four hundred seven joules).

(b) Class II: harness that fastens around the waist and around the thighs or under the buttocks; designed for rescue with a design load of six hundred foot-pounds (eight hundred thirteen joules).

(c) Class III: harness that fastens around the waist, around the thighs or under the buttocks, and over the shoulders; designed for rescue with a design load of six hundred foot-pounds (eight hundred thirteen joules) that may be encountered and where inverting may occur.

(51) "Life safety rope": rope dedicated solely to the purpose of constructing lines for supporting persons during fire rescue, fire fighting, or during training activity.

(a) "Technical use": rope having a diameter of three-eighths inch (9.5 millimeters) or greater and less than one-half inch (thirteen millimeters).

(b) "General use": rope having a diameter of seven-sixteenths inch (thirteen millimeters) or greater and not more than five-eighths inch (sixteen millimeters).

(52) "Maximum extended length": the total length of an extension ladder or a combination ladder when all fly sections are fully extended and pawls engaged.

(53) "Optical warning device": a manufactured assembly of a single optical light emitter or a fixed array of any number of optical light emitters.

(54) "PASS": acronym for personal alert safety system. Devices that sense movement or lack of movement, and that automatically activate an audible alarm signal (which also can be manually activated) to alert and to assist others in locating a firefighter who is in danger.

(55) "Pawls": devices attached to fly sections for the purpose of anchoring fly sections, when extension ladders are used in the extended position. Pawls engage ladder rungs near the beams for anchoring purposes.

(56) "Permanent deformation": that deformation remaining in any part of a ladder or its components after all test loads have been removed from the ladder.

(57) "Pompier ladder": Also known as a "scaling ladder," a ladder having a single center beam only and with a large hook on top, used for scaling.

(58) "Prescribed fire": any fire ignited by management actions under certain predetermined conditions to meet specific land management objectives.

(59) "Protective hood": a garment worn under a helmet to protect the exposed portions of the head, face, and neck.

(60) "PTO": acronym for power takeoff.

(61) "Quantitative fit test": an assessment of the adequacy of respirator fit by numerically measuring the amount of leakage into the respirator.

(62) "Retention system": the complete assembly by which a helmet is retained in position on the head.

(63) "Retroreflective": describes material that reflects and returns a relatively high proportion of light in a direction close to the direction from which it came.

(64) "Roof ladder": a single ladder equipped with hooks at the top end of the ladder.

(65) "Rungs": the ladder crosspieces on which a person steps while ascending or descending.

(66) "Safety factor": the ratio between the ultimate breaking stress and the working stress of the material, structure, or device.

(67) "Self-contained breathing apparatus" or "SCBA": a device providing the wearer with a supply of respirable gas carried in or generated by the apparatus. When in use, this apparatus requires no intake of air from the environment in which the wearer is operating.

(a) "Closed circuit SCBA": an apparatus of the type in which the exhalation is rebreathed by the wearer after the carbon dioxide has been effectively removed and a suitable oxygen concentration restored.

(b) "Open circuit SCBA": an apparatus of the following types from which exhalation is vented to the atmosphere and not rebreathed:

(i) "Demand type": an apparatus in which the pressure inside the facepiece, in relation to the immediate environment, is positive during exhalation and negative during inhalation. This type of SCBA is prohibited by rule 4123:1-21-02 of the Administrative Code.

(ii) "Positive-pressure type": an apparatus in which the pressure inside the facepiece, in relation to the immediate environment, is positive during both inhalation and exhalation.

(68) "Service tests": tests to be performed on a regular basis after a ground ladder is in service to determine its suitability for service.

(69) "Shall": to be construed as mandatory.

(70) "Shell": the outermost part of a helmet.

(71) "Single ladder": a non-self-supporting ground ladder, non-adjustable in length, consisting of only one section.

(72) "Split shaft PTO": a PTO drive system that directs the chassis power either to the pump or to the chassis drive axle. This is accomplished by splitting the chassis driveline that connects the chassis transmission to the drive axle and inserting the split shaft PTO that has the shift mechanism necessary to direct the engine power as described above.

(73) "Stabilizer": a device integral with or separately attached to the chassis of an aerial fire apparatus that is used to increase the moments tending to resist overturning the apparatus.

(a) "Stabilizer pad": a plate inserted beneath a stabilizer shoe to give greater surface bearing area.

(b) "Stabilizer shoe": a permanently mounted shoe on a stabilizer to provide a ground surface area.

(74) "Staypoles": poles attached to each beam of the base section of extension ladders and used to assist in the raising of the ladder and to help provide stability to the raised ladder.

(75) "Structural fire fighting": the physical activity of fire rescue, fire suppression, or both, at buildings, enclosed structures, vehicles, vessels, or like properties that are involved in a fire or a situation where there is the potential for fire.

(76) "Supply hose": hose of three inch (seventy-six millimeter) diameter or larger designed for the purpose of moving water between a pressurized water source and a pump that is supplying attack lines.

(77) "Suspension system": an energy attenuating system made up of headband and crown straps.

(78) "Thermal protective performance": measurement of the amount of heat transfer through the protective ensemble from a thermal exposure equal to flashover conditions that results in second degree burn damage to the wearer's skin as related to the time of heat exposure.

(79) "Throwline": a floating one-person rope that is intended to be thrown to a person during water rescues or as a tether for rescuers entering the water.

(80) "Tip": as used with respect to ladders, the end of the beam opposite the butt.

(81) "Trouser" or "protective trouser": a garment worn to protect the lower part of the body, except the feet.

(82) "Ultimate failure": collapse of a ground ladder structure or component thereof.

(83) "Unlined hose": a hose, usually made of linen yarns, consisting of only the woven jacket, and having such qualities that the yarn of the jacket swells when wetted, tending to seal the hose. This type of hose is to be used primarily for wildland or forestry fires.

(84) "Water tower": a device consisting of permanently mounted, power-operated booms and a waterway designed to supply a large capacity mobile elevated water stream. The booms may be of articulating design or telescoping design and may be equipped with a ladder.

(85) "Wildland fire fighting": the activities of fire suppression and property conservation in woodlands, forests, grasslands, brush, prairies, and other such vegetation, or any combination of vegetation.

(86) "Wristlet": an attachment, fitted to the top of a glove or to the sleeve of a protective coat, to completely cover the wrist area under all conditions.

Last updated September 1, 2026 at 8:41 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2026
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-21-02 Personal protective clothing and equipment for structural fire fighting.

(A) The employer shall provide and require the use of personal protective clothing and equipment, as specified in this rule, when employees are required to work in a hazardous environment that may be encountered during structural fire fighting activities and under similar conditions during training activities in accordance with the most current edition of national fire protection association standard ("NFPA") 1970.

(B) The employer shall assure that protective clothing protects the head, body, and extremities and consists of at least the following components: foot protection; hand protection; body protection; eye, face, and head protection; and respiratory protection.

(D) Personal protective clothing and equipment that is damaged or otherwise defective to the point of voiding its intended protection shall be removed from service.

(E) Employers shall develop and require use of a written plan covering the safe use, limitations, care, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of the clothing and equipment required by this rule, and all affected employees shall be trained in accordance with such plan.

(F) Employers shall develop and retain records for the life of the protective clothing and equipment.

(G) Employer shall provide for the cleaning of personal protective clothing.

(H) Where employees choose to provide their own protective clothing and equipment, such clothing and equipment shall give equal or greater protection than that provided by the employer.

(I) It shall be the responsibility of the employee to properly use the equipment provided by the employer, as required in this rule.

(J) Body protection.

(1) Body protection shall consist of a protective coat and trousers, or equivalent protection that are in accordance with the most current edition of NFPA 1970.

(2) Protective clothing shall be flame-resistant, durable, light-weight, water-resistant, nonirritating to the skin, and cleanable as set forth in paragraph (J) of this rule.

(3) Protective clothing shall be cleaned per the manufacturer's recommendations.

(4) Protective clothing for structural fire fighting shall be repaired in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. If protective clothing cannot be repaired properly without decreasing the protective qualities, the protective clothing shall be replaced.

(5) Protective clothing shall be designed in accordance with the most current edition of NFPA 2500 to give minimum interference to physical movement, the use of fire-fighting tools, and protective breathing apparatus.

(6) Employers that provide protective coats with protective resilient wristlets secured through a thumb opening shall be permitted to provide gloves with gauntlets for use with these protective coats. Employers that do not provide such wristlets attached to the protective coats shall provide gloves with protective resilient wristlets for use with these protective coats.

(K) Foot protection.

Protective footwear shall be capable of withstanding all tests specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1970.

(L) Head protection.

Head protection shall consist of a fire fighters' helmet and a protective hood that is in accordance with the most current edition of NFPA 1970. The helmet shall consist of a shell, an energy-absorbing system, a retention system, retroreflective and fluorescent markings, ear covers, and either a faceshield, or goggles, or both.

(M) Primary eye protection.

(1) Primary eye protection appropriate for a given specific hazard shall be provided for and used by employees exposed to that specific hazard.

(2) Primary eye protection shall meet the requirements of the most current edition of American national standards institute ("ANSI") Z87.1, practice for occupational and educational eye and face protection.

(3) The helmet faceshield, or flip-down eye shields, alone shall not be used as primary eye protection.

(4) The full facepiece of self-contained breathing apparatus ("SCBA"), with the regulator attached, shall constitute face and primary eye protection.

(N) Protective hood.

(1) The hood shall be designed to cover and provide the limited protection to the head, face, and neck areas that do not receive primary protection from the helmet or the SCBA facepiece.

(2) The hood shall be donned properly, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for wearing, and comply with the most current edition of NFPA 1970.

(O) Personal alert safety system ("PASS").

(1) Each employee shall be provided with, use, and activate their PASS device in all emergency situations that could jeopardize that person's safety due to atmospheres that could be immediately dangerous to life or health, incidents that could result in entrapment, structural collapse of any type, or as directed by the incident commander or incident safety officer.

(2) All PASS devices shall be capable of withstanding all performance tests specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1982.

(3) Each PASS device shall be tested at least weekly and prior to each use.

(4) Each PASS device shall be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

(5) PASS devices can be designed to be either a stand-alone PASS, or a SCBA-integrated PASS, which can be removable or non-removable.

(6) Each PASS shall incorporate data logging in nonvolatile memory, and at a minimum, the following events shall be identified and recorded with the data log and shall also have a date and time stamp for each event in the data log:

(a) When the PASS is turned on;

(b) When the PASS activates any alarm or pre-alarm;

(d) When the PASS alarm was reset;

(e) When the PASS was turned off; and

(f) When the PASS low power source warning signal activates.

(7) The data logging information of each PASS shall be downloadable by the employer.

(8) Each PASS shall incorporate a mode selection device or devices to allow for operation in at least three modes: "Off," "Alarm," and "Sensing."

(a) All mode selection devices shall be capable of being switched to the alarm or sensing mode by a single gloved hand.

(b) Only one action shall be required to switch the mode selection device(s) from any mode to alarm.

(c) When a PASS is sounding the alarm signal it shall require at least two separate and distinct manual actions to silence the alarm signal.

(9) Each PASS shall be provided with a light source capable of providing a visual indication of mode status as well as an audible source capable of providing an aural indication of a change in the mode selection when switching from "off" to "sensing," "off" to "alarm," and "alarm" to "sensing."

(10) Each PASS shall incorporate a motion detector, and while in the sensing mode, shall sound the alarm signal when the PASS is motionless for thirty seconds, plus five/minus zero seconds. The alarm signal shall be preceded by a pre-alarm signal that shall sound no more than ten seconds, plus three/minus zero seconds, before the sounding of the alarm signal.

(a) The motion detector shall be operable regardless of the angle of deployment of the PASS.

(b) Any failure of the motion detector shall cause the PASS to sound the alarm signal within thirty seconds, plus five/minus zero seconds, of such failure.

(11) Each PASS shall emit an audible operational signal within one second of being switched to sensing mode, indicating to the user that the device is functioning properly.

(12) Each PASS shall have at least an audible primary pre-alarm signal. The primary pre-alarm signal shall be a distinct and different sound from the alarm signal. This signal shall sound no more than ten seconds prior to the sounding of the alarm signal.

(13) Each PASS shall sound the alarm signal when switched to the alarm mode. The alarm signal shall have a duration of at least one hour at a sound pressure level of not less than ninety-two decibels A-weighted (dBa).

(14) While in the sensing mode, each PASS shall emit a recurrent audible low power source warning signal when the battery voltage is depleted to the level that will maintain the alarm signal level of at least ninety-two decibels A-weighted (dBa) for at least one hour.

(15) This sound shall be distinct and different from the pre-alarm and alarm signals. The low power source warning signal shall have an interval of not greater than thirty seconds.

(16) The cancellation of the pre-alarm signal or the silencing of the alarm signal shall automatically reset the PASS to the sensing mode.

(17) PASS devices shall be capable of withstanding all performance requirement tests specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1982, "Personal Alert Safety Systems (PASS)."

(P) Respiratory protection.

(1) All fire fighters exposed to hazardous atmospheres from fires and other emergencies, or where the potential for such exposure exists, shall be provided SCBA approved by the national institute for occupational safety and health (NIOSH) and the NFPA.

(2) The employer shall adopt and maintain a respiratory protection program that addresses the selection, inspection, safe use, and maintenance of respiratory protection equipment, training in its use, and the assurance of air quality testing.

(3) All employees who might be required to use respiratory protection equipment shall be medically certified by a physician, or by a state of Ohio licensed health care professional who can perform medical evaluations under the supervision of a physician, on an annual basis. Medical certification can be obtained by a medical examination, or by using the medical questionnaire as referenced in 29 CFR 1910.134 Appendix C, 77 FR 46949, July 1, 2024.

(4) The facepiece seal capability of each employee qualified to use SCBA shall be verified by quantitative fit testing on an annual basis and whenever new types of SCBA or facepieces are issued. Each new employee shall be tested before being permitted to use SCBA in a hazardous atmosphere. Only employees with a properly fitting facepiece shall be permitted by the employer to function in a hazardous atmosphere with SCBA.

(5) Only SCBA with an approved service life of thirty minutes or more shall be considered acceptable.

(6) The following SCBAs shall be considered to meet the requirements of this rule:

(a) Open circuit SCBA of the positive-pressure type that operate only in the pressure demand mode.

(b) Open circuit SCBA of the positive-pressure type, equipped with an air flow control device for doffing and donning purposes only. Such air flow control device shall not permit the continued use of the SCBA in the demand mode after donning.

(c) Closed circuit SCBA with a rated service life of more than two hours and a minimum protection factor of five thousand, as determined by an acceptable quantitative fit test performed on each individual. Such SCBA are acceptable only when long-duration respiratory protection is deemed necessary by the employer. Closed circuit SCBA shall operate in the positive-pressure mode only.

(7) Open circuit SCBA approved by NIOSH for use in the demand mode or for use in both the demand mode and the pressure demand mode are prohibited.

(8) Breathing air used to fill SCBA cylinders shall meet the requirements specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1989, "Standard on Breathing Air Quality for Emergency Services Respiratory Protection."

(9) Breathing air quality shall be tested quarterly by an accredited testing laboratory and shall meet the requirements of paragraph (P)(8) of this rule. This provision shall also apply to vendor-supplied and other fire department-supplied compressed breathing air. The employer receiving supplied air shall require the suppliers to provide documentation that the air received has been tested quarterly and that it meets the requirements of paragraph (P)(8) of this rule. Written records shall be maintained by the employer.

(10) The employer shall not permit any known interference with the facepiece-to-face seal or with the operation of the exhalation valve on the full facepiece of an SCBA on employees who are exposed to hazardous atmospheres from fires and other emergencies or where the potential for such exposure exists.

(11) Respiratory equipment shall be inspected, maintained, and repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Maintenance shall include at least:

(a) A written record of such inspection and maintenance for each piece of equipment, and

(b) Regulator calibration performed by a manufacturer-authorized person at no more than twelve-month intervals.

(12) All compressed air cylinders used with self-contained breathing apparatus shall meet department of transportation (DOT) and NIOSH criteria.

(13) SCBA cylinders shall be hydrostatically tested within the periods specified by the manufacturer, DOT, and NIOSH.

(14) The practice of buddy breathing, also known as universal emergency breathing safety system ("UEBSS"), may be utilized where it is accomplished through the use of an NFPA and NIOSH-approved connection that does not compromise the system integrity of either of the users giving or receiving air.

(15) The use of a universal air connection for rapid refilling of SCBA while being worn by the user shall only be done under the following conditions:

(a) Manufacturer permitted, NIOSH-approved fill options are used;

(b) An imminent life threatening situation occurs that requires immediate action to prevent the loss of life or serious injury;

(c) Prior to a life threatening situation occurring that could require immediate action to prevent the loss of life or serious injury; and

(d) The risk assessment process has identified procedures for limiting personnel exposure during the refill process and has provided for adequate equipment inspection and member safety.

(Q) Hand protection.

(1) Hand protection shall consist of properly sized protective gloves or a glove system which allows dexterity of hand movement and a sense of feel for objects.

(2) Gloves of the wristlet type or other interface component shall be required if the protective coat does not provide a protective resilient wristlet with a thumb opening.

(3) Gloves of the gauntlet type shall be allowed if the protective coat provided has a protective resilient wristlet with a thumb opening.

(4) Gloves shall be maintained and repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. If gloves cannot be repaired properly without decreasing the protective qualities required by this rule, they shall be replaced with gloves that meet the requirements of this rule.

(5) The manufacturer's label shall remain permanently attached to each glove unaltered.

(R) Fall protection.

(1) Life safety rope.

(a) Technical use life safety rope shall have a diameter of three-eighths inch (9.5 millimeters) or greater and less than one-half inch (12.7 millimeters). It shall have a minimum breaking strength of not less than four thousand four hundred ninety-six foot-pounds (6.1 kilojoules). The minimum elongation shall be less than one per cent at ten per cent of breaking strength, and the maximum elongation shall not be more than ten per cent at ten per cent of breaking strength.

(b) General use life safety rope shall have a diameter seven-sixteenths inch (eleven millimeters) or greater and not more than five-eighths inch (sixteen millimeters). It shall have a minimum breaking strength of not less than eight thousand nine hundred ninety-two foot-pounds (12.2 kilojoules). The minimum elongation shall not be less than one per cent at ten per cent of breaking strength, and the maximum elongation shall not be more than ten per cent at ten per cent of breaking strength.

(c) Life safety rope shall be constructed of virgin fiber and shall be of block creel construction. Load-bearing elements shall be constructed of continuous filament fiber.

(d) Fiber used for life safety rope shall have a melting point of no less than four hundred degrees Fahrenheit (204.4 degrees Celsius).

(e) Each life safety rope shall have a product label that states the life safety rope meets the requirements of the most current edition of NFPA 2500. The label shall be permitted to be a hang tag affixed to each individual life safety rope or shall be permitted to be printed on a sheet that is inserted and sealed in the packaging that contains the life safety rope.

(f) In addition to the product label specified in this rule, each life safety rope shall be marked for its full length by insertion of a continuous identification tape. At least a statement indicating the rope meets the requirements for life safety rope of the most current edition of NFPA 2500 shall be legibly printed on the tape not less than once every thirty-nine inches (one meter):

(g) Life safety rope shall be inspected after being used for rescue at fires or other emergency incidents or for training. It may be reused if inspected before and after each such use in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and provided that the rope:

(i) Has not been visually damaged by exposure to heat, direct flame impingement, chemical exposure, or abrasion;

(ii) Has not been subjected to any impact load;

(iii) Has not been exposed to chemical liquids, solids, gases, mists, or vapors of any material known to deteriorate rope; and

(iv) Passes inspection when inspected by a qualified person following the manufacturer's inspection procedures.

(2) Life safety harness.

(a) Life safety harnesses shall be designed and designated in accordance with one of the following classes:

(i) Harness that fastens around the waist and around thighs or under buttocks and designed for rescue with a design load of six hundred foot-pounds (0.8 kilojoules)shall be designated as class II life safety harness.

(ii) Harness that fastens around waist, around thighs or under buttocks, and over shoulders, designed for rescue with a design load of six hundred foot-pounds (0.8 kilojoules) shall be designated as class III life safety harness. Class III life safety harness shall be permitted to consist of one or more parts.

(b) Life safety harness shall have at least one load bearing attachment point located at the front waist or sternal location of the harness.

(c) Each life safety harness shall have permanently affixed a product label embossed, printed, sewn, stapled, riveted, or otherwise permanently attached with a metal label plate that at minimum, identifies the class of the life safety harness and indicates the life safety harness is in compliance with the harness requirements of the most current edition of NFPA 2500.

(d) Each life safety harness shall be capable of withstanding all tests specified in the most current edition of NFPA 2500.

(e) Where class II and III life safety harness include side "D-rings" and attachment points designated by the manufacturer as positioning attachments only, these attachments shall show no visible signs of damage that affect its function.

(3) Belt system.

(a) Belts shall be designed and designated in accordance with one of the following types:

(i) A belt that fastens only around the waist and is intended for use as a positioning device for a person on a ladder shall be designated as a ladder belt.

(ii) A belt that fastens only around the waist and is intended for use as a positioning device for a person on a ladder and also intended for use only by the wearer as an emergency self-rescue device shall be designated as a ladder/escape belt.

(b) All belts shall be permitted to be adjustable within a range of sizes, provided in a range of sizes, or custom-fitted for individuals.

(c) Load-bearing textile materials used in the construction of all belts shall be made of virgin, synthetic, continuous filament fiber.

(d) All belts shall have webbing ends secured by heat sealing or by another method that prevents unraveling.

(e) All thread utilized in the construction of all belts shall be compatible with the webbing used and shall allow for ease of inspection.

(f) The ladder belt tether or device that connects the wearer to a ladder shall be permanently affixed to the ladder belt and shall not be greater than twenty-four inches (six-hundred ten mm) in length. This requirement applies only to ladder belts.

(g) Each belt shall have permanently affixed a product label embossed, printed, sewn, stapled, riveted, or otherwise permanently attached with a metal plate.

(h) All ladder belts and ladder/escape belts shall be capable of withstanding all tests specified in the most current edition of NFPA 2500.

(4) Auxiliary equipment.

(a) Auxiliary equipment shall be designated by the manufacturer for its intended use and design load as either escape, technical use, or general use.

(i) Escape shall apply to equipment intended for the sole use of the rescuer for personal escape or self-rescue.

(ii) Technical use shall apply to equipment intended for a design load of three hundred foot-pounds (0.4 kilojoules).

(iii) General use shall apply to equipment intended for design loads of six hundred foot-pounds (08 kilojoules).

(b) Load-bearing hardware shall be constructed of forged, machined, stamped, extruded, or cast metal. Castings shall meet Class I, Grade A requirements of the most current edition of SAE AMS 2175A, "Castings, Classification and Inspection of."

(d) All load-bearing buckles shall have been proof loaded to at least two thousand four hundred seventy-three foot-pounds (3.6 kilojoules).

(e) Snap-link and carabiner gates shall be self-closing and of a locking design.

(f) Each item of auxiliary equipment shall be permitted to have a hang tag affixed to each individual auxiliary equipment item or shall be permitted to be printed on a sheet that is inserted and sealed in the packaging that contains the item.

(i) Auxiliary equipment shall also be stamped, engraved, or otherwise permanently marked with a "G" for general use; "T" for technical use; or "E" for escape.

(ii) Rigging and anchor straps shall indicate on the product label that minimum breaking strength and rating are determined using a basket (U) configuration.

(iii) Where detachable components must be used with the auxiliary equipment in order for the auxiliary equipment to be compliant, the product label shall provide the list of additional components to be used in conjunction with the auxiliary equipment to be compliant with the most current edition of NFPA 1983.

(g) All auxiliary equipment shall be capable of withstanding all tests specified in the most current edition of NFPA 2500.

(h) The employer shall furnish the employee using the auxiliary equipment with use criteria, inspection procedures, maintenance procedures, and retirement criteria for the product.

(5) Escape rope.

(a) Escape rope shall have a minimum breaking strength of not less than three thousand thirty-four foot-pounds (4.1 kilojoules).

(b) Elongation of all new escape rope shall be less than one per cent and not more than ten per cent at ten per cent of breaking strength.

(c) The employer shall furnish the employee using the escape rope with use criteria, inspection procedures, maintenance procedures, and retirement criteria.

(6) Throwline.

(a) Throwline shall be constructed of virgin fiber and shall be of block creel construction. Load-bearing elements shall be constructed of continuous filament fiber.

(b) Throwline shall have a diameter of nineteen sixty-fourths inch (7.5 millimeters) or greater, but less than three eighths inch (9.5 millimeters).

(c) The minimum breaking strength for new throwline shall not be less than two thousand nine hundred twenty-three foot-pounds (four kilojoules).

(d) New throwline shall be tested for the ability to float and shall float.

(e) Each throwline shall meet the throwline requirements of the most current edition of NFPA 2500.

Last updated September 1, 2026 at 8:43 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2026
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-21-03 Personal protective clothing and equipment for wildland fire fighting.

(A) The employer shall provide and require the use of all personal protective clothing and equipment specified in this rule whenever employees are required to work in a hazardous environment that may be encountered during wildland fire fighting activities, prescribed fire activities, or under similar conditions during training activities.

(B) The employer shall assure that protective clothing protects the head, body, and extremities and consists of at least the following components: foot protection, hand protection, body protection, and head and eye protection.

(D) Personal protective clothing and equipment that is damaged or otherwise defective to the point of voiding its intended protection shall be removed from service.

(E) Employers shall develop and require use of a written plan covering the safe use, care, maintenance, inspection, limitations, and replacement of the clothing and equipment required by this rule, and all affected employees shall be trained in accordance with such plan.

(F) Where employees choose to provide their own protective clothing and equipment, such clothing and equipment shall give equal or greater protection than that provided by the employer.

(G) It shall be the responsibility of the employee to properly use the equipment provided by the employer as required in this rule.

(H) Body protection.

(1) Body protection shall consist of a protective coat and protective trousers, or equivalent protection.

(2) Protective clothing shall be melt-resistant, durable, lightweight, nonirritating to the skin, and cleanable.

(3) The protective coat shall have long sleeves and shall not have turned-up cuffs. Sleeve cuffs shall have a closure system that can be adjusted to provide a snug and secure fit around the wrist while wearing a glove.

(4) All collars on jackets, shirts, and one-piece garments shall remain upright after extension into a vertical position.

(5) Any pass-through openings in garments shall have a means of fastening them in a closed position.

(6) All pockets that open to the exterior of garments, other than front waist pockets, shall have a cover or closure system.

(7) All garments that encompass the neck area shall have a closure system at the neckline.

(8) All closure systems shall not come into contact with the body. Hardware of any garment shall not come into direct contact with the wearer's body.

(9) Protective clothing for wildland fire fighting shall be repaired in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. If protective clothing cannot be repaired without decreasing the protective qualities, the protective clothing shall be replaced.

(10) Protective clothing shall be designed to give minimum interference to physical movement and to the use of fire-fighting tools.

(11) Where wildland fire fighting protective clothing is required, a fire shelter shall be provided.

(12) Protective clothing shall be capable of withstanding all tests specified in the most current edition of national fire protection association standard ("NFPA") 1950.

(13) The employer shall provide a user manual that describes the care, use, inspection, maintenance, limitations, and replacement of protective clothing.

(I) Foot protection.

(1) Foot protection shall be achieved by protective workstyle boots worn in combination with protective trousers that meet the requirements of the most current edition of NFPA 1950.

(2) Protective footwear meeting the requirements of paragraph (K) of rule 4123:1- 21-02 of the Administrative Code shall be considered to be in compliance with this rule.

(3) Performance requirements.

Footwear shall be capable of withstanding all tests specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1950.

(4) The employer shall provide a user information guide that describes the care, use, inspection, maintenance, limitations, and replacement criteria.

(J) Head protection.

(1) Wildland fire fighters' helmets shall consist of a shell with brim or peak, an energy-absorbing system, suspension system with sweatband, chin strap, nape device, goggle clips, and retroreflective markings. Provisions shall be made for ventilation between the head and the shell.

(2) Helmets shall meet as a minimum the requirements for type 1, class G helmets as specified in themost current edition of American national standards institute ("ANSI") Z89.1, "Industrial Head Protection." The complete helmet, with energyabsorbing system, suspension system with sweatband, chin strap, nape device, goggle clips, and retroreflective markings shall not weigh more than twenty-seven ounces (seven hundred seventy grams).

(3) Chin straps shall be provided that attach to the shell. Both chin and nape straps shall not be less than one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) in width.

(4) All helmets shall have retroreflective markings on the exterior of the shell. A minimum of four square inches (6.4 square centimeters) of retroreflective markings shall be visible when the helmet is viewed from the sides, front, and rear. The retroreflective markings shall be placed above the goggle or headlamp clips so as not to be obscured by any clip, or the strap retained by the clips.

(5) There shall be no openings penetrating the shell except those provided by the manufacturer for mounting energy-absorbing systems, retention systems, and accessories.

(6) The addition of helmet accessories shall not interfere with the function of the helmet or its component parts and shall not degrade the helmet's performance below the requirements of this rule.

(7) Helmets shall be capable of withstanding all tests specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1977, "Protective Clothing and Equipment for Wildland Fire Fighting."

(8) The employer shall provide a user information guide that describes the care, use, inspection, maintenance, limitations, and replacement criteria.

(9) Eye protection shall be provided by goggles. Goggles may be attached to the helmet.

(K) Hand protection.

(1) Gloves shall be designed such that they closely conform to the wrist or are adjustable at the wrist and shall extend a minimum on one inch (twenty-five millimeters) past the wrist crease.

(2) All thread used to manufacture gloves shall be made of inherently flame-resistant fiber.

(3) Gloves shall be maintained and repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. If gloves cannot be repaired properly without decreasing the protective qualities required by this rule, they shall be replaced with gloves that meet the requirements of this rule.

(4) The employer shall provide a user information guide that describes the care, use, inspections, maintenance, limitations, and replacement criteria.

(L) Face/neck shroud.

(1) Face/neck shrouds shall be designed to cover and provide the limited protection to the face and neck areas that do not receive primary protection from the helmet.

(2) The shroud shall attach to a helmet compliant with the most current edition of NFPA 1950.

(3) Shrouds shall have a closure system. The closure system shall not come into contact with the face or neck.

(4) The employer shall provide a user information guide that describes the care, use, inspection, maintenance, limitations, and replacement criteria.

(M) Protective goggles.

(1) Goggles shall be designed to consist of at least a frame, a lens or lenses, and a retention strap or means of attachment to a helmet compliant with the most current edition of NFPA 1950.

(2) Goggles shall meet the requirements for high impact protection of the most current edition of ANSI Z87.1, "Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection."

(3) All materials in goggle construction that are designed to come in contact with the wearer's head or skin shall be known to be nonirritating to normal skin.

(4) All hardware shall be free of rough spots, burrs, or sharp edges.

(5) Where positioned on the helmet, the goggles shall not interfere with the function of the helmet or its component parts and shall not degrade the helmet's performance below the requirements of this rule.

(6) The employer shall provide a user information guide that describes the care, use, inspection, maintenance, limitations, and replacement criteria.

(N) Chain saw protector.

(1) Chain saw protectors shall be designed as leg protectors and the most current edition of American society for testing and materials ("ASTM") F 1897.

(2) Chain saw protectors shall be capable of withstanding all tests specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1950.

(3) The employer shall provide a user information guide that describes the care, use, inspection, maintenance, limitations, and replacement criteria.

(O) Load carrying protective equipment.

(1) The load carrying protective equipment items shall allow the mounting of the fire shelter carrier on the outside as to be readily available to the user and able to be opened with one gloved hand.

(2) The load carrying protective equipment items shall allow the carrying of the employees' personal water supply in the form of canteens, water bottles, or bladders.

(3) All hardware, brackets, and snaps or other fasteners of any accessories shall be free of rough spots, burrs, or sharp edges.

(4) Load carrying protective equipment shall be capable of withstanding all tests specified in NFPA 1950.

(5) The employer shall provide a user information guide that describes the use, care, inspection, maintenance, limitations, and replacement criteria.

(P) Fire protective shelter.

(1) The fire shelter shall be enclosed in a carrying case liner, and the fire shelter and the carrying case liner shall be enclosed in a carrying case. The fire shelter, carrying case liner, and carrying case shall conform to the most current edition of NFPA 1500.

Last updated September 1, 2026 at 8:43 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2026
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-21-04 Automotive fire apparatus.

(A) New fire appartaus shall meet the requirements of the most current edition of the applicable national fire protection association standard ("NFPA") 1990.

(B)

(1) Two copies of a complete operation and maintenance manual covering the completed apparatus, including but not limited to the following, shall be available:

(a) The truck, pump, wiring and piping diagrams;

(b) Lubrication charts;

(c) Operating instructions for the chassis and any major component such as pump or aerial device or other fire fighting equipment;

(d) Precautions related to multiple configurations of aerial devices;

(e) Instructions regarding the frequency and procedure for recommended maintenance; and

(f) Parts replacement information.

(2) Also, all manufacturers' operations and maintenance documents supplied with components and equipment that are installed by the employer shall be supplied and made available:

(C) GAWR, GCWR, and GVWR, adequate to carry a full water tank, other tanks full, the specified hose load, ground ladders, personnel weight, and miscellaneous equipment allowance, shall be provided on the apparatus.

(D) Automatic engine shutdown systems are prohibited unless they are an integral part of the standard engine management system, which cannot be disabled.

(E) An engine speed control device shall be installed to allow an increase in the engine speed when the apparatus is parked. An interlock shall prevent the operation of this engine speed control device unless the parking brake is fully engaged and the transmission is in neutral or park, or the parking brake is engaged and the engine is disengaged from the drive wheels.

(F) Fuel system, gasoline or diesel.

(1) The fuel line(s) shall be so located or protected as not to be subjected to excessive heating from any portion of a vehicle exhaust system. The line(s) shall be protected from mechanical injury.

(2) Fuel tank and fill piping shall be so placed as to be protected from mechanical injury and shall not be exposed to heat from exhaust or other source of ignition.

(3) The tank fill opening shall be marked with a label indicating the proper fuel.

(G) Exhaust system, gasoline or diesel.

(1) The exhaust piping and discharge outlet shall be so located as not to expose any portion of the apparatus or equipment to excessive heating.

(2) Exhaust pipe discharge shall not be directed toward any employee's position.

(3) Silencing devices shall be provided.

(4) When parts of the exhaust system are exposed to operating personnel, protective guards shall be provided.

(5) If the apparatus is equipped with stabilizers, the exhaust piping discharge shall be directed away from the contact area between the stabilizer and the ground when the stabilizer is deployed.

(H) Low voltage (twelve/twenty-four volt) electrical system and warning devices.

(1) All electrical circuit wiring shall be made with stranded conductors of a carrying capacity of one hundred twenty-five per cent of the anticipated maximum circuit loading. Insulation shall be in accordance with the recommended standards of the society of automotive engineers ("SAE") for such loading at the potential employed. Overall covering of conductors shall be of the moisture-resistant type and have a minimum continuous temperature rating of one hundred ninety-four degrees Fahrenheit (ninety degrees Celsius). All connections shall be made with lugs or terminals mechanically secured to the conductors. Wiring shall be restrained to prevent damage caused by chafing or ice buildup and protected against heat, liquid contaminants, or other environmental factors.

(2) Circuits shall be provided with overload protective devices. Such devices shall be readily accessible and protected against heat, physical injury, and water spray.

(3) Power supply.

(a) A twelve volt or greater electrical alternator shall be provided. It shall have a minimum output at idle to meet the minimum continuous electrical load of the apparatus as defined in the most current edition of NFPA 1900 at two hundred degrees Fahrenheit (ninety-three degrees Celsius) ambient temperature within the engine compartment and shall be provided with full automatic regulation.

(b) The condition of the low-voltage electrical system shall be monitored by a system that provides an audible and visual warning to the driver or operator of the apparatus.

(d) If the total continuous electrical load exceeds the minimum continuous electrical output rating of the installed alternator(s) operating under the conditions specified in this rule, an automatic electrical load management system shall be required.

(4) Batteries.

Batteries shall be securely mounted and protected against physical injury and vibration, water spray, and engine and exhaust heat. When an enclosed battery compartment is provided, the battery compartment shall be adequately ventilated, and the batteries shall be readily accessible for examination, test, and maintenance.

(5) Lights and warning devices.

(a) The rear stop, tail, and directional lights shall be so mounted that they will not be obscured by equipment carried on the rear step. Turn signals shall be visible from front, sides, and rear. On apparatus thirty feet (9.1 meters) or longer in length, a turn signal shall be mounted approximately midway along the apparatus at approximately running board height.

(b) All apparatus shall have upper and lower optical warning devices. The upper and lower warning levels shall each be divided into four warning zones. The four zones shall be determined by drawing lines through the geometric center of the apparatus at forty-five degrees to a line lengthwise of the apparatus through the geometric center. The four zones shall be designated A, B, C, and D in a clockwise direction with zone A to the front of the apparatus. See figure 1.

(i) The front optical warning devices shall be placed so as to maintain the maximum possible separation from the headlights.

(ii) A midship optical warning device shall be mounted on both the right and left sides of the apparatus with the optical center of the device at a distance between eighteen and sixty-two inches (45.7 and 157.5 centimeters) above level ground if the distance between the front and rear lower-level optical devices exceeds twenty-five feet (7.6 meters).

(c) Apparatus shall have hooded lights, with individual switches, providing illumination of the pump operating panel, tool and equipment compartments, steps, and walkways. Switches shall be located within easy reach of the operator.

(d) The work area immediately behind the vehicle shall be illuminated to a level of at least three footcandles (thirty lux) within ten feet (three meters) by ten feet (three meters) square to the rear of the vehicle. If a hose bed is provided, lighting on this hosebed shall be at a level of three footcandles (thirty lux) or higher.

(e) The apparatus shall be equipped with lighting that is capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two footcandles (twenty lux) on the ground area within thirty inches (76.2 centimeters) of the edge of the apparatus in areas designed for personnel to climb onto or descend from the apparatus to the ground level. Lighting designed to provide illumination on areas under the driver and crew riding area exits shall be activated automatically when the exit doors are opened. All other ground area lighting shall be switchable.

(f) A red flashing or rotating light, marked with a sign that clearly states to not move the apparatus when the light is on, located in the driving compartment, shall be illuminated automatically whenever the apparatus's parking brake is not fully engaged and any of the following conditions exist:

(i) Any passenger or equipment door is open.

(ii) Any ladder or equipment rack is not in the stowed position.

(iii) Stabilizer system not in its stowed position.

(iv) Powered light tower is extended.

(v) Any other device is opened, extended, or deployed that creates a hazard or is likely to cause damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved.

(g) Audible warning equipment in the form of one automotive horn and one electric or electronic siren shall be provided. Control for operating the siren shall be provided for the right and left seat positions.

(h) Where furnished, air horns, electric siren(s), and electronic siren speaker(s) shall be mounted as low and as far forward on the apparatus as practical. Audible warning equipment shall not be mounted on the roof of the apparatus.

(i) An electric or electronic backup alarm shall be provided that meets the type D (eighty-seven decibels A-weighted) requirements of the most current edition of SAE J994.

(I) Vehicle components.

(1) Line voltage (one hundred ten/two hundred twenty volts).

(a) The generating system shall be installed in accordance with the grounding requirements of section 250-34 of the most current edition of NFPA 70, "National Electric Code."

(b) When receptacles or other facilities providing one hundred ten volt alternating current ("AC") or direct current ("DC") power are installed, such receptacles and other facilities shall be of the weatherproof type, and all circuits or associated wiring shall have at the source of one hundred ten volt supply overload protection rated at the carrying capacity of the conductor. Circuits shall be three-wired and installed in accordance with section 250-34 of the most current edition of NFPA 70. Those receptacles shall conform to the appropriate national electrical manufacturers association configuration for the voltage and capacity of the circuit.

(c) All fixed auxiliary engine-driven generators shall comply with article 445, "Generators," of the most current edition of NFPA 70, national electrical code.

(i) They shall be installed so that fumes, vapors, heat, and vibrations do not enter the interior passenger compartment.

(ii) They also shall have the exhaust outlet piped to the exterior and located so that exhaust is directed away from any operator's position.

(iii) Where parts of the exhaust system are exposed so that they can cause injury to operating personnel, protective guards shall be provided.

(d) Portable generator installations shall comply with article 445, "Generators," of the most current edition of NFPA 70.

(e) If the apparatus is equipped with a fixed power inlet, also known as a shoreline inlet, it shall be a permanently mounted, flanged surface inlet, also known as a male-recessed-type receptacle with cover, sized in accordance with the anticipated load and wired directly to the system or device to be powered; or wired to a transfer switch to isolate one power source from the other where one or more circuits are intended to be supplied from more than one power source.

The apparatus shall have a label permanently affixed at the power inlet.

(2) Braking system.

(a) Apparatus shall be equipped with an all-wheel antilock braking system if such system is available from the chassis manufacturer.

(b) Service and parking brakes shall be independent and separate systems. All brakes shall be readily accessible for adjustment.

(c) The service brake application valve, when applied, shall operate all the service brakes on the vehicle or combination of vehicles.

(d) Parking brakes shall control the rear wheels, or all wheels, and shall be of a positive, mechanically actuated type with provision for securely holding in position when applied. The parking brake system shall hold the fully loaded apparatus on at least a twenty per cent grade. Neither a lock-up device to retain applied pressure on hydraulically actuated service brake system, nor a "park" position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for a separate parking brake system, is acceptable.

(e) Where air-actuated braking systems are provided, they shall include the following:

(i) An automatic moisture ejector;

(ii) An air dryer;

(iii) A pressure protection valve to prevent the use of all air-operated accessories except air-operated windshield wipers and air-assist steering, if provided, when the system air pressure drops below eighty pounds per square inch (five hundred fifty kilopascals);

(iv) A quick buildup section in the air reservoir system arranged so that if the apparatus has a completely discharged system, it is able to move within sixty seconds of startup.

(a) The quick buildup system shall provide sufficient air pressure so that the apparatus has no brake drag and is able to stop under the intended operating conditions following the sixty second buildup time.

(b) On a chassis that cannot be equipped with a quick buildup air brake system, an onboard automatic electric compressor or a fire station compressed air shoreline hookup shall be permitted in order to maintain full operating air pressure while the vehicle is not running.

(f) Two or more wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, that meet or exceed the requirements of the most current edition of SAE J348, "Standard for Wheel Chocks," for the wheel diameter on which the chocks are to be used, shall be provided and used when the apparatus is not being driven but being operated in a stationary position.

(g) Service brakes shall be capable of bringing a fully laden apparatus to a complete stop from an initial speed of twenty mph (thirty-two kilometers per hour) in a distance not exceeding thirty-five feet (10.7 meters) by actual measurement on a substantially hard surface road that is free from loose material, oil, or grease.

(3) Suspension and wheels.

(a) Each load-bearing tire and rim of the apparatus shall carry a weight not in excess of the tire manufacturer's rating.

(b) An angle of approach and an angle of departure of at least eight degrees shall be maintained at the front and rear of the vehicle when normally loaded.

(d) The steering mechanism for front axles shall be capable of turning the front wheels to an angle of at least twenty-eight degrees front axles and thirty degrees for nondriving front axles to both right and left. Power or power-assisted steering shall be provided.

(4) Body.

(a) A bumper shall be provided on the front of the chassis, and the bumper mounting brackets shall be attached to the frame.

(b) Holders, boxes, compartments, or other attachments shall be provided for all tools, equipment, play-pipes, and other items on the apparatus. Equipment holders shall be firmly attached and designed so that equipment will remain in place under all running conditions but be quickly removable for use.

(c) Steps, platforms, or secure ladders shall be provided so that employees have access to all working and storage areas of the apparatus. The maximum stepping height shall not exceed eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) with the exception of the ground to first step. When the ground to first step, platform, or ladder rung exceeds twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters), a permanently attached supplemental means of access and egress from the ground to these steps, platforms, or secure ladders shall be provided. The supplemental access means shall consist of step(s), platform(s), or ladder(s). The ground to first step height shall be determined with the apparatus on level ground. When the apparatus is supplied with stabilizers, the ground to first step height shall be determined with the apparatus on level ground and the stabilizers deployed according to the manufacturer's instructions.

(i) All steps, platforms, or ladders shall be capable of sustaining a minimum static load of five hundred pounds (226.8 kilograms) without deformation.

(ii) All exterior surfaces designated as stepping, standing, and walking areas shall have a minimum average slip resistance of 0.68 in accordance with the most current edition of American society for testing and materials ("ASTM") E303 or American national standards institute ("ANSI") A326.3 for current slip resistance benchmarks. All interior steps shall provide an average minimum slip resistance of 0.58. Where the fuel fill is located at or near a stepping surface, the surface shall be constructed of an open grate-type material.

(iii) All steps shall have a minimum area of thirty-five square inches (225.8 square centimeters) and be arranged to provide at least eight inches (20.3 centimeters) of clearance between the front of the step and any obstruction. All ladders shall have at least eight inches (20.3 centimeters) of clearance between any rung and the body of the apparatus.

(d) Access handrails shall be provided at all entrances to the driving or crew compartment and at any location where the employee is required to climb up on the apparatus for access to equipment. Exterior access handrails shall be constructed of a slip-resistant, non-corrosive material. Rails shall be between one inch (2.5 centimeters) and one and five-eighths inches (4.1 centimeters) in diameter and have a minimum clearance between the rails and any surface of at least two inches (5.1 centimeters). All rails shall be designed and mounted to reduce the possibility of hand slippage and to avoid snagging of hose, equipment, or clothing.

(e) A reflective stripe(s) shall be affixed to the perimeter of the apparatus. The stripe or combination of stripes shall be a minimum of four inches (10.2 centimeters) in total width and shall conform to the minimum requirements of the most current edition of ASTM D 4956. At least fifty percent of the cab and body length on each side, at least fifty percent of the width of the rear, and at least twenty-five percent of the width of the front of the apparatus shall have the reflective material affixed to it. A graphic design meeting the reflectivity requirements of this paragraph shall be permitted to replace all or part of the required striping material if the design or combination thereof covers at least the same perimeter length(s) required within.

(5) Driving and crew compartment.

(a) A fully enclosed driving or crew compartment with seating for no fewer than two persons shall be provided. Seat belts shall be provided and shall be utilized by each occupant of the cab.

(b) In wildland fire fighting, employees shall be required to ride within a fully enclosed personnel area.

(c) The noise in the compartment shall not be in excess of ninety decibels A-weighted without any warning devices in operation and while the vehicle is traveling at a steady speed of forty-five miles per hour (72.4 kilometers per hour) on a level, hard, smooth surface road.

(d) All interior crew and driving compartment door handles shall be designed and installed to protect against accidental or inadvertent opening.

(e) Head height at any suspension-style seat shall be at least thirty-seven inches (ninety-four centimeters) from the seat H-point to the ceiling. For nonsuspension-style seats it shall be thirty-five inches (88.9 centimeters). Each seating space shall have a minimum width of twenty-two inches (55.9 centimeters) at the shoulder level. Seat cushions shall be a minimum of eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) in width and fifteen inches (38.1 centimeters) from the front of the cushion to the face of the seat back. A back cushion that extends from the face of the seat vertically at least eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) and that is a minimum of eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) wide shall be provided. The back cushion shall be permitted to be split to accommodate a fully recessed self-contained breathing apparatus ("SCBA") and bracket. Where the back cushion is split, a headrest shall be supplied.

(f) Where SCBA units are mounted within the crew compartment, a positive, mechanical means of holding the SCBA in its stowed position shall be provided. The bracket holding device and its mounting shall retain the SCBA unit when subjected to a nine-G force and shall be installed in accordance with the bracket manufacturer's requirements. If the SCBA cylinder is mounted in a vertical position with the valve down, it shall be supported with a brace or yoke under the cylinder or valve area to prevent downward movement.

(g) All equipment within the driving or crew area shall be securely fastened. All equipment not required to be used during an emergency response, with the exception of SCBA units, shall be contained in a fully enclosed and latched compartment, or mounted in at least one bracket that is capable of containing the contents when a nine-G force is applied in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle or a three-G force is applied in any other direction.

(h) The driver's seat shall be readily adjustable by the driver.

(i) Where the crew compartment and the driving compartment are separated, prohibiting direct voice communication, a two-way voice communication system shall be provided.

(j) A speedometer and odometer shall be provided.

(k) All driving and crew compartment doors shall have at least ninety-six square inches (619.4 square centimeters) of reflective material affixed to the inside of each door.

(l) The apparatus shall have sufficient lighting to provide an average level of two footcandle (twenty lux) in the driving and crew compartments.

(m) Each engine compartment and pump compartment shall have a light of at least twenty candlepower (two hundred fifty lumens).

(6) Tractor-drawn vehicles.

(a) A tractor-drawn vehicle shall consist of a tractor with a permanent, non-kingpinned "fifth wheel" mounted upon the rear of the chassis to carry the forward end of the aerial ladder trailer unit. The fifth wheel and body design shall be of a type that permits full ninety degree jackknifing of the tractor-trailer combination with the stabilizers in the stored position.

(b) A tiller steering wheel shall be provided to steer the rear wheels of the trailer unit. The steering shall be of the power or power-assisted type.

(c) A fully enclosed tiller driving compartment with seating for one person shall be provided at the rear wheel's steering position. Tiller seats shall have a lap belt.

(d) A control at the tiller driver's position shall be provided to prevent starting of the engine if the tiller driver is not in place.

(e) A two-way voice communication system shall be provided for communication between the drivers.

(f) A heater or ventilation system, a defroster, and a windshield wiper and washer shall be provided.

(g) The following instrumentation and controls shall be mounted in the tiller driving compartment and shall be clearly identified and visible to the driver while seated:

(i) Heater/defroster controls;

(ii) Turn signal indicator lights;

(iii) Starter control; and

(iv) Windshield wiper control.

(h) Mirrors that provide side and rear visibility shall be provided on both sides of the tiller enclosure.

(i) If the sides of the trailer are not visible from the tiller seat, a device shall be installed as a point of reference for the tillerman to judge clearance distance.

(j) If the manufacturer's design requires that the load from the aerial device not be transferred to the rear springs of the tractor, a device shall be installed that will prevent such a weight transfer.

(J) Pumps.

(1) Construction.

(a) The pump shall be designed and constructed to withstand a hydrostatic test of five hundred pounds per square inch gauge (three thousand four hundred forty-seven kilopascal gauge) minimum for ten minutes. A certificate documenting this test shall be furnished.

(b) When an auxiliary pump is provided in combination with an attack pump and when the pumps are interconnected so that pressure from one pump may be transmitted to the other pump, check valves, intake and/or discharge relief valves, pump drive gear ratios, or other automatic means shall be provided to avoid pressurizing either pump beyond its maximum rated hydrostatic pressure.

(c) The entire discharge and intake piping system, valves, drain cocks and lines, and intake and outlet closures, excluding the tank fill and tank to pump lines on the tank side of the valves in those lines, shall be designed for five hundred pounds per square inch gauge (three thousand four hundred forty-seven kilopascals gauge).

(2) Pump intake and discharge.

(a) Where a three-inch (7.6 centimeters) or larger intake or discharge valve is provided, except the tank to pump intake, the valve mechanism shall be slow-operating to permit changing the position of the flow regulating element of the valve from full close to full open, or vice versa.

(b) Each gated intake or discharge shall be equipped with a three-fourths inch (nineteen millimeters) bleeder valve located in close proximity to the intake or discharge to bleed off air or water from a hose connected to the intake or discharge. The valve shall be operational without the operator having to get under the apparatus. If a siamese is attached to an intake, it shall be equipped with a three-fourths inch (nineteen millimeters) bleeder valve on each inlet.

(c) An adjustable two-and-one-half inch (6.4 centimeters) or larger intake pressure relief system shall be permanently installed. The system shall be designed to self-restore automatically to a nonrelieving position when excessive pressure is no longer present. The minimum range of pressure adjustment shall permit control of the intake pressure relief point from ninety pounds per square inch (six hundred twenty kilopascals) to at least one hundred eighty-five pounds per square inch (one thousand two hundred seventy-five kilopascals).

(3) Pump controls.

(a) Adequate illumination shall be provided for all gages and controls located at the pump operator's position.

(b) All markings required at the pump operator's position shall be permanent, capable of withstanding the effects of extremes of weather and temperature, and securely attached.

(c) Provisions shall be made for quickly and easily placing the pump in operation. The lever or other device shall be marked to indicate when it is correctly positioned for pumping.

(d) Any control device used in the pumping system power train between the engine and pump shall be equipped with a means to prevent unintentional movement of the control device from its set position.

(e) A nameplate indicating the chassis transmission shift selector position to be used for pumping shall be provided in the cab and located so that it can be easily read from the driver's position.

(f) When the pump is driven by a split shaft power take-off (PTO), an indicator light shall be located in the driving compartment. This indicator light shall be energized when the pump shift has been completed and shall be labeled "Pump Engaged." When an automatic chassis transmission is provided, a second indicator light in the driving compartment and an indicator light located at the pump operator's position shall be provided and energized when the pump shift has been completed, the chassis transmission is engaged in pump gear, and the parking brake engaged. The light in the driving compartment shall be labeled "OK to Pump." The light on the pump operator's panel shall be positioned adjacent to and preferably above the throttle control and shall be labeled: "Throttle Ready."

(g) When an automatic or manual chassis transmission is provided and when the pump is driven by a transmission mounted PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO and is used for stationary pumping with the chassis transmission in neutral, or is used for pump and roll with the chassis transmission in any forward or reverse gear, shift indicator lights shall be provided as follows:

(i) There shall be two indicator lights in the driving compartment. One of the lights shall be energized when the pump drive has been engaged and shall be labeled "Pump Engaged." The second light shall be energized when both the pump drive has been engaged the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake engaged and shall be labeled "OK to Pump."

(ii) For pump-and-roll apparatus, an additional "OK to Pump and Roll" indicator light shall be provided in the driving compartment and shall be energized when the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission is on road gear, and the parking brake is released. When the "OK to Pump and Roll" indicator is energized, the "OK to Pump" indicator shall not be energized.

(iii) A "Throttle Ready" indicator shall be provided at the pump operator's panel that is energized when the "OK to Pump" indicator is energized, or when the chassis transmission is neutral, and the parking brake is engaged.

(h) With parallel-series centrifugal pumps, the control positions for parallel operation (volume) and series operation (pressure) shall be clearly indicated. The control for changing the pump from series to parallel and vice versa shall be operable at the pump operator's position.

(i) Means shall be provided for controlling pressure at the pump either through an automatic relief valve or a pressure regulator controlling the speed of the pump. The device shall be capable of operation over a range of ninety to three hundred pounds per square inch gauge (620.5 to 2068.4 kilopascals gauge) discharge pressure and shall limit the pressure rise upon activation to a maximum of thirty pounds per square inch gauge (206.8 kilopascals gauge). A relief valve shall be equipped with an amber light that indicates when the valve is open. A pressure regulator shall be equipped with a green light that indicates when the regulator is activated. The means provided shall be controllable by one person in the pump operator's position.

(j) If the system discharges water to the atmosphere, the discharge shall be in a manner that will not expose personnel to high-pressure water steams.

(4) Engine controls.

A throttle control that will hold its set position shall be provided to control the engine speed and located not higher that seventy-two inches (182.9 centimeters) nor lower than forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) from the pump operator's position with all instrumentation in full view.

(K) Tanks.

(1) All water tanks shall be constructed of noncorrosive material or other materials that are protected against corrosion and deterioration. The water tanks shall have a means to permit flushing of the tank.

(2) Tanks shall be securely fastened, and the tanks shall be cushioned or cradled to avoid stress when the apparatus is traveling over uneven terrain.

(3) Tanks shall be provided with at least one swash or baffle partition. Each tank shall have a sufficient number of swash partitions so that the maximum dimension of any space in the tank, either transverse or longitudinal, shall not exceed forty-eight inches (121.9 centimeters).

(4) The overflow outlet on water tanks shall be designed so that, while the vehicle is in motion, the overflow shall direct any water behind the rear axle so as not to interfere with rear tire traction.

(5) Pressure vessel foam concentrate or foam solution tanks.

(a) The tank shall be of welded construction and designed, fabricated, and stamped in accordance with the requirements of the most current edition of the American society of mechanical engineers ("ASME") "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code " for the required pressure. All pressure tanks and associated piping shall be designed to a minimum of one and one-half times working pressure.

(b) The pressure vessel tank shall be protected against corrosion from the foam concentrate stored in the tank.

(d) A safety vent hole shall be located in the fill cap so that it will vent the tank pressure while at least three and one-half threads are still engaged.

(e) A minimum one-half inch valved vent shall be provided on all pressure vessel tanks.

(f) An approved ASME relief valve, properly set, shall be provided on the tank to prevent tank pressure from exceeding one hundred ten per cent of the maximum allowable working pressure.

(g) A device indicating the internal pressure of the pressure vessel shall be provided and located at the operator's position.

(h) A minimum one inch (thirteen millimeters) inside diameter full flow drain valve and piping shall be provided on all pressure vessel tanks.

(6) Compressed air source.

(a) Holding, surge, or separator tanks (U.S. department of transportation ("DOT") tank or ASME pressure vessel) shall comply with 29 CFR 1910.169, "Air Receivers," 61 FR 9227, September 26, 2025, or if the relief valve does not comply with these standards, the tank must be equal for the rated pressure.

(b) Transportable air tanks shall comply with 49 CFR 178.37, "Specification 3AA and 3AAX, Seamless Steel Cylinders," 89 FR 25488, September 29, 2025, or 29 CFR 1910.169, "Air Receivers," 61 FR 9227, September 26, 2025.

(c) Relief valves on transportable air tanks shall be of the ASME type on ASME cylinders and of the DOT type on DOT cylinders or equal for the rated pressure.

(d) Cylinders shall be securely mounted on the apparatus so that they will not shift during normal apparatus driving and operation.

(e) Valves installed on air tanks shall meet the requirements of the compressed air association or equivalent standards regarding pressure and usage with compressed air.

(f) The compressed air system shall be equipped with an air pressure relief valve which is set to prevent the compressed air system from exceeding one hundred ten percent of the maximum allowance working pressure of the system. The outlet of the relief device shall be routed to an area that does not expose personnel to air blasts or cause the creation of dust.

(g) If the installation utilizes cylinders that require periodic testing, a label shall be placed on the operator's panel indicating the test date stamped on the cylinders and the date the cylinders will next require testing.

(L) Water towers.

(1) If the water tower is equipped with a ladder attached to the boom or sections for continuous egress, the ladder shall meet the requirements for aerial ladders in paragraphs (M)(1)(a) to (M)(1)(g) of this rule.

(2) If the water tower is rated in multiple configurations, these configurations, including the rated load capacity of each, shall be clearly described in the operations manual and on the sign at the operator's station.

(3) Operating mechanisms.

(a) Power-operated elevating and extending devices shall be provided. They shall be so designed and provided with adequate power to allow multiple movements of the water tower booms or sections simultaneously under all rated conditions of loading. At least one automatic locking device shall be provided so that the desired elevated position can be maintained. Provisions shall be made to prevent damage at top and bottom limits.

(b) A lock shall be provided that will retain the water tower booms and sections in the bed when the vehicle is in motion.

(c) A power-operated turntable shall be provided that will permit continuous rotation in either direction under all the rated conditions of loading. The turntable rotation bearing shall be accessible for lubrication and retorquing of bolts.

(d) The turntable rotation mechanism shall be provided with an automatically applied brake or self-locking drive. The turntable rotation mechanism shall provide braking capacity with all power systems nonfunctioning to prevent turntable rotation under all rated conditions of loading.

(4) Stabilization.

(a) The water tower shall be capable of sustaining a static load of one and one-half times its rated capacity in every position in which the water tower can be placed when the vehicle is on a firm and level surface with all normally removable items, such as water hose, ground ladders, or loose equipment removed. If having stabilizers extended to firm footing is part of the definition of the configuration, the stabilizers shall be extended for the purpose of determining whether the vehicle meets this stability requirement.

(b) The water tower shall be capable of sustaining a static load of one and one-third times its rated capacity in every position in which the water tower can be placed when the vehicle is on a slope of five degrees downward in the direction most likely to cause overturning. If having the stabilizers extended to a firm footing is part of the definition of the configuration, the stabilizers shall be extended to provide leveling for the purpose of determining whether the vehicle meets this stability requirement. If other facilities, such as a means of turntable leveling, are provided to minimize the effect of the sloping surface, then those facilities may be utilized for the purpose of determining whether the vehicle meets this stability requirement.

(c) If stabilizers are power-operated, the controls shall be arranged so that the employee may view the stabilizers in motion. An audible alarm of no less than eighty-seven decibels A-weighted shall sound when a stabilizer is moving.

(d) The ground contact area for each stabilizer shall be such that a unit pressure of no greater than seventy-five pounds per square inch (517.1 kilopascals) will be exerted over the ground contact area when the apparatus is fully loaded and the water tower is carrying its rated capacity in every position allowed by the manufacturer. This may be accomplished with stabilizer pads in conjunction with the permanently mounted stabilizer shoes to meet the loading requirement of seventy-five pounds per square inch (517.1 kilopascals). The stabilizer shoe shall be capable of swiveling in at least one direction. If the shoe swivels in one direction only, the shoe shall swivel on an axis parallel to the longitudinal axis of the apparatus.

(e) All stabilizers that protrude beyond the body of the apparatus shall be striped or painted with reflective material to indicate a hazard or obstruction. All stabilizers shall be provided with at least one red warning light visible on the side of the vehicle where the stabilizer is located.

(5) Control devices.

(a) Controls shall be provided at the driver's position to transfer power to the water tower. A visual signal shall be provided at the driver's position to indicate when the operating mechanisms are engaged.

(b) An interlock shall be provided that prevents operation of the water tower until the parking brakes have been set and the transmission has been placed in neutral or the transmission is in the drive position with the drive line to the rear axle disengaged.

(c) An interlock shall be provided that allows operation of the engine speed control only after the parking brakes have been set and the transmission is in neutral.

(d) An interlock system shall be provided to prevent the lifting of the water tower from the travel position until all the stabilizers are in a configuration to meet the stability requirements of paragraphs (L)(4)(a) to (L)(4)(e) of this rule. The interlock system shall also prevent the moving of the stabilizers unless the water tower is in the travel position.

(e) A water tower operator's position shall be provided on the apparatus so that the employee is not in contact with the ground. If equipped with a pump, provisions shall be made so that the pump operator is not in contact with the ground. Sign(s) shall be placed to warn the employees of electrocution hazards.

(f) All controls shall be lighted, clearly marked, and located within easy reach of the employee.

(g) Means shall be provided to prevent unintentional movement of the water tower.

(h) Controls shall be arranged so that each control can be operated by an employee with a gloved hand without disturbing any other control.

(i) When a three lever system is used to control the basic functions of the water tower, the levers shall be distinctively different from the other controls on the panel and be arranged adjacent to each other with the extension control being the left lever, the rotation control being the center lever, and the elevation control being the right lever.

(j) The water tower shall extend when the extension control is pushed up or forward, which is away from the operator.

(k) If the rotation control has a forward/backward orientation or an up/down orientation, the turntable shall rotate clockwise when the rotation control is pushed up or forward, which is away from the operator. Otherwise, the rotation control handle shall move in the direction of rotation.

(l) The water tower shall lower when the elevation control is pushed up or forward, which is away from the operator.

(m) All controls regulating movement of the aerial device shall automatically return to the neutral position upon release.

(n) Indicating devices, lighted, clearly marked, and conveniently arranged, shall be visible from the operator's position to:

(i) Indicate that rungs are aligned for climbing, if applicable;

(ii) Indicate the alignment of the boom or sections with the travel bed; and

(iii) Indicate elevation, extension, and capacity ratings or provide an equivalent load indicating system.

(o) If the water tower incorporates a ladder, a second control station shall be provided near the water tower nozzle, accessible to personnel on the ladder for control of all nozzle functions.

(p) If a second control station is provided at the water tower nozzle, a weather-resistant, two-way voice communication system shall be provided between the water tower operator's control stations and the control station at the nozzle. The speaker and microphone at the nozzle control station shall allow for hands-free operation.

(6) Safety.

(a) If the operator's position is on the turntable, the turntable platform shall be provided with a railing no less than forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) high The railing design shall be capable of withstanding a two hundred twenty-five pound (one hundred two kilogram) force applied at any point from any direction without permanent deformation.

(b) When the water tower includes moving cylinders or other moving parts, these shall be arranged to provide adequate hand clearance, or hand guards shall be provided to prevent injury to the operator.

(c) Lighting shall be provided at the base of the water tower arranged to illuminate the water tower in any position of operation.

(d) A spotlight of no less than seventy-five thousand beam candlepower (seventy-three thousand five hundred seventy-five candelas) or a floodlight of not less than eight hundred thirty-five candlepower (eight hundred nineteen candelas) shall be provided on the apparatus by which the operator may observe the effect of the stream from the water tower nozzle.

(e) An auxiliary source of power shall be readily available in the event of failure of the normal operating power source. The auxiliary power source shall be capable of returning the water tower to a road travel position.

(f) When the operation of the water tower is accomplished by hydraulic means, the system shall be equipped with devices to prevent motion of the water tower in the event of any hydraulic hose failure.

(g) When the operation of the water tower is accomplished by other than hydraulic means, the system shall be designed to prevent motion of the water tower in the event of a power failure.

(h) All components used to stabilize the water tower apparatus shall be designed to prevent instability in the event of a hydraulic hose or power failure.

(i) When the design of the water tower incorporates a knuckle, the knuckle shall be either equipped with position lights or continuously illuminated by boom lights. The knuckle shall be painted with reflective paint or provided with reflective striping.

(7) Hydraulic system.

(a) The nonsealing moving parts of all hydraulic components whose failure results in motion of the water tower shall have a minimum bursting strength of four times the maximum operating pressure to which the component is subjected.

(b) Dynamic sealing parts of all hydraulic components whose failure results in motion of the water tower shall not begin to extrude or otherwise fail at pressures at or below two times the maximum operating pressure to which the component is subjected.

(c) Static sealing parts of all hydraulic components whose failure could result in motion of the water tower shall have a minimum bursting strength of four times the maximum operating pressure to which the component is subjected. All hydraulic hoses, tubing, and fittings shall have a minimum bursting strength of three times the maximum operating pressure to which the components are subjected. All other hydraulic components shall have a minimum bursting strength of two times the maximum operating pressure to which the components are subjected.

(d) The hydraulic system shall be provided with an oil pressure gauge at the lower operating position.

(e) Means shall be provided for readily checking and filling the hydraulic reservoir, which shall be conspicuously marked that only hydraulic oil is used.

(f) The hydraulic system components shall be capable of maintaining, under all operating conditions, proper oil cleanliness and temperature to comply with the hydraulic oil manufacturer's recommendations. The system shall have adequate cooling for the continuous operation of not less than two and one-half hours.

(8) Water delivery system.

(a) When more than one set of controls are provided, the set at the water tower operator's position shall be capable of overriding all others.

(b) When the water tower is equipped with a ladder, the monitor and nozzle shall be arranged so that they do not extend past the last rung of the outermost fly section or so that they can swing completely out of the way of persons climbing onto and off the tip when it is positioned up to a window or other location.

(c) A preset relief valve capable of protecting the waterway system by relieving pressure, through the dumping of water to the environment, shall be provided. Such dumping shall be via a system of piping terminating in an area facing away from the operator's position. The discharge end of the piping shall not have a threaded connection.

(9) Structural safety factors.

(a) All structural load supporting elements of the water tower that are made of a ductile material shall have a design stress of no more than fifty per cent of the minimum yield strength of the material, based on the combination of the live load and the dead load This is equivalent to a safety factor of two.

(b) All structural load supporting elements of the water tower that are made of a nonductile material shall have a design stress of no more than twenty per cent of the minimum ultimate strength of the material, based on the combination of the live load and dead load of the supporting structure. This design stress is equivalent to a safety factor of five.

(c) Wire ropes, chains, and attaching systems used to extend and retract a telescopic water tower shall have a safety factor of five, based on ultimate strength under normal operating conditions. The safety factor for the wire rope shall remain above two during any extension or retraction system stall. The minimum ratio of the diameter of wire rope used to the diameter of the sheave shall be one to twelve.

(10) Instruction plates and signs.

(a) Plates and signs that provide operational directions, warnings, and cautions shall be installed in positions visible to the operator(s).

(b) Instruction plates shall describe the function and operation of each control.

(c) Warning and caution signs shall indicate hazards inherent in the operation of the aerial device. These hazards shall include, but shall not be limited to the following:

(i) Electrical hazards involved where the aerial device does not provide protection to the personnel from contact with, or in proximity to, an electrically charged conductor.

(ii) Electrical hazards involved where the aerial device does not provide protection to ground personnel who contact the vehicle when it is in contact with energized electrical conductors.

(iii) Hazards from stabilizer motion.

(iv) Hazards that can result from failure to follow manufacturer's operating instructions.

(d) Identification signs shall display the following information relative to the water tower:

(i) Make.

(ii) Model.

(iii) Insulated or noninsulated.

(iv) Serial number.

(v) Date of manufacture.

(vi) Rated load capacity.

(vii) Rated vertical height.

(viii) Rated horizontal reach.

(ix) Maximum hydraulic system pressure, if applicable.

(x) Hydraulic oil requirements (change quantity and type), if applicable.

(11) The completed apparatus with the water tower shall be tested at the manufacturer's approved facility and certified by an independent testing organization approved by the manufacturer.

(M) Aerial devices.

(1) Aerial ladder requirements.

(a) Ladder rungs shall be equally spaced on a maximum fourteen inch (35.6 centimeter) centers and minimum eleven and three-fourths inch (29.8 centimeter) centers and shall have a skid-resistant surface or covering. When covering is provided, the covering shall be attached in such a manner as to be secure from twisting and shall cover at least sixty per cent of the length of each rung. When round rungs are furnished, the rungs shall have a minimum outside diameter of one and one-fourth inches (3.2 centimeters, including the skid-resistant surface or covering. When other than round rungs are furnished, the rungs shall have: a cross-sectional area of no less than 1.2 square inches (7.7 square centimeters); a maximum outside dimension of the cross-sectional area, height or width, of 3.2 inches (8.1 centimeters), including the skid-resistant surface or covering; and a minimum outside dimension of three-fourths inch (nineteen millimeters), including the skid-resistant surface or covering. The minimum design load per rung shall be five hundred pounds (226.8 kilograms) distributed over a three and one half-inch (8.9 centimeter) wide area at the center of the length of the rung with the rung oriented in its weakest position.

(b) There shall be a minimum of eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) width between the rails of an aerial ladder, measured at the narrowest point, excluding any mounted equipment.

(c) When a solid obstruction below the ladder is wider than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters), a minimum clearance of seven inches (17.8 centimeters) between the center line of the rung and the obstruction shall be provided. When the solid obstruction below the center line of the ladder is twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) or less in width, the standoff between the center line of the rung and the obstruction may be less than seven inches (17.8 centimeters), provided that there is at least six inches of rung width and seven inches (17.8 centimeters) of depth below the center line of the rung on each side of the obstruction.

(d) Top rails shall be provided on the ladder, shall have a minimum width of one inch (2.5 centimeters), and shall be at a minimum height of twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) above the center line of the rungs.

(e) Two folding steps with skid-resistant surfaces shall be provided on the ladder for the use of the ladder pipe-monitor operator. Each folding step shall have a minimum design load of five hundred pounds (226.8 kilograms) and shall be a minimum of thirty-five square inches (225.8 square centimeters) in area. A single step that has a minimum design load of five hundred pounds (226.8 kilograms) and minimum area of one hundred square inches (645.2 square centimeters) may be used in place of the two steps.

(f) The ladder shall be provided with means for attaching fall protection, and persons working on the ladder shall be provided with fall protection.

(g) The apparatus shall be equipped with skid-resistant steps or rungs that provide a path at any degree of elevation from the bottom rung of the aerial ladder to the ground. Steps or rungs, with the exception of the ground to the first step, shall be spaced on no more than eighteen inch (45.7 centimeter) centers. Handrails shall also be provided within easy reach at each step location.

(h) Capacity rating.

(i) The rated capacity of the aerial ladder shall be a minimum of two hundred fifty pounds (113.4 kilograms) carried on the outermost rung of the outermost fly section with the aerial ladder placed in the horizontal position at maximum extension. The aerial ladder shall be capable of operating in any position while carrying its rated capacity on the outermost rung of the outermost fly section. If the aerial ladder has a permanently mounted water delivery system, the two hundred fifty pound (113.4 kilogram) load capacity shall be determined without water in the system.

(ii) The rated capacity of the aerial ladder shall be a minimum of two hundred fifty pounds (113.4 kilograms) carried on the outermost rung of the outermost fly section with the aerial ladder at forty-five degrees to the horizontal and at maximum extension while discharging water through the full range of monitor or nozzle movements as permitted by the manufacturer.

(iii) All capacity ratings shall be stated in increments of two hundred fifty pounds (113.4 kilograms) and shall be in addition to any fire fighting equipment installed on the ladder by the manufacturer.

(iv) If the aerial ladder is rated in multiple configurations, these configurations, including the rated load capacity of each, shall be clearly described in both the operations manual and on a sign at the operator's control station.

(2) Aerial ladder operating position.

(a) A water tower operator's position shall be provided on the apparatus so that the operator is not in contact with the ground. If equipped with a pump, provisions shall be made so that the pump operator is not in contact with the ground. Sign(s) shall be placed to warn the operator(s) of electrocution hazards.

(b) Indicating devices, lighted, clearly marked, and conveniently arranged, shall be visible from the operator's position to:

(i) Indicate that rungs are aligned for climbing;

(ii) Indicate the alignment of the aerial ladder with the travel bed; and

(iii) Indicate elevation, extension, and capacity ratings or provide an equivalent load indicating system.

(c) A weather-resistant, two-way, voice communication system shall be provided between the aerial ladder operator's position and the tip. The speaker and microphone at the tip shall allow for hands-free operation.

(3) Aerial ladder operating mechanisms.

(a) Elevation.

(i) A power-operated system for elevating and lowering the aerial ladder under all the rated conditions of loading shall be provided. Provisions shall be made to prevent damage at the top and bottom limits.

(ii) An automatic locking device(s) shall be provided so that the desired elevated position can be maintained.

(iii) A locking device that will retain the aerial ladder in the bed when the vehicle is in motion shall be provided.

(b) Rotation.

(i) A power-operated turntable shall be provided that will permit continuous rotation in either direction under all the rated conditions of loading. The turntable rotation bearing shall be accessible for lubrication and retorquing of bolts.

(ii) The turntable rotation mechanism shall be provided with an automatically applied brake of self-locking drive. The turntable rotation mechanism shall provide braking capacity with all power systems nonfunctioning to prevent turntable rotation under all rated conditions of loading.

(i) A power-operated system for extending and retracting the fly section(s) under all the rated conditions of loading shall be provided. An automatic locking device shall be provided so that the desired position of extension can be maintained.

(ii) An automatic locking device shall be provided, in addition to pawls, so that the desired position of extension can be maintained.

(iii) Provision shall be made to prevent damage at full retraction or extension, stops shall be provided to align the sections without damage to the ladder or to the cable mechanism when the ladder is retracted.

(iv) The step(s) for the tip operator, who is the employee working at the tip of the aerial ladder, shall be designed to keep the operator's feet from protruding through the outermost fly section.

(v) The lower station controls shall be capable of overriding the aerial tip controls, which are the controls located at the tip of an aerial ladder.

(vi) When a winch-type extension system or an extension system with a single extension cylinder and single set of extension cables is provided, ladder rung lock pawls shall be provided to prevent retraction movement of the sections in the event of power loss. These lock pawls shall align the rungs between sections. The control for the pawls shall be at the base of the ladder adjacent to the operator and shall permit the operator to clearly determine the on and off position without it being necessary to see the pawls.

(4) Aerial ladder water delivery system.

(a) When more than one set of controls are provided, the set at the aerial operator's position shall be capable of overriding all others.

(b) A preset relief valve capable of protecting the waterway system by relieving pressure through the dumping of water to the environment shall be provided. Such dumping shall be through a system of piping terminating in an area away from the operator's position. The discharge end of the piping shall not have a threaded connection.

(c) A flow meter shall be installed in the waterway with the display on either the pump operator's panel or the aerial ladder operator's control panel.

(d) A permanently installed monitor and nozzle shall not present an obstacle for access to or from the tip.

(e) When a prepiped waterway is not provided, one hose strap shall be provided per ladder section.

(5) Elevating platform requirements.

(a) The platform shall have a minimum floor area of fourteen square feet (1.3 square meters).

(b) Steps and the floor of the platform shall be provided with skid-resistant surfaces.

(d) The platform shall be provided with a continuous guard railing, no less than forty-two inches (106.7 centimeters) high, on all sides. The railing shall be constructed so that there are no horizontal or vertical openings below it greater than twenty-four inches (sixty-one centimeters) in either dimension.

(e) At least two gates shall be provided for access to the platform. Each gate shall be provided with a self-engaging latch. The use of a vertical-opening or inward-opening, self-closing gate or door for access to and from the platform shall be considered as meeting the continuous railing requirement of paragraph (M)(5)(d) of this rule.

(f) A kick plate or toeboard no less than four inches (10.2 centimeters) high shall be provided around the floor and may swing with the gate.

(g) A heat reflective shield shall be provided on the front, sides, and bottom of the platform.

(h) A water curtain system capable of providing a cooling spray under the entire floor of the platform and flowing a minimum of seventy-five gallons per minute (283.9 liters per minute) shall be provided. The system shall be controllable by a single, quick-acting valve with an actuator accessible from the platform.

(i) The platform shall be provided with means for attaching fall protection, and persons working on the platform shall be provided with fall protection.

(j) Capacity rating.

(i) The elevating platform shall be capable of carrying its rated capacity in the platform in any position of operation. Positive stops shall be provided to limit platform travel to those positions of operation recommended by the manufacturer. The capacity rating of the platform shall be a minimum of seven hundred fifty pounds (340.2 kilograms) with the waterway uncharged. All capacity ratings shall be in addition to any fire fighting equipment installed on the elevating platform.

(ii) If the elevating platform is rated in multiple configurations, these configurations, including the rated load capacity of each, shall be clearly described in both the operations manual and on a sign at the operator's control station.

(6) Elevating platform operating position.

(a) Two control stations shall be provided, one known as the platform control station, and the other as the lower control station. All operational controls shall be operable from both of these positions. The lower control station shall be located so that the platform is fully visible to the operator while the controls are being operated.

(b) Provisions shall be made so that the lower control station operator is not in contact with the ground. Sign(s) shall be placed to warn the operator(s) of electrocution hazards.

(d) A weather-resistant, two-way, voice communication system shall be provided between the platform control station and the lower control station. The speaker and microphone at the tip shall allow for hands-free operation.

(7) Elevating platform operating mechanisms.

(a) Power-operated elevating and extending devices shall be provided. These devices shall be so designed and provided with adequate power to allow multiple movements of the elevating platform booms or sections simultaneously under all rated conditions of loading. An automatic locking device(s) shall be provided so that the desired elevated position can be maintained. Provisions shall be made to prevent damage at top and bottom limits.

(b) An automatic platform-leveling system shall be provided so that the platform, together with its rated load, is supported and maintained level in relation to the turntable or horizontal regardless of the positions of the booms or sections.

(e) A locking device shall be provided that will retain the elevating platform booms or sections in the bed when the vehicle is in motion.

(8) Ladders on the elevating platform.

(a) If the raising and extending booms or sections incorporate a ladder or ladder sections, the ladder shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (M(1)(a) to (M)(1)(d), (M)(1)(f) to (M)(1)(g), and (M)(2)(b) of this rule.

(b) The transition step between the top rung of the ladder and the platform shall be no more than eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters).

(9) Elevating platform water delivery system.

(a) A slow-operated type shutoff valve shall be provided at the base of any monitor.

(b) A flow meter shall be installed in the water delivery system with at least one display on the pump operator's panel or at the elevating platform operator's position.

(c) A preset relief valve capable of protecting the waterway system by relieving pressure through the dumping of water to the environment shall be provided. Such dumping shall be through a system of piping terminating in an area away from the operator's position. The discharge end of the piping shall not have a threaded connection.

(10) Control devices.

All control devices on aerial devices shall meet the requirements for water tower control devices in paragraphs (L)(5)(a) to (L)(5)(p) of this rule.

(11) Safety.

Aerial devices shall meet the safety requirements for water towers in paragraphs (L)(6)(a) to (L)(6)(i) of this rule.

(12) Hydraulic system.

Aerial device hydraulic systems shall meet the requirements for water tower hydraulic systems in paragraphs (L)(7)(a) to (L)(7)(f) of this rule.

(13) Structure.

Aerial devices shall meet the structural requirements for water towers in paragraphs (L)(9)(a) to (L)(9)(c) of this rule, except that wire ropes, chains, and attaching systems used to extend and retract the fly sections or booms shall have a safety factor of five.

(14) Stabilization.

Aerial devices shall meet the stability requirements for water towers in paragraphs (L)(4)(a) to (L)(4)(e) of this rule.

(15) Breathing air system.

(a) Where a remote breathing air system is provided for aerial devices, it shall supply breathing air for a minimum of two persons on the platform. The system shall include storage for at least four hundred cubic feet (eleven thousand three hundred twenty-seven liters) of breathing air.

(b) Discharge air from a compressor shall pass through a purifications system prior to distribution.

(c) The cylinder(s) shall be manufactured, installed, and used in accordance with 49 CFR 178.37, "Specification 3AA and 3AAX Seamless Steel Cylinders," 89 FR 25488, September 29, 2025, or 29 CFR 1910.169, "Air Receivers, "61 FR 9227, September 26, 2025."

(d) All components of piping system shall be designed for a pressure rating of three times the working pressure that they are expected to carry. The piping system shall be equipped with a high pressure regulator at the air supply that shall limit the air pressure in the piping up the aerial device to one hundred twenty-five pounds per square inch (861.8 kilopascals) at the outlet point.

(e) All piping, valves, and components shall be made of corrosion-resistant materials and shall be sized for the number of outlets provided.

(f) A pressure relief valve set to relieve the pressure at one and one-half times the working pressure of the piping system in the event of regulator failure shall be provided on the downstream side of the high pressure regulator.

(g) All valves, pressure regulators, and gauges shall be protected from accidental damage that could occur through normal use of the aerial device. The piping or hose system between the air cylinder(s) and the aerial device shall be installed so as to prevent damage caused by abrasion, bending, pinching, or exposure to excessive heat.

(h) The system shall meet the performance requirements for open circuit SCBA in paragraph (P) of rule 4123:1-21-02 of the Administrative Code. Holders shall be provided for the storage of the breathing air equipment when it is not in use.

(i) A low air warning system shall be provided that will monitor the air volume and will provide an audible warning at both the upper and lower control stations when the air volume is at twenty per cent or below.

(16) Instruction plate and signs as required for water towers in paragraph (L)(10) of this rule shall be provided on aerial devices.

(N) Inspection, maintenance, testing, and repair.

(1) All apparatus shall have an operational check and visual check at least weekly, and as soon as practical after any use or repair, to identify and correct unsafe conditions. A preventive maintenance program shall be established and records shall be maintained. Maintenance, inspections, and repairs shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. If the manufacturer is no longer in business and, therefore, cannot be consulted with regard to repair of the apparatus, the repairs shall be performed by a repair facility experienced in performing such repairs.

(2) Any apparatus found to be unsafe shall be placed out of service until repaired. After being repaired, the apparatus shall have an operational check and visual check prior to being placed back in service. The apparatus shall be returned to service only after the defects and deficiencies that caused the apparatus to be taken out of service have been corrected.

(3) If the aerial device is involved in a situation that produces any structural damage, or if the inspections and tests that are required reveal any problems that affect the structural integrity of the aerial device, the aerial device shall be placed out of service and tested in accordance with the most current edition of NFPA 1911 before it is placed back in service.

(4) Fire pumps on apparatus shall be service tested in accordance with the frequency and procedures specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1911.

(5) All aerial devices shall be inspected and service tested in accordance with the frequency and procedures specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1911.

(6) Fire department vehicles shall be operated only by members who have successfully completed an established or recognized driver training program.

(7) Any new component added to an existing apparatus for refurbishing, shall meet the requirements of this rule.

The refurbished apparatus shall be tested at the contractor's approved facility and certified by an independent testing organization approved by the fire department. The certification shall include at least the following tests:

(a) Pumping test,

(b) Pumping engine overload test,

(d) Priming device test,

(e) Vacuum test,

(f) Water tank to pump flow test, and

(g) Aerial device tests.

(8) Refurbished fire apparatus shall meet the requirements of the most current edition of NFPA 1912, "Standard for Fire Apparatus Refurbishing."

(O) Application.

The requirements of this rule shall apply only to newly manufactured fire apparatus contracted for or bought on or after the effective date of this rule, except that the requirements of paragraphs (N)(1) to (N)(6) of this rule shall also apply to all apparatus owned before the effective date.

Last updated September 16, 2026 at 2:22 PM

History

Effective: September 1, 2026
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-21-05 Ground ladders.

(A) Requirements for all ground ladders.

(1) Ground ladders shall be free of sharp edges, burrs in excess of one-sixty-fourth inch (0.4 millimeters), or other defects that may cut or tear clothing or skin or that may result in inadequate structural strength.

(2) The beams, at the tip of each section of ground ladders, shall be rounded to allow the ladder to slide on irregular surfaces without catching or snagging during placement or operations. This provision shall not apply to combination ladders, folding ladders, and pompier ladders.

(3) Rungs shall be no less than one and one -fourth inches (3.2 centimeters) in diameter. This provision shall not apply to folding and pompier ladders.

(4) Rungs shall be uniformly spaced on no less than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters) plus or minus one-eighth inch (three millimeters) and no more than fourteen inches (35.6 centimeters) plus or minus one-eighth inch (three millimeters) centers.

(5) Rungs shall be constructed of a heavy duty corrugated, serrated, knurled, dimpled, or coated with a skid -resistant material.

(6) Butt spurs shall be provided on the butt end of each beam of single ladders and on the butt end of each beam of the base section of extension ladders.

(7) All identification numbers or alphanumeric code, date of manufacture, positioning label, warning labels, and manufacturer's certification that the ladder meets national fire protection association standard ("NFPA") 1960 shall remain permanently affixed to the ladder and unaltered.

(B) Additional requirements for metal and fiberglass ground ladders only.

(1) All structural components of metal and fiberglass ground ladders shall be constructed of materials that maintain at least seventy-five per cent of their designated design strength at three hundred degrees Fahrenheit (one hundred forty-nine degrees Celsius).

(2) Metal and fiberglass ground ladders shall bear heat sensor labels preset for three hundred degrees Fahrenheit (one hundred forty-nine degrees Celsius) on the inside of each beam of each section immediately below the second rung from the tip of each section and immediately below the center rung of that section. Each heat sensor label shall bear an expiration year and wording that indicates that the expiration date is at the end of that year.

(1) The minimum inside width for single ladders shall be no less than sixteen inches (40.6 centimeters).

(2) The designated length shall be the length of one beam excluding any butt spur.

(3) The actual measured length of the beam shall not be more than six inches (fifteen centimeters) shorter than the designated length.

(D) Additional requirements for roof ladders only.

(1) Only roof ladders shall be provided with folding roof hook assemblies for use in roof operations.

(2) Folding roof hooks shall be solid steel and directionally spring locked. The point of the roof hook that engages the roof shall be tapered to reduce slippage.

(3) Folding roof hook assemblies shall be attached to the beams in a manner that does not appreciably weaken the beams.

(4) Ladders with double-tapered beams shall not be used in roof operations.

(E) Additional requirements for extension ladders only.

(1) Extension ladders shall have a permanently affixed stop to prevent their overextension.

(2) Extension ladders shall not necessitate the elimination of a rung on any section.

(3) The rungs of each section shall align with the rungs of other sections when the ladder is extended and pawls are engaged.

(4) The minimum inside width on any section of extension ladders shall be no less than sixteen inches.

(5) The minimum inside width on any section of attic extension ladders shall be no less than seven and one-half inches (nineteen centimeters).

(6) Attic extension ladders shall not exceed sixteen feet (4.9 meters) in length.

(7) Hardware shall meet the minimum strength requirements of the ground ladder's component parts and shall be corrosion resistant or protected against corrosion.

(8) Extension ladders over sixteen feet (4.9 meters) in designated length shall be equipped with a halyard and pulley system.

(9) The pulley shall be attached to the ladder in a manner so as not to weaken appreciably either the rungs or the beams.

(10) The pulley shall be no less than one and one-fourth inches (3.2 centimeters) in diameter measured at the base of the sleeve.

(11) The halyard shall be no less than three-eighths inch (one centimeter) in diameter, shall have a minimum breaking strength of eight hundred twenty-five pounds (374.2 kilograms), and shall be of sufficient length for the purpose intended. Splices are prohibited.

(12) On three-section and four-section extension ladders, all fly sections beyond the first fly section may be extended by wire rope. Such wire rope shall have a safety factor of five while supporting two times the dead load weight of the fly section(s) that the cable is intended to raise. When wire rope is used, a means for adjusting the length of wire rope shall be provided. Splices are prohibited.

(13) Where a continuous halyard is used, a secondary means to secure the halyard from the ground prior to climbing shall be provided. The secondary means of securing the halyard shall be capable of supporting the pull on the halyard in case the pawl disengages while persons are on the ladder.

(14) Pawls shall be of a positive mechanical action type and shall engage a rung of the supporting section.

(15) Pawls shall be fastened or secured to beams in a manner so that vibration and use will not cause bolts and nuts to loosen.

(16) Pawls shall be constructed so that the hook portion of the pawl that engages or rests on the rung shall have sufficient bearing surface or area to prevent the hook from cutting into the rung(s) when engaged.

(17) The hooks on pawls shall have no sharp edges and points.

(18) Pawls shall be designed and attached so that they will rest on the rungs as near the beams as possible.

(19) Staypoles shall be provided on all extension ladders of forty feet (12.2 meters) or greater designated length.

(20) All staypoles shall be permanently attached to the ground ladder with universal swivel mounts and shall not be removed for ladder nesting.

(21) Staypole spikes shall not project beyond the butt of the base section when the extension ladder is in the bedded position.

(22) A means shall be provided to hold the staypoles in a secure position against the base section when the staypoles are not in use.

(23) A label shall be provided on each staypole, located between four and one-half feet (137.2 centimeters) and six feet (182.9 centimeters) from the butt of the pole, that cautions to only place staypoles when both poles can be placed properly.

(F) Additional requirements for combination ladders only.

(1) The designated length of combination ladders shall be determined in the single or extension configuration and shall not exceed sixteen feet (4.9 meters).

(2) The inside width or combination ladders shall be no less than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters).

(G) Additional requirements for folding ladders only.

(1) All folding ladders shall be equipped with foot pads to prevent slippage. The pads shall have a nonskid or skid reducing material on the bottom side of the foot pad.

(2) Folding ladders shall have a positive locking device to hold the ladder in the open position.

(3) The designated length of folding ladders shall not exceed fourteen feet (4.3 meters).

(4) The inside width for folding ladders in the open position shall be no less than seven and one-half inches (nineteen centimeters).

(H) Additional requirements for pompier ladders only.

(1) Pompier ladders shall be equipped with a serrated steel hook permanently fastened to the center beam of the ladder.

(2) Pompier ladders shall be equipped with a minimum of two stand-off brackets. Each stand-off bracket shall maintain a minimum distance of seven inches (17.8 centimeters) between the center line of the rung and the portion of the bracket that contacts the wall.

(3) The designated length of pompier ladders shall not exceed sixteen feet (4.9 meters).

(4) The overall width of the rungs shall be no less than twelve inches (30.5 centimeters).

(I) Inspection and maintenance of ground ladders.

(1) Inspection and maintenance of ground ladders shall be in accordance with the most current edition of NFPA 1930, "Standard on Use, Maintenance and Service Testing of In-Service Fire Department Ground Ladders."

(2) All ground ladders shall be inspected and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

(3) Ground ladders shall be visually inspected at least once every month and after each use.

(4) Visual inspection shall include but not be limited to:

(a) Heat sensor label on metal and fiberglass ladders, and on wood ladders when provided, for change indicating heat exposure and expiration date;

(b) All rungs for snugness and tightness and for punctures, wavy conditions, worn serrations, or deformations;

(d) Welds for any cracks or apparent defects;

(e) Beams and rungs for cracks, splintering, breaks, gouges, checks, wavy conditions, or deformation;

(f) Butt spurs for excessive wear or other defects;

(g) Surface corrosion;

(h) Loss of gloss on fiberglass and wood ladder beams;

(i) Labels present and legible; and

(j) Ladders clean with no buildup of grease, dirt, or grime on the beams.

(5) Any ground ladder that shows any sign of failure during visual inspection or any signs of damage beyond gouges and dents shall be removed from service and marked as out of service or repaired to bring it into compliance with the requirements of this rule. If repaired, the ground ladder shall be service tested as specified in paragraph (J) of this rule before being returned to service.

(6) If gouges or dents are discovered during the visual inspection, the ground ladder shall be subjected to the service tests specified in paragraph (J) of this rule. Gouges and dents shall not be cause to fail a ladder if the ground ladder passes the service test.

(7) Any ground ladder repaired shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

(8) Ground ladders shall not be painted except for the top and bottom eighteen inches (45.7 centimeters) of each section for the purpose of identification or visibility.

(9) When in storage, ground ladders shall not be stored in an area where they are exposed to the elements.

(10) Additional requirements for wood ground ladders only.

(a) Visual inspection shall include the bolts for snugness and tightness without crushing the wood.

(b) When a wood ground ladder develops dark streaks in the beams, the ladder shall be removed from service and service tested as specified in this rule prior to further use.

(d) Wood surface finish shall be maintained in accordance with the ladder manufacturer's recommendations.

(11) Additional requirement for fiberglass ground ladders only.

When in storage, fiberglass ground ladders shall not be stored in direct sunlight.

(12) Additional requirement for roof ladders only.

Visual inspection shall include an operational check of the roof hook assemblies for proper operation.

(13) Additional requirements for extension ladders only.

(a) Visual inspection shall include an operational check of the pawl assemblies for proper operation.

(b) Pawl assemblies shall be kept cleaned, lubricated, and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

(d) Halyards and wire cables on extension ladders shall be replaced when they become frayed or kinked.

(e) Wire rope on three-and four-section ladders shall be snug, when the ladder is in the bedded position, to ensure proper synchronization of upper sections during operation.

(J) Service testing of ground ladders.

(1) Requirements for all ground ladders shall be in accordance with the most current edition of NFPA 1930.

(a) Only employees who have been adequately trained in service testing procedures and equipment shall do service testing. The employer may contract with an approved testing organization to perform the service tests specified in this rule.

(b) Any ladder that shows any sign of failure during service testing shall be removed from service and destroyed or repaired for fire service.

(i) Prior to being put into service for the first time;

(ii) At least annually;

(iii) At any time a ladder is suspected of being unsafe;

(iv) After the ladder has been subjected to overloading pursuant to table 1 of this rule;

Table 1 Ground Ladder Duty Rating

| | | Maximum Load | | --- | --- | --- | | Type | Pounds | Kilograms | | Folding ladders | 300 | 136 | | Pompier ladders | 300 | 136 | | Single and roof ladders | 750 | 340 | | All extension ladders | 750 | 340 | | Combination ladders | 750 | 340 |

(v) After the ladder has been subjected to impact loading or unusual conditions of use;

(vi) After heat exposure; and

(vii) After any deficiencies have been repaired, unless the only repair was replacing the halyard.

(d) All ground ladders, except pompier ladders and folding ladders, shall be service tested as specified in paragraph (J)(2) of this rule.

(e) Pompier ladders shall be service tested as specified in paragraph (J)(3) of this rule.

(f) Folding ladders shall be service tested as specified in paragraph (J)(4) of this rule.

(g) All service test results shall be permanently recorded. The minimum information recorded shall be as required in table 2 of this rule.

Table 2 Fire Department Ground Ladder Record

| Manufacturer's Ladder Identification Number or Code: | | | | --- | --- | --- | | Fire Department Identification (if different): | | | | Ground Ladder Manufacturer: | | | | Fire Department Company Where Ground Ladder is Assigned: | | | | Date Purchased: | | | | Date Placed in Service: | | | | Type of Ground Ladder: single; roof; extension; combination; folding; pompier. | | | | Ladder Construction: wood; metal; fiberglass; solid beam; truss beam. | | | | Heat Sensor Label Test: | | | | Previous Repairs. Reason for Repair and Date of Repair: | | | | Type of Test. Test Date, and Person(s) Performing Test: | | | | Reason for Test: | | | | Test Results: | | | | Horizontal Bending Test | Passed: | Failed: | | Amount of Permanent Deformation: | | | | Hardware Test | Passed: | Failed: | | Roof Hook Test | Passed: | Failed: | | Pompier Ladder Test | Passed: | Failed: | | Repairs Needed: | | | | Repairs Completed: | | | | Person(s) Performing Repairs: | | | | Date Completed: | | | | Person Signing Record: | | |

(2) Strength service testing requirements for all ladders except pompier and folding ladders.

(a) Horizontal bending test.

The ladder shall be positioned for testing and tested as shown in figure 1 of this rule. The ladder shall be placed in a flat horizontal position supported under the six inches (15.2 centimeters) from each end of the ladder. Extension and combination ladders shall be extended to their maximum extended length for this test. The test load shall be applied equally to a center span covering sixteen inches (40.6 centimeters) each side of the center inclusive. The test load shall be applied to a flat test surface resting on the beams in the center area. The test load shall consist of free weights in increments consistent with safety and ease of handling. All test loads shall include the weight of the test surface. If a test fixture is used with a dynamometer, the test fixture shall be designed to apply the load over the required area in a manner that allows a load shift to a weak beam and does not restrain the load directionally.

(b) Test procedures for metal and fiberglass ground ladders only.

(i) The ladder shall be loaded with a pre-load of three hundred fifty pounds (one hundred fifty-nine kilograms) applied equally to the center span covering sixteen inches (40.6 centimeters) each side of the center inclusive. Caution shall be exercised whenever applying or removing the weights to minimize any impact loading. The load shall be allowed to remain for at least one minute to "set" the ladder prior to completing the rest of the test.

(ii) After the pre-load is removed, the distance between the bottom edge of each side rail and the surface upon which the ladder supports are placed shall be measured. All measurements shall be taken at a consistent location as near as practical to the center of the ladder.

(iii) The ladder shall be loaded with a test load of five hundred pounds (two hundred twenty-seven kilograms) applied equally to the center span covering sixteen inches (40.6 centimeters) each side of the center inclusive. The test load shall remain in place for five minutes.

(iv) The test load shall then be removed, and after five minutes have elapsed, the distance between the bottom of each side rail and the surface upon which the ladder supports are placed shall be measured.

(v) The difference between measurements taken in paragraphs (J)(2)(b)(ii) and (J)(2)(b)(iv) of this rule shall not exceed one-half inch (thirteen millimeters) for ladders twenty-five feet (7.6 meters) or less in length, one inch (2.5 centimeters) for ladders twenty-six feet (7.9 meters) to thirty-four feet (10.4 meters) in length, and one and one-half inches (3.8 centimeters) for ladders thirty-five feet (10.7 meters) or more in length. Any ladder that does not meet this criterion shall be removed from fire service use and destroyed.

(vi) There shall be no visible, permanent change, or failure of any hardware.

(i) The ladder shall be loaded with a test load of five hundred pounds (two hundred twenty-seven kilograms) applied equally to a center span covering sixteen inches (40.6 centimeters) each side of the center inclusive. The test load shall remain in place for five minutes and then removed.

(ii) To pass the test, the ladder and all components shall not show ultimate failure. Any ladder that does not meet this criterion shall be removed from fire service use and destroyed.

(d) Additional requirements for roof ladders only -- roof hook test.

(i) The ladder shall be positioned for testing and tested as shown in figure 2 of this rule. The ladder shall be hung solely by the roof hooks, with the hooks supported only by the points of the hooks, in a vertical position from a fixture capable of supporting the entire test load and weight of the ladder. The ladder shall be secured in such a manner to retain the ladder in the test position to prevent injury to test personnel, if the hooks fail during the test.

(ii) A test load of one thousand pounds (four hundred fifty-four kilograms) shall be placed over as many rungs as needed. The test load shall consist of weight increments consistent with safety and ease of handling.

(iii) The test load shall be applied for a minimum of one minute.

(iv) Ladder and roof hook assemblies shall sustain this test load with no permanent deformation.

(v) Variations from the specific methods depicted in figure 2 of this rule shall be acceptable provided such alternative means provide equivalent results and comply with the intent of the specified test method.

(e) Additional requirements for extension ladders only -- hardware test.

(i) The ladder shall be positioned for testing and tested as shown in figure 3 of this rule. The ladder shall be extended a minimum of one rung beyond the bedded position.

(ii) A test load of one thousand pounds (four hundred fifty-four kilograms) shall be placed on the rungs of the fly section. The test load shall consist of weight increments consistent with safety and ease of handling.

(iii) The test load shall be applied for a minimum of one minute.

(iv) Ladders shall sustain this test load with no permanent deformation or other visible weakening of the structure.

(v) Variations from the specific methods depicted in figure 3 of this rule shall be acceptable provided such alternative means provide equivalent results and comply with the intent of the specified test method.

(3) Strength service testing requirements for pompier ladders only.

(a) The ladder shall be positioned for testing and tested as shown in figure 4 of this rule. The ladder shall be tested in the vertical hanging position supported only by its hook from a fixture capable of supporting the entire test load and weight of the ladder. The ladder shall be secured in such a manner to retain the ladder in the test position to prevent injury to test personnel, if the hook fails during the test.

(b) A test load of one thousand pounds (four hundred fifty-four kilograms) shall be applied over multiple rungs.

(c) The ladder shall withstand this test without ultimate failure. Any pompier ladder that does not meet this criterion shall be removed from fire service use and destroyed.

(d) Variations from the specific methods depicted in figure 4 of this rule shall be acceptable provided such alternative means provide equivalent results and comply with the intent of the specified test method.

(4) Strength service testing requirements for folding ladders only.

(a) Horizontal bending test.

The ladder shall be positioned for testing and tested as shown in figure 5 of this rule. The ladder shall be placed in a flat horizontal position and supported six inches (15.2 centimeters) from each end of the ladder. Folding ladders shall be in their unfolded configuration for this test. The test load shall be applied equally to a center span covering eight inches (20.3 centimeters) on each side of the center inclusive. The test load shall be applied to a flat test surface resting on the beams in the center area. The test load shall consist of weight increments consistent with safety and ease of handling. All test loads shall include the weight of the test surface. If test fixture is used with a dynamometer, the test fixture shall be designed to apply the load over the required area in a manner that allows a load shift to a weak beam and does not restrain the load directionally.

(b) Test procedures for metal and fiberglass folding ladders only.

(i) The ladder shall be loaded with a pre-load of one hundred sixty pounds (seventy-three kilograms) applied equally to the center span covering eight inches (20.3 centimeters) on each side of the center inclusive. Caution shall be exercised whenever applying or removing the weights to minimize any impact loading. The load shall be allowed to remain for at least one minute to "set" the ladder prior to completing the rest of the test.

(iii) The ladder shall be loaded with a test load of two hundred twenty-five pounds (one hundred two kilograms) applied equally to the center span covering eight inches (20.3 centimeters) on each side of the center inclusive. The test load shall remain in place for five minutes.

(v) The difference between measurements taken in paragraphs (J)(4)(b)(ii) and (J)(4)(b)(iv) of this rule shall be no more than one-half inch (thirteen millimeters). Any ladder that does not meet this criterion shall be removed from fire service use and destroyed.

(vi) There shall be no visible, permanent change, or failure of any hardware.

(i) The ladder shall be loaded with a test load of two hundred twenty-five pounds (one hundred two kilograms) applied equally to a center span covering eight inches (20.3 centimeters) on each side of the center inclusive. The test load shall remain in place for five minutes and then be removed.

(ii) To pass the test, the ladder and all components shall not show any permanent damage. Any ladder that does not meet this criterion shall be removed from fire service use and destroyed.

(K) Application.

The requirements of this rule shall apply only to ground ladders contracted for or bought on or after the effective date of this rule, except that the requirements of paragraph (J) of this rule shall also apply to all ground ladders owned before the effective date.

Last updated September 1, 2026 at 8:44 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2026
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-21-06 Fire hose, couplings, and nozzles.

(A) Care and use of attack hose, supply hose, and forestry hose.

(1) Large-diameter hose marked "Supply Hose" shall be used at operating pressures not to exceed one hundred eighty-five pounds per square inch (1275.5 kilopascals) to supply pumpers from hydrants and in relay from pumper to pumper and to directly supply attack lines, master streams appliances, portable hydrants, manifolds, and standpipe and sprinkler systems.

(a) If a higher operating pressure is needed, a hose having a service test pressure of at least ten per cent greater than the highest operating pressure shall be used.

(b) Six-inch (15.2 centimeters) supply hose shall not be used at operating pressures exceeding one hundred thirty-five pounds per square inch (930.8 kilopascals).

(2) A pressure and volume relief device with adequate capabilities and a maximum setting, not to exceed the service test pressure of the hose being used, shall be provided on the discharge side of the pump when large-diameter supply hose is being used to supply attack lines, manifolds, and standpipe and sprinkler systems.

(3) Rapid closing or opening valves shall not be used with large-diameter supply hose.

(4) When supply hose is used in relay between pumpers, the suction of each receiving pumper shall be equipped with a relief valve.

(5) Hose that has been frozen during use shall be thawed and service tested as specified in the most current edition of national fire protection association ("NFPA") 1930 before being put back in service or in storage.

(6) After use and before being placed in storage or back in service, the hose shall be drained, cleaned, and inspected as specified in paragraph (C) of this rule.

(B) Care and use of booster and hard suction hose.

(1) Booster and hard suction hose shall be service tested at least annually as specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1930.

(2) Hose which has exposed reinforcement shall be removed from service and repaired or destroyed. The defective section may be cut out, and the length recoupled and service tested as specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1930.

(C) The inspection, storage, and service test maintenance of fire hose, couplings, and nozzles shall comply with the most current edition of NFPA 1930.

Last updated September 1, 2026 at 8:44 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2026
Promulgated Under: 119.03

Ohio Adm.Code 4123:1-21-07 Fire department occupational safety and health.

(A) Incident management.

(1) An incident management system shall be established with written standard operating procedures applying to all employees involved in emergency operations.

(a) All employees involved in emergency operations shall be trained in the system.

(b) The incident management system shall be used at all emergency incidents.

(c) The incident management system shall be applied to drills, exercises, and other situations that involve hazards similar to those encountered at actual emergency incidents and to simulated incidents that are conducted for training and familiarization purposes.

(2) The incident management system shall use risk management based on the following principles:

(a) Activities that present a significant risk to the safety of employees shall be limited to situations where there is potential to save endangered lives.

(b) Activities that are routinely employed to protect property shall be recognized as inherent risks to the safety of employees, and actions shall be taken to reduce or avoid these risks.

(3) The employer shall establish and ensure the maintenance of a fire dispatch and incident communication system.

(4) Each crew operating within the hazardous environment shall be provided with communication equipment capable of communicating with the incident command.

(B) Accountability.

(1) The employer shall establish written standard operating procedures for a personnel accountability system that provides for the tracking and inventory of all employees operating at an emergency incident. The system shall provide a rapid accounting of all personnel at the incident scene.

(2) The employer shall consider local conditions and characteristics in establishing the requirements of the personnel accountability system.

(3) Employees operating at an emergency incident shall actively participate in the personnel accountability system.

(4) The incident commander shall be responsible for overall personnel accountability for the incident. The incident commander shall initiate an accountability and inventory worksheet at the beginning of operations and shall maintain that system throughout the operations.

(1) The employer shall provide an adequate number of personnel to safely conduct emergency scene operations. Operations shall be limited to those that can be safely performed by the employees available at the scene. No employee shall commence or perform any firefighting function or evolution that is not within the established risk management principles as specified in paragraph (A)(2) of this rule.

(2) Employees operating in hazardous environments at emergency incidents shall operate in teams of two or more.

Employees operating in hazardous environments shall be in communication with each other through visual, audible, or physical means, in order to coordinate their activities. Employees shall be in close proximity to each other to provide assistance in case of an emergency.

(3) In interior structural fires a minimum of four employees shall be required, consisting of two employees working as a team in the hazardous atmosphere, who shall remain in voice or visual contact with each other; and two employees who are located outside the hazardous atmosphere, who shall be responsible for maintaining a constant awareness of the number and identity of those operating in the hazardous atmosphere and be prepared to perform rescue of those employees if required. Interior structural firefighting means the physical activity of fire suppression, rescue, or both, inside of buildings or enclosed structures which are involved in a fire situation beyond the incipient stage.

(4) Initial attack operations shall be organized to ensure that, if upon arrival at the emergency scene, the initial attack employees find an imminent life-threatening situation where immediate action could prevent the loss of life or serious injury, such action shall be permitted with less than four employees. No exception shall be permitted when there is no possibility to save lives. Any such actions taken shall be thoroughly investigated by the employer.

(D) Operating at traffic incidents.

(1) The employer shall establish written standard operating procedures regarding emergency operations for traffic incidents.

(2) Fire apparatus shall be positioned in a blocking position to protect employees and other persons at the incident scene. When acting as a shield, fire apparatus emergency/warning lights shall remain on.

(3) All additional responding vehicles, when arriving on the scene, shall position beyond the traffic barrier unless their function requires placement before the barrier.

(4) At least five fluorescent orange traffic cones shall be used to warn oncoming traffic of the emergency operations and the hazards to employees operating at the incident.

The traffic cones shall not be less than twenty eight inches (71.1 centimeters) in height, each equipped with a six inch (15.2 centimeters) retro-reflective white band no more than four inches (10.2 centimeters) from the top of the cone, and an additional four inch (10.2 centimeters) retro-reflective white band two inches (5.1 centimeters) below the six inch (15.2 centimeters) band.

(5) When employees are operating at a traffic incident and their assignment places them in potential conflict with motor vehicle traffic, the employees shall wear garments that meet the requirements of the most current edition of American national standards institute and international safety equipment association ("ANSI/ISEA") 107, Class 2 or 3 "Standard for High - Visibility Safety Apparel," or public safety vests that meet the most current edition of ANSI/ISEA 107, "Standard for High - Visibility Public Safety Vests," with fluorescent and retro-reflective material.

(E) Risk management.

The employer shall develop and adopt a comprehensive written risk management plan. The risk management plan shall consider all fire department policies and procedures, and it shall include goals and objectives to ensure that the risks associated with the emergency and non-emergency operations of the fire department are identified and effectively managed.

(F) Employee fitness.

(1) The employer shall establish and provide a health and fitness program that meets the requirements of the most current edition of NFPA 1583 to enable employees to develop and maintain a level of fitness that allows them to safely perform their assigned functions.

(2) It shall be the responsibility of all employees to actively participate in the fitness and wellness program.

(3) The employer shall adopt written protocols to address occupational exposure to atypical stressful events that employees may experience in the course of their job duties.

(G) Infection control.

The employer shall operate an infection control program that meets the requirements of the most current edition of national fire protection association standard ("NFPA") 1581.

(1) Universal precautions shall be observed to prevent contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials. All body fluids shall be considered potentially infectious materials.

(2) The employer shall establish a written infectious and contagious disease "Exposure Control Plan" that includes universal precautions.

(3) Engineering and work practice controls shall be used to eliminate or minimize employee exposure.

(4) The employer shall make available, at no cost to the employee, the hepatitis B vaccine and vaccination series, including booster doses, to all employees who have potential occupational exposure.

(H) Hazardous materials.

The employer shall establish written plan that defines the employer's hazardous materials handling capabilities.

(1) The plan shall cover all hazardous material operations with all other responding agencies and their roles and capabilities.

(2) Employers shall develop and require use of a written plan covering the safe use, limitations, care, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of the hazardous materials equipment, and all affected employees shall be trained in accordance with the plan.

(I) Technical rescue.

The selection, care, and maintenance of personal protective equipment and associated technical equipment for technical rescue operations shall be as specified in the most current edition of NFPA 1855.

(1) Technical rescue operations are defined by the employers according to their risk management plan as defined in paragraph (E) of this rule.

(2) Employers shall develop and require use of a written plan covering the safe use, limitations, care, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of the equipment utilized in technical rescue operations, and all affected employees shall be trained in accordance of such plan.

Last updated September 1, 2026 at 8:44 AM

History

Effective: September 1, 2026
Promulgated Under: 119.03